ML19092A081: Difference between revisions

From kanterella
Jump to navigation Jump to search
(Created page by program invented by StriderTol)
 
(StriderTol Bot change)
 
Line 2: Line 2:
| number = ML19092A081
| number = ML19092A081
| issue date = 03/11/2019
| issue date = 03/11/2019
| title = Revision 32 to Updated Safety Analysis Report, Chapter 8, Electric Power
| title = 2 to Updated Safety Analysis Report, Chapter 8, Electric Power
| author name =  
| author name =  
| author affiliation = Wolf Creek Nuclear Operating Corp
| author affiliation = Wolf Creek Nuclear Operating Corp
Line 17: Line 17:


=Text=
=Text=
{{#Wiki_filter:WOLF CREEK CHAPTER 8.0 TABLE OF CONTENTS ELECTRIC POWER  
{{#Wiki_filter:WOLF CREEK CHAPTER 8.0 TABLE OF CONTENTS ELECTRIC POWER Section Title Page  
 
Section Title Page  


==8.1 INTRODUCTION==
==8.1 INTRODUCTION==
8.1-1  
8.1-1 8.1.1 UTILITY GRID DESCRIPTION 8.1-1 8.1.2 ONSITE POWER SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 8.1-2 8.1.3 SAFETY-RELATED LOADS 8.1-3 8.1.4 DESIGN BASES 8.1-3 8.1.4.1 Offsite Power System 8.1-3 8.1.4.2 Onsite Power System 8.1-4 8.1.4.3 Design Criteria, Regulatory Guides, IEEE Standards and IE Bulletins 8.1-5 8.
 
8.1.1 UTILITY GRID DESCRIPTION 8.1-1  
 
8.1.2 ONSITE POWER SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 8.1-2
 
8.1.3 SAFETY-RELATED LOADS 8.1-3  
 
8.1.4 DESIGN BASES 8.1-3 8.1.4.1 Offsite Power System 8.1-3 8.1.4.2 Onsite Power System 8.1-4 8.1.4.3 Design Criteria, Regulatory Guides, IEEE Standards and IE Bulletins 8.1-5   8.


==1.5 REFERENCES==
==1.5 REFERENCES==
8.1-27 8.2 OFFSITE POWER SYSTEM 8.2-1  
8.1-27 8.2 OFFSITE POWER SYSTEM 8.2-1 8.
 
8.


==2.1 DESCRIPTION==
==2.1 DESCRIPTION==
8.2-1 8.2.1.1 Transmission Network 8.2-2 8.2.1.2 Switchyard and Connection to the Onsite Distribution System 8.2-4 8.2.1.3 Compliance with Design Criteria and Standards 8.2-6
8.2-1 8.2.1.1 Transmission Network 8.2-2 8.2.1.2 Switchyard and Connection to the Onsite Distribution System 8.2-4 8.2.1.3 Compliance with Design Criteria and Standards 8.2-6 8.2.2 ANALYSIS 8.2-9 8.3 ONSITE POWER SYSTEMS 8.3-1 8.3.1 AC POWER SYSTEMS 8.3-1 8.3.1.1 Description 8.3-1 8.3.1.2 Analysis 8.3-25 8.3.1.3 Physical Identification of Safety-Related Equipment 8.3-25 8.3.1.4 Independence of Redundant Systems 8.3-27 8.3.2 DC POWER SYSTEMS 8.3-36 8.3.2.1 Description 8.3-36 8.3.2.2 Analysis 8.3-38 8.3.3 FIRE PROTECTION FOR CABLE SYSTEMS 8.3-45 8.
 
8.2.2 ANALYSIS 8.2-9
 
8.3 ONSITE POWER SYSTEMS 8.3-1
 
8.3.1 AC POWER SYSTEMS 8.3-1 8.3.1.1 Description 8.3-1 8.3.1.2 Analysis 8.3-25 8.3.1.3 Physical Identification of Safety-Related Equipment 8.3-25 8.3.1.4 Independence of Redundant Systems 8.3-27 8.3.2 DC POWER SYSTEMS 8.3-36 8.3.2.1 Description 8.3-36 8.3.2.2 Analysis 8.3-38  
 
8.3.3 FIRE PROTECTION FOR CABLE SYSTEMS 8.3-45 8.


==3.4 REFERENCES==
==3.4 REFERENCES==
8.3-45  
8.3-45 8.0-i Rev. 29


8.0-i                      Rev. 29 WOLF CREEK TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)  
WOLF CREEK TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
LIST OF TABLES Table No. Title App. 8.3A STATION BLACKOUT 8.3A.1 INTRODUCTION 8.3A-1 8.3A.2 STATION BLACKOUT GENERAL CRITERIA AND ASSUMPTION 8.3A-2 8.3A.3 WOLF CREEK BLACKOUT DURATION 8.3A-2 8.3A.4 Procedures for SBO 8.3A-5 8.3A.5 Summary for SBO Coping Assessment 8.3A-5 8.3A.6 REFERENCES 8.3A-7 8.3-1 Class IE DC System Loads 8.3-2 125 V DC Class IE Battery Loading Cycle (Amperes Required per Time Interval per Battery After Loss of AC Power) Subsystems 1 and 4 8.3-3 125 V DC Class IE Battery Loading Cycle (Amperes Required per Time Interval per Battery After Loss of AC Power) Subsystems 2 and 3 8.3-4 Failure Modes and Effects Analysis 8.3-5 Minimum Separation Distance Analysis Required by Regulatory Guide 1.75 and IEEE 384-74 8.0-ii Rev. 26


LIST OF TABLES
WOLF CREEK CHAPTER 8 - LIST OF FIGURES
 
*Refer to Section 1.6 and Table 1.6-3. Controlled drawings were removed from the USAR at Revision 17 and are considered incorporated by reference.
Table No.                     Title  
Figure #
 
Sheet Title Drawing #*
App. 8.3A STATION BLACKOUT 8.3A.1 INTRODUCTION 8.3A-1 8.3A.2 STATION BLACKOUT GENERAL CRITERIA AND ASSUMPTION 8.3A-2 8.3A.3 WOLF CREEK BLACKOUT DURATION 8.3A-2 8.3A.4 Procedures for SBO 8.3A-5 8.3A.5 Summary for SBO Coping Assessment 8.3A-5  8.3A.6 REFERENCES 8.3A-8.3-1 Class IE DC System Loads  
8.1-1 0
 
Southwest Power Pool Transmission System and MoKan Companies Service Area (Historical) 8.2-1 0
8.3-2 125 V DC Class IE Battery Loading Cycle (Amperes Required per Time Interval per Battery After Loss of AC Power) Subsystems 1 and 4 8.3-3 125 V DC Class IE Battery Loading Cycle (Amperes Required per Time Interval per Battery After Loss of AC Power) Subsystems 2 and 3 
345 kV System in MoKan Area (Historical) 8.2-2 0
 
161 kV and Below KG&E Transmission System Near Wolf Creek Plant 8.2-3 0
8.3-4 Failure Modes and Effects Analysis 
Wolf Creek Substation General Plan KD-7750 8.2-4 0
 
One-Line Diagram KD-7496 8.2-5 0
8.3-5 Minimum Separation Distance Analysis Required by Regulatory Guide 1.75 and IEEE 384-74
Electrical One-Line Diagram of Wolf Creek 345 kV Switchyard and Adjacent Subs 8.3-1 1
 
Main Single Line Diagram E-11001 8.3-1 2
8.0-ii                      Rev. 26
Single Line Diagram, Essential Service Water System E-K1001 8.3-1 3
Single Line Diagram Site Area Loads E-1001 8.3-2 0
List of Loads Supplied by the Emergency Diesel Generator E-11005 8.3-3 0
Logic Diagram Standby Generation Excitation Control E-12NE01 8.3-4 0
Logic Diagram Standby Generator System Protection E-12NE02 8.3-5 0
Logic Diagram Standby Generator Engine and Governor Control E-12KJ01 8.3-6 1
DC Main Single Line Diagram E-11010 8.3-6 2
DC Auxiliary Power System 8.3-7 0
DC Main Single Line Diagram (PK03 and PK04 Bus)
E-11010A 8.0-iii Rev. 32


WOLF CREEK CHAPTER 8.0 ELECTRIC POWER  
WOLF CREEK CHAPTER 8.0 ELECTRIC POWER  


==8.1 INTRODUCTION==
==8.1 INTRODUCTION==
 
8.1.1 UTILITY GRID DESCRIPTION The generator unit is connected to the respective transmission systems. The transmission system voltage is 345 kV for Wolf Creek. The utility has integrated transmission networks and interconnections with neighboring systems.
8.1.1 UTILITY GRID DESCRIPTION  
The Southwest Power Pool is the regional reliability council of which Kansas City Power & Light Company (KCPL) and Westar, Evergy companies are members. It is made up of 38 member systems, extending throughout an area covering the states of Arkansas, Louisiana, Kansas, Oklahoma and portions of Mississippi, Missouri, New Mexico and Texas. The Southwest Power Pool is highly interconnected with transmission lines of many voltages, including 345 and 500-kV. Figure 8.1-1 is a map of the Southwest Power Pool, showing its extensive transmission facilities as of January, 1979.
 
Kansas Electric Power Cooperative (KEPCo) is a member of the Southwest Power Pool with limited (peaking) generating capacity.
The generator unit is connected to the respective transmission systems. The  
8.1-1 Rev. 32  
 
transmission system voltage is 345 kV for Wolf Creek. The utility has  
 
integrated transmission networks and interconnections with neighboring systems.  
 
The Southwest Power Pool is the regional reliability council of which Kansas  
 
City Power & Light Company (KCPL) and Westar, Evergy companies are members. It  
 
is made up of 38 member systems, extending throughout an area covering the states of Arkansas, Louisiana, Kansas, Oklahoma and portions of Mississippi, Missouri, New Mexico and Texas. The Southwest Power Pool is highly  
 
interconnected with transmission lines of many voltages, including 345 and 500-
 
kV. Figure 8.1-1 is a map of the Southwest Power Pool, showing its extensive  
 
transmission facilities as of January, 1979.
Kansas Electric Power Cooperative (KEPCo) is a member of the Southwest Power  
 
Pool with limited (peaking) generating capacity.  
 
8.1-1Rev. 32 WOLF CREEK 8.1.2  ONSITE POWER SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The onsite power system is provided with preferred (offsite) power from the
 
offsite system through two independent and redundant sources of power. One
 
preferred circuit from the switchyard supplies power to a three-winding startup
 
transformer. This startup transformer feeds two medium-voltage 13.8-kV busses and a 13.8/4.16-kV ESF transformer. The second preferred (offsite) circuit is connected to the second 13.8/4.16-kV ESF transformer. Each transformer normally
 
supplies its associated medium voltage 4.16-kV Class 1E bus. Refer to Figure
 
8.3-1.
The two 13.8-kV busses supply power to the nonsafety-related auxiliary loads of the unit. The 13.8-kV busses are also connected to a three-winding unit
 
auxiliary transformer, in addition to the startup transformer. The unit
 
auxiliary transformer is connected to the main generator through an isolated
 
phase bus duct.
Two 4.16-kV non-Class 1E busses are supplied power from two 13.8-kV busses
 
through two 13.8/4.16-kV station service transformers.
 
Non-Class 1E low-voltage 480-V loads are supplied power from two 13.8-kV busses through 480-V load centers and 480-V motor control centers.
 
The onsite power system is divided into two separate load groups, each load
 
group consisting of an arrangement of busses, transformers, switching
 
equipment, and loads fed from a common power supply. Power is supplied to auxiliaries at 13.8 kV, 4.16 kV, 480 V, 480/277 V, 208/120 V, 120 V ac, 250 V dc, and 125 V dc.
 
The onsite standby power system includes the Class 1E ac and dc power for
 
equipment used to maintain a cold shutdown of the plant and to mitigate the consequences of a DBA.
 
Class 1E ac system loads are separated into two load groups which are powered
 
from separate ESF transformers or two independent diesel generators (one per
 
load group). Each load group distributes power by a 4.16-kV bus, 480-V load centers, and 480-V motor control centers.
 
The Class 1E dc system provides four separate 125-V dc battery supplies for
 
Class 1E controls, instrumentation, power, and control inverters. Refer to
 
Figure 8.3-6, sheet 1.
 
8.1-2Rev. 32 WOLF CREEK The Station Blackout Diesel Generator (SBO DG) system consists of three (3) non-safety related diesel generators that are capable of supplying essential loads on bus NB001 or bus NB002 required to reliably and safely shut down the unit following a station blackout event. The SBO DG system is also capable of supplying power to the non-safety auxiliary feedwater pump (NSAFP). Station blackout means the complete loss of alternating current (ac) electric power to
 
the essential and nonessential switchgear buses in a nuclear power plant (i.e., loss of offsite electric power system concurrent with turbine trip and unavailability of the onsite emergency ac power system).


The SBO DG system is not credited for coping with a station blackout per NRC Regulatory Guide 1.155 and NUMARC 87-00, but is instead installed to provide plant MSPI/PRA margin.  
WOLF CREEK 8.1.2 ONSITE POWER SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The onsite power system is provided with preferred (offsite) power from the offsite system through two independent and redundant sources of power. One preferred circuit from the switchyard supplies power to a three-winding startup transformer. This startup transformer feeds two medium-voltage 13.8-kV busses and a 13.8/4.16-kV ESF transformer. The second preferred (offsite) circuit is connected to the second 13.8/4.16-kV ESF transformer. Each transformer normally supplies its associated medium voltage 4.16-kV Class 1E bus. Refer to Figure 8.3-1.
The two 13.8-kV busses supply power to the nonsafety-related auxiliary loads of the unit. The 13.8-kV busses are also connected to a three-winding unit auxiliary transformer, in addition to the startup transformer. The unit auxiliary transformer is connected to the main generator through an isolated phase bus duct.
Two 4.16-kV non-Class 1E busses are supplied power from two 13.8-kV busses through two 13.8/4.16-kV station service transformers.
Non-Class 1E low-voltage 480-V loads are supplied power from two 13.8-kV busses through 480-V load centers and 480-V motor control centers.
The onsite power system is divided into two separate load groups, each load group consisting of an arrangement of busses, transformers, switching equipment, and loads fed from a common power supply. Power is supplied to auxiliaries at 13.8 kV, 4.16 kV, 480 V, 480/277 V, 208/120 V, 120 V ac, 250 V dc, and 125 V dc.
The onsite standby power system includes the Class 1E ac and dc power for equipment used to maintain a cold shutdown of the plant and to mitigate the consequences of a DBA.
Class 1E ac system loads are separated into two load groups which are powered from separate ESF transformers or two independent diesel generators (one per load group). Each load group distributes power by a 4.16-kV bus, 480-V load centers, and 480-V motor control centers.
The Class 1E dc system provides four separate 125-V dc battery supplies for Class 1E controls, instrumentation, power, and control inverters. Refer to Figure 8.3-6, sheet 1.
8.1-2 Rev. 32


The SBO DGs are located with a missile barrier designed to limit the average wind speed downstream of the barrier entrance to less than or equal to 150 mph  
WOLF CREEK The Station Blackout Diesel Generator (SBO DG) system consists of three (3) non-safety related diesel generators that are capable of supplying essential loads on bus NB001 or bus NB002 required to reliably and safely shut down the unit following a station blackout event. The SBO DG system is also capable of supplying power to the non-safety auxiliary feedwater pump (NSAFP). Station blackout means the complete loss of alternating current (ac) electric power to the essential and nonessential switchgear buses in a nuclear power plant (i.e.,
 
loss of offsite electric power system concurrent with turbine trip and unavailability of the onsite emergency ac power system).
during a 230 mph tornado event in accordance with NRC Regulatory Guide 1.76, Rev. 1.
The SBO DG system is not credited for coping with a station blackout per NRC Regulatory Guide 1.155 and NUMARC 87-00, but is instead installed to provide plant MSPI/PRA margin.
8.1.3 SAFETY-RELATED LOADS  
The SBO DGs are located with a missile barrier designed to limit the average wind speed downstream of the barrier entrance to less than or equal to 150 mph during a 230 mph tornado event in accordance with NRC Regulatory Guide 1.76, Rev. 1.
 
8.1.3 SAFETY-RELATED LOADS Refer to Figure 8.3-2 for a listing of loads supplied by the Class IE ac system. Refer to Table 8.3-1 for a list of loads supplied by the Class IE dc system. Specific safety related loads and safety functions are identified in Table 8.3-4.
Refer to Figure 8.3-2 for a listing of loads supplied by the Class IE ac system. Refer to Table 8.3-1 for a list of loads supplied by the Class IE dc system. Specific safety related loads and safety functions are identified in  
8.1.4 DESIGN BASES 8.1.4.1 Offsite Power System 8.1.4.1.1 Safety Design Bases SAFETY DESIGN BASIS ONE - Electrical power from the power grid to the plant site is supplied by two physically independent circuits designed and located so as to minimize the likelihood of simultaneous failure.
 
SAFETY DESIGN BASIS TWO - Each of these independent circuits has the capability to safely shut down the unit. The first preferred circuit, which is connected to the startup transformer, has the capacity to supply the startup and all the auxiliary loads (both group 1 and group 2 simultaneously) of the unit.
Table 8.3-4.  
SAFETY DESIGN BASIS THREE - The second preferred power circuit, which supplies power to the ESF transformer, has the capacity to supply all the safety-related loads of the unit.
 
SAFETY DESIGN BASIS FOUR - The loss of the nuclear unit or the most critical unit on the grid will not result in the loss of offsite power to the Class IE busses.
8.1.4 DESIGN BASES 8.1.4.1 Offsite Power System  
8.1.4.1.2 Power Generation Design Bases POWER GENERATION DESIGN BASIS ONE - The switchyard power circuit breaker control is designed with duplicate and redundant systems, i.e., two independent battery systems, two trip coils per breaker, and two independent protective relay schemes.
 
8.1-3 Rev. 30  
8.1.4.1.1 Safety Design Bases  
 
SAFETY DESIGN BASIS ONE - Electrical power from the power grid to the plant site is supplied by two physically independent circuits designed and located so  
 
as to minimize the likelihood of simultaneous failure.  
 
SAFETY DESIGN BASIS TWO - Each of these independent circuits has the capability to safely shut down the unit. The first preferred circuit, which is connected to the startup transformer, has the capacity to supply the startup and all the  
 
auxiliary loads (both group 1 and group 2 simultaneously) of the unit.  
 
SAFETY DESIGN BASIS THREE - The second preferred power circuit, which supplies power to the ESF transformer, has the capacity to supply all the safety-related loads of the unit.  
 
SAFETY DESIGN BASIS FOUR - The loss of the nuclear unit or the most critical  
 
unit on the grid will not result in the loss of offsite power to the Class IE  
 
busses. 8.1.4.1.2 Power Generation Design Bases  
 
POWER GENERATION DESIGN BASIS ONE - The switchyard power circuit breaker  
 
control is designed with duplicate and redundant systems, i.e., two independent battery systems, two trip coils per breaker, and two independent protective relay schemes.  
 
8.1-3                         Rev. 30 WOLF CREEK 8.1.4.2  Onsite Power System 8.1.4.2.1  Safety Design Bases SAFETY DESIGN BASIS ONE - The onsite power system includes a separate and independent Class IE electric power system (GDC-17).
 
SAFETY DESIGN BASIS TWO - The onsite Class IE electric power system is divided into two independent load groups, each with its own power supply, busses, transformers, loads, and associated 125- V dc control power. Each load group
 
is independently capable of maintaining the plant in a cold shutdown (GDC-17).
 
SAFETY DESIGN BASIS THREE - One independent diesel generator is provided for each Class IE ac load group.
 
SAFETY DESIGN BASIS FOUR - No provisions are made for automatic transfer of load groups between redundant power sources.


WOLF CREEK 8.1.4.2 Onsite Power System 8.1.4.2.1 Safety Design Bases SAFETY DESIGN BASIS ONE - The onsite power system includes a separate and independent Class IE electric power system (GDC-17).
SAFETY DESIGN BASIS TWO - The onsite Class IE electric power system is divided into two independent load groups, each with its own power supply, busses, transformers, loads, and associated 125-V dc control power. Each load group is independently capable of maintaining the plant in a cold shutdown (GDC-17).
SAFETY DESIGN BASIS THREE - One independent diesel generator is provided for each Class IE ac load group.
SAFETY DESIGN BASIS FOUR - No provisions are made for automatic transfer of load groups between redundant power sources.
SAFETY DESIGN BASIS FIVE - No portion (ac or dc) of the onsite standby power systems is shared with another unit (GDC-5).
SAFETY DESIGN BASIS FIVE - No portion (ac or dc) of the onsite standby power systems is shared with another unit (GDC-5).
SAFETY DESIGN BASIS SIX - The Class IE electric systems are designed to satisfy  
SAFETY DESIGN BASIS SIX - The Class IE electric systems are designed to satisfy the single failure criterion (GDC-17).
 
SAFETY DESIGN BASIS SEVEN - For each of four protection channels, one independent 125-V dc and one 120-V vital ac power source are provided.
the single failure criterion (GDC-17).
Batteries are sized for 240 minutes of operation without the support of battery chargers.
SAFETY DESIGN BASIS SEVEN - For each of four protection channels, one independent 125-V dc and one 120-V vital ac power source are provided.
SAFETY DESIGN BASIS EIGHT - Raceways are not shared by Class IE and non-Class IE cables. However, associated cables connected to Class IE busses are treated as Class IE cables with regard to separation and identification and are run in their related Class IE raceway system.
 
SAFETY DESIGN BASIS NINE - Special identification criteria are applied for Class IE equipment, including cabling and raceways. Refer to Section 8.3.1.3.
Batteries are sized for 240 minutes of operation without the support of battery  
SAFETY DESIGN BASIS TEN - Separation criteria are applied which establish requirements for preserving the independence of redundant Class IE load groups or power systems. Refer to Section 8.3.1.4.1.
 
SAFETY DESIGN BASIS ELEVEN - Class IE equipment is designed with the capability of being tested periodically (GDC-18).
chargers.
8.1-4 Rev. 9  
SAFETY DESIGN BASIS EIGHT - Raceways are not shared by Class IE and non-Class  
 
IE cables. However, associated cables connected to Class IE busses are treated  
 
as Class IE cables with regard to separation and identification and are run in  
 
their related Class IE raceway system.
SAFETY DESIGN BASIS NINE - Special identification criteria are applied for  
 
Class IE equipment, including cabling and raceways. Refer to Section 8.3.1.3.  
 
SAFETY DESIGN BASIS TEN - Separation criteria are applied which establish requirements for preserving the independence of redundant Class IE load groups or power systems. Refer to Section 8.3.1.4.1.  
 
SAFETY DESIGN BASIS ELEVEN - Class IE equipment is designed with the capability  
 
of being tested periodically (GDC-18).  
 
8.1-4                         Rev. 9 WOLF CREEK SAFETY DESIGN BASIS TWELVE - Two physically and electrically independent ESF transformers are provided to supply the Class IE ac electric power system.
 
8.1.4.2.2  Power Generation Design Bases
 
POWER GENERATION DESIGN BASIS ONE - A separate non-Class IE dc system is
 
provided for non-Class IE controls and dc motors.
 
8.1.4.3  Design Criteria, Regulatory Guides, IEEE Standards and IE Bulletins The onsite power system is generally designed in accordance with IEEE Standards
 
279, 308, 317, 323, 334, 344, 379, 382, 383, 384, 387, 450, and 484.
Compliance with Regulatory Guides 1.6, 1.9, 1.22, 1.29, 1.30, 1.32, 1.40, 1.41, 1.47, 1.53, 1.62, 1.63, 1.68, 1.73, 1.75, 1.81, 1.89, 1.93, 1.100, 1.106, 1.108, 1.118, and 1.131 and IEEE Standards 323-1974, 338-1971, 344-1975, 384-
 
1974, 387-1984, 308- 1974, and 317-1976 are discussed below:
 
Refer to Appendix 3A for the applicable revision dates on regulatory guides.
 
Compliance with General Design Criteria 17 and 18 is discussed in Section 3.1.
 
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.6, INDEPENDENCE BETWEEN REDUNDANT STANDBY (ONSITE) POWER SOURCES AND BETWEEN THEIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS - The Class IE system is divided
 
into redundant load groups so that loss of any one group does not prevent the
 
minimum safety functions from being performed. Figure 8.3-1 shows this
 
arrangement.
Each ac load group has connections to two preferred (offsite) power supplies
 
and to a single diesel generator. Each diesel generator is exclusively
 
connected to a single Class IE 4.16-kV load group and has no automatic
 
connection to the redundant load group.
For a discussion of this regulatory guide, with respect to the Class IE dc
 
system, refer to Section 8.3.2.2.1.
 
No provisions exist for automatic transfer of loads between redundant onsite power supplies.
 
The diesel generator of one load group cannot be automatically paralleled with
 
the diesel generator of the redundant load group.


8.1-5 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK Interlocks are provided to assure that a single operator error would not parallel the standby power sources of redundant load groups. Refer to Section  
WOLF CREEK SAFETY DESIGN BASIS TWELVE - Two physically and electrically independent ESF transformers are provided to supply the Class IE ac electric power system.
 
8.1.4.2.2 Power Generation Design Bases POWER GENERATION DESIGN BASIS ONE - A separate non-Class IE dc system is provided for non-Class IE controls and dc motors.
8.3.1.1.3.
8.1.4.3 Design Criteria, Regulatory Guides, IEEE Standards and IE Bulletins The onsite power system is generally designed in accordance with IEEE Standards 279, 308, 317, 323, 334, 344, 379, 382, 383, 384, 387, 450, and 484.
There is no interconnection of load groups.  
Compliance with Regulatory Guides 1.6, 1.9, 1.22, 1.29, 1.30, 1.32, 1.40, 1.41, 1.47, 1.53, 1.62, 1.63, 1.68, 1.73, 1.75, 1.81, 1.89, 1.93, 1.100, 1.106, 1.108, 1.118, and 1.131 and IEEE Standards 323-1974, 338-1971, 344-1975, 384-1974, 387-1984, 308-1974, and 317-1976 are discussed below:
Refer to Appendix 3A for the applicable revision dates on regulatory guides.
Compliance with General Design Criteria 17 and 18 is discussed in Section 3.1.
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.6, INDEPENDENCE BETWEEN REDUNDANT STANDBY (ONSITE) POWER SOURCES AND BETWEEN THEIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS - The Class IE system is divided into redundant load groups so that loss of any one group does not prevent the minimum safety functions from being performed. Figure 8.3-1 shows this arrangement.
Each ac load group has connections to two preferred (offsite) power supplies and to a single diesel generator. Each diesel generator is exclusively connected to a single Class IE 4.16-kV load group and has no automatic connection to the redundant load group.
For a discussion of this regulatory guide, with respect to the Class IE dc system, refer to Section 8.3.2.2.1.
No provisions exist for automatic transfer of loads between redundant onsite power supplies.
The diesel generator of one load group cannot be automatically paralleled with the diesel generator of the redundant load group.
8.1-5 Rev. 27


WOLF CREEK Interlocks are provided to assure that a single operator error would not parallel the standby power sources of redundant load groups. Refer to Section 8.3.1.1.3.
There is no interconnection of load groups.
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.9, SELECTION, DESIGN, QUALIFICATION, and TESTING OF EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR UNITS USED AS CLASS 1E ONSITE ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEMS AT NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS WCGS was initially licensed to Regulatory Guide 1.108 and Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 1 with regard to the original design and qualification of the emergency diesel generators. Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 1 was essentially an endorsement of IEEE Standard 387-1977 with a number of provisions specified in the Regulatory Position of the regulatory guide.
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.9, SELECTION, DESIGN, QUALIFICATION, and TESTING OF EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR UNITS USED AS CLASS 1E ONSITE ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEMS AT NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS WCGS was initially licensed to Regulatory Guide 1.108 and Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 1 with regard to the original design and qualification of the emergency diesel generators. Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 1 was essentially an endorsement of IEEE Standard 387-1977 with a number of provisions specified in the Regulatory Position of the regulatory guide.
For ongoing testing of the emergency diesel generators, WCGS conforms to the Technical Specifications and with exceptions (as described in the Technical Specification 3.8.1 Bases) to the test recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 3. Revision 3 of Regulatory Guide 1.9 integrates the pertinent guidance previously addressed in Revisions 1 and 2 of Regulatory Guide 1.9 and the guidance of Revision 1 of Regulatory Guide 1.108. Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 3 endorses IEEE 387-1984 with respect to design, qualification and periodic testing of diesel generator units, subject to the supplemental design considerations specified in Section C.1 and the diesel generator testing provisions specified in Section C.2 of the Regulatory Guide.
For ongoing testing of the emergency diesel generators, WCGS conforms to the Technical Specifications and with exceptions (as described in the Technical Specification 3.8.1 Bases) to the test recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 3. Revision 3 of Regulatory Guide 1.9 integrates the pertinent guidance previously addressed in Revisions 1 and 2 of Regulatory Guide 1.9 and the guidance of Revision 1 of Regulatory Guide 1.108. Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 3 endorses IEEE 387-1984 with respect to design, qualification and periodic testing of diesel generator units, subject to the supplemental design considerations specified in Section C.1 and the diesel generator testing provisions specified in Section C.2 of the Regulatory Guide.
Line 268: Line 121:
Load requirements are listed in Figure 8.3-2.
Load requirements are listed in Figure 8.3-2.
The following exception applies to Regulatory guide 1.9, Revision 3, Regulatory Position C.1.3:
The following exception applies to Regulatory guide 1.9, Revision 3, Regulatory Position C.1.3:
The predicted loads for short-time operation are less than the diesel generator short-time load rating and the predicted loads for continuous operation are less than the diesel generator continuous load rating.  
The predicted loads for short-time operation are less than the diesel generator short-time load rating and the predicted loads for continuous operation are less than the diesel generator continuous load rating.
 
The diesel generators are designed as follows:
The diesel generators are designed as follows:
: a. To start and accelerate to rated speed, in the sequence shown in Figure 8.3-2, all the needed engineered safety  
: a. To start and accelerate to rated speed, in the sequence shown in Figure 8.3-2, all the needed engineered safety features and emergency hot shutdown loads.
: b. So that at no time during the loading sequence do the frequency and voltage decrease to less than 95 percent of 60 Hz (when operating at nominal 60Hz) and 75 percent of 4.16 kV, respectively. Calculations demonstrate that if the diesel generators are operating at the lower end of the Technical Specification frequency band and if the frequency momentarily dips below 95 percent of 60 Hz, that the equipment will still perform its safety function with no equipment damage. (Reference 1) 8.1-6 Rev. 27


features and emergency hot shutdown loads.
WOLF CREEK
: b. So that at no time during the loading sequence do the
: c.
 
Frequency is restored to within 2 percent of nominal in less than 60 percent of each load-sequence interval for step load increase and in less than 80 percent of each load sequence interval for disconnection of the single largest load, and voltage is restored to within 10 percent of nominal within 60 percent of each load-sequence time interval. (A greater percentage of the time interval may be used if it can be justified by analysis. However, the load-sequence time interval should include sufficient margin to account for the accuracy and repeatability of the load-sequence timer.) During recovery from transients caused by the disconnection of the largest single load, the speed of the diesel generator unit does not exceed the nominal speed plus 75 percent of the difference between nominal speed and the over-speed trip setpoint of 115 percent of nominal, whichever is lower.
frequency and voltage decrease to less than 95 percent of 60 Hz (when operating at nominal 60Hz) and 75 percent of  4.16 kV, respectively. Calculations demonstrate  that if the diesel generators are operating at the lower  end of the Technical Specification frequency band and if  the frequency momentarily dips below 95 percent of 60 Hz, that  the equipment will still perform its safety function with no  equipment damage.  (Reference 1) 8.1-6 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK c. Frequency is restored to within 2 percent of nominal in less than 60 percent of each load-sequence interval for step load increase and in less than 80 percent of each load sequence interval for disconnection of the single largest load, and voltage is restored to within 10 percent of nominal within 60 percent of each load-sequence time interval. (A greater percentage of the time interval may be used if it can be justified by analysis. However, the load-sequence time interval should include sufficient margin to account for the accuracy and repeatability of the load-sequence timer.) During recovery from transients caused by the disconnection of the largest single load, the speed of the diesel generator unit does not exceed the nominal speed plus 75 percent of the difference between nominal speed and the over-speed trip setpoint of 115 percent of nominal, whichever is lower.
Furthermore, the transient following the complete loss of load does not cause the speed of the unit to attain the overspeed trip setpoint.
Furthermore, the transient following the complete loss of load does not cause the speed of the unit to attain the overspeed trip setpoint.
The suitability of each diesel generator is confirmed by the manufacturer's  
The suitability of each diesel generator is confirmed by the manufacturer's prototype qualification test data and preoperational tests.
 
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.22, PERIODIC TESTING OF PROTECTION SYSTEM ACTUATION FUNCTIONS - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.
prototype qualification test data and preoperational tests.
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.29, SEISMIC DESIGN CLASSIFICATION - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.22, PERIODIC TESTING OF PROTECTION SYSTEM ACTUATION  
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.30, QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR THE INSTALLATION, INSPECTION, AND TESTING OF INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.
 
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.32, CRITERIA FOR SAFETY-RELATED ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEMS FOR NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - Compliance with IEEE Standard 450-1995 and the dc power requirements of IEEE Standard 308-1974 is discussed in Section 8.3.2.2.1. (See Appendix 3A for discussion of compliance to Regulatory Guide 1.32 in relation to IEEE Standard 450)
FUNCTIONS - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.  
Compliance with ac power requirements of IEEE Standard 308-1974 is as follows:
 
The Class 1E ac power system is designed to ensure that any design basis event, as listed in Table 1 of IEEE 308, does not cause either (1) loss of electric power to a number of engineered safety features, surveillance, or protection system device sufficient to jeopardize the safety of the unit or (2) loss of electric power to equipment that could result in a reactor power transient capable of causing significant damage to the fuel or the reactor coolant system.
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.29, SEISMIC DESIGN CLASSIFICATION - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.  
The Class 1E power system is capable of performing its function when subjected to the effects of any of the design basis events. The Class 1E loads are designed to perform their functions adequately for the design variations of voltage and frequency in the Class 1E system.
 
Circuit breaker control is provided in the control room and on the circuit breakers of the preferred power supplies and diesel generator supplies to the 4.16-kV busses of the Class 1E system. Controls are provided in each diesel generator room for local operation of the diesel generator.
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.30, QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR THE INSTALLATION, INSPECTION, AND TESTING OF INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT - Refer to  
Class 1E equipment and associated design, operating, and maintenance documents are distinctly identified as described in Section 8.3.1.3.
 
8.1-7 Rev. 27
Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.32, CRITERIA FOR SAFETY-RELATED ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEMS FOR  
 
NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - Compliance with IEEE Standard 450-1995 and the dc power  
 
requirements of IEEE Standard 308-1974 is discussed in Section 8.3.2.2.1. (See  
 
Appendix 3A for discussion of compliance to Regulatory Guide 1.32 in relation to IEEE Standard 450)  
 
Compliance with ac power requirements of IEEE Standard 308-1974 is as follows:  
 
The Class 1E ac power system is designed to ensure that any design basis event, as listed in Table 1 of IEEE 308, does not cause either (1) loss of electric  
 
power to a number of engineered safety features, surveillance, or protection  
 
system device sufficient to jeopardize the safety of the unit or (2) loss of  
 
electric power to equipment that could result in a reactor power transient  
 
capable of causing significant damage to the fuel or the reactor coolant system.
The Class 1E power system is capable of performing its function when subjected to the effects of any of the design basis events. The Class 1E loads are designed to perform their functions adequately for the design variations of  
 
voltage and frequency in the Class 1E system.  
 
Circuit breaker control is provided in the control room and on the circuit  
 
breakers of the preferred power supplies and diesel generator supplies to the  
 
4.16-kV busses of the Class 1E system. Controls are provided in each diesel generator room for local operation of the diesel generator.
Class 1E equipment and associated design, operating, and maintenance documents are distinctly identified as described in Section 8.3.1.3.  


8.1-7 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK Each type of Class 1E equipment is qualified by analysis, by successful use under similar conditions, or by actual test to demonstrate its ability to perform its function under applicable design basis events.
WOLF CREEK Each type of Class 1E equipment is qualified by analysis, by successful use under similar conditions, or by actual test to demonstrate its ability to perform its function under applicable design basis events.
A failure modes and effects analysis is performed. Refer to Section 8.3.1.2.1.
A failure modes and effects analysis is performed. Refer to Section 8.3.1.2.1.
Supplementary design criteria of IEEE 308 are addressed in the applicable sections describing specific Class 1E equipment.
Supplementary design criteria of IEEE 308 are addressed in the applicable sections describing specific Class 1E equipment.
The surveillance requirements of IEEE 308 are followed in the design, installation, and operation of Class 1E systems and consist of the following:
The surveillance requirements of IEEE 308 are followed in the design, installation, and operation of Class 1E systems and consist of the following:
: a. Preoperational equipment tests and inspections were performed in accordance with the procedures described in  
: a. Preoperational equipment tests and inspections were performed in accordance with the procedures described in Chapter 14.0 with all components installed.
 
Chapter 14.0 with all components installed.
: b. Preoperational system tests were performed in accordance with the procedure described in Chapter 14.0 with all components installed.
: b. Preoperational system tests were performed in accordance with the procedure described in Chapter 14.0 with all components installed.
: c. Periodic equipment tests are performed at the scheduled  
: c. Periodic equipment tests are performed at the scheduled intervals to detect deterioration of the system toward an unacceptable condition and to demonstrate that the standby power equipment and other components that are not running during normal operation of the station are operable.
 
: d. Surveillance system tests referred to in item c above are performed at scheduled intervals to demonstrate the operational readiness of the system.
intervals to detect deterioration of the system toward an unacceptable condition and to demonstrate that the standby power equipment and other components that are not  
With regard to Section 7 of IEEE 308 and Regulatory Guide 1.93, The Technical Specifications discuss operating alternatives under degraded Class IE ac system conditions.
 
Section 8 of IEEE 308 describes multiunit considerations and is not applicable to WCGS.
running during normal operation of the station are  
The electrical and physical independence between redundant standby (onsite) power sources is discussed in the responses to Regulatory Guides 1.6 and 1.75.
 
Connection of non-Class 1E equipment to Class 1E systems is discussed in the response to Regulatory Guide 1.75.
operable.
Diesel generator set capacity is discussed in the response to Regulatory Guide 1.9.
: d. Surveillance system tests referred to in item c above are performed at scheduled intervals to demonstrate the  
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.40, QUALIFICATION TESTS OF CONTINUOUS-DUTY MOTORS INSTALLED INSIDE THE CONTAINMENT OF WATER-COOLED NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.
 
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.41, PREOPERATIONAL TESTING OF REDUNDANT ONSITE ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEMS TO VERIFY PROPER LOAD GROUP ASSIGNMENTS - The onsite electric power systems, designed in accordance with Regulatory Guides 1.6 and 1.32, were tested as part of the preoperational testing program and also after major modifications. The tests were performed in accordance with the 8.1-8 Rev. 27  
operational readiness of the system.  
 
With regard to Section 7 of IEEE 308 and Regulatory Guide 1.93, The Technical Specifications discuss operating alternatives under degraded Class IE ac system conditions.  
 
Section 8 of IEEE 308 describes multiunit considerations and is not applicable  
 
to WCGS. The electrical and physical independence between redundant standby (onsite)  
 
power sources is discussed in the responses to Regulatory Guides 1.6 and 1.75.  
 
Connection of non-Class 1E equipment to Class 1E systems is discussed in the response to Regulatory Guide 1.75.  
 
Diesel generator set capacity is discussed in the response to Regulatory Guide  
 
1.9.  
 
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.40, QUALIFICATION TESTS OF CONTINUOUS-DUTY MOTORS INSTALLED INSIDE THE CONTAINMENT OF WATER-COOLED NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.  
 
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.41, PREOPERATIONAL TESTING OF REDUNDANT ONSITE ELECTRIC  
 
POWER SYSTEMS TO VERIFY PROPER LOAD GROUP ASSIGNMENTS - The onsite electric power systems, designed in accordance with Regulatory Guides 1.6 and 1.32, were tested as part of the preoperational testing program and also after major  
 
modifications. The tests were performed in accordance with the  
 
8.1-8                         Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK procedures outlined in Chapter 14.0. These tests verify the independence between the redundant onsite power sources and their load groups.
 
The Class IE power system is isolated from the preferred (offsite) transmission network by direct actuation of the Class IE undervoltage relays monitoring the Class IE busses, resulting in tripping of the supply breakers.
 
The Class IE power system is tested functionally, one load group at a time, by allowing one load group to be powered only by its associated diesel generator while the bus is disconnected from the preferred power source. The redundant
 
load group remains completely disconnected from its associated diesel generator
 
and preferred power source.
 
An engineered safety features actuation signal (ESFAS) is simulated to start the diesel generators and initiate automatic sequencing. Functional
 
performance of the loads is checked. Each test is of sufficient duration to achieve stable operating conditions and thus permit the onset and detection of
 
adverse conditions which could result from improper assignment of loads.
During testing of one Class IE load group, the busses of the redundant load
 
groups not under test are monitored to verify absence of voltage on these
 
busses and loads, indicating no interconnection of load groups.
 
Refer to Section 8.3.2.2.1 for a discussion of this regulatory guide with respect to dc systems.
 
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.47, BYPASSED AND INOPERABLE STATUS INDICATION FOR NUCLEAR


POWER PLANT SAFETY SYSTEMS - A detailed description of the engineered safety features status panel is provided in Section 7.5. A section of this panel is devoted to providing indication of the configuration and, therefore, the operability of the Class IE ac power distribution system.  
WOLF CREEK procedures outlined in Chapter 14.0. These tests verify the independence between the redundant onsite power sources and their load groups.
 
The Class IE power system is isolated from the preferred (offsite) transmission network by direct actuation of the Class IE undervoltage relays monitoring the Class IE busses, resulting in tripping of the supply breakers.
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.53, APPLICATION OF THE SINGLE FAILURE CRITERION TO NUCLEAR POWER PLANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS - Refer to Section 7.3 for the response to this regulatory guide.  
The Class IE power system is tested functionally, one load group at a time, by allowing one load group to be powered only by its associated diesel generator while the bus is disconnected from the preferred power source. The redundant load group remains completely disconnected from its associated diesel generator and preferred power source.
 
An engineered safety features actuation signal (ESFAS) is simulated to start the diesel generators and initiate automatic sequencing. Functional performance of the loads is checked. Each test is of sufficient duration to achieve stable operating conditions and thus permit the onset and detection of adverse conditions which could result from improper assignment of loads.
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.62, MANUAL INITIATION OF PROTECTIVE ACTIONS - Refer to  
During testing of one Class IE load group, the busses of the redundant load groups not under test are monitored to verify absence of voltage on these busses and loads, indicating no interconnection of load groups.
 
Refer to Section 8.3.2.2.1 for a discussion of this regulatory guide with respect to dc systems.
Appendix 3A, Responses to Regulatory Guides.
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.47, BYPASSED AND INOPERABLE STATUS INDICATION FOR NUCLEAR POWER PLANT SAFETY SYSTEMS - A detailed description of the engineered safety features status panel is provided in Section 7.5. A section of this panel is devoted to providing indication of the configuration and, therefore, the operability of the Class IE ac power distribution system.
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.63, ELECTRIC PENETRATION ASSEMBLIES IN CONTAINMENT  
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.53, APPLICATION OF THE SINGLE FAILURE CRITERION TO NUCLEAR POWER PLANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS - Refer to Section 7.3 for the response to this regulatory guide.
 
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.62, MANUAL INITIATION OF PROTECTIVE ACTIONS - Refer to Appendix 3A, Responses to Regulatory Guides.
STRUCTURES FOR LIGHT-WATER-COOLED NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - The electric  
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.63, ELECTRIC PENETRATION ASSEMBLIES IN CONTAINMENT STRUCTURES FOR LIGHT-WATER-COOLED NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - The electric penetration assemblies conform to IEEE Standard 317-1976.
 
8.1-9 Rev. 0  
penetration assemblies conform to IEEE Standard 317-1976.  
 
8.1-9 Rev. 0
 
WOLF CREEK The electrical penetration assemblies do not incorporate self-fusing characteristics. They are designed to withstand the maximum possible fault
 
current versus time conditions (which could occur because of single random failures of circuit overload protection devices) for any electrical fault external to the penetration within the two leads of any one single-phase
 
circuit or the three leads of any one three-phase circuit.


WOLF CREEK The electrical penetration assemblies do not incorporate self-fusing characteristics. They are designed to withstand the maximum possible fault current versus time conditions (which could occur because of single random failures of circuit overload protection devices) for any electrical fault external to the penetration within the two leads of any one single-phase circuit or the three leads of any one three-phase circuit.
In accordance with Regulatory Guide 1.63, the following system features are provided to ensure compliance with this requirement of the regulatory guide.
In accordance with Regulatory Guide 1.63, the following system features are provided to ensure compliance with this requirement of the regulatory guide.
: a. Medium Voltage System  
: a. Medium Voltage System For medium voltage circuits feeding loads (e.g. RCPs) in the reactor building, the primary protection is provided by the individual load circuit breakers, which are backed up by the main bus feeder breaker. Spatial separation is achieved by locating the primary (load breaker) and backup (bus feeder breaker) relays in separate switchgear cubicles on a given bus. Primary and backup circuit protection for control power are supplied from two separate dc sources. The penetration withstands the maximum available fault current for the respective durations which are characteristic of both the primary and backup protection. The switchgear is located in the turbine building. Separate non-Class IE battery sources are provided for the primary and backup protection and circuit breaker control. (No 4.16-kV loads are located within the reactor building).
 
For medium voltage circuits feeding loads (e.g. RCPs) in the reactor building, the primary protection is provided by the individual load circuit breakers, which are backed  
 
up by the main bus feeder breaker. Spatial separation is  
 
achieved by locating the primary (load breaker) and  
 
backup (bus feeder breaker) relays in separate switchgear cubicles on a given bus. Primary and backup circuit protection for control power are supplied from two  
 
separate dc sources. The penetration withstands the  
 
maximum available fault current for the respective  
 
durations which are characteristic of both the primary and backup protection. The switchgear is located in the turbine building. Separate non-Class IE battery sources  
 
are provided for the primary and backup protection and  
 
circuit breaker control. (No 4.16-kV loads are located  
 
within the reactor building).
: b. Low Voltage Load Center Loads
: b. Low Voltage Load Center Loads
: 1. Class IE Loads  
: 1. Class IE Loads For low voltage Class IE load centers feeding loads in the reactor building, the primary and backup protection is provided by a fuse or a MCC breaker in series with the individual load center load circuit breakers respectively.
 
Spatial separation is achieved, since the primary (fuse or MCC breaker) and backup (load center breaker) protective devices are in separate physical locations. The penetration withstands the available range of fault current and time duration for the load center breaker trip. No battery sources are necessary, since the breaker trip units are direct acting.
For low voltage Class IE load centers feeding loads in the reactor building, the primary and backup protection is provided by a fuse or a MCC breaker in series with the individual load center load circuit breakers respectively.
8.1-10 Rev. 28  
Spatial separation is achieved, since the primary (fuse or   MCC breaker) and backup (load center breaker) protective   devices are in separate physical locations. The penetration withstands the available range of fault current and time duration for the load center breaker trip. No battery sources are necessary, since the breaker trip units are direct acting.  
 
8.1-10 Rev. 28 WOLF CREEK
: 2. Non-Class IE load center loads are few in number, and are treated on an individual basis as follows:
 
(a)  Containment Polar Crane and Non-Class IE MCC The containment polar crane and MCC are powered
 
from their respective non-class IE load centers
 
located in the auxiliary building. For the non-Class IE MCC, primary and backup protection is provided in a manner similar to that described
 
for Class IE load center loads in Item 1. The
 
primary and backup protection is provided by the
 
individual load circuit breaker and the associated load center main feeder breaker,                  respectively. For the containment polar crane, primary and backup protection is provided by the individual load center feeder breaker and
 
properly rated fuses, respectively. The penetration will withstand the range of fault current and the time duration which is
 
characteristic of the primary and backup
 
protection devices.
 
(b)  Pressurizer Backup Heaters
 
The pressurizer backup heaters are supplied from
 
non-Class IE load centers, which are located in
 
the auxiliary building. Individual 480-V molded case circuit breakers feeding the heaters provide the primary protection. Fuses in series with these circuit breakers provide backup
 
protection. The fuses are located in a
 
different vertical section than the molded case circuit breakers. The penetrations will withstand the range of fault current and the
 
time duration which is characteristic of the
 
primary and backup protection devices.
 
(c)  Pressurizer Control Group Heaters
 
The pressurizer control group heaters are
 
supplied from a non-Class IE load center through
 
an SCR controller and a bank of molded case circuit breakers. Since the SCR controller is fused, the primary protection is provided by the
 
molded case circuit breakers, and the backup
 
protection is provided by the fuses in the SCR
 
controller. The penetration withstands the
 
range of fault current and time duration which are characteristic of the primary and backup devices.


WOLF CREEK
: 2. Non-Class IE load center loads are few in number, and are treated on an individual basis as follows:
(a) Containment Polar Crane and Non-Class IE MCC The containment polar crane and MCC are powered from their respective non-class IE load centers located in the auxiliary building. For the non-Class IE MCC, primary and backup protection is provided in a manner similar to that described for Class IE load center loads in Item 1. The primary and backup protection is provided by the individual load circuit breaker and the associated load center main feeder breaker, respectively. For the containment polar crane, primary and backup protection is provided by the individual load center feeder breaker and properly rated fuses, respectively. The penetration will withstand the range of fault current and the time duration which is characteristic of the primary and backup protection devices.
(b) Pressurizer Backup Heaters The pressurizer backup heaters are supplied from non-Class IE load centers, which are located in the auxiliary building. Individual 480-V molded case circuit breakers feeding the heaters provide the primary protection. Fuses in series with these circuit breakers provide backup protection. The fuses are located in a different vertical section than the molded case circuit breakers. The penetrations will withstand the range of fault current and the time duration which is characteristic of the primary and backup protection devices.
(c) Pressurizer Control Group Heaters The pressurizer control group heaters are supplied from a non-Class IE load center through an SCR controller and a bank of molded case circuit breakers. Since the SCR controller is fused, the primary protection is provided by the molded case circuit breakers, and the backup protection is provided by the fuses in the SCR controller. The penetration withstands the range of fault current and time duration which are characteristic of the primary and backup devices.
8.1-11 Rev. 0  
8.1-11 Rev. 0  


WOLF CREEK c.Low Voltage Motor Control Center Loads
WOLF CREEK c.Low Voltage Motor Control Center Loads
: 1. General MCC loads The 480-V loads within the reactor building are supplied power from Class IE or non-Class IE MCCs (as applicable) which are located in the auxiliary building. In this case, the primary protection is provided by the combination of a molded case circuit breaker (instantaneous only) and the thermal overload relays in the starter, for motor loads. The pri-mary protection is provided by a thermal-magnetic circuit breaker in the case of feeder tap breakers. In both cases, backup protection is provided by introducing properly rated fuses in each cubicle between the breaker and the load. Although the primary (circuit breaker) and backup (fuse) protection are located within the same MCC compartment, these two protection means are diverse in their fault clearing mechanisms. There are two exceptions. First, primary protection in non Class 1E  
: 1. General MCC loads The 480-V loads within the reactor building are supplied power from Class IE or non-Class IE MCCs (as applicable) which are located in the auxiliary building. In this case, the primary protection is provided by the combination of a molded case circuit breaker (instantaneous only) and the thermal overload relays in the starter, for motor loads. The pri-mary protection is provided by a thermal-magnetic circuit breaker in the case of feeder tap breakers.
 
In both cases, backup protection is provided by introducing properly rated fuses in each cubicle between the breaker and the load. Although the primary (circuit breaker) and backup (fuse) protection are located within the same MCC compartment, these two protection means are diverse in their fault clearing mechanisms. There are two exceptions. First, primary protection in non Class 1E MCCs may be provided by fused disconnect switches equipped with current limiting fuses having circuit protection characteristics equal to or better than molded case circuit breakers in similar applications.
MCCs may be provided by fused disconnect switches  
 
equipped with current limiting fuses having circuit protection characteristics equal to or better than molded case circuit breakers in similar applications.
 
An exception also occurs in the case of large feeder tap breakers and larger motors connected to the MCCs.
An exception also occurs in the case of large feeder tap breakers and larger motors connected to the MCCs.
In this case, where the penetration is relatively large and can practicably be coordinated with the MCC incoming breaker, the fuses are not used. In all cases, the penetration withstands the available current and time duration which are characteristic of the primary and backup devices.
In this case, where the penetration is relatively large and can practicably be coordinated with the MCC incoming breaker, the fuses are not used. In all cases, the penetration withstands the available current and time duration which are characteristic of the primary and backup devices.
: 2. Motor-Operated Valves  
: 2. Motor-Operated Valves Class 1E motor-operated valves (MOVs), similar to the 480-V motor loads previously discussed, require properly rated fuses to be added to the individual motor starter cubicles for backup protection. However, the Class 1E motor-operated valves have their thermal overload (TOL) relays in the control circuit bypassed in order to ensure run to failure. Eliminating the TOL relays removes a portion of their primary protection. Complete primary protection for the MOV circuits is maintained using one of two methods, as follows:
 
Class 1E motor-operated valves (MOVs), similar to the 480-V motor loads previously discussed, require properly rated fuses to be added to the individual motor starter cubicles for backup protection. However, the Class 1E motor-operated valves have their thermal overload (TOL) relays in the control circuit bypassed in order to ensure run to failure. Eliminating the TOL relays removes a portion of their primary protection. Complete primary protection for the MOV circuits is maintained using one of two methods, as follows:
(a) The typical method uses a magnetic-only molded-case circuit breaker with an adjustable trip setting (vertical intercept) that provides the primary protection. The trip setting is set low enough to stay below the thermal limit of the penetration (considering the upper limit of the breaker tripping tolerance band), and high enough to avoid nuisance tripping of the MOV during starts (considering the lower limit of the breaker tripping tolerance band).
(a) The typical method uses a magnetic-only molded-case circuit breaker with an adjustable trip setting (vertical intercept) that provides the primary protection. The trip setting is set low enough to stay below the thermal limit of the penetration (considering the upper limit of the breaker tripping tolerance band), and high enough to avoid nuisance tripping of the MOV during starts (considering the lower limit of the breaker tripping tolerance band).
Although the primary (circuit breaker) and backup (fuse) protection are located within the same MCC compartment, these two protection means are diverse as to their sensing and fault clearing mechanisms.
Although the primary (circuit breaker) and backup (fuse) protection are located within the same MCC compartment, these two protection means are diverse as to their sensing and fault clearing mechanisms.
8.1-12 Rev. 30 WOLF CREEK (b) The alternate method uses a second set of fuses to complement and complete the primary protection, as a magnetic-only molded-case circuit breaker with an adjustable trip setting may not be fully coordinated with the penetration's thermal limits as described above in (a). The molded-case circuit breaker trip setting is set high enough to avoid nuisance tripping of the MOV during starts (considering the lower limit of the breaker tripping tolerance band). The primary protection fuses are sized such that they actuate prior to the backup protection fuses. Although the primary (circuit breaker and fuse) and backup (fuse) protection may be located within the same MCC compartment, these three protection means are diverse as to their sensing and fault clearing mechanisms. In addition, the primary and backup fuses are of a different type, which reduces the potential for the fuses to have a common failure mode. In all cases, the penetrations are sized such that their thermal limits are greater than the time-current curves of both the primary and backup protection devices.
8.1-12 Rev. 30  
: d. Low Voltage Control Systems


Primary protection is provided by a fuse in the control  
WOLF CREEK (b) The alternate method uses a second set of fuses to complement and complete the primary protection, as a magnetic-only molded-case circuit breaker with an adjustable trip setting may not be fully coordinated with the penetrations thermal limits as described above in (a). The molded-case circuit breaker trip setting is set high enough to avoid nuisance tripping of the MOV during starts (considering the lower limit of the breaker tripping tolerance band). The primary protection fuses are sized such that they actuate prior to the backup protection fuses. Although the primary (circuit breaker and fuse) and backup (fuse) protection may be located within the same MCC compartment, these three protection means are diverse as to their sensing and fault clearing mechanisms. In addition, the primary and backup fuses are of a different type, which reduces the potential for the fuses to have a common failure mode.
In all cases, the penetrations are sized such that their thermal limits are greater than the time-current curves of both the primary and backup protection devices.
: d. Low Voltage Control Systems Primary protection is provided by a fuse in the control circuit. Backup protection is provided by fuses in the control power transformer primary. The penetrations will withstand the range of fault current and the time duration which is characteristic of the primary and backup protection devices.
: e. Instrument Systems The energy levels in the instrument systems are sufficiently low so that no damage occurs to the electric penetration.
: f. DC Loads Primary and backup fuses are provided with the penetrations withstanding the available fault current and time duration which are characteristic of those devices.
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.68, INITIAL TEST PROGRAMS FOR WATER-COOLED NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.73, QUALIFICATION TESTS OF ELECTRIC VALVE OPERATORS INSTALLED INSIDE THE CONTAINMENT OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.75, PHYSICAL INDEPENDENCE OF ELECTRIC SYSTEMS - This regulatory guide sets forth criteria for the separation of circuits and electric equipment. These circuits and equipment either comprise or are associated with the Class IE power systems, the protection system, systems actuated or controlled by the protection system, and auxiliary or supporting systems that are essential to the operation of these systems. The separation criteria are discussed in Section 8.3.1.4.1 and meet the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.75. The following discussion supplements and clarifies 8.1-13 Rev. 30


circuit. Backup protection is provided by fuses in the
WOLF CREEK several of the items presented in the guide. Paragraph numbers herein correspond to paragraph numbers in IEEE 384-1974.
 
Paragraph 4.1 Two completely separate and independent load groups, each of which is capable of safely shutting down the unit, are provided. Separation between these load groups and between associated circuits and non-Class IE circuits is implemented to an extent commensurate with the hazard potential of the areas in which they are installed. See Section 8.3.1.4.1.
control power transformer primary. The penetrations will withstand the range of fault current and the time duration which is characteristic of the primary and
Paragraph 4.2 Equipment and circuits requiring separation are determined and delineated early in the design stage. Distinctive identification on documents and drawings is provided. See Section 8.3.1.3.
 
Paragraph 4.3 Various means of attaining physical separation of safety-related circuits and equipment include separate cable spreading rooms, separate cable chases, raceways, barriers, and distance. See Section 8.3.1.4.1.
backup protection devices.
Paragraph 4.4 Section 8.3.1.4.1.1 satisfies this guide paragraph.
: e. Instrument Systems The energy levels in the instrument systems are
Paragraph 4.5 Associated circuits are separated and identified as if safety related.
 
Associated circuits are not uniquely labeled as such; rather, they are identified as any safety-related circuit of the same separation group would be.
sufficiently low so that no damage occurs to the electric
Where non-Class IE circuits are associated by reason of their sharing of Class IE sources, the following specific criteria are followed:
 
The non-Class 1E loads connected to Class 1E power buses are isolated with an isolation device as described below.
penetration.
: 1.
: f. DC Loads
Circuit Breaker tripped by a safety injection signal (SIS).
 
: 2.
Primary and backup fuses are provided with the
Starter contactor opened by a safety injection signal (SIS).
 
: 3.
penetrations withstanding the available fault current and
Two circuit breakers, two fuses, or a breaker and a fuse in series, both coordinated with an upstream circuit breaker, and the circuit breaker periodically tested.
 
time duration which are characteristic of those devices.
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.68, INITIAL TEST PROGRAMS FOR WATER-COOLED NUCLEAR POWER
 
PLANTS - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.
 
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.73, QUALIFICATION TESTS OF ELECTRIC VALVE OPERATORS
 
INSTALLED INSIDE THE CONTAINMENT OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.
 
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.75, PHYSICAL INDEPENDENCE OF ELECTRIC SYSTEMS - This
 
regulatory guide sets forth criteria for the separation of circuits and
 
electric equipment. These circuits and equipment either comprise or are associated with the Class IE power systems, the protection system, systems actuated or controlled by the protection  system,  and auxiliary or supporting 
 
systems that are essential to the operation of these systems. The separation
 
criteria are discussed in Section 8.3.1.4.1 and meet the recommendations of
 
Regulatory Guide 1.75. The following discussion supplements and clarifies 8.1-13    Rev. 30 WOLF CREEK several of the items presented in the guide. Paragraph numbers herein correspond to paragraph numbers in IEEE 384-1974.
Paragraph 4.1  
 
Two completely separate and independent load groups, each of which is capable  
 
of safely shutting down the unit, are provided. Separation   between these  
 
load   groups and   between associated circuits and non-Class IE circuits is implemented to an extent commensurate with the hazard potential of the areas in which they are installed. See Section 8.3.1.4.1.  
 
Paragraph 4.2  
 
Equipment and circuits requiring separation are determined and delineated early in the design stage. Distinctive identification on documents and drawings is  
 
provided. See Section 8.3.1.3.  
 
Paragraph 4.3 Various means of attaining physical separation of safety-related circuits and  
 
equipment include separate cable spreading rooms, separate cable chases, raceways, barriers, and distance. See Section 8.3.1.4.1.  
 
Paragraph 4.4  
 
Section 8.3.1.4.1.1 satisfies this guide paragraph.  
 
Paragraph 4.5 Associated circuits are separated and identified as if safety related.
 
Associated circuits are not uniquely labeled as such; rather, they are  
 
identified as any safety-related circuit of the same separation group would be.  
 
Where non-Class IE circuits are associated by reason of their sharing of Class IE sources, the following specific criteria are followed:  
 
The non-Class 1E loads connected to Class 1E power buses are isolated  
 
with an isolation device as described below.
: 1. Circuit Breaker tripped by a safety injection signal (SIS).
: 2. Starter contactor opened by a safety injection signal (SIS).
: 3. Two circuit breakers, two fuses, or a breaker and a fuse in series, both coordinated with an upstream circuit breaker, and the circuit breaker periodically tested.
These power circuit loads are described as follows:
These power circuit loads are described as follows:
: a. Tripped AC Loads  
: a. Tripped AC Loads Non-Class IE loads which are tripped on occurrence of an SIS are as given below. These circuits beyond the isolation device (Class IE breaker or contactor) are treated per non-Class IE and non-associated criteria.
 
Non-Class IE loads which are tripped on occurrence of an SIS are as given below. These circuits beyond the  
 
isolation device (Class IE breaker or contactor) are  
 
treated per non-Class IE and non-associated criteria.
: 1. Air compressors
: 1. Air compressors
: 2. Standby ac lighting
: 2. Standby ac lighting
: 3. Battery chargers, 125 V and 250 V 8.1-14     Rev. 30 WOLF CREEK
: 3. Battery chargers, 125 V and 250 V 8.1-14 Rev. 30  
 
WOLF CREEK
: 4. Pressurizer heaters backup groups
: 4. Pressurizer heaters backup groups
: 5. CRDM cooling fans
: 5. CRDM cooling fans
Line 601: Line 235:
: 11. Deleted
: 11. Deleted
: b. Non-Class IE AC Loads not Tripped
: b. Non-Class IE AC Loads not Tripped
: 1. Each separation group of the non-class IE instrument ac power system is supplied from a delta-star connected, three phase transformer. In order to assure that the class IE system is not compromised and to eliminate  
: 1.
 
Each separation group of the non-class IE instrument ac power system is supplied from a delta-star connected, three phase transformer. In order to assure that the class IE system is not compromised and to eliminate the accidental imposition of 480-Vac on the transformer secondary (120-Vac) circuit, two circuit breakers in series are utilized in the transformer primary circuit of each separation group. For these reasons, the circuits beyond the second circuit breaker are treated per non-class 1E and non-associated criteria. The non-class IE instrument ac power system is not tripped upon the occurrence of an SIS.
the accidental imposition of 480-Vac on the transformer secondary (120-
: 2.
 
Boric acid heat tracing in Room 1311 that is not tripped on SIS.
Vac) circuit, two circuit breakers in series are utilized in the transformer primary circuit of each separation group. For these reasons, the circuits beyond the second circuit breaker are treated per  
: c. Control Room DC Lighting The 125-V dc system supplies control board emergency lighting from the class IE dc battery. These cables are identified and separated as safety-related.
 
8.1-15 Rev. 30  
non-class 1E and non-associated criteria. The non-class IE instrument  
 
ac power system is not tripped upon the occurrence of an SIS.
: 2. Boric acid heat tracing in Room 1311 that is not tripped on SIS.
: c. Control Room DC Lighting  
 
The 125-V dc system supplies control board emergency lighting from the class IE dc battery. These cables are identified and separated as safety-related.  
 
8.1-15     Rev. 30 WOLF CREEK Paragraph 4.6
 
Two channels of non-safety-related cables and raceway are associated with the normal plant systems and equipment. These channels require no specific separation. However, they are separated from the four safety-related separation groups by the same criteria that is applied to the separation of the
 
four safety-related separation groups from each other.
 
All non-safety-related circuits are routed separately from safety-related and associated circuits to the above criteria. The specific separation distance
 
required by Paragraphs 5.1.3, 5.1.4, or 5.6 is complied with.
 
Paragraph 5.1.1.1 The requirements of this paragraph are met. See Section 8.3.1.4.1.1.
 
Paragraph 5.1.1.2
 
Areas in which the only source of fire is electrical are divided into two groups--cable spreading areas and general plant areas. Section 8.3.1.4.1.1 is
 
followed.
 
Paragraph 5.1.1.3 The separation distances of 1 horizontal and 3 vertical feet in the cable
 
spreading and main control rooms and 3 horizontal and 5 vertical feet in
 
general plant areas are provided, and are described in Section 8.3.1.4.1.1.


WOLF CREEK Paragraph 4.6 Two channels of non-safety-related cables and raceway are associated with the normal plant systems and equipment. These channels require no specific separation. However, they are separated from the four safety-related separation groups by the same criteria that is applied to the separation of the four safety-related separation groups from each other.
All non-safety-related circuits are routed separately from safety-related and associated circuits to the above criteria. The specific separation distance required by Paragraphs 5.1.3, 5.1.4, or 5.6 is complied with.
Paragraph 5.1.1.1 The requirements of this paragraph are met. See Section 8.3.1.4.1.1.
Paragraph 5.1.1.2 Areas in which the only source of fire is electrical are divided into two groups--cable spreading areas and general plant areas. Section 8.3.1.4.1.1 is followed.
Paragraph 5.1.1.3 The separation distances of 1 horizontal and 3 vertical feet in the cable spreading and main control rooms and 3 horizontal and 5 vertical feet in general plant areas are provided, and are described in Section 8.3.1.4.1.1.
Cables and raceways are selected with flame-retardant properties.
Cables and raceways are selected with flame-retardant properties.
Hazards are limited to failures or faults internal to the electrical equipment.  
Hazards are limited to failures or faults internal to the electrical equipment.
 
The use of splices in Class IE systems is limited to the following areas:
The use of splices in Class IE systems is limited to the following areas:
: a. Splices are used in long duct bank runs to site  
: a. Splices are used in long duct bank runs to site buildings, such as intake structures for ESW systems, where cables are longer than is practical to manufacture and pull. Splices in the long duct bank runs are done in the vicinity of the manholes.
8.1-16 Rev. 0


buildings, such as intake structures for ESW systems, where cables are longer than is practical to manufacture
WOLF CREEK
 
: b. Where small control or instrument devices are supplied with short pigtails, the field cable may be terminated to the pigtail by means of an approved connection, which is adequately insulated, located close to the device, and enclosed in the connecting conduit.
and pull. Splices in the long duct bank runs are done in the vicinity of the manholes.
: c. Another possible area would be in the event of cable damage in an operating plant where a splice might be preferable over total replacement of the cable. Such instances are resolved on a case-by-case basis.
 
: d. In cases in which field-run cables are incompatible with the terminal size on the devices to which they must terminate, a splice to a short, appropriate pigtail may be made to permit the required termination. Such instances are approved on a case-by-case basis, where the adequacy of the pigtail is confirmed and splices are made with qualified materials and are restricted to enclosures such as MCCs, termination compartments, and panels.
8.1-16    Rev. 0 WOLF CREEK
: e. Splices made with qualified materials are used within enclosures where specified by design.
: b. Where small control or instrument devices are supplied with short pigtails, the field cable may be terminated to  
: f. The 600 volt fire-resistive control and power cables are fitted with termination kits on both ends that are either factory installed or field installed. The termination kits provide transition from solid cable conductors to stranded pigtails suited for making cable terminations. The kits, along with the fire-resistive cables are covered by specification E-057C. Splices for terminating the fire-resisitive cables will be in accordance with paragraphs b, d and e above.
 
: g. The 600 volt fire-resistive control and power cables typically have a maximum manufactured length of 100 feet. Factory installed or field installed splices provide for increased cable length. The splices are covered in the fire-resistive cable specification E-057C, and maintain the fire rating and structural integrity of the cables.
the pigtail by means of an approved connection, which is adequately insulated, located close to the device, and enclosed in the connecting conduit.
Paragraph 5.1.2 Exposed Class IE raceways are marked in a distinct, permanent manner at intervals not exceeding 15 feet and at points of entry to and exit from enclosed areas.
: c. Another possible area would be in the event of cable  
In addition, separate color identification is provided for each separation group of field wired, safety-related cables.
 
As stated in reference to Paragraph 4.5, associated circuits are identified the same as their related Class IE circuits, and are, therefore, distinguished from one another as stated above.
damage in an operating plant where a splice might be preferable over total replacement of the cable. Such instances are resolved on a case-by-case basis.
See Section 8.3.1.3.
: d. In cases in which field-run cables are incompatible with  
Paragraph 5.1.3 8.1-17 Rev. 24
 
the terminal size on the devices to which they must terminate, a splice to a short, appropriate pigtail may be made to permit the required termination. Such  
 
instances are approved on a case-by-case basis, where the adequacy of the pigtail is confirmed and splices are made  
 
with qualified materials and are restricted to enclosures such as MCCs, termination compartments, and panels.
: e. Splices made with qualified materials are used within  
 
enclosures where specified by design.
: f. The 600 volt fire-resistive control and power cables are fitted with termination kits on both ends that are either factory installed or field installed. The termination kits provide transition from solid cable conductors to stranded pigtails suited for making cable terminations. The kits, along with the fire-resistive cables are covered by specification E-057C. Splices for terminating the fire-resisitive cables will be in accordance with paragraphs b, d and e above. g. The 600 volt fire-resistive control and power cables typically have a maximum manufactured length of 100 feet. Factory installed or field installed splices provide for increased cable length. The splices are covered in the fire-resistive cable specification E-057C, and maintain the fire rating and structural integrity of the cables.
Paragraph 5.1.2  
 
Exposed Class IE raceways are marked in a distinct, permanent manner at intervals not exceeding 15 feet and at points of entry to and exit from enclosed areas.
In addition, separate color identification is provided for each separation  
 
group of field wired, safety-related cables.  
 
As stated in reference to Paragraph 4.5, associated circuits are identified the  
 
same as their related Class IE circuits, and are, therefore, distinguished from one another as stated above.  
 
See Section 8.3.1.3.  
 
Paragraph 5.1.3  


8.1-17 Rev. 24 WOLF CREEK Section 8.3.1.4.1.1 satisfies this paragraph.
WOLF CREEK Section 8.3.1.4.1.1 satisfies this paragraph.
Paragraph 5.1.4 Section 8.3.1.4.1.1 satisfies this paragraph.
Paragraph 5.1.4 Section 8.3.1.4.1.1 satisfies this paragraph.
Paragraph 5.2.1 Sections 8.3.1.1.3 satisfy this paragraph.
Paragraph 5.2.1 Sections 8.3.1.1.3 satisfy this paragraph.
Paragraph 5.2.2  
Paragraph 5.2.2 Section 8.3.1.1.3 satisfies this paragraph.
 
Paragraph 5.3.1 Each of the four Class IE batteries is located in a separate room of the control building.
Section 8.3.1.1.3 satisfies this paragraph.
Paragraph 5.3.2 As per Section 8.3.2.1 and 8.3.2.2.1, physical separation, electrical isolation, and redundancy are provided for the entire Class IE dc system, including the battery chargers.
Paragraph 5.3.1  
Paragraph 5.4.1 As per Section 8.3.1.1.7, Class IE switchgear of redundant load groups is located in separate rooms in the control building.
 
Paragraph 5.4.2 As per Section 8.3.1.1.7, Class IE motor control centers of redundant load groups are located in separate rooms within seismic Category I buildings.
Each of the four Class IE batteries is located in a separate room of the  
Paragraph 5.4.3 Vital distribution switchboards of different separation groups are located in separate rooms in the control building. Each switchboard is located with the vital switchgear of its respective separation group.
 
Paragraph 5.5 Two separate penetration areas are provided. One area contains cables for separation groups 2 and 4, each group having separate penetration assemblies.
control building.
The other area contains cables for separation groups 1 and 3, each group again having separate penetration assemblies. Raceway separation criteria apply to the penetrations. See Section 8.3.1.4.1.1.
Paragraph 5.3.2  
Paragraph 5.6.1 Sections 8.3.1.1.6, 8.3.1.3 and 8.3.1.4.1.2 satisfy this guide paragraph.
 
8.1-18 Rev. 24  
As per Section 8.3.2.1 and 8.3.2.2.1, physical separation, electrical  
 
isolation, and redundancy are provided for the entire Class IE dc system, including the battery chargers.
Paragraph 5.4.1  
 
As per Section 8.3.1.1.7, Class IE switchgear of redundant load groups is located in separate rooms in the control building.  
 
Paragraph 5.4.2  
 
As per Section 8.3.1.1.7, Class IE motor control centers of redundant load groups are located in separate rooms within seismic Category I buildings.  
 
Paragraph 5.4.3  
 
Vital distribution switchboards of different separation groups are located in separate rooms in the control building. Each switchboard is located with the vital switchgear of its respective separation group.  
 
Paragraph 5.5  
 
Two separate penetration areas are provided. One area contains cables for separation groups 2 and 4, each group having separate penetration assemblies.
 
The other area contains cables for separation groups 1 and 3, each group again  
 
having separate penetration assemblies. Raceway separation criteria apply to  
 
the penetrations. See Section 8.3.1.4.1.1.  
 
Paragraph 5.6.1  
 
Sections 8.3.1.1.6, 8.3.1.3 and 8.3.1.4.1.2 satisfy this guide paragraph.  
 
8.1-18 Rev. 24 WOLF CREEK Paragraph 5.6.2
 
Separation criteria for wiring internal to control boards are satisfied by Section 8.3.1.4.1.2.
Paragraph 5.6.3
 
Identification of wiring internal to control boards is provided by separation group designation. See Section 8.3.1.3.
 
Paragraph 5.6.4
 
Single control devices to which different separation groups are connected are avoided, wherever practicable. Where single devices are unavoidable, electrical isolation is provided. Where separation by distance is not
 
practicable and internal fire is the only consideration, fire barriers, conduit, or wire duct are used. See Section 8.3.1.4.1.2.
 
Paragraph 5.6.5
 
Within control boards and other panels, nonsafety-related wiring is not
 
harnessed with safety-related wiring. Where both types of wiring are contained
 
within the same board or panel, the nonsafety-related wiring is separated from the safety-related wiring by means of barriers or by a distance equal to or greater than 6 inches.
 
Paragraph 5.6.6
 
Load Group l and Protection Channels 1 and 3 enter the lower cable spreading room and hence enter from the bottom of the control board. Load Group 2 and Protection Channels 2 and 4 generally enter the upper cable spreading room and
 
hence enter from the top of the control board. The only exception to this is
 
in the console which has channels 2 and 4 brought directly from the channel 2 and 4 vertical shaft via embedded floor raceways into separate openings into the bottom of the console. The scheme meets all requirements of Paragraph
 
5.1.3. See Section 8.3.1.4.1.1.
 
Paragraph 5.7 Class IE instruments of different separation groups are generally precluded
 
from occupying the same cabinet. Where this is not practicable, such
 
instruments are located in separate compartments of the cabinet, or are
 
adequately separated by barriers.


WOLF CREEK Paragraph 5.6.2 Separation criteria for wiring internal to control boards are satisfied by Section 8.3.1.4.1.2.
Paragraph 5.6.3 Identification of wiring internal to control boards is provided by separation group designation. See Section 8.3.1.3.
Paragraph 5.6.4 Single control devices to which different separation groups are connected are avoided, wherever practicable. Where single devices are unavoidable, electrical isolation is provided. Where separation by distance is not practicable and internal fire is the only consideration, fire barriers, conduit, or wire duct are used. See Section 8.3.1.4.1.2.
Paragraph 5.6.5 Within control boards and other panels, nonsafety-related wiring is not harnessed with safety-related wiring. Where both types of wiring are contained within the same board or panel, the nonsafety-related wiring is separated from the safety-related wiring by means of barriers or by a distance equal to or greater than 6 inches.
Paragraph 5.6.6 Load Group l and Protection Channels 1 and 3 enter the lower cable spreading room and hence enter from the bottom of the control board. Load Group 2 and Protection Channels 2 and 4 generally enter the upper cable spreading room and hence enter from the top of the control board. The only exception to this is in the console which has channels 2 and 4 brought directly from the channel 2 and 4 vertical shaft via embedded floor raceways into separate openings into the bottom of the console. The scheme meets all requirements of Paragraph 5.1.3. See Section 8.3.1.4.1.1.
Paragraph 5.7 Class IE instruments of different separation groups are generally precluded from occupying the same cabinet. Where this is not practicable, such instruments are located in separate compartments of the cabinet, or are adequately separated by barriers.
8.1-19 Rev. 0  
8.1-19 Rev. 0  


WOLF CREEK Paragraph 5.8  
WOLF CREEK Paragraph 5.8 Section 7.3 satisfies the requirements of this paragraph.
 
Paragraph 5.9 Location of Class 1E actuated equipment is evaluated to ensure that adequate separation for redundant equipment is implemented.
Section 7.3 satisfies the requirements of this paragraph.
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.81, SHARED EMERGENCY AND SHUTDOWN ELECTRIC SYSTEMS FOR MULTI-UNIT NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - Wolf Creek is a one unit site.
Paragraph 5.9  
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.89, QUALIFICATION OF CLASS 1E EQUIPMENT FOR NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.
 
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.93, AVAILABILITY OF ELECTRIC POWER SOURCES - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.
Location of Class 1E actuated equipment is evaluated to ensure that adequate separation for redundant equipment is implemented.
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.100, SEISMIC QUALIFICATION OF ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT FOR NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.81, SHARED EMERGENCY AND SHUTDOWN ELECTRIC SYSTEMS FOR  
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.106, THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION FOR ELECTRIC MOTORS ON MOTOR-OPERATED VALVES - Overload protection for safety-related, motor-operated valves is discussed in Section 8.3.1.1.2. Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.
 
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.108 - PERIODIC TESTING OF DIESEL GENERATOR UNITS USED AS ONSITE ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEMS AT NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - The original testing of the emergency diesel generators was performed in conformance with Regulatory Guide 1.108. After final assembly and preliminary startup testing, each diesel generator was tested as described in Section 8.3.1.1.3.
MULTI-UNIT NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - Wolf Creek is a one unit site.  
Ongoing, periodic surveillance testing of the diesel generators is performed in accordance with the plant Technical Specifications. The testing requirements in the plant Technical Specifications are based on Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 3. The testing guidance of Regulatory Guide 1.108 was largely incorporated into Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 3. Refer to Appendix 3A for additional information regarding Regulatory Guide 1.108.
 
8.1-20 Rev. 27  
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.89, QUALIFICATION OF CLASS 1E EQUIPMENT FOR NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.  
 
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.93, AVAILABILITY OF ELECTRIC POWER SOURCES - Refer to  
 
Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.  
 
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.100, SEISMIC QUALIFICATION OF ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT FOR NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.  
 
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.106, THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION FOR ELECTRIC MOTORS ON  
 
MOTOR-OPERATED VALVES - Overload protection for safety-related, motor-operated valves is discussed in Section 8.3.1.1.2. Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.  
 
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.108 - PERIODIC TESTING OF DIESEL GENERATOR UNITS USED AS  
 
ONSITE ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEMS AT NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - The original testing of the emergency diesel generators was performed in conformance with Regulatory Guide 1.108. After final assembly and preliminary startup testing, each diesel generator was tested as described in Section 8.3.1.1.3.  
 
Ongoing, periodic surveillance testing of the diesel generators is performed in accordance with the plant Technical Specifications. The testing requirements in the plant Technical Specifications are based on Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 3. The testing guidance of Regulatory Guide 1.108 was largely incorporated into Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 3. Refer to Appendix 3A for additional information regarding Regulatory Guide 1.108.  
 
8.1-20                       Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK REGULATORY GUIDE 1.118, PERIODIC TESTING OF ELECTRIC POWER AND PROTECTION SYSTEMS - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.131, QUALIFICATION TESTS OF ELECTRIC CABLES, FIELD SPLICES, AND CONNECTIONS FOR LIGHT-WATER-COOLED NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - The requirements
 
of IEEE Standard 383, 1974 have been used for the qualification of cables, field splices, and connections.
 
The cable, field splices, and connections are qualified to the environmental conditions and all design basis events (e.g., steam line break) by testing
 
and/or analysis.
 
Type tests for design basis event conditions consist of subjecting nonaged and aged cables, field splices, and connections to a sequence of environmental extremes that simulate the most severe postulated conditions of a design basis
 
event and specified conditions of installation. Type tests demonstrate margin
 
by application of multiple transients or increased level. Electrical and
 
physical performance of the cable is measured during and following the environmental cycle. All environmental conditions are enveloped by the qualification program. However, the factors for margin given in Section
 
6.3.1.5 of IEEE 323 are not used.
 
Testing data is provided to establish the long-term performance of the insulation. Data is evaluated using the Arrhenius technique, using a minimum of three data points including 136 C and two others at least 10 C apart in
 
temperature. No on-going qualification is used.


WOLF CREEK REGULATORY GUIDE 1.118, PERIODIC TESTING OF ELECTRIC POWER AND PROTECTION SYSTEMS - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.131, QUALIFICATION TESTS OF ELECTRIC CABLES, FIELD SPLICES, AND CONNECTIONS FOR LIGHT-WATER-COOLED NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - The requirements of IEEE Standard 383, 1974 have been used for the qualification of cables, field splices, and connections.
The cable, field splices, and connections are qualified to the environmental conditions and all design basis events (e.g., steam line break) by testing and/or analysis.
Type tests for design basis event conditions consist of subjecting nonaged and aged cables, field splices, and connections to a sequence of environmental extremes that simulate the most severe postulated conditions of a design basis event and specified conditions of installation. Type tests demonstrate margin by application of multiple transients or increased level. Electrical and physical performance of the cable is measured during and following the environmental cycle. All environmental conditions are enveloped by the qualification program. However, the factors for margin given in Section 6.3.1.5 of IEEE 323 are not used.
Testing data is provided to establish the long-term performance of the insulation. Data is evaluated using the Arrhenius technique, using a minimum of three data points including 136 C and two others at least 10 C apart in temperature. No on-going qualification is used.
The recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.89 are discussed later in this section.
The recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.89 are discussed later in this section.
Vertical tray flame testing is performed in accordance with IEEE 383, Paragraph  
Vertical tray flame testing is performed in accordance with IEEE 383, Paragraph 2.5. However, aged samples are not used.
 
No field splices are used in the cable trays.
2.5. However, aged samples are not used.  
Fire tests are performed with the vertical tray perpendicular to the plane of the horizon.
 
A gas burner flame source releasing approximately 70,000 Btu/hr is used.
No field splices are used in the cable trays.  
The ribbon gas burner flame source is mounted in accordance with the requirements of the regulatory guide, except that the flame is directed from the back side of the cable tray.
 
The 600 volt fire-resistive control and power cables are type tested to 1925 F to verify 1 hour and 3 hour fire ratings, and to verify environmental qualifications in accordance with NRC Generic Letter 86-10, Supplement 1. The fire testing requirements of NRC Generic Letter 86-10, Supplement 1, exceed the flame test requirements of IEEE 383.
Fire tests are performed with the vertical tray perpendicular to the plane of  
 
the horizon.  
 
A gas burner flame source releasing approximately 70,000 Btu/hr is used.  
 
The ribbon gas burner flame source is mounted in accordance with the  
 
requirements of the regulatory guide, except that the flame is directed from  
 
the back side of the cable tray.
The 600 volt fire-resistive control and power cables are type tested to 1925 F  
 
to verify 1 hour and 3 hour fire ratings, and to verify environmental  
 
qualifications in accordance with NRC Generic Letter 86-10, Supplement 1. The  
 
fire testing requirements of NRC Generic Letter 86-10, Supplement 1, exceed the  
 
flame test requirements of IEEE 383.
Oil or burlap as an alternate flame source is not used.
Oil or burlap as an alternate flame source is not used.
The requirements outlined in Regulatory Guide Position 13 are met.
The requirements outlined in Regulatory Guide Position 13 are met.
IEEE 323-1974 IEEE STANDARD FOR QUALIFYING CLASS IE EQUIPMENT FOR NUCLEAR POWER GENERATING STATIONS - Environmental qualification of Class IE electric equipment and the extent of compliance with IEEE 323 are discussed in Section 3.11(B) and 3.11(N).  
IEEE 323-1974 IEEE STANDARD FOR QUALIFYING CLASS IE EQUIPMENT FOR NUCLEAR POWER GENERATING STATIONS - Environmental qualification of Class IE electric equipment and the extent of compliance with IEEE 323 are discussed in Section 3.11(B) and 3.11(N).
 
8.1-21 Rev. 27  
8.1-21                     Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK IEEE 338-1971 CRITERIA FOR THE PERIODIC TESTING OF NUCLEAR POWER GENERATING STATION PROTECTION SYSTEMS - Refer to Table 7.1-2 for application of this standard to various systems.
IEEE 344-1975 SEISMIC QUALIFICATION OF CLASS IE ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT FOR NUCLEAR
 
POWER GENERATING STATIONS - Seismic qualification of Class IE electric
 
equipment and the extent of compliance with IEEE 344 are discussed in Section


3.10(B) and 3.10(N).
WOLF CREEK IEEE 338-1971 CRITERIA FOR THE PERIODIC TESTING OF NUCLEAR POWER GENERATING STATION PROTECTION SYSTEMS - Refer to Table 7.1-2 for application of this standard to various systems.
IEEE 344-1975 SEISMIC QUALIFICATION OF CLASS IE ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT FOR NUCLEAR POWER GENERATING STATIONS - Seismic qualification of Class IE electric equipment and the extent of compliance with IEEE 344 are discussed in Section 3.10(B) and 3.10(N).
IEEE 387-1984 CRITERIA FOR DIESEL GENERATOR UNITS APPLIED AS STANDBY POWER SUPPLIES FOR NUCLEAR POWER GENERATING STATIONS - The original design and testing of the emergency diesel generators conformed to Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 1 and Regulatory Guide 1.108. Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 1 endorsed IEEE Standard 387-1977, and original compliance was demonstrated based on the design criteria as stated below. The following demonstrates compliance with design criteria of IEEE 387:
IEEE 387-1984 CRITERIA FOR DIESEL GENERATOR UNITS APPLIED AS STANDBY POWER SUPPLIES FOR NUCLEAR POWER GENERATING STATIONS - The original design and testing of the emergency diesel generators conformed to Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 1 and Regulatory Guide 1.108. Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 1 endorsed IEEE Standard 387-1977, and original compliance was demonstrated based on the design criteria as stated below. The following demonstrates compliance with design criteria of IEEE 387:
: a. Service Environment The diesel generator unit provides power to appropriate  
: a. Service Environment The diesel generator unit provides power to appropriate ventilation equipment to maintain an acceptable environment within the diesel generator rooms.
: b. Starting, Loading, and Design Load Profile The diesel generator unit is capable of starting, accelerating, being loaded, and carrying the design load described in Section 8.3.1.1.3. The unit energizes its cooling equipment within an acceptable time.
: c. Quality of Power Refer to previous discussions in this section on Regulatory Guide 1.9 concerning frequency and voltage limits.
: d. Ratings Refer to previous discussions in this section on Regulatory Guide 1.9 concerning the basis for the continuous rating of the diesel generator.
Periodic, in-service testing of the diesel generators is performed in accordance with the plant Technical Specifications and the test recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 3. Regulatory Position C.2 of Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 3 endorses requirements of IEEE Standard 387-1984 with respect to Section 3, Definitions, Section 6, Testing, and Section 7, Qualification Requirements, subject to the supplemental design considerations specified in Section C.1 and the diesel generator testing provisions specified in Section C.2 of the Regulatory Guide. Differences between the test requirements of the plant Technical Specifications and the recommendations of the Regulatory Guide are due to the Standard Technical Specifications and/or approved changes to the plant Technical Specifications.
8.1-22 Rev. 27


ventilation equipment to maintain an acceptable
WOLF CREEK
 
: e. Interactions Refer to previous discussions in this section for an analysis per Regulatory Guide 1.6 for assurance that independence is provided between redundant diesel generators and the Class IE electric system. Mechanical systems are designed so that a single failure affects the operation of only a single diesel generator.
environment within the diesel generator rooms.
: f. Qualification Refer to Section 3.11(B) for the extent of compliance to IEEE 323.
: b. Starting, Loading, and Design Load Profile
: g. Design and Application Considerations Design conditions such as vibration, torsional vibration, and overspeed are considered in accordance with the requirements of IEEE 387.
 
: h. Governor and Voltage Regulator Operation Governor and voltage regulator manually actuated droop modes are automatically reset in the isochronous modes in the event of the loss of offsite power.
The diesel generator unit is capable of starting, accelerating, being loaded, and carrying the design load
: i. Control The diesel generator is provided with control systems permitting automatic and manual control. The start-diesel signal is functional, except in the local (repair and maintenance) mode. The capability is provided at each diesel generator for restricted manual starting in the event of a control room emergency. Refer to previous discussions in this section for a further description of the control systems.
 
: j. Surveillance Voltage, current, frequency, and power metering are provided in the control room to permit assessment of the operating condition of each diesel generator.
described in Section 8.3.1.1.3. The unit energizes its cooling equipment within an acceptable time.
Surveillance instrumentation is provided in accordance with IEEE 387, as described in Sections 9.5.4 through 9.5.8.
: c. Quality of Power
8.1-23 Rev. 0
 
Refer to previous discussions in this section on Regulatory Guide 1.9 concerning frequency and voltage limits.
: d. Ratings
 
Refer to previous discussions in this section on Regulatory Guide 1.9 concerning the basis for the  
 
continuous rating of the diesel generator.  
 
Periodic, in-service testing of the diesel generators is performed in accordance with the plant Technical Specifications and the test recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 3. Regulatory Position C.2 of Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 3 endorses requirements of IEEE Standard 387-1984 with respect to Section 3, "Definitions," Section 6, "Testing," and Section 7, "Qualification Requirements," subject to the supplemental design considerations specified in Section C.1 and the diesel generator testing provisions specified in Section C.2 of the Regulatory Guide. Differences between the test requirements of the plant Technical Specifications and the recommendations of the Regulatory Guide are due to the Standard Technical Specifications and/or approved changes to the plant Technical Specifications.
8.1-22                    Rev. 27


WOLF CREEK
WOLF CREEK
: e. Interactions
: k. Testing Tests are conducted on each diesel-generator unit in accordance with IEEE 387, as listed in Section 8.3.1.1.3.
 
IEEE 317-1976 IEEE STANDARD FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATION ASSEMBLIES IN CONTAINMENT STRUCTURES FOR NUCLEAR POWER GENERATING STATIONS - Electrical penetration assemblies are used for all electrical cables that pass through the reactor building. These assemblies are designed and tested in accordance with IEEE Standard 317.
Refer to previous discussions in this section for an analysis per Regulatory Guide 1.6 for assurance that independence is provided between redundant diesel generators and the Class IE electric system. Mechanical
 
systems are designed so that a single failure affects the
 
operation of only a single diesel generator.
: f. Qualification
 
Refer to Section 3.11(B) for the extent of compliance to
 
IEEE 323.
: g. Design and Application Considerations
 
Design conditions such as vibration, torsional vibration, and overspeed are considered in accordance with the requirements of IEEE 387.
: h. Governor and Voltage Regulator Operation
 
Governor and voltage regulator manually actuated droop modes are automatically reset in the isochronous modes in the event of the loss of offsite power.
: i. Control
 
The diesel generator is provided with control systems permitting automatic and manual control. The start-diesel signal is functional, except in the local (repair and
 
maintenance) mode. The capability is provided at each
 
diesel generator for restricted manual starting in the event of a control room emergency. Refer to previous discussions in this section for a further description of
 
the control systems.
: j. Surveillance Voltage, current, frequency, and power metering are
 
provided in the control room to permit assessment of the
 
operating condition of each diesel generator.
 
Surveillance instrumentation is provided in accordance with IEEE 387, as described in Sections 9.5.4 through
 
9.5.8.
 
8.1-23    Rev. 0 WOLF CREEK
: k. Testing  
 
Tests are conducted on each diesel-generator unit in accordance with IEEE 387, as listed in Section 8.3.1.1.3.
IEEE 317-1976 IEEE STANDARD FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATION ASSEMBLIES IN  
 
CONTAINMENT STRUCTURES FOR NUCLEAR POWER GENERATING STATIONS - Electrical  
 
penetration assemblies are used for all electrical cables that pass through the reactor building. These assemblies are designed and tested in accordance with IEEE Standard 317.  
 
Principal design criteria for these assemblies include the following:
Principal design criteria for these assemblies include the following:
: a. The mechanical design, materials, fabrication,         examination, and testing of the pressure-retaining  
: a. The mechanical design, materials, fabrication, examination, and testing of the pressure-retaining boundary of the electrical penetration assembly, excluding electrical conductors, feed-through connectors, insulation, potting compounds, and gaskets, are in accordance with the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, Subsection NE, for Class MC components.
 
boundary of the electrical penetration assembly,         excluding electrical conductors, feed-through connectors, insulation, potting compounds, and gaskets, are in accordance with the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, Subsection NE, for  
 
Class MC components.
: b. The electrical penetration assembly is designed to meet all the electrical requirements for the specified service environment without dielectric breakdown or overheating.
: b. The electrical penetration assembly is designed to meet all the electrical requirements for the specified service environment without dielectric breakdown or overheating.
: c. The electrical penetration assembly is designed to have a  
: c. The electrical penetration assembly is designed to have a total gas leakage rate through its pressure-retaining boundary exclusive of the aperture seal not greater than 1 x 10-6 standard (20 C at one atmosphere of pressure) cubic centimeters per second of dry helium (or equivalent means of measurement) at the maximum specified containment design pressure.
: d. A leak test is performed on each penetration assembly following installation. The test is capable of detecting a leakage rate of 10-2 cubic centimeters per second or less of dry nitrogen with maximum containment pressure applied across the penetration assembly pressure barrier seal at ambient temperature.
: e. Each penetration room has a continuous nitrogen supply system manifolded to each penetration assembly. The design and installation of the system facilitates periodic individual penetration assembly gas leak rate testing after installation.
8.1-24 Rev. 12


total gas leakage rate through its pressure-retaining boundary exclusive of the aperture seal not greater than 1 x 10-6 standard (20 C at one atmosphere of pressure)
WOLF CREEK
 
cubic centimeters per second of dry helium (or equivalent
 
means of measurement) at the maximum specified
 
containment design pressure.
: d. A leak test is performed on each penetration assembly
 
following installation. The test is capable of detecting
 
a leakage rate of 10-2 cubic centimeters per second or less of dry nitrogen with maximum containment pressure applied across the penetration assembly pressure barrier seal at ambient temperature.
: e. Each penetration room has a continuous nitrogen supply
 
system manifolded to each penetration assembly. The design and installation of the system facilitates periodic individual penetration assembly gas leak rate
 
testing after installation.
 
8.1-24    Rev. 12 WOLF CREEK
: f. The electrical penetration assembly design is such that safety-related channel separation is maintained.
: f. The electrical penetration assembly design is such that safety-related channel separation is maintained.
: g. The penetration assembly design is qualified by testing for the intended service within the service and DBE  
: g. The penetration assembly design is qualified by testing for the intended service within the service and DBE environment.
 
IEEE 317-1983 IEEE STANDARD FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATION ASSEMBLIES IN CONTAINMENT STRUCTURES FOR NUCLEAR POWER GENERATING STATIONS - An Electrical penetration assembly is used for all fiber optic cables that pass through the reactor building. This assembly is designed and tested in accordance with the applicable portions (non-electrical) of IEEE Standard 317.
environment.  
 
IEEE 317-1983 IEEE STANDARD FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATION ASSEMBLIES IN CONTAINMENT STRUCTURES FOR NUCLEAR POWER GENERATING STATIONS - An Electrical penetration assembly is used for all fiber optic cables that pass through the  
 
reactor building. This assembly is designed and tested in accordance with the  
 
applicable portions (non-electrical) of IEEE Standard 317.  
 
Principal design criteria for this assembly include the following:
Principal design criteria for this assembly include the following:
: a. The mechanical design, materials, fabrication, examination, and testing of the pressure-retaining boundary of the electrical  
: a. The mechanical design, materials, fabrication, examination, and testing of the pressure-retaining boundary of the electrical penetration assembly used for fiber optic cables, excluding the fiber conductors, fiber covering/sealant and spare port plugs/ferrule assemblies, are in accordance with the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, Subsection NE, for Class MC components.
 
: b. The electrical penetration assembly used for fiber optic cables is designed to have a total gas leakage rate through its pressure-retaining boundary exclusive of the aperture seal not greater than 1 x 10-3 standard cubic centimeters per second of dry nitrogen (@20 C + 15 C) at the maximum specified containment design pressure.
penetration assembly used for fiber optic cables, excluding the fiber conductors, fiber covering/sealant and spare port plugs/ferrule assemblies, are in accordance with the requirements of the ASME Boiler  
 
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, Subsection NE, for Class MC  
 
components.
: b. The electrical penetration assembly used for fiber optic cables is designed to have a total gas leakage rate through its pressure-retaining boundary exclusive of the aperture seal not greater than 1 x 10-3 standard cubic centimeters per second of dry nitrogen (@20 C + 15 C) at the maximum specified containment design pressure.
: c. A leak test is performed on the Electrical penetration assembly used for fiber optic cables, following installation. A post installation leakage test is conducted in accordance with Appendix J requirements.
: c. A leak test is performed on the Electrical penetration assembly used for fiber optic cables, following installation. A post installation leakage test is conducted in accordance with Appendix J requirements.
: d. The electrical penetration assembly used for fiber optic cables does not incorporate O-rings and does not require constant nitrogen  
: d. The electrical penetration assembly used for fiber optic cables does not incorporate O-rings and does not require constant nitrogen pressurization in order to provide the pressure boundary seal. The design facilitates periodic penetration assembly gas leak rate testing after installation.
 
IE BULLETIN 79-27 Power for the vital reactor instrumentation and protection systems is provided by the Class 1E instrument ac power system. This system is composed of four independent 120-volt ac power supplies to provide power for the four channels of the vital reactor protection and instrumentation systems. With one channel inoperable, the remaining three channels are capable of monitoring the vital reactor parameters continuously and safely shutting down the reactor.
pressurization in order to provide the pressure boundary seal. The design facilitates periodic penetration assembly gas leak rate testing after installation.  
Each essential power panel is fed from a dedicated Class 1E inverter, which, in turn, is fed from one of four independent Class 1E batteries. Each essential power panel is fed from a dedicated Class 1E inverter, which, in turn, is fed from one or four independent Class 1E batteries. Each inverter has a 125 VDC supply and a separate 120VAC supply to an internal constant voltage transformer. In the event of a failure of the inverter DC rectifier section, the inverter internal constant voltage transformer will supply the 120VAC power panel until the swing (backup) inverter can be placed in service to replace it.
Each battery has an associated charger that is fed from a diesel generator backed bus. Each battery has an associated charger that is fed from a diesel generator backed bus.
8.1-25 Rev. 29


IE BULLETIN 79-27
WOLF CREEK Power for the four non-Class 1E reactor process control channels is provided by the non-Class 1E ac power system through two non-Class IE uninterruptible power supplies (UPSs). Each power supply train supplies a dedicated UPS that, in turn, supplies two process control cabinets. A backup dc supply is provided to the UPS in the event that the primary source is not available.
 
The backup dc power source is the non-Class 1E dc system. This system is composed of two station batteries and two battery chargers. Both of the chargers are powered from a diesel generator backed bus.
Power for the vital reactor instrumentation and protection systems is provided by the Class 1E instrument ac power system. This system is composed of four
In the event of loss of power as a result of an inverter failure, two trains of backup power to the process cabinets are provided by manual switches from the non-Class 1E ac system. These trains of ac power are provided with a cross tie for additional reliability.
 
Power for miscellaneous non-Class 1E instrument loads is provided by the non-Class 1E instrument ac power system. This system is powered from the Class 1E power system through a qualified isolating regulating transformer. One transformer is provided for each train of instrument ac. No cross ties are provided.
independent 120-volt ac power supplies to provide power for the four channels
The Class IE instrument ac power system is provided with the following alarms in the control room:
 
of the vital reactor protection and instrumentation systems. With one channel
 
inoperable, the remaining three channels are capable of monitoring the vital reactor parameters continuously and safely shutting down the reactor.
 
Each essential power panel is fed from a dedicated Class 1E inverter, which, in
 
turn, is fed from one of four independent Class 1E batteries. Each essential power panel is fed from a dedicated Class 1E inverter, which, in turn, is fed from one or four independent Class 1E batteries. Each inverter has a 125 VDC supply and a separate 120VAC supply to an internal constant voltage transformer. In the event of a failure of the inverter DC rectifier section, the inverter internal constant voltage transformer will supply the 120VAC power panel until the swing (backup) inverter can be placed in service to replace it.
Each battery has an associated charger that is fed from a diesel generator backed bus. Each battery has an associated charger that is fed from a diesel generator backed bus.
 
8.1-25    Rev. 29 WOLF CREEK Power for the four non-Class 1E reactor process control channels is provided by the non-Class 1E ac power system through two non-Class IE uninterruptible power supplies (UPSs). Each power supply train supplies a dedicated UPS that, in turn, supplies two process control cabinets. A backup dc supply is provided to the UPS in the event that the primary source is not available.
The backup dc power source is the non-Class 1E dc system. This system is composed of two station batteries and two battery chargers. Both of the chargers are powered from a diesel generator backed bus.  
 
In the event of loss of power as a result of an inverter failure, two trains of  
 
backup power to the process cabinets are provided by manual switches from the  
 
non-Class 1E ac system. These trains of ac power are provided with a cross tie for additional reliability.  
 
Power for miscellaneous non-Class 1E instrument loads is provided by the non-
 
Class 1E instrument ac power system. This system is powered from the Class 1E  
 
power system through a qualified isolating regulating transformer. One transformer is provided for each train of instrument ac. No cross ties are provided.  
 
The Class IE instrument ac power system is provided with the following alarms  
 
in the control room:
: a. Inverter Trouble
: a. Inverter Trouble
: b. Inverter Static Switch Transfer
: b. Inverter Static Switch Transfer
: c. Loss of switchboard voltage  
: c. Loss of switchboard voltage The non-Class IE dc system is provided with the following alarms which are grouped into a summary alarm in the control room:
 
The non-Class IE dc system is provided with the following alarms which are  
 
grouped into a summary alarm in the control room:
: a. System ground
: a. System ground
: b. Battery imbalance
: b. Battery imbalance
Line 1,027: Line 377:
: g. Charge failure
: g. Charge failure
: h. Loss of distribution board voltage
: h. Loss of distribution board voltage
: i. Loss of switchboard voltage  
: i. Loss of switchboard voltage The non-Class IE instrument ac system is provided with a loss of bus voltage alarm in the control room.
 
Procedures have been developed that address Action Item No. 2 of IE Bulletin 79-27 (i.e. emergency procedures, administrative procedures, and/or alarm procedures). As a result of the review of IE Bulletin 79-27 and IE Circular 79-02, no design modifications are required. However, the ongoing development of procedures and administrative controls will consider these IE issuances.
The non-Class IE instrument ac system is provided with a loss of bus voltage  
8.1-26 Rev. 29
 
alarm in the control room.  
 
Procedures have been developed that address Action Item No. 2 of IE Bulletin 79-27 (i.e. emergency procedures, administrative procedures, and/or alarm  
 
procedures). As a result of the review of IE Bulletin 79-27 and IE Circular  
 
79-02, no design modifications are required. However, the ongoing development  


of procedures and administrative controls will consider these IE issuances.
WOLF CREEK 8.
 
8.1-26    Rev. 29 WOLF CREEK 8.


==1.5 REFERENCES==
==1.5 REFERENCES==
: 1. Calculation NE-E-001, Rev. 0, "Emergency Diesel Transient Loading Analysis" 8.1-27 Rev. 27
: 1.
Calculation NE-E-001, Rev. 0, Emergency Diesel Transient Loading Analysis 8.1-27 Rev. 27  


WOLF CREEK 8.2 OFFSITE POWER SYSTEM 8.
WOLF CREEK 8.2 OFFSITE POWER SYSTEM 8.
 
==2.1  DESCRIPTION==
 
The WCGS offsite ac power supply for the startup, normal operation, and safe shutdown is supplied from the transmission network. The principal design bases
 
as applied to the offsite power system are described in Section 8.1.4.
 
The portion of the offsite power system from the startup transformer and ESF transformer XNB01 to the 4.16-kV Class 1E busses is discussed here. The
 
offsite power system from the transmission line network to the startup
 
transformer and ESF transformer XNB01 is discussed in Section 8.2.1.1.
 
Two physically independent sources of offsite power are brought to the onsite power system. One circuit is fed from ESF transformer XNB01 and supplies power
 
normally to its associated 4.16-kV Class 1E bus.
 
The other circuit is fed from one secondary winding of the startup transformer, through ESF transformer XNB02, and supplies power normally to its associated 4.16-kV Class lE bus. In addition, each offsite power circuit can be manually
 
aligned to supply power to the opposite or both 4.16-kV Class lE busses, if
 
required. Each of these offsite power circuits is designed to be available in
 
sufficient time to ensure that specified acceptable fuel design limits and design conditions of the reactor coolant pressure boundary are not exceeded following a loss of all onsite power sources and the remaining offsite power
 
circuit.  


==2.1 DESCRIPTION==
The WCGS offsite ac power supply for the startup, normal operation, and safe shutdown is supplied from the transmission network. The principal design bases as applied to the offsite power system are described in Section 8.1.4.
The portion of the offsite power system from the startup transformer and ESF transformer XNB01 to the 4.16-kV Class 1E busses is discussed here. The offsite power system from the transmission line network to the startup transformer and ESF transformer XNB01 is discussed in Section 8.2.1.1.
Two physically independent sources of offsite power are brought to the onsite power system. One circuit is fed from ESF transformer XNB01 and supplies power normally to its associated 4.16-kV Class 1E bus.
The other circuit is fed from one secondary winding of the startup transformer, through ESF transformer XNB02, and supplies power normally to its associated 4.16-kV Class lE bus. In addition, each offsite power circuit can be manually aligned to supply power to the opposite or both 4.16-kV Class lE busses, if required. Each of these offsite power circuits is designed to be available in sufficient time to ensure that specified acceptable fuel design limits and design conditions of the reactor coolant pressure boundary are not exceeded following a loss of all onsite power sources and the remaining offsite power circuit.
The two ESF transformers XNB01 and XNB02 are separated by a 3-hour fire wall.
The two ESF transformers XNB01 and XNB02 are separated by a 3-hour fire wall.
The cables associated with each of these offsite power circuits are routed in separate and distinct raceways. The duct banks and other routing features of the two circuits are shown on drawings E-OR0224, E-OR3321, E-OR3221, and E-
The cables associated with each of these offsite power circuits are routed in separate and distinct raceways. The duct banks and other routing features of the two circuits are shown on drawings E-OR0224, E-OR3321, E-OR3221, and E-1R3211 for the cables for the ESF transformers to the 4.16-kV Class lE busses, on drawings E-1R0223, E-OR4331, E-OR4321, and E-OR0224 for cables from the startup transformer to the 13.8-kV switchgear and from the 13.8-kV switchgear to ESF transformer XNB02.
 
The offsite power circuits, including the transformers and cables, have been sized to carry their anticipated loads continuously. Each ESF transformer is sized to carry its associated safety-related load group continuously. The secondary feeder cables to the 4.16-kV Class lE busses are sized in excess of that required to carry their maximum load continuously. The startup transformer is sized to carry its anticipated load continuously, but may be slightly overloaded under certain abnormal conditions. For additional details of the sizing of these components, refer to Section 8.3.1.
1R3211 for the cables for the ESF transformers to the 4.16-kV Class lE busses, on drawings E-1R0223, E-OR4331, E-OR4321, and E-OR0224 for cables from the startup transformer to the 13.8-kV switchgear and from the 13.8-kV switchgear to ESF transformer XNB02.  
 
The offsite power circuits, including the transformers and cables, have been  
 
sized to carry their anticipated loads continuously. Each ESF transformer is sized to carry its associated safety-related load group continuously. The secondary feeder cables to the 4.16-kV Class lE busses are sized in excess of that required to carry their maximum load continuously. The startup  
 
transformer is sized to carry its anticipated load continuously, but may be  
 
slightly overloaded under certain abnormal conditions. For additional details of the sizing of these components, refer to Section 8.3.1.  
 
8.2-1 Rev. 25  
8.2-1 Rev. 25  


WOLF CREEK These two circuits are fully testable. Since they are continuously energized and largely passive, they are continuously tested by their use. When one circuit is shutdown, relays, meters, and other instruments can be tested and calibrated as required.  
WOLF CREEK These two circuits are fully testable. Since they are continuously energized and largely passive, they are continuously tested by their use. When one circuit is shutdown, relays, meters, and other instruments can be tested and calibrated as required.
 
Control and instrumentation power for these offsite power circuits is provided by the Non-Class lE dc system. A dc power source from separate station batteries is provided to each offsite power circuit for control and relaying purposes.
Control and instrumentation power for these offsite power circuits is provided  
From the above considerations, it is concluded that the installation, sizing, and control of both of the offsite power circuits are designed so as to minimize the likelihood of their simultaneous failure under operating and accident conditions.
 
For additional details concerning the compliance of the offsite power system with General Design Criteria, refer to Section 3.1.
by the Non-Class lE dc system. A dc power source from separate station batteries is provided to each offsite power circuit for control and relaying purposes.  
The instrumentation associated with the offsite ac power system provides sufficient information to determine the system availability at any time.
 
Table 1.7-1 of the USAR contains drawings 10466-E-01NB01 and 10466-E-01NB02, Single Line Meter and Relay Diagrams for the Safety-Related 4.16-kV Busses NB01 and NB02. These drawings show the surveillance details of the ESF transformers and their associated 4.16-kV bus. Table 8.3-4 of the USAR, Failure Modes and Effects Analysis, shows the system failure modes and the method of such failure detection.
From the above considerations, it is concluded that the installation, sizing, and control of both of the offsite power circuits are designed so as to minimize the likelihood of their simultaneous failure under operating and accident conditions.  
8.2.1.1 Transmission Network The KG&E and KCPL transmission systems serve as the main outlet and source of offsite power for WCGS. Connection of the station output to the system is achieved via a 345-kV overhead line from the plant yard to the Wolf Creek 345-kV switchyard.
 
A rather extensive 345-kV network forms the backbone of the KG&E-KCPL and neighboring systems, as can be seen from Figure 8.2-1. This transmission system provides a highly reliable source of continuous power for plant shutdown.
For additional details concerning the compliance of the offsite power system  
 
with General Design Criteria, refer to Section 3.1.
The instrumentation associated with the offsite ac power system provides  
 
sufficient information to determine the system availability at any time.  
 
Table 1.7-1 of the USAR contains drawings 10466-E-01NB01 and 10466-E-01NB02, Single Line Meter and Relay Diagrams for the Safety-Related 4.16-kV Busses NB01 and NB02. These drawings show the surveillance details of the ESF transformers  
 
and their associated 4.16-kV bus. Table 8.3-4 of the USAR, Failure Modes and  
 
Effects Analysis, shows the system failure modes and the method of such failure  
 
detection.
8.2.1.1 Transmission Network  
 
The KG&E and KCPL transmission systems serve as the main outlet and source of  
 
offsite power for WCGS. Connection of the station output to the system is achieved via a 345-kV overhead line from the plant yard to the Wolf Creek 345-kV switchyard.  
 
A rather extensive 345-kV network forms the backbone of the KG&E-KCPL and  
 
neighboring systems, as can be seen from Figure 8.2-1. This transmission system provides a highly reliable source of continuous power for plant shutdown.  
 
KCPL and KG&E maintains voltage between a maximum and minimum range of +5%, -2%
KCPL and KG&E maintains voltage between a maximum and minimum range of +5%, -2%
of nominal. The frequency range is 60  
of nominal. The frequency range is 60 +/-.002 Hertz.
+/- .002 Hertz.  
8.2-2 Rev. 32


8.2-2Rev. 32 WOLF CREEK There are three 345-kV lines connecting the Wolf Creek 345-kV Substation to the area transmission system. The three lines are as follows:
WOLF CREEK There are three 345-kV lines connecting the Wolf Creek 345-kV Substation to the area transmission system. The three lines are as follows:
: a. Wolf Creek-Waverly-LaCygne 345-kV Line:
: a. Wolf Creek-Waverly-LaCygne 345-kV Line:
The Wolf Creek-Waverly-LaCygne line is sectioned into two line sections. The first is a 5 miles long line connecting Wolf Creek to the Waverly Switching Station followed by a 53 miles long line connecting Waverly Switching Station to LaCygne Steam Electric Station which has three additional 345-kV lines.
The Wolf Creek-Waverly-LaCygne line is sectioned into two line sections. The first is a 5 miles long line connecting Wolf Creek to the Waverly Switching Station followed by a 53 miles long line connecting Waverly Switching Station to LaCygne Steam Electric Station which has three additional 345-kV lines.
: b. Wolf Creek-Rose Hill 345-kV Line:
: b. Wolf Creek-Rose Hill 345-kV Line:
98 miles long, connecting to the Rose Hill Substation  
98 miles long, connecting to the Rose Hill Substation southeast of Wichita. Rose Hill Substation has three additional 345-kV connections.
: c. Wolf Creek-Benton 345-kV Line:
90 miles long, connecting to the Benton Substation northeast of Wichita. Benton Substation has two additional 345-kV lines, one of which is to the Wichita 345-kV Substation, near the Gordon Evans Steam Electric Station.
The above 345-kV lines do not share common rights-of-way, do not have any crossovers, and are not in close proximity of one another, except in the immediate vicinity of the switchyard. In those areas, the design is such as to maintain clearances as required by the National Electric Safety Code (4).
In addition, a 27-mile long 69-kV line connects the Wolf Creek 345-kV switchyard to the Athens Switching Station located south of the Wolf Creek Plant site. The Wolf Creek-Rose Hill 345-kV line crosses over this 69-kV line once approximately 7 miles from the Wolf Creek Plant site. The physical separation of the two lines meets or exceeds the requirements of the National Electric Safety Code (4).
If one of the three 345-kV lines faulted, the breakers located at Wolf Creek Substation would trip, deenergizing the line (in the case of the Wolf Creek-Waverly-LaCygne Line only one segment of the line would normally be deenergized due to the Waverly tap, however, the remaining segment would no longer be credited as a source of power for the plant). Any one of the two remaining incoming 345-kV transmission lines at Wolf Creek Substation (in the case of the Waverly/LaCygne Line both line segments must be in-service) can carry the total ESF load required for safe shutdown by controlled switching of te Wolf Creek substation breakers, providing a separate transmission line feeding each ESF transformer.
The Phillips 69-kV line, Figure 8.2-5, is owned and maintained by the Lyon-Coffey County REC. It is not a supply line for the 69-kV system. Should a fault occur on this line, a 69-kV breaker located in the Wolf Creek Substation would trip, deenergizing the line -- not adversely affecting the 345-kV offsite source.
8.2-3 Rev. 29


southeast of Wichita. Rose Hill Substation has three
WOLF CREEK All line designs are such as to minimize the possibility of conductor vibration and/or galloping. The design of these overhead lines meets or exceeds the requirements of the National Electric Safety Code (4) for heavy loading district, Grade B construction, and is based on a lightning performance of less than one outage per 100 miles per year.
8.2.1.2 Switchyard and Connection to the Onsite Distribution System Figure 8.2-3 shows the physical orientation and separation of the 345-kV and 69-kV switchyards; the main, startup, 345/13.8 kV, 345/69-kV and 67/13.8-kV transformers; the manual throwover switch and the transmission line routing.
Figure 8.2-4 provides a one-line diagram of the electrical distribution on the site. The electrical one-line diagram of the installation showing connections to offsite substations is shown in Figure 8.2-5.
The 345-kV switchyard design includes a breaker-and-a-half arrangement. A 69-kV line and transformers connected to the local transmission system are provided.
The 345-13.8-kV unit startup transformer, through switchyard breaker 345-100 or 345-110, serves one of the two Class IE busses by way of the ESF number two transformer. The No. 7 transformer (also 345/13.8-kV, through switchyard breaker 345-80 or 345-90, is the primary source for the second Class IE bus by way of breaker 13-48, the manual throwover switch and the ESF number one transformer. The No. 7 transformer is an installed spare for the unit startup and would require being moved to the location of the unit startup should it become necessary to replace the unit startup transformer. The unit startup is a physically independent offsite power source from the No. 7 transformer as neither source shares common protective equipment. As an alternate to the No.
7 transformer source, the No. 6 (345/69-kV) transformer (with No. 4 and No. 5 67/13.8-kV transformers) is available to serve the second Class IE bus via the manual throwover switch. This off-site power source does not have open phase detection capability. This alternate power source is also physically independent from the unit startup transformer, as it does not have common protective equipment with the unit startup transformer. Figure 8.2-3 shows the routing of the overhead line from the 345-kV switchyard to the startup transformer, which serves one of the load groups. This figure also shows the underground circuits encased in concrete from the primary 345/13.8-kV source and the alternate 345/69-kV source to the manual throwover switch, then from the manual throwover switch in the 69-kV switchyard via an underground circuit encased in concrete to the ESF number one transformer. Voltage studies have been performed and cables have been sized to assure that either offsite source is capable of supplying the entire Class IE loads should it become necessary.
8.2-4 Rev. 32


additional 345-kV connections.
WOLF CREEK When the ESF No., 1 transformer is fed through the primary offsite power source (345/13.8-kV transformer), the offsite 69-kV system may be connected to the 345-kV system through the 345/69-kV transformer. When the ESF No. 1 transformer is being fed from the 345-kV switchyard through the alternate offsite power source (345/69-kV transformer and two parallel 67/13.8-kV transformers), the offsite 69-kV shall not be connected to the 345-kV system.
: c. Wolf Creek-Benton 345-kV Line:
The 13.8-kV side of both 67/13.8-kV transformers is connected to five underground circuits. These five circuits feed through metal clad switchgear with drawout type breakers and a transfer bus which serve the ESF No. 1 transformer, one switchyard station power transformer, the site distribution system, and the east and west construction loops.
Three single-phase, one-third size, step-up transformers provided for the unit raise the generator voltage to 345-kV prior to transmission, via an overhead line, to the 345-kV switchyard located approximately 700 feet due north of the turbine building. This overhead line is not carried on the same supporting structures as the line to the unit startup transformer. The design of these overhead lines meets or exceeds the requirements of the National Electric Safety Code (4) for heavy loading district, Grade B construction.
The generating unit is to be synchronized to the system across the generator circuit breakers located in the 345-kV switchyard. Control of these synchronizing breakers and the 13.8-kV breakers is administered from the plant main control room. Control Room indication is provided for all 345-kV breakers and 69-kV feeder breakers. Control of all other transmission breakers in the Wolf Creek switchyard is via supervisory control from the Operating Agent's System Control Center in Topeka.
In addition to status indication of all 345-kV breakers and line disconnect switches, the 69-kV feeder breakers and the 13.8-kV breakers, eight main control board annunciator windows are provided to alert the operator to any failure which could result in loss of availability of either preferred offsite source to perform its intended function. These alarms include the following:
345-kV Trouble 345-kV Supervisory Trouble 345-kV Battery Trouble SL2 Buss 13-40 Breaker Trip 69-kV Trouble No.4/No.5 Transformers not Parallel No. 1 Switchgear Breaker Trip 13-48 Breaker Trip 8.2-5 Rev. 32


90 miles long, connecting to the Benton Substation
WOLF CREEK A partial breakdown of many of these alarms is provided on the plant computer alarm listing with a further breakdown on the local annunciator panel in the switchyard buildings and equipment cabinets. A voltmeter is provided on the main control board for monitoring the voltage on the 13.8-kV busses SL7 and SL8 and breaker 13-48.
The 345/13.8 kV transformer is equipped with Open Phase Detection (OPD) equipment. The purpose of the OPD equipment is to detect an Open Phase Condition (OPC) event. An OPC is created when there is not proper circuit continuity for one or more phases of an offsite source.
No failure causing a loss of function of one offsite source can occur without alarming on the Main Control Board in some manner. The main switchyard bus and interconnections between various switchyard components are comprised of rigid aluminum bus.
8.2.1.3 Compliance with Design Criteria and Standards The offsite power systems are capable of providing reliable sources of power to the Class IE systems in compliance with GDC 17 and 18 of 10 CFR Part 50 and Regulatory Guide 1.32. Design of the offsite power systems for Wolf Creek exceeds the minimum requirements cited in the above documents as demonstrated by the following analysis.
Criterion 17 - Electric Power Systems In addition to the features detailed in Sections 8.2.1.1 and 8.2.1.2, compliance with Criterion 17 is further demonstrated by the following:
: a. In the event any one of the overhead 345-kV transmission lines were to be interrupted, either one of the remaining two lines is capable (in the case of the Waverly/LaCygne Line both line segments must be in-service) of carrying the total ESF load required for post-accident and post-fire safe shutdown.
Controlled switching of the Wolf Creek substation breakers, providing a separate transmission line feeding each ESF transformer, based on grid conditions, is an acceptable means of maintaining acceptable voltage to carry the ESF load required for post-accident and post-fire safe shutdown.
: b. The two 345-kV transmission lines from the plant yard to the switching station are supported on their own individual structures. Structural design and circuit separation are such as to eliminate the possibility of a structural collapse causing an outage of both 345-kV transmission lines.
: c. The 345-kV system is protected from lightning and switching surges by lightning protective equipment and by overhead static lines.
8.2-6 Rev. 30


northeast of Wichita. Benton Substation has two
WOLF CREEK
 
: d. The design of all overhead lines meets or exceeds the requirements of the National Electric Safety Code (4) for heavy loading district, Grade B construction, and is based on a lightning performance of less than one outage per 100 miles per year. Design of switchyard components is in accordance with the latest standards of the IEEE, ANSI and NEMA.
additional 345-kV lines, one of which is to the Wichita 345-kV Substation, near the Gordon Evans Steam Electric Station.
: e. The design of the 125-V dc system for the 345-kV portion of the switchyard consists of two independent dc systems. Each of the two systems consists of a separate 125-V dc battery, battery charger, and distribution system. Cable separation is maintained between the two systems. A single failure caused by a malfunction of either of the two 125-V dc systems will not affect the performance of the other system. The ability of the switchyard to supply offsite power to the plant will not be affected by the loss of one of the two 125-V dc systems. The surveillance of battery charger operation and battery voltage for each battery system is provided by individual alarms monitored in the switchyard control building. Alarms are also monitored in the plant control room. The 69-kV portion of the switchyard has its own 125-Vdc battery for relaying. There is no dc tie between the switchyard batteries and those in the power block.
 
: f. Two isolated 13.8-kV supplies from separate sources are provided to the switchyard. One supply is from the offsite 13.8-kV bus and the other is from a site 13.8-kV bus. Each supply serves a station power transformer which is capable of supplying the total ac load of the station. Loss of the normal source will initiate automatic throwover of all load to the standby transformer.
The above 345-kV lines do not share common rights-of-way, do not have any
 
crossovers, and are not in close proximity of one another, except in the immediate vicinity of the switchyard. In those  areas,  the design is such as to maintain clearances as required by the National Electric Safety Code (4).
 
In addition, a 27-mile long 69-kV line connects the Wolf Creek 345-kV
 
switchyard to the Athens Switching Station located south of the Wolf Creek Plant site. The Wolf Creek-Rose Hill 345-kV line crosses over this 69-kV line once approximately 7 miles from the Wolf Creek Plant site. The physical
 
separation of the two lines meets or exceeds the requirements of the National
 
Electric Safety Code (4).
 
If one of the three 345-kV lines faulted, the breakers located at Wolf Creek Substation would trip, deenergizing the line (in the case of the Wolf Creek-Waverly-LaCygne Line only one segment of the line would normally be deenergized due to the Waverly tap, however, the remaining segment would no longer be credited as a source of power for the plant). Any one of the two remaining incoming 345-kV transmission lines at Wolf Creek Substation (in the case of the Waverly/LaCygne Line both line segments must be in-service) can carry the total ESF load required for safe shutdown by controlled switching of te Wolf Creek substation breakers, providing a separate transmission line feeding each ESF transformer.
 
The Phillips 69-kV line, Figure 8.2-5, is owned and maintained by the Lyon-Coffey County REC. It is not a supply line for the 69-kV system. Should a
 
fault occur on this line, a 69-kV breaker located in the Wolf Creek Substation
 
would trip, deenergizing the line -- not adversely affecting the 345-kV offsite
 
source. 
 
8.2-3                        Rev. 29 WOLF CREEK All line designs are such as to minimize the possibility of conductor vibration and/or galloping. The design of these overhead lines meets or exceeds the requirements of the National Electric Safety Code (4) for heavy loading district, Grade B construction, and is based on a lightning performance of less
 
than one outage per 100 miles per year.
 
8.2.1.2  Switchyard and Connection to the Onsite Distribution System
 
Figure 8.2-3 shows the physical orientation and separation of the 345-kV and
 
69-kV switchyards; the main, startup, 345/13.8 kV, 345/69-kV and 67/13.8-kV
 
transformers; the manual throwover switch and the transmission line routing.
Figure 8.2-4 provides a one-line diagram of the electrical distribution on the site. The electrical one-line diagram of the installation showing connections
 
to offsite substations is shown in Figure 8.2-5.
 
The 345-kV switchyard design includes a breaker-and-a-half arrangement. A 69-kV line and transformers connected to the local transmission system are provided.
 
The 345-13.8-kV unit startup transformer, through switchyard breaker 345-100 or
 
345-110, serves one of the two Class IE busses by way of the ESF number two transformer. The No. 7 transformer (also 345/13.8-kV, through switchyard breaker 345-80 or 345-90, is the primary source for the second Class IE bus by
 
way of breaker 13-48, the manual throwover switch and the ESF number one
 
transformer. The No. 7 transformer is an installed spare for the unit startup
 
and would require being moved to the location of the unit startup should it become necessary to replace the unit startup transformer. The unit startup is a physically independent offsite power source from the No. 7 transformer as
 
neither source shares common protective equipment. As an alternate to the No.
 
7 transformer source, the No. 6 (345/69-kV) transformer (with No. 4 and No. 5
 
67/13.8-kV transformers) is available to serve the second Class IE bus via the manual throwover switch. This off-site power source does not have open phase detection capability. This alternate power source is also physically
 
independent from the unit startup transformer, as it does not have common
 
protective equipment with the unit startup transformer. Figure 8.2-3 shows the
 
routing of the overhead line from the 345-kV switchyard to the startup transformer, which serves one of the load groups. This figure also shows the underground circuits encased in concrete from the primary 345/13.8-kV source
 
and the alternate 345/69-kV source to the manual throwover switch, then from
 
the manual throwover switch in the 69-kV switchyard via an underground circuit
 
encased in concrete to the ESF number one transformer. Voltage studies have been performed and cables have been sized to assure that either offsite source is capable of supplying the entire Class IE loads should it become necessary.
 
8.2-4 Rev. 32 WOLF CREEK When the ESF No., 1 transformer is fed through the primary offsite power source (345/13.8-kV transformer), the offsite 69-kV system may be connected to the 345-kV system through the 345/69-kV transformer. When the ESF No. 1 transformer is being fed from the 345-kV switchyard through the alternate
 
offsite power source (345/69-kV transformer and two parallel 67/13.8-kV
 
transformers), the  offsite 69-kV shall not be connected to the 345-kV system.
 
The 13.8-kV side of both 67/13.8-kV transformers is connected to five underground circuits. These five circuits feed through metal clad switchgear with drawout type breakers and a transfer bus which serve the ESF No. 1
 
transformer, one switchyard station power transformer, the site distribution
 
system, and the east and west construction loops.
 
Three single-phase, one-third size, step-up transformers provided for the unit raise the generator voltage to 345-kV prior to transmission, via an overhead
 
line, to the 345-kV switchyard located approximately 700 feet due north of the
 
turbine building. This overhead line is not carried on the same supporting
 
structures as the line to the unit startup transformer. The design of these overhead lines meets or exceeds the requirements of the National Electric Safety Code (4) for heavy loading district, Grade B construction.
 
The generating unit is to be synchronized to the system across the generator
 
circuit breakers located in the 345-kV switchyard. Control of these synchronizing breakers and the 13.8-kV breakers is administered from the plant main control room. Control Room indication is provided for all 345-kV breakers
 
and 69-kV feeder breakers. Control of all other transmission breakers in the
 
Wolf Creek switchyard is via supervisory control from the Operating Agent's
 
System Control Center in Topeka.
In addition to status indication of all 345-kV breakers and line disconnect
 
switches, the 69-kV feeder breakers and the 13.8-kV breakers, eight main
 
control board annunciator windows are provided to alert the operator to any
 
failure which could result in loss of availability of either preferred offsite source to perform its intended function. These alarms include the following:
 
345-kV Trouble 345-kV Supervisory Trouble 345-kV Battery Trouble  SL2 Buss 13-40 Breaker Trip  69-kV Trouble No.4/No.5  Transformers not Parallel  No. 1 Switchgear Breaker Trip 13-48 Breaker Trip
 
8.2-5                        Rev. 32 WOLF CREEK A partial breakdown of many of these alarms is provided on the plant computer alarm listing with a further breakdown on the local annunciator panel in the
 
switchyard buildings and equipment cabinets. A voltmeter is provided on the main control board for monitoring the voltage on the 13.8-kV busses SL7 and SL8 and breaker 13-48.
 
The 345/13.8 kV transformer is equipped with Open Phase Detection (OPD) equipment. The purpose of the OPD equipment is to detect an Open Phase Condition (OPC) event. An OPC is created when there is not proper circuit continuity for one or more phases of an offsite source.
 
No failure causing a loss of function of one offsite source can occur without
 
alarming on the Main Control Board in some manner. The main switchyard bus and interconnections between various switchyard components are comprised of rigid aluminum bus.
 
8.2.1.3  Compliance with Design Criteria and Standards The offsite power systems are capable of providing reliable sources of power to the Class IE systems in compliance with GDC 17 and 18 of 10 CFR Part 50 and
 
Regulatory Guide 1.32. Design of the offsite power systems for Wolf Creek
 
exceeds the minimum requirements cited in the above documents as demonstrated
 
by the following analysis.
Criterion 17 - Electric Power Systems
 
In addition to the features detailed in Sections 8.2.1.1 and
 
8.2.1.2, compliance with Criterion 17 is further demonstrated by the following:
: a. In the event any one of the overhead 345-kV transmission lines were to be interrupted, either one of the remaining
 
two lines is capable (in the case of the Waverly/LaCygne Line both line segments must be in-service) of carrying the total ESF load required for post-accident and post-
 
fire safe shutdown.
 
Controlled switching of the Wolf Creek substation breakers, providing a separate transmission line feeding
 
each ESF transformer, based on grid conditions, is an
 
acceptable means of maintaining acceptable voltage to
 
carry the ESF load required for post-accident and post-
 
fire safe shutdown.
: b. The two 345-kV transmission lines from the plant yard to
 
the switching station are supported on their own
 
individual structures. Structural design and circuit
 
separation are such as to eliminate the possibility of a
 
structural collapse causing an outage of both 345-kV transmission lines.
: c. The 345-kV system is protected from lightning and
 
switching surges by lightning protective equipment and by
 
overhead static lines.
 
8.2-6 Rev. 30 WOLF CREEK
: d. The design of all overhead lines meets or exceeds the requirements of the National Electric Safety Code (4) for heavy loading district, Grade B construction, and is based on a lightning performance of less than one outage per 100 miles per year. Design of switchyard components is in accordance with the latest standards of the IEEE,         ANSI and NEMA.
: e. The design of the 125-V dc system for the 345-kV portion of the switchyard consists of two independent dc  
 
systems. Each of the two systems consists of a separate  
 
125-V dc battery, battery charger, and distribution  
 
system. Cable separation is maintained between the two systems. A single failure caused by a malfunction of either of the two 125-V dc systems will not affect the  
 
performance of the other system. The ability of the  
 
switchyard to supply offsite power to the plant will not  
 
be affected by the loss of one of the two 125-V dc systems. The surveillance of battery charger operation and battery voltage for each battery system is provided  
 
by individual alarms monitored in the switchyard control  
 
building. Alarms are also monitored in the plant control  
 
room. The 69-kV portion of the switchyard has its own 125-Vdc battery for relaying. There is no dc tie between the switchyard batteries and those in the power block.
: f. Two isolated 13.8-kV supplies from separate sources are  
 
provided to the switchyard. One supply is from the offsite 13.8-kV bus and the other is from a site 13.8-kV bus. Each supply serves a station power transformer  
 
which is capable of supplying the total ac load of the  
 
station. Loss of the normal source will initiate automatic  
 
throwover of all load to the standby transformer.
Subsequent loss of the standby source will initiate automatic throwover to a standby diesel generator.
Subsequent loss of the standby source will initiate automatic throwover to a standby diesel generator.
: g. For reliability and operating flexibility, the 345-kV  
: g. For reliability and operating flexibility, the 345-kV switchyard design includes a breaker-and-a-half arrangement for each circuit. Along with breaker failure backup protection. Each 345-kV breaker has two trip coils on separate isolated dc control circuits. The above provisions permit the following:
: 1. Any transmission line can be cleared under normal or fault conditions without affecting any other transmission line.
: 2. Any 345-kV circuit breaker can be isolated for maintenance without interrupting the power or protection to any circuit.
: 3. Short circuits on a section of bus can be isolated without interrupting service to any circuit other than that connected to the faulted bus section.
: h. Both offsite sources from the 345-kV switchyard are separate and independent. The failure or structural collapse of one will not affect the other.
8.2-7 Rev. 30


switchyard design includes a breaker-and-a-half arrangement for each circuit. Along with breaker failure backup protection. Each 345-kV breaker has two trip
WOLF CREEK
 
: i. The offsite sources from the startup and the primary 345/13.8-kV transformers to the ESF transformers and associated switchgear are independently and separately routed. The offsite sources from the startup and the alternate 345/69-kV, 67/13.8-kV transformers to the ESF transformers and associated switchgear are independently and separately routed.
coils on separate isolated dc control circuits. The
: j. Two physically independent circuits are provided to supply offsite power to the onsite distribution system.
 
The offsite sources from the 345-kV switchyard are each normally connected to their own individual ESF transformers, and are both immediately available following a LOCA to supply components important to safety.
above provisions permit the following:
Criterion 18 - Inspection and Testing of Electric Power Systems The 345-kV and 69-kV circuit breakers are inspected, maintained and tested on a routine basis. This can be accomplished without removing the generators, transformers or transmission lines from service.
: 1. Any transmission line can be cleared under normal or fault conditions without affecting any other
 
transmission line.
: 2. Any 345-kV circuit breaker can be isolated for
 
maintenance without interrupting the power or protection to any circuit.
: 3. Short circuits on a section of bus can be isolated
 
without interrupting service to any circuit other
 
than that connected to the faulted bus section.
: h. Both offsite sources from the 345-kV switchyard are
 
separate and independent. The failure or structural
 
collapse of one will not affect the other.
 
8.2-7                        Rev. 30 WOLF CREEK
: i. The offsite sources from the startup and the primary 345/13.8-kV transformers to the ESF transformers and  
 
associated switchgear are independently and separately routed. The offsite sources from the startup and the alternate 345/69-kV, 67/13.8-kV transformers to the ESF  
 
transformers and associated switchgear are independently  
 
and separately routed.
: j. Two physically independent circuits are provided to supply offsite power to the onsite distribution system.  
 
The offsite sources from the 345-kV switchyard are each  
 
normally connected to their own individual ESF  
 
transformers, and are both immediately available following a LOCA to supply components important to safety.  
 
Criterion 18 - Inspection and Testing of Electric Power  
 
Systems The 345-kV and 69-kV circuit breakers are inspected, maintained and tested on a routine basis. This can be  
 
accomplished without removing the generators, transformers or  
 
transmission lines from service.
Transmission line protective relays are tested on a routine basis. This can be accomplished without removing the transmission lines from service. The OPD equipment includes abnormal condition alarms and can be functionality tested with the system online. Generator, main, startup and standby transformer relays are tested on a routine basis when the generator is off line.
Transmission line protective relays are tested on a routine basis. This can be accomplished without removing the transmission lines from service. The OPD equipment includes abnormal condition alarms and can be functionality tested with the system online. Generator, main, startup and standby transformer relays are tested on a routine basis when the generator is off line.
Regulatory Guide 1.32 As described in the paragraph above, the two offsite sources  
Regulatory Guide 1.32 As described in the paragraph above, the two offsite sources are immediate access circuits from the transmission network.
 
This design conforms to the preferred design as outlined in Regulatory Guide 1.32.
are immediate access circuits from the transmission network.  
Industry Standards The design complies with the following industry standards and recommendations:
 
: 1. Institute of Electrical Electronics Engineers, Inc (IEEE)
This design conforms to the preferred design as outlined in  
 
Regulatory Guide 1.32.
Industry Standards  
 
The design complies with the following industry standards and  
 
recommendations:
: 1. Institute of Electrical Electronics Engineers, Inc  
 
(IEEE)
: 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
: 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
: 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
: 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
: 4. American Institute Steel Construction (AISC)
: 4. American Institute Steel Construction (AISC)
: 5. American Concrete Institute (ACI)  
: 5. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 8.2-8 Rev. 30


8.2-8                        Rev. 30 WOLF CREEK
WOLF CREEK
: 6. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
: 6. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
: 7. American Welding Society (AWS)
: 7. American Welding Society (AWS)
Line 1,410: Line 488:
: 14. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)
: 14. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)
: 15. Metal Building Manufacturers Association (MBMA)
: 15. Metal Building Manufacturers Association (MBMA)
: 16. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National  
: 16. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) 8.2.2 ANALYSIS The 345-kV system to which the WCGS is connected is quite extensive with several major interconnections to other regions. One major benefit to be derived from such a system is that, through proper design, the system continues to function properly on loss of a generating unit, loss of a heavily loaded circuit, or various other contingency conditions.
Analysis of conditions during plant operation demonstrate the following regarding the Wolf Creek 345-kV Substation and its associated lines:
: 1. The system can successfully withstand loss of the Wolf Creek unit when fully loaded.
: 2. With all 345-kV lines in service and the Wolf Creek unit fully loaded, the system can successfully withstand loss of any one 345-kV line from Wolf Creek Substation under three-phase fault conditions with the fault cleared in normal clearing sequence.
: 3. With all 345-kV lines in service and the Wolf Creek unit fully loaded, the system can successfully withstand loss of any two elements caused by a single phase fault being cleared by back-up breaker operation in back-up clearing sequences.
8.2-9 Rev. 0


Association (SMACNA)  
WOLF CREEK
 
: 4.
8.2.2  ANALYSIS
Any one 345-kV line, when energized from the remote end (in the case of the Waverly/LaCygne 345kV Line both line segments must be energized), can successfully carry the total ESF load required for post-accident and post-fire safe shutdown should it become necessary to do so.
Controlled switching of the Wolf Creek substation breakers, providing a separate transmission line feeding each ESF transformer, based on grid conditions, is an acceptable means of maintaining acceptable voltage to carry the ESF load required for post-accident and post-fire safe shutdown.
: 5. All of the above comments apply on both a transient stability and a steady state basis.
The analyses of the WCGS demonstrate that the transmission system is fully capable of delivering the output from WCGS and of providing adequate power for safe operation of WCGS.
A transmission system analysis has shown the frequency decay rate to be below 5.0 Hz/sec, therefore, the reactor coolant pump motor breakers are not required to be safety grade.
Transmission grid availability of the KG&E and KCPL systems has historically been very high with no recorded incidents of system islanding within the twenty year period prior to licensing. During the period 1942 to the mid-sixties, KG&E and KCPL established multiple 138 and 161-kV interconnections with their neighboring utilities, significantly strengthening the reliability of the bulk power systems. Grid availability has been further strengthened by multiple 345-kV lines constructed in this and surrounding areas since 1966.
The area's historical outage rate prior to licensing for 345-kV circuits is below 1.0 per 100 circuit miles/year for outages of over 15 minutes duration and less than 2.0 per 100 circuit miles/year for all outages including momentary interruptions. This compares favorably with the historical performance of other 345-kV transmission systems. These outages are caused primarily by lightning, wind and ice.
In view of the applied system design, and based on past performance of the transmission system, uninterrupted transmission grid availability to meet all requirements is projected over the life of WCGS.
8.2-10 Rev. 29


The 345-kV system to which the WCGS is connected is quite extensive with
IOWA T 0 MrNNE APOLIS TO DES MOINES
\\.. - -..
TO OMAHA'-
TO LINCOLN
\\
NEBRASKA KANSAS TO OKLAHOMA CITY OKLAHOMA HOYT STRANGER CREEK TO TULSA MISSOURI TO TO ST. LOUIS TO ST. LOUIS 1\\
* WIND POWER
~ STATION e SUBSTATION POWER STATION 345 KV TRANSMISSION LINE
---STATE BORDER Rev. 32 WOIJF1 CREEK UPDATElD fiAFElmY ANALYf!I REPORT Figure 8.2-1 345 KV SYSTEM (Historical)


several major interconnections to other regions. One major benefit to be
6


derived from such a system is that, through proper design, the system continues to function properly on loss of a generating unit, loss of a heavily loaded circuit, or various other contingency conditions.  
TO WICHITA..........----.......
345KV BENTON 345KV TO WAVERLY WIND FARM COLLECTOR SUB 345KV TO BENTON
~O MILES 5 MILES
~
WAVERLY 345KV TO 138KV SWITCH YARD TO TO 138KV SWITCH YARD 13 8 K V ______....
SWITCH YARD TO 138KV...,..___...
SWITCH YARD TO l38KV~
SWITCH YARD 14 MILES ROSEHILL 345KV TO SOONER AREA OF CHANGE 345KV TO WAVERLY 5 MILES WOLF CREEK 345KV 345KV TO~---~
ROSEHILL 98 MILES LATHAM 345/69KV XFMR 69KV TO ATHENS 27 MILES REC 69KV TO PHILLIPS
,......,.,........ 67/13.8KV XFMR I
I
~- -------- -*-------....J POWER BLOCK
,---.---______,.... TO WEST GARDNER I CRAIG 0----3 ')--------,
,...-------~~0 STILWELL UNIT 2
~-~-~To NEOSHO 345KV TO LACYGNE 53 MILES 345/13.8KV XFMR REV.32 WOLF CREEK UPDATED SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Figure 8.2-5 ELECTRICAL ONE LINE DIAGRAM OF WOLF CREEK 345KV SWITCHYARD AND ADJACIENT SUBS


Analysis of conditions during plant operation demonstrate the following
WOLF CREEK 8.3 ONSITE POWER SYSTEMS The onsite power system is comprised of a standardized portion within the power block which uses the same design as Callaway and a nonstandardized portion outside of the power block.
8.3.1 AC POWER SYSTEMS 8.3.1.1 Description The onsite ac power system includes a Class IE system and a non-Class IE system.
8.3.1.1.1 Non-Class IE System 8.3.1.1.1.1 Non Class IE Site Auxiliary Power System A single-line diagram of the AC auxiliary power system is shown in Figure 8.3-1, sheet 3.
Site auxiliary power is supplied at 13.8-kV from two independent sources within the power block: Buses PA01 and PA02. Neither of these is a Class IE power bus. Two air circuit breakers at each source (four total) deliver power to the site through underground feeder cables. Controls, metering, instrumentation and protective relaying for each site feeder are provided within the power block.
One of the site feeders serves the makeup water screenhouse and makeup water discharge structure. At the makeup water discharge structure, the feeder is tapped to supply a 480-volt unit substation through a 13.8-kV-480V transformer for the raw water pumps. At the screenhouse, the feeder supplies 4.16-kV switchgear through a 13.8/4.16-kV transformer. The transformer is rated 5.0 MVA, OA, and is equipped for automatic tap changing under load. The 4.16-kV switchgear supplies the makeup water pumps and a 480-volt unit substation for various auxiliaries.
One site feeder from each of the power block buses serves the non-Class IE circulating water screenhouse. At the screenhouse, each feeder supplies 13.8-kV switchgear through a manually operated, normally closed disconnect. A normally open disconnect between the two switchgears permits manual interconnection of the buses, but mechanical interlocks prevent interconnection of the independent site feeders. Each of the site feeders is sized to carry the entire screenhouse in the event the other feeder is disabled. Each 13.8-kV switchgear supplies circulating water pumps, a 480-volt unit substation for auxiliaries, and a 4.16-kV switchgear through a 13.8/4.16-kV transformer rated 5.0 MVA, OA. Electrically operated circuit breakers at the 4.16-kV switchgear permit interconnection of the buses, but electrical interlocks prevent 8.3-1 Rev. 13


regarding the Wolf Creek 345-kV Substation and its associated lines:
WOLF CREEK parallel operation of the 13.8/4.16-kV transformers. Each transformer is sized to carry the entire 4.16-kV screenhouse load in the event the other transformer is disabled. The 4.16-kV switchgear supplies the service water pumps and the motor-driven fire pump.
: 1. The system can successfully withstand loss of the
The remaining site feeder serves 13.8-kV switchgear located in the shop building. This switchgear supplies standby station power for the 345-kV switchyard, an emergency feed for the town of Burlington, Kansas, and 480-volt unit substations for auxiliaries at the shop building, administration building, main warehouse, auxiliary warehouse, technical support center, guardhouse, and Water Treatment Building North.
 
Wolf Creek unit when fully loaded.
: 2. With all 345-kV lines in service and the Wolf Creek unit fully loaded, the system can successfully withstand loss of any one 345-kV line from Wolf Creek
 
Substation under three-phase fault conditions with
 
the fault cleared in normal clearing sequence.
: 3. With all 345-kV lines in service and the Wolf Creek unit fully loaded, the system can successfully
 
withstand loss of any two elements caused by a single
 
phase fault being cleared by back-up breaker
 
operation in back-up clearing sequences.
 
8.2-9                        Rev. 0 WOLF CREEK 4. Any one 345-kV line, when energized from the remote end (in the case of the Waverly/LaCygne 345kV Line both line segments must be energized), can successfully carry the total ESF load required for post-accident and post-fire safe shutdown should it become necessary to do so.
Controlled switching of the Wolf Creek substation breakers, providing a separate transmission line feeding each ESF transformer, based on grid conditions, is an acceptable means of maintaining acceptable voltage to
 
carry the ESF load required for post-accident and post-
 
fire safe shutdown.
: 5. All of the above comments apply on both a transient stability and a steady state basis.
 
The analyses of the WCGS demonstrate that the transmission system is fully
 
capable of delivering the output from WCGS and of providing adequate power for safe operation of WCGS.
 
A transmission system analysis has shown the frequency decay rate to be below
 
5.0 Hz/sec, therefore, the reactor coolant pump motor breakers are not required
 
to be safety grade.
Transmission grid availability of the KG&E and KCPL systems has historically
 
been very high with no recorded incidents of system islanding within the twenty
 
year period prior to licensing. During the period 1942 to the mid-sixties, KG&E and KCPL established multiple 138 and 161-kV interconnections with their neighboring utilities, significantly strengthening the reliability of the bulk power systems. Grid availability has been further strengthened by multiple
 
345-kV lines constructed in this and surrounding areas since 1966.
 
The area's historical outage rate prior to licensing for 345-kV circuits is below 1.0 per 100 circuit miles/year for outages of over 15 minutes duration and less than 2.0 per 100 circuit miles/year for all outages including
 
momentary interruptions. This compares favorably with the historical
 
performance of other 345-kV transmission systems. These outages are caused
 
primarily by lightning, wind and ice.
In view of the applied system design, and based on past performance of the
 
transmission system, uninterrupted transmission grid availability to meet all
 
requirements is projected over the life of WCGS.
 
8.2-10 Rev. 29 IOWA T 0 MrNNE APOLIS , TO DES MOINES \ .. --.. .. --..... --.. -.. --.. --"' ---.. -.. __ ..... _ ...... -* TO OMAHA'-TO LINCOLN \ NEBRASKA ....... -.... -----------..... --:-.. ______ ,. ............ ..,_ KANSAS TO OKLAHOMA CITY OKLAHOMA HOYT STRANGER CREEK TO TULSA MISSOURI TO TO ST. LOUIS TO ST. LOUIS 1\
* WIND POWER STATION e SUBSTATION
* POWER STATION 345 KV -TRANSMISSION LINE ---STATE BORDER Rev. 32 WOIJF1 CREEK UPDATElD fiAFElmY ANALYf!I REPORT Figure 8.2-1 345 KV SYSTEM (Historical) 6 TO WICHITA..........----....... 345KV BENTON 345KV TO WAVERLY WIND FARM COLLECTOR SUB 345KV TO BENTON MILES 5 MILES ,.---., WAVERLY 345KV TO 138KV SWITCH YARD TO TO 138KV SWITCH YARD 13 8 K V ______.... SWITCH YARD TO 138KV ...,..___... SWITCH YARD TO SWITCH YARD 14 MILES ROSEHILL 345KV TO SOONER AREA OF CHANGE 345KV TO WAVERLY 5 MILES WOLF CREEK 345KV 345KV ROSEHILL 98 MILES LATHAM 345/69KV XFMR 69KV TO ATHENS 27 MILES REC 69KV TO PHILLIPS ,......,.,........ 67/13.8KV XFMR I I ---------*-------....J POWER BLOCK ,---.---______, .... TO WEST GARDNER I CRAIG 0----3 ')--------, STILWELL UNIT 2 NEOSHO 345KV TO LACYGNE 53 MILES 345/13.8KV XFMR REV.32 WOLF CREEK UPDATED SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Figure 8.2-5 ELECTRICAL ONE LINE DIAGRAM OF WOLF CREEK 345KV SWITCHYARD AND ADJACIENT SUBS WOLF CREEK 8.3  ONSITE POWER SYSTEMS The onsite power system is comprised of a standardized portion within the power block which uses the same design as Callaway and a nonstandardized portion outside of the power block.
 
8.3.1  AC POWER SYSTEMS
 
8.3.1.1  Description The onsite ac power system includes a Class IE system and a non-Class IE
 
system.
8.3.1.1.1  Non-Class IE System
 
8.3.1.1.1.1 Non Class IE Site Auxiliary Power System
 
A single-line diagram of the AC auxiliary power system is shown in Figure 8.3-1, sheet 3.
Site auxiliary power is supplied at 13.8-kV from two independent sources within
 
the power block:  Buses PA01 and PA02. Neither of these is a Class IE power
 
bus. Two air circuit breakers at each source (four total) deliver power to the site through underground feeder cables. Controls, metering, instrumentation and protective relaying for each site feeder are provided within the power
 
block.
 
One of the site feeders serves the makeup water screenhouse and makeup water discharge structure. At the makeup water discharge structure, the feeder is tapped to supply a 480-volt unit substation through a 13.8-kV-480V transformer
 
for the raw water pumps. At the screenhouse, the feeder supplies 4.16-kV
 
switchgear through a 13.8/4.16-kV transformer. The transformer is rated 5.0
 
MVA, OA, and is equipped for automatic tap changing under load. The 4.16-kV switchgear supplies the makeup water pumps and a 480-volt unit substation for various auxiliaries.
 
One site feeder from each of the power block buses serves the non-Class IE
 
circulating water screenhouse. At the screenhouse, each feeder supplies 13.8-kV switchgear through a manually operated, normally closed disconnect. A normally open disconnect between the two switchgears permits manual
 
interconnection of the buses, but mechanical interlocks prevent interconnection
 
of the independent site feeders. Each of the site feeders is sized to carry
 
the entire screenhouse in the event the other feeder is disabled. Each 13.8-kV switchgear supplies circulating water pumps, a 480-volt unit substation for auxiliaries, and a 4.16-kV switchgear through a 13.8/4.16-kV transformer rated
 
5.0 MVA, OA. Electrically operated circuit breakers at the 4.16-kV switchgear
 
permit interconnection of the buses, but electrical interlocks prevent
 
8.3-1 Rev. 13 WOLF CREEK parallel operation of the 13.8/4.16-kV transformers. Each transformer is sized to carry the entire 4.16-kV screenhouse load in the event the other transformer  
 
is disabled. The 4.16-kV switchgear supplies the service water pumps and the motor-driven fire pump.
The remaining site feeder serves 13.8-kV switchgear located in the shop  
 
building. This switchgear supplies standby station power for the 345-kV  
 
switchyard, an emergency feed for the town of Burlington, Kansas, and 480-volt unit substations for auxiliaries at the shop building, administration building, main warehouse, auxiliary warehouse, technical support center, guardhouse, and Water Treatment Building North.
Electrical interlocks, or administrative controls, prevent interconnection of the onsite auxiliary power system with the Burlington normal source or the switchyard station power normal source.
Electrical interlocks, or administrative controls, prevent interconnection of the onsite auxiliary power system with the Burlington normal source or the switchyard station power normal source.
The selection, application, and design of the equipment used in the onsite  
The selection, application, and design of the equipment used in the onsite auxiliary power system is compatible with that of the power block and is in compliance with applicable standards and regulations.
 
8.3.1.1.1.2 Non-Class IE Powerblock Power System The non-Class IE ac system is that part of the power system outside the broken-line enclosures indicated in Figure 8.3-1, sheet 1. The non-Class IE ac system distributes power at 13.8 kV, 4.16 kV, 480 V, and 208/120 V ac for all nonsafety-related loads. The non-Class IE ac system also supplies preferred (offsite) power to the Class IE ac system through two ESF transformers. One ESF transformer is supplied power directly, by one of the preferred power circuits, from the offsite power system. The second ESF transformer is supplied power from one of the secondary windings of the startup transformer.
auxiliary power system is compatible with that of the power block and is in compliance with applicable standards and regulations.  
This startup transformer is supplied power from the second preferred power circuit from the offsite power system. Routing of cables from the ESF transformers to the Class IE switchgear is shown on drawings E-0R0224, E-0R3321, E-OR3221, and E-1R3211. Routing of cables from the startup transformer to the 13.8-kV switchgear and from the 13.8-kV switchgear to ESF transformer XNB02 is shown on drawings E-1R0223, E-0R4331, E-0R4321, and E-OR0224. Feeds to ESF transformer XNB01 and the startup transformer are described in Section 8.2.1.2.
 
The unit auxiliary transformer and the startup transformer each have two secondary windings rated at 13.8 kV.
8.3.1.1.1.2 Non-Class IE Powerblock Power System  
Two 13.8-kV busses supply power to nonsafety-related loads. Each 13.8-kV bus is connected to a secondary winding of the startup transformer and also to a secondary winding of the unit auxiliary transformer. During starting of the unit, both 13.8-kV busses are 8.3-2 Rev. 19  
 
The non-Class IE ac system is that part of the power system outside the broken-line enclosures indicated in Figure 8.3-1, sheet 1. The non-Class IE ac system distributes power at 13.8 kV, 4.16 kV, 480 V, and 208/120 V ac for all  
 
nonsafety-related loads. The non-Class IE ac system also supplies preferred (offsite) power to the Class IE ac system through two ESF transformers. One ESF transformer is supplied power directly, by one of the preferred power circuits, from the offsite power system. The second ESF transformer is supplied power from one of the secondary windings of the startup transformer.
 
This startup transformer is supplied power from the second preferred power  
 
circuit from the offsite power system. Routing of cables from the ESF  
 
transformers to the Class IE switchgear is shown on drawings E-0R0224, E-0R3321, E-OR3221, and E-1R3211. Routing of cables from the startup transformer to the 13.8-kV switchgear and from the 13.8-kV switchgear to ESF transformer  
 
XNB02 is shown on drawings E-1R0223, E-0R4331, E-0R4321, and E-OR0224. Feeds  
 
to ESF transformer XNB01 and the startup transformer are described in Section  
 
8.2.1.2. The unit auxiliary transformer and the startup transformer each have two  
 
secondary windings rated at 13.8 kV.  
 
Two 13.8-kV busses supply power to nonsafety-related loads. Each 13.8-kV bus is connected to a secondary winding of the startup transformer and also to a secondary winding of the unit auxiliary transformer. During starting of the  
 
unit, both 13.8-kV busses are  
 
8.3-2 Rev. 19 WOLF CREEK supplied power from the startup transformer. The busses are later transferred to the unit auxiliary transformer, during power generation, by a manually
 
initiated transfer. Automatic transfer of the 13.8-kV busses from the unit auxiliary transformer to the startup transformer is provided.
: a. The bus transfer is performed immediately after electrical faults where the generator/network can no longer supply power to the reactor
 
coolant pumps. b. The bus transfer is performed approximately three seconds after generator vital trips (trips initiated by a turbine trip due to a
 
mechanical fault) where the generator/network can no longer supply
 
power to the reactor coolant pumps. Generator vital trips are
 
initiated by turbine trips on low vacuum, thrust bearing wear, low bearing oil pressure and high vibration. c. The bus transfer is performed approximately 33 seconds after generator non-vital trips (trips not involving electrical or turbine faults). 
 
The turbine generator remains connected to the switchyard during the
 
delay to allow the switchyard to supply power to the reactor coolant pump busses for at least 30 seconds before any transfer is made.
The startup transformer has the capacity to supply both non-Class IE and both
 
Class IE load groups simultaneously. Refer to Section 8.1.2 for a definition
 
of load group. Figure 8.3-1 shows the transformers, feeders, busses, and their connections. It also lists all loads directly supplied from each 13.8-kV and 4.16-kV bus.
 
Two feeders from each of the two 13.8-kV busses supply power to non-Class IE
 
site loads located outside the power block. Loads and power distribution systems for WCGS are described in detail in Section 8.3.1 of the USAR.
 
The startup transformer is equipped with two secondary windings, each rated at
 
13.8 kV, 50 MVA FOA.
 
The startup transformer, ESF transformers, and their associated feeder cables have all been sized to carry their expected loads continuously. During normal


system operation, transformer loads are below the manufacturer's FOA design  
WOLF CREEK supplied power from the startup transformer. The busses are later transferred to the unit auxiliary transformer, during power generation, by a manually initiated transfer. Automatic transfer of the 13.8-kV busses from the unit auxiliary transformer to the startup transformer is provided.
 
: a. The bus transfer is performed immediately after electrical faults where the generator/network can no longer supply power to the reactor coolant pumps.
limitations. Under abnormal system configurations, such as when ESF No. 2 or a  
: b. The bus transfer is performed approximately three seconds after generator vital trips (trips initiated by a turbine trip due to a mechanical fault) where the generator/network can no longer supply power to the reactor coolant pumps. Generator vital trips are initiated by turbine trips on low vacuum, thrust bearing wear, low bearing oil pressure and high vibration.
 
: c. The bus transfer is performed approximately 33 seconds after generator non-vital trips (trips not involving electrical or turbine faults).
station service transformer have lost their normal feeds, loads may be transferred to the alternate startup transformer secondary winding. (NOTE:
The turbine generator remains connected to the switchyard during the delay to allow the switchyard to supply power to the reactor coolant pump busses for at least 30 seconds before any transfer is made.
The previous statement is for very limited conditions of plant operation which  
The startup transformer has the capacity to supply both non-Class IE and both Class IE load groups simultaneously. Refer to Section 8.1.2 for a definition of load group. Figure 8.3-1 shows the transformers, feeders, busses, and their connections. It also lists all loads directly supplied from each 13.8-kV and 4.16-kV bus.
 
Two feeders from each of the two 13.8-kV busses supply power to non-Class IE site loads located outside the power block. Loads and power distribution systems for WCGS are described in detail in Section 8.3.1 of the USAR.
include as stated, abnormal or complicated scenarios. Refer to USAR Fig. 8.2-4  
The startup transformer is equipped with two secondary windings, each rated at 13.8 kV, 50 MVA FOA.
 
The startup transformer, ESF transformers, and their associated feeder cables have all been sized to carry their expected loads continuously. During normal system operation, transformer loads are below the manufacturer's FOA design limitations. Under abnormal system configurations, such as when ESF No. 2 or a station service transformer have lost their normal feeds, loads may be transferred to the alternate startup transformer secondary winding. (NOTE:
for a better description of actual system configuration.) Provisions exist for  
The previous statement is for very limited conditions of plant operation which include as stated, abnormal or complicated scenarios. Refer to USAR Fig. 8.2-4 for a better description of actual system configuration.) Provisions exist for the automatic transfer of busses PB03/PB04 to their alternate source. Under these conditions, additional loads may be placed on a startup transformer secondary winding.
 
8.3-3 Rev. 27  
the automatic transfer of busses PB03/PB04 to their alternate source. Under these conditions, additional loads may be placed on a startup transformer secondary winding.  
 
8.3-3 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK Analyses have been performed to evaluate the maximum bus and transformer loadings that may result from these transformer failures. These loads
 
represent the maximum credible loads that may be achieved during abnormal system operation.
 
Using the guidelines of ANSI C57.92-1962, operation of oil-immersed power
 
transformers in an overloaded condition is permissible. Measurable loss of
 
transformer life occurs if the overload is allowed to persist for extended periods of time. 
 
The protective relays associated with the startup transformer are set above
 
these maximum overload values.
 
The continuous ampacity of the feeder cables from the startup transformer to the 13.8 kV switchgear PA02 and ESF transformer XNB02 is not exceeded under any
 
loading condition described above.


WOLF CREEK Analyses have been performed to evaluate the maximum bus and transformer loadings that may result from these transformer failures. These loads represent the maximum credible loads that may be achieved during abnormal system operation.
Using the guidelines of ANSI C57.92-1962, operation of oil-immersed power transformers in an overloaded condition is permissible. Measurable loss of transformer life occurs if the overload is allowed to persist for extended periods of time.
The protective relays associated with the startup transformer are set above these maximum overload values.
The continuous ampacity of the feeder cables from the startup transformer to the 13.8 kV switchgear PA02 and ESF transformer XNB02 is not exceeded under any loading condition described above.
8.3.1.1.1.3, Station Blackout Diesel Generators The Station Blackout Diesel Generator (SBO DG)System consists of a missile barrier located outside of the Protected Area (PA) that contains the necessary equipment required to provide reliable power to 4.16 kV Class 1E bus NB001 or NB002 during a station blackout event, and to the non-safety auxiliary feedwater pump (NSAFP).
8.3.1.1.1.3, Station Blackout Diesel Generators The Station Blackout Diesel Generator (SBO DG)System consists of a missile barrier located outside of the Protected Area (PA) that contains the necessary equipment required to provide reliable power to 4.16 kV Class 1E bus NB001 or NB002 during a station blackout event, and to the non-safety auxiliary feedwater pump (NSAFP).
This equipment includes three diesel generators (DGs) and one power equipment center (PEC). The PEC includes nine 4.16 kV switchgear sections, four control panels and one 125 VDC battery system in addition to other auxiliary equipment required to support the operation of the system.
This equipment includes three diesel generators (DGs) and one power equipment center (PEC). The PEC includes nine 4.16 kV switchgear sections, four control panels and one 125 VDC battery system in addition to other auxiliary equipment required to support the operation of the system.
One control panel is also located in each of the ESF Switchgear Rooms to allow operation of the SBO DG system without the need for plant personnel to be present in the missile barrier. Each diesel generator is housed within its own enclosure which contains all equipment necessary to start the DGs.
One control panel is also located in each of the ESF Switchgear Rooms to allow operation of the SBO DG system without the need for plant personnel to be present in the missile barrier.
Starting of the SBO DGs must be initiated by an operator, from any of the following locations:
Each diesel generator is housed within its own enclosure which contains all equipment necessary to start the DGs. Starting of the SBO DGs must be initiated by an operator, from any of the following locations:
: 1) Engine control panels located within the diesel generator enclosure.
: 1) Engine control panels located within the diesel generator enclosure.
: 2) Local control panel located inside the PEC. The diesel generators can be started simultaneously through a Human-Machine Interface (HMI) touchscreen. They can also be started individually through the HMI touchscreen or through control switches.
: 2) Local control panel located inside the PEC. The diesel generators can be started simultaneously through a Human-Machine Interface (HMI) touchscreen. They can also be started individually through the HMI touchscreen or through control switches.
: 3) Remote control panels located inside the ESF Switchgear Room. The diesel generators can be started either individually or simultaneously through HMI touchscreens.
: 3) Remote control panels located inside the ESF Switchgear Room. The diesel generators can be started either individually or simultaneously through HMI touchscreens.
Note: The SBO DG control switches must be in the auto position in order to be controlled through the HMI touchscreens.
Note:
: a. Installed Capability All system operation within the control system for the diesel generators, including each of the HMIs, is performed in what is described as Minimum Requirements Mode. The SBO vendor has provided alternate modes of operation that involve modifications to the NB switchgear, running the SBO DGs in parallel with energized NB switchgear or the construction loop, and installing an external load bank. However, these options have not been installed.
The SBO DG control switches must be in the auto position in order to be controlled through the HMI touchscreens.
8.3-4 Rev. 30 WOLF CREEK Minimum Requirements Mode is the installed configuration. There are no connections between the existing switchgear (NB00 1 and NB002) and the Kohler switchgear except for the differential CT wires and the open/closed status of NB00114 and NB00214. The operation of breakers NB00114 and NB00214 is manual only with no automatic protective features.
: a.
Installed Capability All system operation within the control system for the diesel generators, including each of the HMIs, is performed in what is described as Minimum Requirements Mode. The SBO vendor has provided alternate modes of operation that involve modifications to the NB switchgear, running the SBO DGs in parallel with energized NB switchgear or the construction loop, and installing an external load bank. However, these options have not been installed.
8.3-4 Rev. 30  
 
WOLF CREEK Minimum Requirements Mode is the installed configuration. There are no connections between the existing switchgear (NB001 and NB002) and the Kohler switchgear except for the differential CT wires and the open/closed status of NB00114 and NB00214. The operation of breakers NB00114 and NB00214 is manual only with no automatic protective features.
The Kohler-supplied switchgear is designed to control three Kohler 3250 kW generators in parallel with each other. All transfers and tests are manually initiated using an HMI (touchscreen).
The Kohler-supplied switchgear is designed to control three Kohler 3250 kW generators in parallel with each other. All transfers and tests are manually initiated using an HMI (touchscreen).
There is one 15" HMI (touchscreen) mounted on the control section in the PEC for system monitoring and control. The Kohler- provided PLC-based control system consists of one hot standby master PLC and a PLC for each generator. In the event of a complete PLC system failure, the operator can use the control switches on the KU100 Local Control Panel to synchronize the generators and manually connect them to PB005. There are two remote control panel enclosures. One is located in the NB00l Switchgear room and the other in the NB002 Switchgear room. There is one 15" HMI (touchscreen) mounted on each remote enclosure for system monitoring and control.
There is one 15" HMI (touchscreen) mounted on the control section in the PEC for system monitoring and control. The Kohler-provided PLC-based control system consists of one hot standby master PLC and a PLC for each generator. In the event of a complete PLC system failure, the operator can use the control switches on the KU100 Local Control Panel to synchronize the generators and manually connect them to PB005.
The control switches on each remote control panel enclosure, with the exception of the emergency stop push buttons, are not functional in Minimum Requirements Mode. All breakers in NB001 and NB002 must be operated locally. No status (except open/closed status of NB00114 and NB00214) or control of these breakers is available.
There are two remote control panel enclosures. One is located in the NB00l Switchgear room and the other in the NB002 Switchgear room. There is one 15" HMI (touchscreen) mounted on each remote enclosure for system monitoring and control. The control switches on each remote control panel enclosure, with the exception of the emergency stop push buttons, are not functional in Minimum Requirements Mode. All breakers in NB001 and NB002 must be operated locally. No status (except open/closed status of NB00114 and NB00214) or control of these breakers is available.
To protect the cables going from the PB bus to the NB buses, monitoring, alarms and protective relaying are utilized.
To protect the cables going from the PB bus to the NB buses, monitoring, alarms and protective relaying are utilized. The loading on the cables will be monitored by the PLC, using an elapsed time counter to track the amount of time that the cables are loaded beyond a specified setpoint. The HMI will also alarm when the cables are loaded beyond the same setpoint. The setpoint along with a time delay is configurable through the HMI. Protective relaying is present at the PB bus that prevents cable overload damage while allowing the required loads to be powered without spurious tripping.
The loading on the cables will be monitored by the PLC, using an elapsed time counter to track the amount of time that the cables are loaded beyond a specified setpoint. The HMI will also alarm when the cables are loaded beyond the same setpoint. The setpoint along with a time delay is configurable through the HMI.
: b.
Protective relaying is present at the PB bus that prevents cable overload damage while allowing the required loads to be powered without spurious tripping. b. Periodic Testing The SBO DG system will be periodically tested to ensure continued reliability of the system. The system is capable of performing the following tests while in the Minimum Requirements Mode:   No Load Test This test is performed from the PEC local control panel.
Periodic Testing The SBO DG system will be periodically tested to ensure continued reliability of the system. The system is capable of performing the following tests while in the Minimum Requirements Mode:
This test will run the SBO diesels for an operator defined amount of time to verify readiness to operate.         8.3-5 Rev. 30 WOLF CREEK
No Load Test This test is performed from the PEC local control panel. This test will run the SBO diesels for an operator defined amount of time to verify readiness to operate.
* NSAFP Load Test  This test is performed from either the PEC local control panel or one of the ESF Switchgear Room remote control panels.
8.3-5 Rev. 30  
This test will start and synchronize at least two diesel generators to the PB005 bus and will prevent the PB005 bus from powering the NB busses, before closing the PB00506 breaker. The SBO DGs will provide power to the NSAFWP for the specified period of time to verify readiness to operate.
* NB Functional Load Test  This test is performed from either of the ESF switchgear room remote control panels. This test will unload and de-energize the NB busses, then start at least two SBO DGs, energize the NB busses from the SBO DGs, and carry necessary plant loads for a Station Blackout Event. 8.3.1.1.2  Class 1E AC System The Class 1E AC system is that portion of the onsite power system inside the broken-line enclosures shown in Figure 8.3-1, sheet 1, and sheet 2.


The Class 1E AC system distributes power at 4.16 kV, 480 V, 208/120 V, and 120  
WOLF CREEK
 
* NSAFP Load Test This test is performed from either the PEC local control panel or one of the ESF Switchgear Room remote control panels.
V ac to all safety-related loads. Also, the Class 1E AC system supplies certain selected loads which are not safety related but are important to the plant operation. Figure 8.3-2 lists the major safety-related and isolated  
This test will start and synchronize at least two diesel generators to the PB005 bus and will prevent the PB005 bus from powering the NB busses, before closing the PB00506 breaker.
 
The SBO DGs will provide power to the NSAFWP for the specified period of time to verify readiness to operate.
nonsafety-related loads supplied from the Class 1E AC system.  
* NB Functional Load Test This test is performed from either of the ESF switchgear room remote control panels. This test will unload and de-energize the NB busses, then start at least two SBO DGs, energize the NB busses from the SBO DGs, and carry necessary plant loads for a Station Blackout Event.
 
8.3.1.1.2 Class 1E AC System The Class 1E AC system is that portion of the onsite power system inside the broken-line enclosures shown in Figure 8.3-1, sheet 1, and sheet 2.
In addition to the above power distribution, the Class 1E AC system contains  
The Class 1E AC system distributes power at 4.16 kV, 480 V, 208/120 V, and 120 V ac to all safety-related loads. Also, the Class 1E AC system supplies certain selected loads which are not safety related but are important to the plant operation. Figure 8.3-2 lists the major safety-related and isolated nonsafety-related loads supplied from the Class 1E AC system.
 
In addition to the above power distribution, the Class 1E AC system contains standby power sources diesel generator which provide the power required for post-accident and post-fire safe shutdown in the event of a loss of the preferred power sources.
standby power sources diesel generator which provide the power required for post-accident and post-fire safe shutdown in the event of a loss of the preferred power sources.  
The following describes various features of the Class 1E systems:
 
POWER SUPPLY FEEDERS - Each 4.16-kV load group is supplied by two preferred power supply feeders and one diesel generator (standby) supply feeder. Each 4.16-kV bus supplies motor loads and 4.0-kV/480-V load center transformers with their associated 480-V busses.
The following describes various features of the Class 1E systems:  
BUS ARRANGEMENTS - The Class 1E AC system is divided into two redundant load groups (load groups 1 and 2). Either one of the load groups is capable of providing power to safely reach cold shutdown. Each ac load group consists of a 4.16-kV bus, 480-V load centers, 480-V motor control centers, and lower voltage ac supplies.
 
LOADS SUPPLIED FROM EACH BUS - Refer to Figure 8.3-2 for a listing of Class 1E system loads and their respective busses.
POWER SUPPLY FEEDERS - Each 4.16-kV load group is supplied by two preferred power supply feeders and one diesel generator (standby) supply feeder. Each  
MANUAL AND AUTOMATIC INTERCONNECTIONS BETWEEN BUSSES, BUSSES AND LOADS, AND BUSSES AND SUPPLIES - No provisions exist for automatically connecting one Class IE load group to another redundant Class IE load group or for automatically transferring loads between load groups. The incoming preferred power supply associated with a load group can supply the 4.16-kV Class 1E bus of the other load group by manual operation of the requisite 4.16-kV circuit breakers when required.
 
8.3-6 Rev. 30  
4.16-kV bus supplies motor loads and 4.0-kV/480-V load center transformers with  
 
their associated 480-V busses.  
 
BUS ARRANGEMENTS - The Class 1E AC system is divided into two redundant load groups (load groups 1 and 2). Either one of the load groups is capable of  
 
providing power to safely reach cold shutdown. Each ac load group consists of a  
 
4.16-kV bus, 480-V load centers, 480-V motor control centers, and lower voltage  
 
ac supplies.
LOADS SUPPLIED FROM EACH BUS - Refer to Figure 8.3-2 for a listing of Class 1E  
 
system loads and their respective busses.  
 
MANUAL AND AUTOMATIC INTERCONNECTIONS BETWEEN BUSSES, BUSSES AND LOADS, AND BUSSES AND SUPPLIES - No provisions exist for automatically connecting one Class IE load group to another redundant Class IE load group or for  
 
automatically transferring loads between load groups. The incoming preferred  
 
power supply associated with a load group can supply the 4.16-kV Class 1E bus  
 
of the other load group by manual operation of the requisite 4.16-kV circuit breakers when required.  
 
8.3-6 Rev. 30 WOLF CREEK For a discussion of interlocks, refer to Section 8.3.1.1.3.
 
INTERCONNECTIONS BETWEEN SAFETY-RELATED AND NONSAFETY-RELATED BUSSES - No interconnections are provided between the safety- and nonsafety-related busses.
The startup transformer supplies power through the same winding to a 13.8-kV
 
bus and a 13.8/4.16-kV ESF transformer.
 
REDUNDANT BUS SEPARATION - The Class 1E switchgear, load centers, and motor control centers for the redundant load groups are located in separate rooms of the control building and auxiliary building in such a way as to ensure physical
 
separation. Refer to Section 8.3.1.4.1 and Section 8.3.1.1.7 for the criteria
 
governing redundant bus separation.


WOLF CREEK For a discussion of interlocks, refer to Section 8.3.1.1.3.
INTERCONNECTIONS BETWEEN SAFETY-RELATED AND NONSAFETY-RELATED BUSSES - No interconnections are provided between the safety-and nonsafety-related busses.
The startup transformer supplies power through the same winding to a 13.8-kV bus and a 13.8/4.16-kV ESF transformer.
REDUNDANT BUS SEPARATION - The Class 1E switchgear, load centers, and motor control centers for the redundant load groups are located in separate rooms of the control building and auxiliary building in such a way as to ensure physical separation. Refer to Section 8.3.1.4.1 and Section 8.3.1.1.7 for the criteria governing redundant bus separation.
CLASS 1E EQUIPMENT CAPACITIES -
CLASS 1E EQUIPMENT CAPACITIES -
: a. 4.16-kV Switchgear  
: a. 4.16-kV Switchgear Bus 2000A continuous rating Incoming breakers 2000A continuous, 350 MVA interrupting Feeder breakers 1200A continuous, 350 MVA interrupting
 
: b. 480-V Unit Load Centers Transformers 1000 kVA, 3 phase, 60-Hz, 4000/480 V Bus 1600A continuous Incoming breakers 1600A continuous, 50,000A rms symmetrical interrupting Feeder breakers 800A continuous, 30,000A rms symmetrical interrupting (AKR) 800A continuous, 42,000A rms symmetrical interrupting (MP)
Bus 2000A continuous rating Incoming breakers 2000A continuous, 350 MVA interrupting Feeder breakers 1200A continuous, 350 MVA interrupting
: c. 480-V Motor Control Centers Horizontal bus 600A continuous, 25,000A rms symmetrical Vertical bus 300A continuous, 25,000A rms symmetrical Breakers 25,000A rms symmetrical, (molded case) minimum interrupting (singly for thermal-magnetic breakers and in combination with a starter for magnetic only breakers)
: b. 480-V Unit Load Centers Transformers 1000 kVA, 3 phase, 60-Hz, 4000/480 V Bus 1600A continuous Incoming breakers 1600A continuous, 50,000A rms symmetrical interrupting Feeder breakers 800A continuous, 30,000A rms symmetrical interrupting (AKR) 800A continuous, 42,000A rms symmetrical interrupting (MP)
AUTOMATIC LOADING AND LOAD SHEDDING - The automatic loading sequence of the Class IE busses is indicated in Figure 8.3-2.
: c. 480-V Motor Control Centers  
If preferred power is available to the 4.16-kV Class 1E bus following a LOCA, the Class 1E loads are started in programmed time increments by the load sequencer. The emergency standby diesel generator is automatically started but not connected to the bus. However, in the event that preferred power is lost following a LOCA, the load sequencer will function to shed selected loads and automatically start the associated standby diesel generator (connection of the standby diesel generator to the 4.16-kV Class 1E bus is performed by the diesel generator control circuitry). Load sequencers then function to start the required Class 1E loads in programmed time increments.
 
8.3-7 Rev. 30
Horizontal bus 600A continuous, 25,000A rms  
 
symmetrical Vertical bus 300A continuous, 25,000A rms symmetrical Breakers 25,000A rms symmetrical, (molded case) minimum interrupting (singly for thermal-magnetic breakers and in combination with a starter for magnetic only breakers)  
 
AUTOMATIC LOADING AND LOAD SHEDDING - The automatic loading sequence of the  
 
Class IE busses is indicated in Figure 8.3-2.  
 
If preferred power is available to the 4.16-kV Class 1E bus following a LOCA, the Class 1E loads are started in programmed time increments by the load  


sequencer. The emergency standby diesel generator is automatically started but
WOLF CREEK A failure modes and effects analysis and a reliability study have been performed on the load shedder emergency load sequencers (LSELS). These studies have shown that no failure within a single LSELS can result in the failure of both sources of offsite power, that there are no credible sneak circuits or common mode failures in the LSELS that could render both the onsite and offsite power sources unavailable, and that sequencing of loads on the offsite power system does not compromise the reliability of the offsite power source.
 
There are no permissive devices (e.g., lube oil pressure) incorporated into the final actuation control circuitry for large horsepower, safety-related motors.
not connected to the bus. However, in the event that preferred power is lost
Refer to Section 8.3.1.1.3 for additional information on load shedding and sequencing.
 
CLASS 1E EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION - Refer to Section 8.3.1.3 for details regarding the physical identification of Class 1E equipment.
following a LOCA, the load sequencer will function to shed selected loads and automatically start the associated standby diesel generator (connection of the standby diesel generator to the 4.16-kV Class 1E bus is performed by the diesel
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR THE APPLICABLE POWER SYSTEMS WITH THE ASSIGNED POWER SUPPLY IDENTIFIED - The dc control supplies for switchgear breaker operation are separate and independent so that Class 1E dc load group 1 supplies Class 1E load group 1 switchgear. The battery chargers for dc load group 1 are fed from the same load group switchgear. Class 1E dc load group 2 supplies Class 1E load group 2 switchgear. For further information on the dc power system, refer to Section 8.3.2.
 
Each 4.16-kV switchgear bus and 480-V load center bus is equipped with an undervoltage relay for annunciation in the control room. All Class 1E 4.16-kV buses are provided with voltage and current indication. The 480 volt system is provided with current indications only.
generator control circuitry). Load sequencers then function to start the
ELECTRIC CIRCUIT PROTECTION SYSTEMS - Protective relay schemes or direct-acting trip devices on primary and backup circuit breakers are provided throughout the onsite power system in order to:
 
required Class 1E loads in programmed time increments.
 
8.3-7 Rev. 30 WOLF CREEK A failure modes and effects analysis and a reliability study have been performed on the load shedder emergency load sequencers (LSELS). These studies have shown that no failure within a single LSELS can result in the failure of both sources of offsite power, that there are no credible sneak circuits or common mode failures in the LSELS that could render both the onsite and offsite  
 
power sources unavailable, and that sequencing of loads on the offsite power  
 
system does not compromise the reliability of the offsite power source.  
 
There are no permissive devices (e.g., lube oil pressure) incorporated into the final actuation control circuitry for large horsepower, safety-related motors.  
 
Refer to Section 8.3.1.1.3 for additional information on load shedding and  
 
sequencing.
CLASS 1E EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION - Refer to Section 8.3.1.3 for details  
 
regarding the physical identification of Class 1E equipment.  
 
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR THE APPLICABLE POWER SYSTEMS WITH THE ASSIGNED POWER SUPPLY IDENTIFIED - The dc control supplies for switchgear breaker operation are separate and independent so that Class 1E dc load group 1  
 
supplies Class 1E load group 1 switchgear. The battery chargers for dc load  
 
group 1 are fed from the same load group switchgear. Class 1E dc load group 2  
 
supplies Class 1E load group 2 switchgear. For further information on the dc power system, refer to Section 8.3.2.  
 
Each 4.16-kV switchgear bus and 480-V load center bus is equipped with an  
 
undervoltage relay for annunciation in the control room. All Class 1E 4.16-kV  
 
buses are provided with voltage and current indication. The 480 volt system is provided with current indications only.  
 
ELECTRIC CIRCUIT PROTECTION SYSTEMS - Protective relay schemes or direct-acting  
 
trip devices on primary and backup circuit breakers are provided throughout the  
 
onsite power system in order to:
: a. Isolate faulted equipment and/or circuits from unfaulted equipment and/or circuits
: a. Isolate faulted equipment and/or circuits from unfaulted equipment and/or circuits
: b. Prevent damage to equipment
: b. Prevent damage to equipment
: c. Protect personnel
: c. Protect personnel
: d. Minimize system disturbances The short circuit protective system is analyzed to ensure that the various adjustable devices are applied within their ratings and set to be coordinated with each other to attain selectivity in their operation. The combination of devices and settings applied affords the selectivity necessary to isolate a faulted area quickly with a minimum of disturbance to the rest of the system.  
: d. Minimize system disturbances The short circuit protective system is analyzed to ensure that the various adjustable devices are applied within their ratings and set to be coordinated with each other to attain selectivity in their operation. The combination of devices and settings applied affords the selectivity necessary to isolate a faulted area quickly with a minimum of disturbance to the rest of the system.
8.3-8 Rev. 27


8.3-8 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK Major types of protection applications that are used consist of the following:
WOLF CREEK Major types of protection applications that are used consist of the following:
: a. Overcurrent Relaying Each bus supply breaker (except the standby diesel breaker) is equipped with three inverse-time overcurrent relays and one inverse-time ground fault relay for bus faults and to provide backup for feeder circuit relays. Bus supply breakers from the standby emergency diesel generator are equipped with three inverse-time overcurrent relays only. Ground protection is provided on each generator neutral.  
: a. Overcurrent Relaying Each bus supply breaker (except the standby diesel breaker) is equipped with three inverse-time overcurrent relays and one inverse-time ground fault relay for bus faults and to provide backup for feeder circuit relays.
Bus supply breakers from the standby emergency diesel generator are equipped with three inverse-time overcurrent relays only. Ground protection is provided on each generator neutral.
Each 4.16-kV motor circuit breaker has three overcurrent relays, each with one long-time and two instantaneous elements for overload, locked rotor, and short circuit protection. Each 4.16-kV motor circuit breaker is also equipped with an instantaneous ground current relay.
The current for Class 1E motors is monitored by computer in the control room and at the Class 1E switchgear.
Each 4.16-kV supply circuit breaker to a load center transformer has three overcurrent relays with long-time and instantaneous elements. An instantaneous overcurrent ground current relay provides sensitive ground fault protection.
: b. Undervoltage Relaying Each 4.16-kV Class 1E bus is equipped with undervoltage relays for diesel generator start initiation and undervoltage annunciation.
Each 480-V Class 1E load center bus is equipped with undervoltage relays for undervoltage annunciation.
: c. Differential Relaying The main, unit auxiliary, startup, station service, and ESF transformers are equipped with differential relays.
These relays provide high-speed disconnection to prevent severe damage in the event of transformer internal faults.
Motors rated above 3,500 horsepower are equipped with differential protection.
The main generator and the standby emergency diesel generator are provided with differential protection.
: d. 480-V Load Center Overcurrent Relaying Each 480-V load center circuit breaker is equipped with a solid state device which has an adjustable phase and ground overcurrent trip.
8.3-9 Rev. 27


Each 4.16-kV motor circuit breaker has three overcurrent  relays, each with one long-time and two instantaneous elements for overload, locked rotor, and short circuit protection. Each 4.16-kV motor circuit breaker is also equipped with an instantaneous ground current relay.
WOLF CREEK
The current for Class 1E motors is monitored by computer  in the control room and at the Class 1E switchgear.
: e.
 
480-V Motor Control Center Overcurrent Relaying Molded case circuit breakers provide time overcurrent and/or instantaneous short circuit protection for connected loads. The molded case circuit breakers for motor circuits are equipped with instantaneous trip only. Motor overload protection is provided by ambient compensated thermal trip units in the motor controller.
Each 4.16-kV supply circuit breaker to a load center  transformer has three overcurrent relays with long-time  and instantaneous elements. An instantaneous overcurrent ground current relay provides sensitive ground fault
The molded case breakers for nonmotor feeder circuits provide thermal time overcurrent protection as well as instantaneous short circuit protection.
 
All starters for motor-operated valves are equipped with thermal overload relays. The thermal overload relay trip contacts located in 480-V motor control centers for all Class 1E valves, are bypassed in accordance with Regulatory Guide 1.106, Rev. 1, dated March 1977.
protection.
The starters and the feeder circuit breakers located in the motor control center are coordinated with the motor control center incoming supply breakers so that, upon ground fault, the protective device nearest the fault trips first. Where coordination is not possible using the protective devices normally furnished in a standard motor control center module, solid-state ground fault protectors are added to the affected modules on an individual basis.
: b. Undervoltage Relaying
TESTING OF THE AC SYSTEMS DURING POWER OPERATION - All Class 1E circuit breakers and motor controllers are testable during reactor operation, except for the electric equipment associated with those Class 1E loads identified in Chapter 7.0. During periodic Class 1E system tests, subsystems of the engineered safety features actuation system, such as safety injection, containment spray, and containment isolation, are actuated, thereby causing appropriate circuit breaker or contactor operation. The 4.16-kV and 480-V circuit breakers and control circuits can also be tested independently while individual equipment is shut down. The circuit breakers can be placed in the test position and exercised without operation of the associated equipment.
 
8.3.1.1.3 Standby Power Supply The standby power supply for each safety-related load group consists of one diesel generator complete with its accessories and fuel storage and transfer systems. It is capable of supplying essential loads necessary to reliably and safely shut down and isolate the reactor. Each diesel generator is rated at 6,201 kW for continuous operation. Additional ratings are 6,635 kW for 2,000 hours, 6,821 kW for 7 days, and 7,441 kW for 30 minutes. The generator 2-hour rating is equal to the 7-day rating. Each diesel generator is connected exclusively to a single 4.16-kV safety feature bus for one load group. The load groups are redundant and have similar safety-related equipment. Each load group is adequate to satisfy minimum engineered safety features demand caused by a LOCA and/or loss of preferred power supply. The diesel generators are electrically isolated from each other. Physical separation for fire and missile protection is provided between the diesel generators, since they are housed in separate rooms of a seismic Category I structure. Power and control cables for the diesel generators and associated switchgear are routed to maintain physical separation.
Each 4.16-kV Class 1E bus is equipped with undervoltage  relays for diesel generator start initiation and undervoltage annunciation.
8.3-10 Rev. 27  
Each 480-V Class 1E load center bus is equipped with  undervoltage relays for undervoltage annunciation.
: c. Differential Relaying The main, unit auxiliary, startup, station service, and  ESF transformers are equipped with differential relays. These relays provide high-speed disconnection to prevent  severe damage in the event of transformer internal faults. Motors rated above 3,500 horsepower are equipped with  differential protection.
The main generator and the standby emergency diesel  generator are provided with differential protection.
: d. 480-V Load Center Overcurrent Relaying Each 480-V load center circuit breaker is equipped with a  solid state device which has an adjustable phase and  ground overcurrent trip.  
 
8.3-9 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK  e. 480-V Motor Control Center Overcurrent Relaying  
 
Molded case circuit breakers provide time overcurrent and/or instantaneous short circuit protection for connected loads. The molded case circuit breakers for motor circuits are equipped with instantaneous trip only. Motor overload protection is provided by ambient compensated thermal trip units in the motor controller. The molded case breakers for nonmotor feeder circuits provide thermal time overcurrent protection as well as instantaneous short circuit protection.  
 
All starters for motor-operated valves are equipped with thermal overload relays. The thermal overload relay trip contacts located in 480-V motor control centers for all Class 1E valves, are bypassed in accordance with Regulatory Guide 1.106, Rev. 1, dated March 1977.
The starters and the feeder circuit breakers located in the motor control center are coordinated with the motor control center incoming supply breakers so that, upon ground fault, the protective device nearest the fault trips first. Where coordination is not possible using the protective devices normally furnished in a standard  
 
motor control center module, solid-state ground fault protectors are added to the affected modules on an individual basis.
TESTING OF THE AC SYSTEMS DURING POWER OPERATION - All Class 1E circuit breakers and motor controllers are testable during reactor operation, except for the electric equipment associated with those Class 1E loads identified in Chapter 7.0. During periodic Class 1E system tests, subsystems of the engineered safety features actuation system, such as safety injection, containment spray, and containment isolation, are actuated, thereby causing appropriate circuit breaker or contactor operation. The 4.16-kV and 480-V circuit breakers and control circuits can also be tested independently while individual equipment is shut down. The circuit breakers can be placed in the test position and exercised without operation of the associated equipment.  
 
8.3.1.1.3 Standby Power Supply The standby power supply for each safety-related load group consists of one diesel generator complete with its accessories and fuel storage and transfer systems. It is capable of supplying essential loads necessary to reliably and safely shut down and isolate the reactor. Each diesel generator is rated at 6,201 kW for continuous operation. Additional ratings are 6,635 kW for 2,000 hours, 6,821 kW for 7 days, and 7,441 kW for 30 minutes. The generator 2-hour rating is equal to the 7-day rating. Each diesel generator is connected exclusively to a single 4.16-kV safety feature bus for one load group. The load groups are redundant and have similar safety-related equipment. Each load group is adequate to satisfy minimum engineered safety features demand caused by a LOCA and/or loss of preferred power supply. The diesel generators are electrically isolated from each other. Physical separation for fire and missile protection is provided between the diesel generators, since they are housed in separate rooms of a seismic Category I structure. Power and control cables for the diesel generators and associated switchgear are routed to maintain physical separation.  
 
8.3-10 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK Ratings for diesel generator sets are established in order to satisfy the requirements set forth in Regulatory Guide 1.9. Refer to Section 8.1.4.3.
The diesel generator loads are determined on the basis of nameplate rating, pump pressure and flow conditions, or pump runout conditions. The basis for
 
each load is noted in Figure 8.3-2. The continuous rating of the diesel
 
generator is based on the maximum total load required at any time.


WOLF CREEK Ratings for diesel generator sets are established in order to satisfy the requirements set forth in Regulatory Guide 1.9. Refer to Section 8.1.4.3.
The diesel generator loads are determined on the basis of nameplate rating, pump pressure and flow conditions, or pump runout conditions. The basis for each load is noted in Figure 8.3-2. The continuous rating of the diesel generator is based on the maximum total load required at any time.
The functional aspects of the onsite power system are discussed below.
The functional aspects of the onsite power system are discussed below.
STARTING INITIATING CIRCUITS - The diesel generators are started on the following:
STARTING INITIATING CIRCUITS - The diesel generators are started on the following:
: a. Receipt of a safety injection signal (SIS)
: a. Receipt of a safety injection signal (SIS)
: b. Loss of voltage to the respective 4.16-kV Class 1E bus to   which each generator is connected
: b. Loss of voltage to the respective 4.16-kV Class 1E bus to which each generator is connected
: c. Manual - Remote switch actuation (main control room)
: c. Manual - Remote switch actuation (main control room)
: d. Manual - Local switch actuation (diesel generator room)
: d. Manual - Local switch actuation (diesel generator room)
: e. Emergency Manual - Local switch actuation (diesel   generator room)
: e. Emergency Manual - Local switch actuation (diesel generator room)
Refer to logic diagrams - Figures 8.3-3, 8.3-4, and 8.3-5.
Refer to logic diagrams - Figures 8.3-3, 8.3-4, and 8.3-5.
DIESEL STARTING MECHANISM AND SYSTEM - Refer to Section 9.5.6.
DIESEL STARTING MECHANISM AND SYSTEM - Refer to Section 9.5.6.
Line 1,813: Line 674:
: f. Generator differential The above protective devices, which function to shut down the diesel or trip the diesel generator breaker, are also functional following an SIS or loss of offsite power.
: f. Generator differential The above protective devices, which function to shut down the diesel or trip the diesel generator breaker, are also functional following an SIS or loss of offsite power.
The high jacket water coolant temperature, and low lube oil pressure, switches initiate shutdown only upon coincidence of a modified two-out-of-four logic.
The high jacket water coolant temperature, and low lube oil pressure, switches initiate shutdown only upon coincidence of a modified two-out-of-four logic.
The high crankcase pressure switches initiate shutdown only upon coincidence of a modified two-out-of-three logic. That is, a false trip on one channel does not erroneously shut down the diesel generator.  
The high crankcase pressure switches initiate shutdown only upon coincidence of a modified two-out-of-three logic. That is, a false trip on one channel does not erroneously shut down the diesel generator.
8.3-11 Rev. 27


8.3-11 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK The remaining protective functions that are retained during an SIS are (1) generator differential, (2) engine overspeed, and (3) start failure.  
WOLF CREEK The remaining protective functions that are retained during an SIS are (1) generator differential, (2) engine overspeed, and (3) start failure.
 
In accordance with the provisions of Reg. Guide 1.9, the engine overspeed and generator differential trips are retained to protect the diesel generator set from massive damage. The start failure protection functions to interrupt the starting of the diesel generator if a predetermined speed is not reached or if lube oil pressure is not established within a predetermined time following the start initiation.
In accordance with the provisions of Reg. Guide 1.9, the engine overspeed and generator differential trips are retained to protect the diesel generator set  
Reverse power, loss of field, generator overcurrent, generator voltage-restrained overcurrent, generator ground overcurrent, overexcitation and underfrequency protection are also provided but cause a trip only during tests when the diesel generator is operating in parallel with the preferred power system.
 
During testing with a loss of offsite power event the diesel generator may trip due to one of the seven (7) previously mentioned protective trips. If the diesel generator trips, operator action may be required to reset a lockout relay. If the diesel generator does not trip, operator action is required to disable the seven (7) protective trips and place the diesel generator in isochronous mode.
from massive damage. The start failure protection functions to interrupt the  
Underfrequency protection is provided for safely separating the diesel generators from the preferred source (when previously synchronized to it) without damage to or shutdown of the diesel generators.
 
The diesel generators are monitored from the control room, and each device, when actuated, initiates an annunciator in the diesel generator room, a summary annunciator in the control room, and in some cases individual annunciation in the control room (see Section 8.3.1.1.3). The alarms are set to provide a warning of impending trouble prior to trip of the diesels.
starting of the diesel generator if a predetermined speed is not reached or if  
INTERLOCKS - Circuit breaker electrical interlocks are provided to prevent automatic closing of a diesel generator breaker to an energized or faulted bus.
 
If the preferred power has been lost, undervoltage relays on the incoming (offsite) side of the 4.16-kV feeder breakers prevent closure of these breakers.
lube oil pressure is not established within a predetermined time following the start initiation.  
The two 4.16-kV circuit breakers which control the incoming preferred source power to a 4.16-kV Class 1E bus are so interlocked that only one breaker can be closed at any one time. This is to prevent parallel operation of the preferred sources.
 
Reverse power, loss of field, generator overcurrent, generator voltage-
 
restrained overcurrent, generator ground overcurrent, overexcitation and  
 
underfrequency protection are also provided but cause a trip only during tests when the diesel generator is operating in parallel with the preferred power system.  
 
During testing with a loss of offsite power event the diesel generator may trip  
 
due to one of the seven (7) previously mentioned protective trips. If the diesel generator trips, operator action may be required to reset a lockout relay. If the diesel generator does not trip, operator action is required to  
 
disable the seven (7) protective trips and place the diesel generator in  
 
isochronous mode.  
 
Underfrequency protection is provided for safely separating the diesel generators from the preferred source (when previously synchronized to it)  
 
without damage to or shutdown of the diesel generators.  
 
The diesel generators are monitored from the control room, and each device, when actuated, initiates an annunciator in the diesel generator room, a summary annunciator in the control room, and in some cases individual annunciation in  
 
the control room (see Section 8.3.1.1.3). The alarms are set to provide a  
 
warning of impending trouble prior to trip of the diesels.  
 
INTERLOCKS - Circuit breaker electrical interlocks are provided to prevent automatic closing of a diesel generator breaker to an energized or faulted bus.  
 
If the preferred power has been lost, undervoltage relays on the incoming (offsite) side of the 4.16-kV feeder breakers prevent closure of these breakers.  
 
The two 4.16-kV circuit breakers which control the incoming preferred source  
 
power to a 4.16-kV Class 1E bus are so interlocked that only one breaker can be closed at any one time. This is to prevent parallel operation of the preferred sources.
When operating from the diesel generator supply (loss of offsite power),
When operating from the diesel generator supply (loss of offsite power),
redundant load groups cannot be manually connected together since the 4.16-kV circuit breakers controlling the incoming preferred power supplies to the Class 1E busses are interlocked to prevent paralleling of the diesel generators.  
redundant load groups cannot be manually connected together since the 4.16-kV circuit breakers controlling the incoming preferred power supplies to the Class 1E busses are interlocked to prevent paralleling of the diesel generators.
 
During normal operation (offsite power available), synchronizing check relays provide an interlock function. They prevent an operator error that would parallel the standby power source with the offsite power source when the two are out-of-synchronism.
During normal operation (offsite power available), synchronizing check relays provide an interlock function. They prevent an operator error that would parallel the standby power source with the offsite power source when the two are out-of-synchronism.  
8.3-12 Rev. 27  
 
8.3-12 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK PERMISSIVES - A single switch (AUTO, LOCAL/ MANUAL) in the diesel generator room is provided for each diesel generator to block automatic start signals when the diesel is out for maintenance (i.e., LOCAL/MANUAL position). When in the LOCAL/MANUAL position, an annunciator is initiated in the control room.
 
A pushbutton in the control room and a local pushbutton are provided to allow
 
manual start capability.
 
During periodic diesel generator tests, subsequent to diesel start and prior to synchronization to the preferred system, a switch in the control room allows
 
parallel operation with the preferred system.


WOLF CREEK PERMISSIVES - A single switch (AUTO, LOCAL/ MANUAL) in the diesel generator room is provided for each diesel generator to block automatic start signals when the diesel is out for maintenance (i.e., LOCAL/MANUAL position). When in the LOCAL/MANUAL position, an annunciator is initiated in the control room.
A pushbutton in the control room and a local pushbutton are provided to allow manual start capability.
During periodic diesel generator tests, subsequent to diesel start and prior to synchronization to the preferred system, a switch in the control room allows parallel operation with the preferred system.
LOAD-SHEDDING CIRCUITS - Upon recognition of a loss of or degraded voltage on a 4.16-kV Class 1E bus, a logic signal is initiated to effect the following on each load group:
LOAD-SHEDDING CIRCUITS - Upon recognition of a loss of or degraded voltage on a 4.16-kV Class 1E bus, a logic signal is initiated to effect the following on each load group:
: a. Shed selected loads
: a. Shed selected loads
: b. Send signal to start diesel
: b. Send signal to start diesel
: c. Trip 4.16-kV preferred power supply breakers  
: c. Trip 4.16-kV preferred power supply breakers Two voltage sensing schemes are employed on each 4.16-kV Class lE bus to initiate the required logic signal. One scheme recognizes a loss of voltage, and the other recognizes a degraded voltage. Four potential transformers on each bus provide the necessary input voltages to the protective devices necessary to achieve the above protection.
 
In order to recognize a loss of voltage, four instantaneous undervoltage relays are used. The output contacts of these relays are directed to logic circuits that process the four undervoltage input circuits into the 2-out-of-4 logic circuit described above. This scheme is used on each bus.
Two voltage sensing schemes are employed on each 4.16-kV Class lE bus to initiate the required logic signal. One scheme recognizes a loss of voltage, and the other recognizes a degraded voltage. Four potential transformers on  
 
each bus provide the necessary input voltages to the protective devices  
 
necessary to achieve the above protection.  
 
In order to recognize a loss of voltage, four instantaneous undervoltage relays are used. The output contacts of these relays are directed to logic circuits  
 
that process the four undervoltage input circuits into the 2-out-of-4 logic  
 
circuit described above. This scheme is used on each bus.  
 
The loss of voltage logic signal is set below the minimum bus voltage encountered during diesel generator sequential loading. A brief time delay is employed to prevent false trips arising from transient undervoltage (spike) conditions.
The loss of voltage logic signal is set below the minimum bus voltage encountered during diesel generator sequential loading. A brief time delay is employed to prevent false trips arising from transient undervoltage (spike) conditions.
In order to recognize a degraded voltage, a diverse protection scheme is used.
In order to recognize a degraded voltage, a diverse protection scheme is used.
The above four potential transformers each provide an analog output signal of 0-120 volts. This signal is directed to logic circuits and processors that convert the analog signals into a 2-out-of-4 logic signal, whenever the signal drops below a preset value. This scheme serves only to trip the incoming offsite power circuit breakers when that power source has been determined to be degraded. This design cannot adversely affect the sequential loading of the diesel generators.
The above four potential transformers each provide an analog output signal of 0-120 volts. This signal is directed to logic circuits and processors that convert the analog signals into a 2-out-of-4 logic signal, whenever the signal drops below a preset value. This scheme serves only to trip the incoming offsite power circuit breakers when that power source has been determined to be degraded. This design cannot adversely affect the sequential loading of the diesel generators.
The degraded voltage logic signal is set at the minimum permissible continuous bus voltage. A time delay is provided that prevents damage to or spurious tripping of the permanently connected Class lE loads by limiting the amount of time they are exposed to a degraded voltage. The final voltage and time setpoints was determined based on an analysis of the auxiliary power distribution system, including the Class lE busses at all voltage levels. The use of an SIS contact in series with the degraded voltage logic circuit output contact ensures that the Class lE busses are immediately separated from the offsite power system whenever an accident occurs and the offsite power system is not able to accept the loads continuously. An alarm is also provided to alert the operator to a degraded voltage condition. It is delayed until any motor starting-induced voltage transient bus has had sufficient time to clear.
The degraded voltage logic signal is set at the minimum permissible continuous bus voltage. A time delay is provided that prevents damage to or spurious tripping of the permanently connected Class lE loads by limiting the amount of time they are exposed to a degraded voltage. The final voltage and time setpoints was determined based on an analysis of the auxiliary power distribution system, including the Class lE busses at all voltage levels. The use of an SIS contact in series with the degraded voltage logic circuit output contact ensures that the Class lE busses are immediately separated from the offsite power system whenever an accident occurs and the offsite power system is not able to accept the loads continuously. An alarm is also provided to alert the operator to a degraded voltage condition. It is delayed until any motor starting-induced voltage transient bus has had sufficient time to clear.
8.3-13 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK As each generator reaches rated voltage and frequency, the generator breaker connecting it to the corresponding 4.16-kV bus closes. With the SIS, connection of the diesel generator to the 4.16-kV bus is not made unless the preferred source of power is lost. The diesel generator is able to accept loads within 12 seconds after receipt of a starting signal, and all
8.3-13 Rev. 27  
 
automatically sequenced loads are connected to the Class 1E bus within 35 seconds thereafter. Refer to Figure 8.3-2. Relays at the diesel generator
 
detect generator rated voltage and frequency conditions and provide a permissive interlock for the closing of the respective generator circuit breaker. Upon loss of the preferred source of power without a LOCA, the load
 
sequencer system initiates the starting of the diesel generators and sheds all
 
loads, except the load centers and the centrifugal charging pumps.
 
Following diesel start and connection to the Class 1E bus, the loads are automatically sequenced onto the bus at programmed time intervals. A fast responding exciter and voltage regulator ensure voltage recovery of the diesel generator after each load step. Field flashing is utilized on the diesel generators for fast voltage buildup during the start sequence. Momentary voltage and frequency dips will not exceed a maximum of 25 percent below nominal rating (4.16 kV) for voltage and 5 percent for frequency.


The voltage levels at safety-related buses are optimized for the expected load conditions throughout the anticipated range of voltage of the offsite system by adjustment of transformer taps. This analysis is verified to be accurate by testing. TESTING - Because the diesel generator is not of the type or size that has been previously used as a standby emergency power source in nuclear power plant service, the following tests are performed at the manufacturer's facility:
WOLF CREEK As each generator reaches rated voltage and frequency, the generator breaker connecting it to the corresponding 4.16-kV bus closes. With the SIS, connection of the diesel generator to the 4.16-kV bus is not made unless the preferred source of power is lost. The diesel generator is able to accept loads within 12 seconds after receipt of a starting signal, and all automatically sequenced loads are connected to the Class 1E bus within 35 seconds thereafter. Refer to Figure 8.3-2. Relays at the diesel generator detect generator rated voltage and frequency conditions and provide a permissive interlock for the closing of the respective generator circuit breaker. Upon loss of the preferred source of power without a LOCA, the load sequencer system initiates the starting of the diesel generators and sheds all loads, except the load centers and the centrifugal charging pumps.
Following diesel start and connection to the Class 1E bus, the loads are automatically sequenced onto the bus at programmed time intervals. A fast responding exciter and voltage regulator ensure voltage recovery of the diesel generator after each load step. Field flashing is utilized on the diesel generators for fast voltage buildup during the start sequence. Momentary voltage and frequency dips will not exceed a maximum of 25 percent below nominal rating (4.16 kV) for voltage and 5 percent for frequency.
The voltage levels at safety-related buses are optimized for the expected load conditions throughout the anticipated range of voltage of the offsite system by adjustment of transformer taps. This analysis is verified to be accurate by testing.
TESTING - Because the diesel generator is not of the type or size that has been previously used as a standby emergency power source in nuclear power plant service, the following tests are performed at the manufacturer's facility:
: a. Load capability qualification tests were performed as follows:
: a. Load capability qualification tests were performed as follows:
: 1. The engine was brought to temperature equilibrium conditions and then run at rated load for 22 hours.
: 1. The engine was brought to temperature equilibrium conditions and then run at rated load for 22 hours.
Line 1,910: Line 714:
This is in accordance with Paragraph 6.3.1(1) and (2) of IEEE 387-1977.
This is in accordance with Paragraph 6.3.1(1) and (2) of IEEE 387-1977.
: 2. A load rejection from rated load was performed in one step. The engine speed did not exceed the normal speed plus 75 percent of the difference between normal speed and the overspeed setpoint. This is in accordance with Paragraph 6.3.1(3) of IEEE 387-1977.
: 2. A load rejection from rated load was performed in one step. The engine speed did not exceed the normal speed plus 75 percent of the difference between normal speed and the overspeed setpoint. This is in accordance with Paragraph 6.3.1(3) of IEEE 387-1977.
: 3. A no load test was conducted for 4 hours followed by loading to the rated load to demonstrate the capability to carry full load following operation at no load. This is in accordance with Paragraph 6.3.1(4) of IEEE 387-1977. Refer to Section 9.5.8.2.3 for a discussion of the manufacturer's operating recommendations for light and no load operations for extended periods. (Note that IEEE-387 contains no requirement for analyzing or inspecting the exhaust gas or the exhaust system during or following this test. The acceptance criterion is the acceptance of the rated load.)
: 3. A no load test was conducted for 4 hours followed by loading to the rated load to demonstrate the capability to carry full load following operation at no load. This is in accordance with Paragraph 6.3.1(4) of IEEE 387-1977. Refer to Section 9.5.8.2.3 for a discussion of the manufacturer's operating recommendations for light and no load operations for extended periods. (Note that IEEE-387 contains no requirement for analyzing or inspecting the exhaust gas or the exhaust system during or following this test. The acceptance criterion is the acceptance of the rated load.)
8.3-14 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK  b. At least 300 valid start and load tests are performed on  one diesel generator. This includes all valid tests  performed offsite. A valid start and load test is  defined as an unloaded start from design conditions with
8.3-14 Rev. 27  


subsequent loading to at least 50 percent of the continuous rating within the required time interval and continued operation until temperature equilibrium is  
WOLF CREEK
: b. At least 300 valid start and load tests are performed on one diesel generator. This includes all valid tests performed offsite. A valid start and load test is defined as an unloaded start from design conditions with subsequent loading to at least 50 percent of the continuous rating within the required time interval and continued operation until temperature equilibrium is attained. This is in accordance with Paragraph 6.3.2 of IEEE 387-1977. At least 90 percent of these start tests were made from hot standby conditions and 10 percent from design hot equilibrium.
A failure-to-start rate in excess of one per hundred requires further testing as well as a review of the system design adequacy.
If failures to start are found to be caused by failures of a generic nature in a single component, it may be possible to correct the problem by use of a different kind of component or to correct the deficiency in the component.
If it is possible to independently test the component after its deficiencies have been corrected, it is not necessary to repeat the 300 starting tests of the complete diesel generator unit. If the component is successfully tested 300 times or more under acceptable simulated starting conditions, it is only necessary to continue and complete the original required 300 unit tests with the replacement component.
If starting failures are of a random nature or cannot be readily identified as being generic component failures, additional starting tests of the complete unit are performed after each starting problem has been corrected. The additional tests are of a sufficient number to verify the required starting reliability.
: c. At least two full load and margin tests are performed on each diesel generator to demonstrate the start and load capability of these units with some margin in excess of the design requirements. The margin test includes step-loading the diesel generator with a test load at least 10 percent larger than the largest design single-step load.
This is in accordance with Paragraph 6.3.3 of IEEE 387-1977.
In addition to the above tests, after final assembly and preliminary startup testing each diesel generator was tested at the site prior to reactor fuel loading to verify actual electrical loading on the diesel generator and to demonstrate its ability to perform its intended function. The diesel generator is given each 8.3-15 Rev. 27


attained. This is in accordance with Paragraph 6.3.2 of IEEE 387-1977. At least 90 percent of these start tests were made from hot standby conditions and 10 percent from design hot equilibrium.  
WOLF CREEK of the following tests, in accordance with Paragraph 6.4 of IEEE 387-1977 to certify the adequacy of the unit for the intended service.
: a. Starting tests to demonstrate the ability to start automatically on simulation of loss of ac voltage and attain stabilized frequency and voltage within the rated limits and time.
: b. Load acceptance tests to demonstrate the ability to accept the design loads in the design accident loading sequence and to maintain voltage and frequency within acceptable limits.
: c. Rated load tests, with the diesel in parallel with the offsite system, to demonstrate the ability to carry the continuous rated load until temperature equilibrium is reached, followed by operation for 2 hours at the short-time rated load of the diesel generator, followed by operation for 22 hours at the continuous rated load, without exceeding the manufacturer's design limits.
: d. Functional tests to demonstrate diesel generator capability at full load temperature conditions by rerunning tests a and b above immediately following c above. If these tests are not satisfactorily completed, it is not necessary to repeat the tests of item c above prior to rerunning this test. Instead, prior to rerunning these tests, the diesel generator may be operated at the continuous rated load for 1 hour or until operating temperature has stabilized.
: e. Design load tests to demonstrate the ability to carry the design load for a time required to reach equilibrium temperature plus 1 hour without exceeding the manufacturer's design limits.
: f. Load rejection tests to demonstrate the ability to reject the maximum rated load without exceeding speeds or voltages that cause tripping, mechanical damage, or harmful overstresses.
: g. Electrical tests to demonstrate that the electrical properties of the generator, excitation system, voltage regulator, engine governor system, and the control and surveillance systems are acceptable for the intended application including:
8.3-16 Rev. 27


A failure-to-start rate in excess of one per hundred requires further testing as well as a review of the  system design adequacy.
WOLF CREEK
 
: 1. Synchronize the diesel generator unit with offsite system while the unit is connected to the emergency load.
If failures to start are found to be caused by failures of a generic nature in a single component, it may be possible to correct the problem by use of a different  kind of component or to correct the deficiency in the component.
: 2. Transfer the emergency load to the offsite system.
 
If it is possible to independently test the component after its deficiencies have been corrected, it is not  necessary to repeat the 300 starting tests of the  complete diesel generator unit. If the component is successfully tested 300 times or more under acceptable simulated starting conditions, it is only necessary to continue and complete the original required 300 unit  tests with the replacement component.
 
If starting failures are of a random nature or cannot be readily identified as being generic component failures, additional starting tests of the complete unit are  performed after each starting problem has been  corrected. The additional tests are of a sufficient number to verify the required starting reliability.
: c. At least two full load and margin tests are performed on  each diesel generator to demonstrate the start and load  capability of these units with some margin in excess of the design requirements. The margin test includes step-loading the diesel generator with a test load at least 10 percent larger than the largest design single-step load. This is in accordance with Paragraph 6.3.3 of IEEE 387-1977.
 
In addition to the above tests, after final assembly and preliminary startup
 
testing each diesel generator was tested at the site prior to reactor fuel
 
loading to verify actual electrical loading on the diesel generator and to demonstrate its ability to perform its intended function. The diesel generator is given each 
 
8.3-15 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK of the following tests, in accordance with Paragraph 6.4 of IEEE 387-1977 to certify the adequacy of the unit for the intended service.
: a. Starting tests to demonstrate the ability to start  automatically on simulation of loss of ac voltage and attain stabilized frequency and voltage within the rated limits and time.
: b. Load acceptance tests to demonstrate the ability to  accept the design loads in the design accident loading sequence and to maintain voltage and frequency within acceptable limits.
: c. Rated load tests, with the diesel in parallel with the  offsite system, to demonstrate the ability to carry the continuous rated load until temperature equilibrium is reached, followed by operation for 2 hours at the short-time rated load of the diesel generator, followed by  operation for 22 hours at the continuous rated load,  without exceeding the manufacturer's design limits.
: d. Functional tests to demonstrate diesel generator capability at full load temperature conditions by  rerunning tests a and b above immediately following c  above. If these tests are not satisfactorily completed, it is not necessary to repeat the tests of item c above prior to rerunning this test. Instead, prior to rerunning these tests, the diesel generator may be  operated at the continuous rated load for 1 hour or until  operating temperature has stabilized.
: e. Design load tests to demonstrate the ability to carry the design load for a time required to reach equilibrium  temperature plus 1 hour without exceeding the  manufacturer's design limits.
: f. Load rejection tests to demonstrate the ability to reject the maximum rated load without exceeding speeds or  voltages that cause tripping, mechanical damage, or  harmful overstresses.
: g. Electrical tests to demonstrate that the electrical properties of the generator, excitation system, voltage  regulator, engine governor system, and the control and  surveillance systems are acceptable for the intended application including:
 
8.3-16 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK 1. Synchronize the diesel generator unit with offsite   system while the unit is connected to the emergency   load. 2. Transfer the emergency load to the offsite system.
: 3. Isolate the diesel generator unit from the offsite system.
: 3. Isolate the diesel generator unit from the offsite system.
: 4. Restore diesel unit to standby status.
: 4. Restore diesel unit to standby status.
: h. A minimum of 35 consecutive valid tests are to be run with no failures to demonstrate the required reliability.
: h. A minimum of 35 consecutive valid tests are to be run with no failures to demonstrate the required reliability.
: i. Subsystem tests to demonstrate the capability of the control, surveillance, and protection systems to function in accordance with their intended application.
: i. Subsystem tests to demonstrate the capability of the control, surveillance, and protection systems to function in accordance with their intended application.
: j. Tests to demonstrate the capability of the diesel generator unit to respond to an emergency start signal within the required time.  
: j. Tests to demonstrate the capability of the diesel generator unit to respond to an emergency start signal within the required time.
 
After being placed in service, the standby power system is tested periodically in accordance with the plant Technical Specifications to demonstrate the continued ability of the unit to perform its intended function.
After being placed in service, the standby power system is tested periodically in accordance with the plant Technical Specifications to demonstrate the continued ability of the unit to perform its intended function.  
REPAIRS AND MAINTENANCE - Preventative and corrective maintenance records are maintained and reviewed on a continuing basis for parts failure data. In cases where repeated failures of a certain part or component are identified, then investigative maintenance is performed to try to identify the root cause of the problem.
 
Upon completion of repairs or maintenance and prior to an actual start, run, and load test, a final equipment check is made to ensure the diesel generators are ready for operation.
REPAIRS AND MAINTENANCE - Preventative and corrective maintenance records are maintained and reviewed on a continuing basis for parts failure data. In cases where repeated failures of a certain part or component are identified, then investigative maintenance is performed to try to identify the root cause of the  
FUEL OIL STORAGE AND TRANSFER SYSTEMS - The diesel generator fuel oil system is described in Section 9.5.4.
 
DIESEL GENERATOR COOLING AND HEATING SYSTEMS - The diesel generator cooling water system is described in Section 9.5.5.
problem.  
 
Upon completion of repairs or maintenance and prior to an actual start, run, and load test, a final equipment check is made to ensure the diesel generators are ready for operation.  
 
FUEL OIL STORAGE AND TRANSFER SYSTEMS - The diesel generator fuel oil system is  
 
described in Section 9.5.4.
DIESEL GENERATOR COOLING AND HEATING SYSTEMS - The diesel generator cooling  
 
water system is described in Section 9.5.5.  
 
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR STANDBY POWER SUPPLY - Equipment is provided in the control room for each diesel generator for the following operations:
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR STANDBY POWER SUPPLY - Equipment is provided in the control room for each diesel generator for the following operations:
: a. Remote manual starting and stopping  
: a. Remote manual starting and stopping 8.3-17 Rev. 27


8.3-17 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK b. Remote manual synchronization
WOLF CREEK
: c. Remote manual frequency adjustment Remote manual voltage adjustment for the NE001 EDG and remote manual voltage adjustment for the NE002 EDG while in automatic voltage control only.
: b. Remote manual synchronization
: c. Remote manual frequency adjustment Remote manual voltage adjustment for the NE001 EDG and remote manual voltage adjustment for the NE002 EDG while in automatic voltage control only.
: d. Governor and voltage drop selection
: d. Governor and voltage drop selection
: e. Automatic or manual voltage regulator selection (The NE002 EDG can only be switched between automatic and manual voltage control locally.)  
: e. Automatic or manual voltage regulator selection (The NE002 EDG can only be switched between automatic and manual voltage control locally.)
 
A master transfer switch is provided in the diesel room for automatic and local-manual control selection. The switch is normally in the automatic position, whereby the engineered safety features system senses an accident or loss of preferred power and starts the diesel. The master transfer switch is placed in the local-manual position to allow manual operation of the diesel locally when it is out for maintenance. Equipment is provided locally at each diesel generator for manual starting in case of a control room evacuation. The local emergency start functions to start the diesel generator, regardless of the position of the master transfer switch.
A master transfer switch is provided in the diesel room for automatic and local-manual control selection. The switch is normally in the automatic  
 
position, whereby the engineered safety features system senses an accident or  
 
loss of preferred power and starts the diesel. The master transfer switch is  
 
placed in the local-manual position to allow manual operation of the diesel locally when it is out for maintenance. Equipment is provided locally at each diesel generator for manual starting in case of a control room evacuation. The  
 
local emergency start functions to start the diesel generator, regardless of  
 
the position of the master transfer switch.  
 
Equipment is provided at each local control panel for the following operation (when the master transfer switch is in the local position):
Equipment is provided at each local control panel for the following operation (when the master transfer switch is in the local position):
: a. Manual starting
: a. Manual starting
Line 1,988: Line 764:
: c. Frequency and voltage regulation
: c. Frequency and voltage regulation
: d. Automatic or manual regulation selection
: d. Automatic or manual regulation selection
: e. Exciter field removal and reset  
: e. Exciter field removal and reset The local control operation is annunciated in the control room. The dc power source for the diesel generator instrumentation and control system is of the same load group as the respective diesel generator.
 
Each diesel generator is equipped with the following alarms at the local control panel:
The local control operation is annunciated in the control room. The dc power  
 
source for the diesel generator instrumentation and control system is of the same load group as the respective diesel generator.  
 
Each diesel generator is equipped with the following alarms at the local  
 
control panel:
: a. Lube oil pressure low
: a. Lube oil pressure low
: b. Lube oil temperature high
: b. Lube oil temperature high
: c. Lube oil temperature low  
: c. Lube oil temperature low 8.3-18 Rev. 27


8.3-18 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK d. Lube oil level high in sump
WOLF CREEK
: d. Lube oil level high in sump
: e. Lube oil level low in sump
: e. Lube oil level low in sump
: f. Lube oil filter differential pressure high
: f. Lube oil filter differential pressure high
Line 2,023: Line 793:
: x. Engine overspeed trip
: x. Engine overspeed trip
: y. Any switch not in auto position
: y. Any switch not in auto position
: z. Generator protective relay trip  
: z. Generator protective relay trip aa. Diesel main bearing temperature high 8.3-19 Rev. 27  
 
aa. Diesel main bearing temperature high  
 
8.3-19 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK bb. Combustion air pressure low cc. Intercooler water pressure low dd. Intercooler water temperature high


ee. Intercooler water temperature low  
WOLF CREEK bb. Combustion air pressure low cc. Intercooler water pressure low dd. Intercooler water temperature high ee. Intercooler water temperature low ff. Rocker arm lube oil filter differential pressure high gg. Rocker arm lube oil level high hh. Rocker arm lube oil pressure low ii. Diesel generator underexcitation jj. Diesel generator field grounded kk. Exciter power potential transformer fuse failure The following conditions are separately alarmed in the control room:
 
ff. Rocker arm lube oil filter differential pressure high  
 
gg. Rocker arm lube oil level high  
 
hh. Rocker arm lube oil pressure low ii. Diesel generator underexcitation  
 
jj. Diesel generator field grounded  
 
kk. Exciter power potential transformer fuse failure  
 
The following conditions are separately alarmed in the control room:
: a. Diesel out of service
: a. Diesel out of service
: b. Diesel local alarm
: b. Diesel local alarm
: c. Diesel generator undervoltage or underfrequency
: c. Diesel generator undervoltage or underfrequency
: d. Diesel overvoltage
: d. Diesel overvoltage
: e. Diesel negative phase sequence  
: e. Diesel negative phase sequence Electrical instruments are provided in the control room and at the diesel generator for surveillance of generator voltage, current, frequency, power, and reactive volt amperes. The breaker status of each 4.16-kV breaker of the engineered safety features system is displayed by red and green indicating lamps in the control room. Local indication is provided at the switchgear.
 
A window is provided on the engineered safety features status panel in order to determine the availability of the diesel generator. The window reads "Emergency Diesel Generator" and operates as described in Section 7.5.2.2.
Electrical instruments are provided in the control room and at the diesel generator for surveillance of generator voltage, current, frequency, power, and reactive volt amperes. The breaker status of each 4.16-kV breaker of the  
This window is activated by all conditions which render the diesel inoperable.
 
engineered safety features system is displayed by red and green indicating  
 
lamps in the control room. Local indication is provided at the switchgear.  
 
A window is provided on the engineered safety features status panel in order to determine the availability of the diesel generator. The window reads "Emergency Diesel Generator" and operates as described in Section 7.5.2.2.
 
This window is activated by all conditions which render the diesel inoperable.
 
These conditions are listed as follows:
These conditions are listed as follows:
: a. Loss of dc control power
: a. Loss of dc control power
: b. Generator relay trip  
: b. Generator relay trip 8.3-20 Rev. 27


8.3-20 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK c. Barring device engaged
WOLF CREEK
: c. Barring device engaged
: d. Starting air pressure low
: d. Starting air pressure low
: e. Engine shutdown
: e. Engine shutdown
: f. Start failure
: f. Start failure
: g. Diesel generator control switch not in auto position
: g. Diesel generator control switch not in auto position
: h. Diesel generator auxiliaries control switch in off position.  
: h. Diesel generator auxiliaries control switch in off position.
 
Controls and monitoring instruments for the WCGS emergency diesel generators are installed in free standing, floor-mounted control panels, separate from the engine skid. Only those sensors and other electrical controls (solenoid valves and governor actuator) which send or receive signals to and from the control panels are mounted on the diesel generator unit.
Controls and monitoring instruments for the WCGS emergency diesel generators are installed in free standing, floor-mounted control panels, separate from the  
Although the WCGS panels are mounted on the same floor as the engine skid they do not employ vibration mounts because the floor is of sufficient mass to dampen the engine vibrations.
 
8.3.1.1.4 Control Rod Drive Power Supply Electric power to control rod drive mechanisms is supplied by two full-capacity, motor-generator sets. Each motor-generator set is connected to a separate non-Class IE 480-V load center. Each generator is of the synchronous type and is driven by a 200-hp induction motor. The ac power is distributed to the rod control power cabinets through two series-connected reactor trip breakers.
engine skid. Only those sensors and other electrical controls (solenoid valves  
8.3.1.1.5 Vital Instrument AC Power Supply Four independent Class IE 120-V vital instrument ac power supplies are provided to supply the four channels of the protection systems and reactor control systems. Each vital instrument ac power supply consists of one normal inverter equipped with an integral bypass constant voltage transformer and one distribution bus. Normally, the inverter is operating to supply the vital ac bus. Each inverter is supplied by a separate Class IE battery system, as described in Section 8.3.2. If an inverter is inoperable or is to be removed from service, the vital ac bus can be supplied from the integral constant voltage transformer until the trains swing (backup) inverter is configured to operate in its place. The swing unit can supply either inverter in that train.
 
A selector switch located on the inverter is positioned to select the appropriate inverter to be replaced (a keylock is used to maintain the position). The swing unit will be fed from the dc bus associated with the affected inverters power supply. A 125 VDC power source is selected on the DC manual transfer switch via key operated switches.
and governor actuator) which send or receive signals to and from the control  
Refer to Figure 8.3-6, sheet 1, for the single-line arrangement of the vital instrument ac power supply.
 
8.3-21 Rev. 29
panels are mounted on the diesel generator unit.
Although the WCGS panels are mounted on the same floor as the engine skid they  
 
do not employ vibration mounts because the floor is of sufficient mass to  
 
dampen the engine vibrations.  
 
8.3.1.1.4 Control Rod Drive Power Supply  
 
Electric power to control rod drive mechanisms is supplied by two full-
 
capacity, motor-generator sets. Each motor-generator set is connected to a  
 
separate non-Class IE 480-V load center. Each generator is of the synchronous type and is driven by a 200-hp induction motor. The ac power is distributed to the rod control power cabinets through two series-connected reactor trip  
 
breakers.  
 
8.3.1.1.5 Vital Instrument AC Power Supply Four independent Class IE 120-V vital instrument ac power supplies are provided  


to supply the four channels of the protection systems and reactor control
WOLF CREEK 8.3.1.1.6 Non-vital Instrument AC Power Supply The non-vital 120/208-V instrument ac power supply is designed to furnish reliable power to all nonsafety-related plant instruments. In addition, it is utilized as the source of power for the public address system.
 
The non-vital instrument ac power supply system is divided into four panelboards. Two of the panel boards are normally supplied by three phase transformers, each connected to a Class 1E motor control center. In the event of the loss of normal auxiliary power, the transformers are automatically energized by the emergency diesel generators. In the event that the transformers fail, the instrument buses will be automatically transferred to an alternate regulated source from non-vital motor control centers. The other two panelboards are fed from uninterruptible power supplies. These panelboards supply instrument loads which are required for stable plant operation and cannot withstand an interruption in power.
systems. Each vital instrument ac power supply consists of one normal inverter equipped with an integral bypass constant voltage transformer and one distribution bus. Normally, the inverter is operating to supply the vital ac bus. Each inverter is supplied by a separate Class IE battery system, as
8.3.1.1.7 Electric Equipment Layout The following are the general features of the electric equipment layout:
 
: a. Class IE switchgear, load centers, and motor control centers of redundant load groups are located in separate rooms within seismic Category I buildings.
described in Section 8.3.2. If an inverter is inoperable or is to be removed from service, the vital ac bus can be supplied from the integral constant voltage transformer until the trains swing (backup) inverter is configured to operate in its place. The swing unit can supply either inverter in that train.
A selector switch located on the inverter is positioned to select the appropriate inverter to be replaced (a keylock is used to maintain the position). The swing unit will be fed from the dc bus associated with the affected inverter's power supply. A 125 VDC power source is selected on the DC manual transfer switch via key operated switches.
Refer to Figure 8.3-6, sheet 1, for the single-line arrangement of the vital instrument ac power supply.
 
8.3-21 Rev. 29 WOLF CREEK 8.3.1.1.6 Non-vital Instrument AC Power Supply  
 
The non-vital 120/208-V instrument ac power supply is designed to furnish reliable power to all nonsafety-related plant instruments. In addition, it is utilized as the source of power for the public address system.  
 
The non-vital instrument ac power supply system is divided into four  
 
panelboards. Two of the panel boards are normally supplied by three phase transformers, each connected to a Class 1E motor control center. In the event of the loss of normal auxiliary power, the transformers are automatically  
 
energized by the emergency diesel generators. In the event that the  
 
transformers fail, the instrument buses will be automatically transferred to an  
 
alternate regulated source from non-vital motor control centers. The other two panelboards are fed from uninterruptible power supplies. These panelboards supply instrument loads which are required for stable plant operation and  
 
cannot withstand an interruption in power.  
 
8.3.1.1.7 Electric Equipment Layout The following are the general features of the electric equipment layout:
: a. Class IE switchgear, load centers, and motor control centers of redundant load groups are located in separate rooms within seismic Category I buildings.
: b. Four Class IE battery supplies are located in the control building. Each battery is located in a separate room.
: b. Four Class IE battery supplies are located in the control building. Each battery is located in a separate room.
Battery ventilation considerations are addressed in Section 9.4.1.
Battery ventilation considerations are addressed in Section 9.4.1.
: c. The battery charger, inverter, and dc busses associated with each of the four subsystems are in separate rooms outside the battery rooms.
: c. The battery charger, inverter, and dc busses associated with each of the four subsystems are in separate rooms outside the battery rooms.
: d. Two cable spreading rooms are provided, one above and one below the control room. This enhances redundant cable  
: d. Two cable spreading rooms are provided, one above and one below the control room. This enhances redundant cable separation.
 
: e. Redundant diesel generators and associated supporting equipment are located in separate rooms in the seismic Category I diesel generator building.
separation.
Electrical equipment layout drawings showing the location of electrical equipment and equipment and cable raceways are listed in Section 1.7.
: e. Redundant diesel generators and associated supporting equipment are located in separate rooms in the seismic Category I diesel generator building.  
8.3-22 Rev. 27  
 
Electrical equipment layout drawings showing the location of electrical equipment and equipment and cable raceways are listed in Section 1.7.  
 
8.3-22 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK 8.3.1.1.8  Design Criteria for Class IE Equipment


Design criteria are discussed below for the Class IE equipment:
WOLF CREEK 8.3.1.1.8 Design Criteria for Class IE Equipment Design criteria are discussed below for the Class IE equipment:
MOTOR SIZE - For all motors rated above 480 Volts, some have the nameplate rated horsepower less than the horsepower required by the driven load under runout condition, but still within the service factor of the motor.
MOTOR SIZE - For all motors rated above 480 Volts, some have the nameplate rated horsepower less than the horsepower required by the driven load under runout condition, but still within the service factor of the motor.
In the case of containment spray pumps (500 hp nameplate rating and 505 brake horsepower), residual heat removal pumps (500 hp nameplate rating and 510 brake horsepower), centrifugal charging pumps (600 hp nameplate rating and 680 brake horsepower), and safety injection pumps (450 hp nameplate rating and 460 brake horsepower) which are under the scope of the NSSS supplier, the brake horsepower exceeds the nameplate rating of the motor, but is within the capability of the motors which have a service factor of 1.15.
In the case of containment spray pumps (500 hp nameplate rating and 505 brake horsepower), residual heat removal pumps (500 hp nameplate rating and 510 brake horsepower), centrifugal charging pumps (600 hp nameplate rating and 680 brake horsepower), and safety injection pumps (450 hp nameplate rating and 460 brake horsepower) which are under the scope of the NSSS supplier, the brake horsepower exceeds the nameplate rating of the motor, but is within the capability of the motors which have a service factor of 1.15.
MINIMUM MOTOR ACCELERATING VOLTAGE - All Class IE motors fed from the 4.16-kV  
MINIMUM MOTOR ACCELERATING VOLTAGE - All Class IE motors fed from the 4.16-kV busses are specified with accelerating capability at 75 percent of the motor nameplate rating (4,000 volts). IE motors rated for use on lower voltage busses, which are required to start concurrently with large 4-kV motors, are specified with accelerating capability at 65 percent of the motor nameplate rating.
 
To prevent valve damage from the oversizing of motors, motor-operated valve actuators are specified with accelerating capability at 80 percent of the nameplating rating.
busses are specified with accelerating capability at 75 percent of the motor nameplate rating (4,000 volts). IE motors rated for use on lower voltage busses, which are required to start concurrently with large 4-kV motors, are  
The electrical system is designed so that the total voltage drop on the Class IE motor circuits is less than that required to accelerate those motors.
 
MOTOR STARTING TORQUE - The motor starting torque is capable of starting and accelerating the connected load to normal speed within sufficient time to perform its safety function for all expected operating conditions, including the design minimum bus voltage stated in Section 8.3.1.1.3.
specified with accelerating capability at 65 percent of the motor nameplate  
MINIMUM MOTOR TORQUE MARGIN OVER PUMP TORQUE THROUGH ACCELERATING PERIOD - The minimum torque margin (accelerating torque) is such that the pump-motor assembly reaches nominal speed within sufficient time to perform its safety function at design minimum terminal voltage.
 
MOTOR INSULATION - Insulation systems are selected on the basis of the particular ambient conditions to which insulation is exposed. For Class IE motors located within the containment, the insulation system is selected to withstand the postulated accident environment.
rating.
8.3-23 Rev. 27  
To prevent valve damage from the oversizing of motors, motor-operated valve actuators are specified with accelerating capability at 80 percent of the  
 
nameplating rating.  
 
The electrical system is designed so that the total voltage drop on the Class IE motor circuits is less than that required to accelerate those motors.  
 
MOTOR STARTING TORQUE - The motor starting torque is capable of starting and  
 
accelerating the connected load to normal speed within sufficient time to  
 
perform its safety function for all expected operating conditions, including the design minimum bus voltage stated in Section 8.3.1.1.3.  
 
MINIMUM MOTOR TORQUE MARGIN OVER PUMP TORQUE THROUGH ACCELERATING PERIOD - The  
 
minimum torque margin (accelerating torque) is such that the pump-motor  
 
assembly reaches nominal speed within sufficient time to perform its safety function at design minimum terminal voltage.  
 
MOTOR INSULATION - Insulation systems are selected on the basis of the  
 
particular ambient conditions to which insulation is exposed. For Class IE  
 
motors located within the containment, the insulation system is selected to withstand the postulated accident environment.  
 
8.3-23 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK TEMPERATURE MONITORING DEVICES PROVIDED IN LARGE HORSEPOWER MOTORS - Each motor in excess of 1,500 hp is provided with six resistance temperature detectors (RTD) embedded in the motor slots, two per phase. In normal operation, the RTD at the hottest location (selected by test) monitors the motor temperature and provides a computer alarm in the control room on high temperature. Each 4.16-
 
kV motor bearing (except residual heat removal) is provided with one
 
thermocouple which will provide an alarm on bearing high temperature.


WOLF CREEK TEMPERATURE MONITORING DEVICES PROVIDED IN LARGE HORSEPOWER MOTORS - Each motor in excess of 1,500 hp is provided with six resistance temperature detectors (RTD) embedded in the motor slots, two per phase. In normal operation, the RTD at the hottest location (selected by test) monitors the motor temperature and provides a computer alarm in the control room on high temperature. Each 4.16-kV motor bearing (except residual heat removal) is provided with one thermocouple which will provide an alarm on bearing high temperature.
INTERRUPTING CAPACITIES - The interrupting capacities of the protective equipment are determined as follows:
INTERRUPTING CAPACITIES - The interrupting capacities of the protective equipment are determined as follows:
: a. Switchgear  
: a. Switchgear Switchgear interrupting capacities are greater than the maximum short circuit current available at the point of application. The magnitude of the short circuit currents in the medium voltage systems is determined in accordance with ANSI C37.010-1972. The offsite power system, a single operating diesel generator, and running motor contributions are considered in determining the fault level. All motors connected to the bus are considered to be running when the short circuit is postulated.
High voltage power circuit breaker interrupting capacity ratings are selected in accordance with ANSI C37.06-1971.
: b. Load Centers, Motor Control Centers, and Distribution Panels Load centers, motor control centers, and distribution panel circuit breakers have a symmetrical rated interrupting current as great as the determined total available symmetrical current at the point of application. Symmetrical current is determined in accordance with the procedures of ANSI C37-1973 for low-voltage circuit breakers other than molded-case breakers and of NEMA Standards Publication AB l for molded case circuit breakers.
ELECTRIC CIRCUIT PROTECTION - Refer to Section 8.3.1.1.2 for criteria regarding the electric circuit protection.
GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS - Equipment and system grounding were designed using IEEE 80, 1971 "Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding," and IEEE 142, 1972, "Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems" as a guide.
8.3-24 Rev. 27


Switchgear interrupting capacities are greater than the maximum short circuit current available at the point of application. The magnitude of the short circuit currents in the medium voltage systems is determined in accordance with ANSI C37.010-1972. The offsite power system, a single operating diesel generator, and running motor  contributions are considered in determining the fault level. All motors connected to the bus are considered to be running when the short circuit is postulated.  
WOLF CREEK 8.3.1.1.9 Cable Derating and Cable Tray Fill The ampacity and group derating factors for cables in conduit duct bank and maintained space trays are in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and IPCEA P-46-426 or the NEC. For randomly filled trays, ICEA P-54-440 with IPCEA P-46-426, as appropriate, is used in conjunction with the manufacturers recommendation for cable ampacity and group derating factors.
The cable ampacities are based on a maximum conductor temperature of 90 C, 100-percent load factor, and all cables fully loaded.
Cable tray fill, for the various randomly filled tray configurations, is generally limited by the percentage criteria as follows: 45% for raceway containing control and low voltage power cables inside the cable spreading rooms and for raceway containing instrumentation cables; 30% for raceway containing control and low voltage power cables outside the cable spreading rooms. Where these conditions cannot be maintained, a design engineer reviews each case for the adequacy of the design for both physical fill and derating.
Conduit fill is in compliance with the provisions of the NEC. Where these provisions cannot be maintained, a design engineer reviews each case and will allow a higher fill percentage based on actual cable sizes, conduit sizes, length of conduit, and number of bends.
8.3.1.2 Analysis 8.3.1.2.1 Compliance with General Design Criteria 17 and 18 and Regulatory Guides For discussion of regulatory guides in regard to Class IE ac systems, refer to Section 8.1.4.3.
Compliance with General Design Criteria 17 and 18 is discussed in Section 3.1.
A failure modes and effects analysis is provided in accordance with IEEE 352-1972. Refer to Table 8.3-4.
8.3.1.2.2 Safety-Related Equipment Exposed to Hostile Environment The detailed information on all Class IE equipment that must operate in a hostile environment during and/or subsequent to an accident is furnished in Section 3.11(B) and 3.11(N).
8.3.1.3 Physical Identification of Safety-Related Equipment Each circuit (scheme) and raceway is given a unique alphanumeric identification. This identification provides a means of distinguishing a circuit or raceway association with a particular channel or load group, and is assigned on the basis of the following criteria:
8.3-25 Rev. 27


High voltage power circuit breaker interrupting capacity  ratings are selected in accordance with ANSI C37.06-1971.
WOLF CREEK SEPARATION GROUP 1 - A safety-related instrumentation, control, or power scheme/raceway associated with safety-related load group 1 or protection system channel 1.
: b. Load Centers, Motor Control Centers, and Distribution
SEPARATION GROUP 2 - A safety-related instrumentation, control, or power scheme/raceway associated with protection system channel 2.
SEPARATION GROUP 3 - A safety-related instrumentation, power, or control scheme/raceway associated with protection system channel 3.
SEPARATION GROUP 4 - A safety-related instrumentation, control, or power scheme/raceway associated with safety-related load group 2 or protection system channel 4.
Nonsafety-related cables and raceways associated with normal plant (non-Class IE) equipment are uniquely identified and separately routed from safety-related cables and raceways, as described in Section 8.1.4.3.
The unique identification afforded all nonsafety-related cables is generally black; however, other colors (other than Red, White, Blue and Yellow) may be used for non-safety related cable in isolated cases.
Nameplates with colored backgrounds are provided for all IEEE 308 Class lE equipment (such as transformers, motors, motor control centers, switchgear, panels, and switchboards) under A/E scope. Each separation group has its distinguishing color. The applicable channel or load group designation is marked on each nameplate. For the identification of instrumentation and control equipment, refer to Section 7.1.2.3.
Raceways are marked in a distinct, permanent manner at intervals not to exceed 15 feet and at points of entry to, and exit from, enclosed areas.
The 600 volt fire-resistive control and power cables are routed independent of raceways. The fire-resisitive cables are distinctly and permanently marked in the same manner as described above for raceways.
Color identification is provided for each separation group of field-wired, safety-related cables.
Within control panels where more than one separation group is present, wiring is identified by separation group designation or, if enclosed by conduit, the conduit is identified by separation group designation.
8.3-26 Rev. 27


Panels  Load centers, motor control centers, and distribution panel circuit breakers have a symmetrical rated interrupting current as great as the determined total available symmetrical current at the point of application. Symmetrical current is determined in  accordance with the procedures of ANSI C37-1973 for low-voltage circuit breakers other than molded-case breakers and of NEMA Standards Publication AB l for molded case circuit breakers.
WOLF CREEK Within a cabinet or panel which is associated and identified with a single separation group, the internal wiring is exclusively associated with the same separation group and, therefore, requires no further identification.
ELECTRIC CIRCUIT PROTECTION - Refer to Section 8.3.1.1.2 for criteria regarding
In cases where the majority of the wiring within a cabinet or panel is primarily one separation group, standard color wire and/or sleeves for the majority separation group is used. The remaining wiring is identified, using the appropriate color, as defined in applicable specifications or drawings.
When colored sleeves are used in lieu of colored wiring, the sleeves are provided at both ends of the wire and at strategic intervals along its length.
Design drawings provide distinct identification of Class IE equipment.
Operating and maintenance documents pertaining to Class IE equipment are distinctly identified.
8.3.1.4 Independence of Redundant Systems 8.3.1.4.1 Separation Criteria This section establishes the criteria and the bases for preserving the independence of redundant Class IE power systems.
8.3.1.4.1.1 Raceway and Cable Routing
: a.
Wherever possible, cable trays are arranged from top to bottom, with trays containing the highest voltage cables at the top and trays containing the lowest voltage cables at the bottom. A raceway designated for a single voltage category of cables contains only cables of the same voltage category. Voltage categories are:
: 1.
15-kV power (non-Class IE)
: 2.
5-kV power
: 3.
Large 600-V power (cables from load centers)
: 4.
600-V power (cables from motor control centers, control and digital signal cables)
: 5.
Instrumentation cables
: b.
Cables associated with each safety-related separation group, as defined in Section 8.3.1.3, are run in separate conduits, cable trays, ducts, and penetrations.
8.3-27 Rev. 27


the electric circuit protection.  
WOLF CREEK The 600 volt fire-resistive control and power cables are routed independent of raceways. The fire-resistive cables are routed in the same manner as conduits.
: c.
The arrangement of electrical equipment and cabling minimizes the possibility of a fire in one separation group from propagating to another separation group.
In the absence of confirming analyses to support less stringent requirements, the following rules apply to those areas in which the only source of fire is electrical. Areas in which the only source of fire is electrical are divided into two groups--cable spreading rooms and general plant areas. (See Section 8.3.1.4.1.4 for exemptions) Table 8.3-5 contains analyses of alternate minimum separation distances as allowed by RG 1.75.
GENERAL - Routing of instrumentation, control, or power cables through rooms or spaces where there is a potential for accumulation of large quantities of combustible fluids is avoided. Where such routing is unavoidable, only cables of one separation group are allowed. In addition, the cables are enclosed in conduit. Openings in solid floors for vertical runs of cables are sealed with fire resistant material.
GENERAL PLANT AREAS - In plant areas from which equipment with potential hazards such as missiles, external fires, and pipe whip are excluded, the separation criteria are as follows:
: a.
Cable trays of different separation groups have a minimum horizontal separation of 3 feet if no physical barrier exists between the trays. In the limited number of areas where horizontal separation of 3 feet is unattainable, a fire barrier is installed extending at least 1 foot above the top of the tray (or to the ceiling) and 1 foot below the bottom of the tray (or to the floor).
: b.
For cable trays of different separation groups, there is a minimum vertical separation of 5 feet between open-top trays stacked vertically. In the limited number of areas where trays of different separation groups are stacked with less than 5 feet of vertical separation, a fire barrier is placed between the two separation groups. The barrier extends 1 foot to each side of the tray system (or to the wall).
8.3-28 Rev. 27


GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS - Equipment and system grounding were designed using IEEE 80, 1971 "Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding," and IEEE 142, 1972, "Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power
WOLF CREEK
: c.
In the case where a tray of one separation group crosses over a tray of a different separation group and the vertical separation is less than 5 feet, a fire barrier is installed extending 1 foot from each side of each tray and 5 feet along each tray from the crossover.
: d.
Where it is necessary that cables of different separation groups approach the same or adjacent control panels with less than 3-foot horizontal or 5-foot vertical spacing, isolation is maintained by installing both separation groups in steel conduit or enclosed wireway or by installing fire barriers between the separation groups. In the case of horizontal separation, the barrier extends 1 foot below the bottom of the tray (or to the floor) to 1 foot above the top of the tray (or to the ceiling). In the case of vertical spacing, the barrier extends 1 foot on each side of the tray system (or to the wall).
: e.
Isolation between separation groups is considered to be adequate where physical separation is less than that indicated in Items a, b, and c above, provided the circuits of different separation groups are run in enclosed raceways that qualify as barriers or other barriers are installed between the different separation groups. The minimum distance between these enclosed raceways and between barriers and raceways is 1 inch.
The barriers are installed as described in a through d above. Additionally, 600 volt fire-resistive control and power cables are capable of withstanding fire and can be routed with 1.5 inch isolation distance from other separation groups and non-safety raceways and fire resistive cables.
In cases of open trays containing safety-related cables and totally enclosed conduits containing non-safety-related cables, the safety design basis is to protect the safety-related cables from failure of the non-safety-related circuits, and not vice-versa. In consideration of this limit, enclosing the non-safety circuits in raceway and maintaining at least one inch separation provides an acceptable level of protection.
The conduit can contain only a limited quantity of combustible material (cable insulation and jacket).
Furthermore, there is insufficient oxygen inside the conduit to support combustion of more than a fraction of the available material.
Based on these considerations, it is established that one-inch separation between a conduit containing non-safety-related circuits and an open tray containing safety-related circuits is sufficient to assure that any failure within the non-safety related circuits will not propagate into and compromise the integrity of the safety related circuits.
8.3-29 Rev. 27


Systems" as a guide.  
WOLF CREEK CABLE SPREADING AREAS - The cable spreading area does not contain high energy equipment such as switchgear, transformers, rotating equipment, or potential sources of missiles or pipe whip and is not used for storing flammable materials. (Circuits in the cable spreading area are limited to control and instrument functions and also those power supply circuits and facilities serving the control room and instrument systems.) Power supply feeders 480 V and above are installed in enclosed raceways. Separation criteria are as follows:
: a.
he minimum separation distance between redundant Class IE cable trays is 1 foot between trays separated horizontally and 3 feet between trays separated vertically.
: b.
Where termination arrangements preclude maintaining the minimum separation distance, the redundant circuits are run in enclosed raceways or other barriers are provided between redundant circuits. The minimum distance between these redundant enclosed raceways and between barriers and raceways is 1 inch. The fire barriers are installed as described above in "General Plant Areas."
: c.
Arrangement and/or protective barriers preclude locally generated forces or missiles from destroying redundant systems. In the absence of confirming analyses to support less stringent requirements, the following rules have been used:
: 1.
The routing of Class IE circuits and the location of Class IE electrical equipment is reviewed for exposure to hazards such as high pressure piping, missiles, flammable material, and flooding.
A degree of separation or physical protection commensurate with the damage potential of the hazard is provided so that the independence of redundant Class IE subsystems is maintained. The separation of redundant Class IE circuits and equipment makes use of features inherent in the plant design, such as using different rooms or opposite sides of rooms or areas.
: 2.
The separation of Class IE circuits and equipment is such that the required independence is not compromised by the failure of mechanical systems served by the Class IE systems. For example, Class IE circuits are routed or protected so that failure 8.3-30 Rev. 27


8.3-24 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK 8.3.1.1.9  Cable Derating and Cable Tray Fill
WOLF CREEK of related mechanical equipment of one redundant subsystem cannot jeopardize Class IE circuits or equipment essential to the operation of the other redundant subsystem.
: d.
Nonsafety-related cables are not routed through safety-related raceways. However, if a nonsafety-related cable is fed from a safety-related power service it may be routed through safety-related raceways of the same separation group as that of the power service. For discussion of nonsafety-related circuits fed from safety-related sources through isolation devices, refer to Section 8.1.4.3 - Regulatory Guide 1.75.
: e.
Load group 1 and protection channels 1 and 3 and load group 2 and protection channels 2 and 4 cables are routed through separate cable chases and cable spreading rooms. The former circuits enter the lower cable spreading room, while the latter circuits enter the upper cable spreading room.
: f.
The independence of redundant NSSS safety-related systems is discussed below:
Safety-related reactor trip, engineered safety features actuation, and instrumentation and control power supply systems are designed to meet the independence and separation requirements of Criterion 22 of the 1971 General Design Criteria and Paragraph 4.6 of IEEE 279, 1971.
Channel independence is carried throughout the system, extending from the sensor through to the devices actuating the protective function. Physical separation of wiring for each redundant channel set is used.
Redundant analog equipment is separated by locating modules in different protection rack sets.
Each redundant channel set is energized from a separate ac power feed.
There are four separate process protection analog rack sets. Separation of redundant analog channels begins at the process sensors and is maintained in the analog protection racks to the redundant trains in the logic racks. Redundant analog channels are separated by locating modules in different rack sets. Within these racks, field run nonsafety-related shielded cables having a signal level of 100 V or less are routed in common 8.3-31 Rev. 27


The ampacity and group derating factors for cables in conduit duct bank and maintained space trays are in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and IPCEA P-46-426 or the NEC. For randomly filled trays, ICEA
WOLF CREEK wireways with safety-related shielded cables with no physical separation. Internal cabinet safety and nonsafety-related cables are similarly routed.
 
Justification for this method of routing is contained in Reference 1. The field run non safety-related shielded cables to these cabinets are routed in accordance with Reference 1.
P-54-440 with IPCEA P-46-426, as appropriate, is used in conjunction with the
Two reactor trip breakers are actuated by two separate logic matrices which interrupt power to the control rod drive mechanisms. The breaker main contacts are connected in series with the power supply so that opening either breaker interrupts power to all control rod drive mechanisms, permitting the rods to free fall into the core.
 
Protection system channel inputs are separated from the solid state protection system train outputs as follows:
manufacturer's recommendation for cable ampacity and group derating factors. 
 
The cable ampacities are based on a maximum conductor temperature of 90 C, 100-percent load factor, and all cables fully loaded.
 
Cable tray fill, for the various randomly filled tray configurations, is
 
generally limited by the percentage criteria as follows:  45% for raceway
 
containing control and low voltage power cables inside the cable spreading rooms and for raceway containing instrumentation cables;  30% for raceway containing control and low voltage power cables outside the cable spreading
 
rooms. Where these conditions cannot be maintained, a design engineer reviews
 
each case for the adequacy of the design for both physical fill and derating.
 
Conduit fill is in compliance with the provisions of the NEC. Where these provisions cannot be maintained, a design engineer reviews each case and will
 
allow a higher fill percentage based on actual cable sizes, conduit sizes, length of conduit, and number of bends.
 
8.3.1.2  Analysis 8.3.1.2.1  Compliance with General Design Criteria 17 and 18 and
 
Regulatory Guides
 
For discussion of regulatory guides in regard to Class IE ac systems, refer to Section 8.1.4.3.
 
Compliance with General Design Criteria 17 and 18 is discussed in Section 3.1.
 
A failure modes and effects analysis is provided in accordance with IEEE 352-1972. Refer to Table 8.3-4.
 
8.3.1.2.2  Safety-Related Equipment Exposed to Hostile Environment
 
The detailed information on all Class IE equipment that must operate in a hostile environment during and/or subsequent to an accident is furnished in
 
Section 3.11(B) and 3.11(N). 
 
8.3.1.3  Physical Identification of Safety-Related Equipment Each circuit (scheme) and raceway is given a unique alphanumeric identification. This identification provides a means of distinguishing a circuit or raceway association with a particular channel or load group, and is assigned on the basis of the following criteria:
 
8.3-25 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK SEPARATION GROUP 1 - A safety-related instrumentation, control, or power scheme/raceway associated with safety-related load group 1 or protection system channel 1.
 
SEPARATION GROUP 2 - A safety-related instrumentation, control, or power
 
scheme/raceway associated with protection system channel 2.  
 
SEPARATION GROUP 3 - A safety-related instrumentation, power, or control scheme/raceway associated with protection system channel 3.
 
SEPARATION GROUP 4 - A safety-related instrumentation, control, or power
 
scheme/raceway associated with safety-related load group 2 or protection system channel 4.
 
Nonsafety-related cables and raceways associated with normal plant (non-Class
 
IE) equipment are uniquely identified and separately routed from safety-related
 
cables and raceways, as described in Section 8.1.4.3.
The unique identification afforded all nonsafety-related cables is generally 
 
black; however, other colors (other than Red, White, Blue and Yellow) may be 
 
used for non-safety related cable in isolated cases.
 
Nameplates with colored backgrounds are provided for all IEEE 308 Class lE equipment (such as transformers, motors, motor control centers, switchgear, panels, and switchboards) under A/E scope. Each separation group has its
 
distinguishing color. The applicable channel or load group designation is
 
marked on each nameplate. For the identification of instrumentation and control equipment, refer to Section 7.1.2.3.
 
Raceways are marked in a distinct, permanent manner at intervals not to exceed
 
15 feet and at points of entry to, and exit from, enclosed areas.
 
The 600 volt fire-resistive control and power cables are routed independent of raceways. The fire-resisitive cables are distinctly and permanently marked in
 
the same manner as described above for raceways.  
 
Color identification is provided for each separation group of field-wired, safety-related cables.
 
Within control panels where more than one separation group is present, wiring
 
is identified by separation group designation or, if enclosed by conduit, the
 
conduit is identified by separation group designation.
 
8.3-26 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK Within a cabinet or panel which is associated and identified with a single separation group, the internal wiring is exclusively associated with the same
 
separation group and, therefore, requires no further identification.
In cases where the majority of the wiring within a cabinet or panel is
 
primarily one separation group, standard color wire and/or sleeves for the
 
majority separation group is used. The remaining wiring is identified, using
 
the appropriate color, as defined in applicable specifications or drawings.
When colored sleeves are used in lieu of colored wiring, the sleeves are provided at both ends of the wire and at strategic intervals along its length.
 
Design drawings provide distinct identification of Class IE equipment.
 
Operating and maintenance documents pertaining to Class IE equipment are distinctly identified.
 
8.3.1.4  Independence of Redundant Systems 8.3.1.4.1  Separation Criteria
 
This section establishes the criteria and the bases for preserving the
 
independence of redundant Class IE power systems.
 
8.3.1.4.1.1  Raceway and Cable Routing
: a. Wherever possible, cable trays are arranged from top to bottom, with trays containing the highest voltage cables at the top and trays containing the lowest voltage  cables at the bottom. A raceway designated for a single  voltage category of cables contains only cables of the same voltage category. Voltage categories are:
: 1. 15-kV power (non-Class IE)
: 2. 5-kV power
: 3. Large 600-V power (cables from load centers)
: 4. 600-V power (cables from motor control centers,  control and digital signal cables)
: 5. Instrumentation cables
: b. Cables associated with each safety-related separation group, as defined in Section 8.3.1.3, are run in separate conduits, cable trays, ducts, and penetrations.
 
8.3-27 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK The 600 volt fire-resistive control and power cables are routed independent of raceways. The fire-resistive cables are routed in the same manner as conduits.
: c. The arrangement of electrical equipment and cabling
 
minimizes the possibility of a fire in one separation group from propagating to another separation group.
In the absence of confirming analyses to support less stringent requirements, the following rules apply to those areas in which the only source of fire is electrical. Areas in which the only source of fire is electrical are divided into two groups--cable spreading rooms and general plant areas.  (See Section 8.3.1.4.1.4 for exemptions)  Table 8.3-5 contains analyses of alternate minimum separation distances as allowed by RG 1.75. GENERAL - Routing of instrumentation, control, or power cables through rooms or spaces where there is a potential for accumulation of large quantities of
 
combustible fluids is avoided. Where such routing is unavoidable, only cables
 
of one separation group are allowed. In addition, the cables are enclosed in
 
conduit. Openings in solid floors for vertical runs of cables are sealed with fire resistant material.
 
GENERAL PLANT AREAS - In plant areas from which equipment with potential
 
hazards such as missiles, external fires, and pipe whip are excluded, the
 
separation criteria are as follows:
: a. Cable trays of different separation groups have a
 
minimum horizontal separation of 3 feet if no physical barrier exists between the trays. In the limited number of areas where horizontal separation of 3 feet is unattainable, a fire barrier is installed extending at least 1 foot above the top of the tray (or to the ceiling) and 1 foot below the bottom of the tray (or to the floor).
: b. For cable trays of different separation groups, there is a minimum vertical separation of 5 feet between open-top trays stacked vertically. In the limited number of areas where trays of different separation groups are stacked with less than 5 feet of vertical separation, a fire barrier is placed between the two separation groups. The barrier extends 1 foot to each side of the tray system (or to the wall).
 
8.3-28 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK c. In the case where a tray of one separation group crosses over a tray of a different separation group and the vertical separation is less than 5 feet, a fire barrier is installed extending 1 foot from each side of each tray and 5 feet along each tray from the crossover.
: d. Where it is necessary that cables of different
 
separation groups approach the same or adjacent control panels with less than 3-foot horizontal or 5-foot vertical spacing, isolation is maintained by installing both separation groups in steel conduit or enclosed wireway or by installing fire barriers between the separation groups. In the case of horizontal separation, the barrier extends 1 foot below the bottom of the tray (or to the floor) to 1 foot above the top of the tray (or to the ceiling). In the case of vertical spacing, the barrier extends 1 foot on each side of the tray system (or to the wall).
: e. Isolation between separation groups is considered to be
 
adequate where physical separation is less than that indicated in Items a, b, and c above, provided the circuits of different separation groups are run in enclosed raceways that qualify as barriers or other barriers are installed between the different separation groups. The minimum distance between these enclosed raceways and between barriers and raceways is 1 inch.
The barriers are installed as described in a through d above. Additionally, 600 volt fire-resistive control and power cables are capable of withstanding fire and can be
 
routed with 1.5 inch isolation distance from other separation groups and non-safety raceways and fire resistive cables.
 
In cases of open trays containing safety-related cables and totally enclosed conduits containing non-safety-related cables, the safety design basis is to protect the safety-related cables from failure of the non-  safety-related circuits, and not vice-versa. In  consideration of this limit, enclosing the non-safety circuits in raceway and maintaining at least one inch separation provides an acceptable level of protection.
The conduit can contain only a limited quantity of  combustible material (cable insulation and jacket). Furthermore, there is insufficient oxygen inside the conduit to support combustion of more than a fraction of the available material.
 
Based on these considerations, it is established that  one-inch separation between a conduit containing non-  safety-related circuits and an open tray containing safety-related circuits is sufficient to assure that any failure within the non-safety related circuits will not propagate into and compromise the integrity of the safety related circuits.
 
8.3-29 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK CABLE SPREADING AREAS - The cable spreading area does not contain high energy equipment such as switchgear, transformers, rotating equipment, or potential
 
sources of missiles or pipe whip and is not used for storing flammable materials.  (Circuits in the cable spreading area are limited to control and instrument functions and also those power supply circuits and facilities
 
serving the control room and instrument systems.)  Power supply feeders 480 V
 
and above are installed in enclosed raceways. Separation criteria are as
 
follows:  a. he minimum separation distance between redundant Class IE cable trays is 1 foot between trays separated horizontally and 3 feet between trays separated
 
vertically.
: b. Where termination arrangements preclude maintaining the minimum separation distance, the redundant circuits are run in enclosed raceways or other barriers are provided between redundant circuits. The minimum distance  between these redundant enclosed raceways and between  barriers and raceways is 1 inch. The fire barriers are installed as described above in "General Plant Areas."
: c. Arrangement and/or protective barriers preclude locally  generated forces or missiles from destroying redundant  systems. In the absence of confirming analyses to support less stringent requirements, the following rules have been used:
: 1. The routing of Class IE circuits and the location  of Class IE electrical equipment is reviewed for  exposure to hazards such as high pressure piping,  missiles, flammable material, and flooding.
 
A degree of separation or physical protection  commensurate with the damage potential of the hazard is provided so that the independence of redundant Class IE subsystems is maintained. The separation of redundant Class IE circuits and  equipment makes use of features inherent in the  plant design, such as using different rooms or opposite sides of rooms or areas.
: 2. The separation of Class IE circuits and equipment  is such that the required independence is not  compromised by the failure of mechanical systems served by the Class IE systems. For example, Class IE circuits are routed or protected so that failure
 
8.3-30 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK of related mechanical equipment of one  redundant subsystem cannot jeopardize Class IE  circuits or equipment essential to the operation of  the other redundant subsystem.
: d. Nonsafety-related cables are not routed through safety-related raceways. However, if a nonsafety-related cable is fed from a safety-related power service it may be  routed through safety-related raceways of the same  separation group as that of the power service. For discussion of nonsafety-related circuits fed from safety-related sources through isolation devices, refer to Section 8.1.4.3 - Regulatory Guide 1.75.
: e. Load group 1 and protection channels 1 and 3 and load group 2 and protection channels 2 and 4 cables are routed through separate cable chases and cable spreading rooms. The former circuits enter the lower cable  spreading room, while the latter circuits enter the upper cable spreading room.
: f. The independence of redundant NSSS safety-related systems is discussed below:
Safety-related reactor trip, engineered safety features actuation, and instrumentation and control power supply systems are designed to meet the independence and separation requirements of Criterion 22 of the 1971  General Design Criteria and Paragraph 4.6 of IEEE 279,  1971.  
 
Channel independence is carried throughout the system, extending from the sensor through to the devices  actuating the protective function. Physical separation  of wiring for each redundant channel set is used.
Redundant analog equipment is separated by locating modules in different protection rack sets.
 
Each redundant channel set is energized from a separate  ac power feed.
 
There are four separate process protection analog rack sets. Separation of redundant analog channels begins at  the process sensors and is maintained in the analog  protection racks to the redundant trains in the logic racks. Redundant analog channels are separated by locating modules in different rack sets. Within these racks, field run nonsafety-related shielded cables having a signal level of 100 V or less are routed in common 
 
8.3-31 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK wireways with safety-related shielded cables with no physical separation. Internal cabinet safety and nonsafety-related cables are similarly routed.
Justification for this method of routing is contained in Reference 1. The field run non safety-related shielded cables to these cabinets are routed in accordance with Reference
: 1.
: 1.
Two reactor trip breakers are actuated by two separate logic matrices which interrupt power to the control rod drive mechanisms. The breaker main contacts are connected in series with the power supply so that opening either breaker interrupts power to all control rod drive mechanisms, permitting the rods to free fall into the core.
Shielded cables defined in the NSSS vendor protection system documentation (process sensing circuits, solid state protection system logic cabinet inputs from control board switches, and pushbuttons) are separated from 120-V ac instrumentation and vital instrument bus voltage cables and 120-V ac and 125-V dc control voltage cables.
 
: 2.
Protection system channel inputs are separated from the solid state protection system train outputs as follows:
Prefabricated cables which connect process control system 24-V dc signals to the protection system input are separated from the 120-V ac instrumentation and vital instrument bus voltage cables, 120-V ac and 125-V dc control voltage cables.
: 1. Shielded cables defined in the NSSS vendor protection system documentation (process sensing circuits, solid state protection system logic cabinet inputs from control board switches, and pushbuttons) are separated from 120-V ac instrumentation and vital instrument bus voltage cables and 120-V ac and 125-V dc control voltage cables. 2. Prefabricated cables which connect process control system 24-V dc signals to the protection system input are separated from the 120-V ac instrumentation and vital instrument bus voltage cables, 120-V ac and 125-V dc control voltage cables.
: 3.
: 3. The 48-V dc reactor trip logic Train A and Train B output circuits are installed in separate conduits.
The 48-V dc reactor trip logic Train A and Train B output circuits are installed in separate conduits.
: 4. Train A protection system outputs (120-V ac and 125-V dc Class IE control voltage unshielded cables only) are contained in the same tray as protection system channel I unshielded cables.
: 4.
: 5. Train B protection system outputs (120-V ac and 125-V dc Class IE control voltage unshielded cables only) are contained in the same tray as protection system channel IV unshielded cables.
Train A protection system outputs (120-V ac and 125-V dc Class IE control voltage unshielded cables only) are contained in the same tray as protection system channel I unshielded cables.
These requirements are complied with in the field circuiting.  
: 5.
 
Train B protection system outputs (120-V ac and 125-V dc Class IE control voltage unshielded cables only) are contained in the same tray as protection system channel IV unshielded cables.
8.3-32 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK 8.3.1.4.1.2  Control Boards and Other Panels
These requirements are complied with in the field circuiting.
 
8.3-32 Rev. 27  
Within the control boards and other panels associated with protection systems, circuits and instruments of different separation groups (see Section 8.3.1.3) are independent and physically separated horizontally and vertically by a
 
distance of 6 inches. Where physical separation is impracticable, conduit
 
and/or fire barriers are utilized to maintain independence.
 
Single control devices to which different separation groups are connected are avoided, wherever practicable. Where single devices are unavoidable, electrical isolation is provided. Devices that provide electrical isolation
 
include relays, isolation amplifiers, and solid-state optical couplers. A
 
small number of control switches (e.g., reactor trip switches, lockout relays) contain different separation group wiring to their control contacts. For these switches, electrical independence is maintained, and physical barriers are
 
provided between each separation group. Within control boards and other panels, nonsafety-related wiring is not harnessed together with safety-related wiring. 
 
However, if an associated nonsafety-related cable is supplied from a safety-related bus it is treated as a safety-related cable and is harnessed with safety-related cables of the same group. Harnesses of different separation


groups are separated physically by a distance of 6 inches. Where physical  
WOLF CREEK 8.3.1.4.1.2 Control Boards and Other Panels Within the control boards and other panels associated with protection systems, circuits and instruments of different separation groups (see Section 8.3.1.3) are independent and physically separated horizontally and vertically by a distance of 6 inches. Where physical separation is impracticable, conduit and/or fire barriers are utilized to maintain independence.
Single control devices to which different separation groups are connected are avoided, wherever practicable. Where single devices are unavoidable, electrical isolation is provided. Devices that provide electrical isolation include relays, isolation amplifiers, and solid-state optical couplers. A small number of control switches (e.g., reactor trip switches, lockout relays) contain different separation group wiring to their control contacts. For these switches, electrical independence is maintained, and physical barriers are provided between each separation group. Within control boards and other panels, nonsafety-related wiring is not harnessed together with safety-related wiring.
However, if an associated nonsafety-related cable is supplied from a safety-related bus it is treated as a safety-related cable and is harnessed with safety-related cables of the same group. Harnesses of different separation groups are separated physically by a distance of 6 inches. Where physical separation is impracticable, fire barriers, conduit, or wire duct is used to maintain independence.
8.3.1.4.1.3 Reactor Containment Penetration Areas Two separate penetration areas are provided for cables that must pass through the containment wall. The south penetration area contains cable for Separation Groups 2 and 4, each group having separate penetration assemblies. The north penetration area contains cable for Separation Groups l and 3, each group again having separate penetration assemblies. Raceway separation criteria, as described in this section, apply in routing cable through the penetration areas.
8.3.1.4.1.4 Exemptions from Physical Separation Requirements A limited number of specific raceway and panel configurations exist for which the previously given separation requirements are not imposed due to practical limitations. These exemptions are identified in E-1R8902. The evaluation criteria for acceptance of these exemptions is as follows:
A)
Class 1E raceway is assumed lost and the effects are determined.
Exception is allowed provided the loss does not affect safe shutdown; OR B)
Non-Class 1E circuits are energized only during maintenance when Class 1E circuits are out of service. Non-Class 1E circuits are isolated from the Class 1E circuits by administrative controls; OR C)
Deviations are evaluated based upon a review of Electrical Raceway Separation Verification Test Reports for Limerick Units 1 & 2 and the WCNOC overcurrent protection system.
8.3-33 Rev. 27


separation is impracticable, fire barriers, conduit, or wire duct is used to
WOLF CREEK Review/Analysis -- Wyle Laboratories conducted tests for Limerick Units 1 and 2 (Test Report 46960-1 and 46960-3) to justify separation which is less than the standard distance. They used similar cables of the same size (and larger) as the WCNOC cables in question. Their tests are based on the following failure mode assumptions:
 
: 1. The cable or equipment in the circuit develops a fault that is not cleared due to the failure of the primary overcurrent protective device.
maintain independence.
8.3.1.4.1.3  Reactor Containment Penetration Areas
 
Two separate penetration areas are provided for cables that must pass through
 
the containment wall. The south penetration area contains cable for Separation Groups 2 and 4, each group having separate penetration assemblies. The north penetration area contains cable for Separation Groups l and 3, each group again
 
having separate penetration assemblies. Raceway separation criteria, as
 
described in this section, apply in routing cable through the penetration
 
areas. 8.3.1.4.1.4  Exemptions from Physical Separation Requirements
 
A limited number of specific raceway and panel configurations exist for which
 
the previously given separation requirements are not imposed due to practical limitations. These exemptions are identified in E-1R8902. The evaluation criteria for acceptance of these exemptions is as follows:
 
A) Class 1E raceway is assumed lost and the effects are determined. 
 
Exception is allowed provided the loss does not affect safe shutdown; OR  B) Non-Class 1E circuits are energized only during maintenance when Class 1E circuits are out of service. Non-Class 1E circuits are isolated
 
from the Class 1E circuits by administrative controls; OR C) Deviations are evaluated based upon a review of Electrical Raceway Separation Verification Test Reports for Limerick Units 1 & 2 and the WCNOC overcurrent protection system.
 
8.3-33 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK Review/Analysis -- Wyle Laboratories conducted tests for Limerick Units 1 and 2 (Test Report 46960-1 and 46960-3) to justify separation which is less than the  
 
standard distance. They used similar cables of the same size (and larger) as the WCNOC cables in question. Their tests are based on the following failure mode assumptions:
: 1. The cable or equipment in the circuit develops a fault that is not cleared due to the failure of the primary   overcurrent protective device.
: 2. The fault current level (660 amps) is just below the long-term trip setpoint of the next higher level overcurrent device.
: 2. The fault current level (660 amps) is just below the long-term trip setpoint of the next higher level overcurrent device.
: 3. The impedance of the fault adjusts itself automatically to maintain the fault current magnitude at a constant level as the resistance of the wire increases due to
: 3. The impedance of the fault adjusts itself automatically to maintain the fault current magnitude at a constant level as the resistance of the wire increases due to heating.
 
heating.
: 4. There are no other loads on the same circuit which would cause the next high level overcurrent device to trip.
: 4. There are no other loads on the same circuit which would cause the next high level overcurrent device to trip.
: 5. The overload wire can maintain the continuous overheated   condition without an operator being aware of the condition.  
: 5. The overload wire can maintain the continuous overheated condition without an operator being aware of the condition.
 
Philadelphia Electric Company's Design Verification Test Report #48503 showed that heating effects due to wiring faults which caused sustained overcurrent conditions with the above assumptions had the greatest impact on adjacent wires. The results of their tests revealed the following:
Philadelphia Electric Company's Design Verification Test Report #48503 showed  
: 1. Cable sized #4/0 AWG and smaller when energized with 660 amps and routed in an open cable tray, did not ignite.
 
Cables were tested in both horizontal and vertical tray configurations and did not ignite in any case.
that heating effects due to wiring faults which caused sustained overcurrent conditions with the above assumptions had the greatest impact on adjacent wires. The results of their tests revealed the following:
: 1. Cable sized #4/0 AWG and smaller when energized with 660 amps and routed in an open cable tray, did not ignite. Cables were tested in both horizontal and vertical tray   configurations and did not ignite in any case.
Configuration with a 1" vertical separation between cable trays and zero separation between cable tray and enclosed raceway were tested successfully without damage.
Configuration with a 1" vertical separation between cable trays and zero separation between cable tray and enclosed raceway were tested successfully without damage.
: 2. No separation was required between an enclosed raceway and another enclosed raceway or cable tray when the enclosed raceway contains cables which are #4/0 AWG and
: 2. No separation was required between an enclosed raceway and another enclosed raceway or cable tray when the enclosed raceway contains cables which are #4/0 AWG and smaller.
 
: 3. One inch separation between an enclosed raceway and another enclosed raceway or cable tray is required when the enclosed raceway contains cables larger than #4/0 AWG.
smaller.
8.3-34 Rev. 27  
: 3. One inch separation between an enclosed raceway and another enclosed raceway or cable tray is required when the enclosed raceway contains cables larger than #4/0
 
AWG.  
 
8.3-34 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK The Electrical Raceway Separation Verification Test reports for Limerick Units 1 & 2 are applicable to WCNOC for the following reasons:
: 1. WCNOC uses similar cables made by the same manufactures as the cables used in the test. Cables used by WCNOC made by different manufactures
 
than those used in the test use the same type of insulation material (cross-linked polyethylene or cross-linked ethylene propylene rubber)


and jacket material (chlorosulfonated polyethylene or neoprene). In addition, all class 1E cables, with the exception of stanless steel fire-resistive cables, are qualified to the same standards such as IEEE-323 and IEEE-383 and are manufactured to the same IPCEA standards. Stanless steel fire-resistive cables have been type tested for exceeding the standards of IEEE-323 and IEEE-383.
WOLF CREEK The Electrical Raceway Separation Verification Test reports for Limerick Units 1 & 2 are applicable to WCNOC for the following reasons:
: 1. WCNOC uses similar cables made by the same manufactures as the cables used in the test. Cables used by WCNOC made by different manufactures than those used in the test use the same type of insulation material (cross-linked polyethylene or cross-linked ethylene propylene rubber) and jacket material (chlorosulfonated polyethylene or neoprene). In addition, all class 1E cables, with the exception of stanless steel fire-resistive cables, are qualified to the same standards such as IEEE-323 and IEEE-383 and are manufactured to the same IPCEA standards. Stanless steel fire-resistive cables have been type tested for exceeding the standards of IEEE-323 and IEEE-383.
: 2. The WCNOC electrical raceway configurations are similar to the electrical raceway configurations used in the test.
: 2. The WCNOC electrical raceway configurations are similar to the electrical raceway configurations used in the test.
: 3. The fault current used in the test is very conservative compared to the maximum credible fault current that could develop for the  
: 3. The fault current used in the test is very conservative compared to the maximum credible fault current that could develop for the configuration of circuits described above in this section.
 
Physical separation between transient electrical cables and Class 1E raceway/cables/equipment may on a temporary basis fail to meet the 3 foot - 5 foot requirement per Reg. Guide 1.75 Rev. 1 and IEEE 384-1974.
configuration of circuits described above in this section.  
Transient electrical cables are defined as follows: transient electrical cables are those non-safety related cables used on a temporary basis in support of field work activities or testing/monitoring which will remain in place for a short duration of time and which do not require a permanent plant modification or a temporary modification for their use. Transient cables typically include but are not limited to: extension cords, temporary power leads, temporary lighting cords, hand power tool cords, welding leads, communication cables, computer cables, video cables, test leads, (DMMs, recorders, data acquisition equipment, etc.) and instrumentation leads.
 
Transient cable separation requirements are delineated in plant administrative procedures. All deviations from the administrative procedures will require an engineering evaluation.
Physical separation between transient electrical cables and Class 1E  
Physical separation between the non-safety related Local Area Network (LAN) cable and Class 1E raceway may on a limited basis, fail to meet the 3 foot horizontal and 5 foot vertical requirement of R.G. 1.75 and IEEE 384-1974.
 
These cables are installed in free air. Physical separation of 1 inch horizontal and 3 inches vertical is maintained between the free air cables and Class 1E raceway.
raceway/cables/equipment may on a temporary basis fail to meet the 3 foot - 5 foot requirement per Reg. Guide 1.75 Rev. 1 and IEEE 384-1974.  
LAN cables inside the power block consist of fiber optic cables and 4 pair - 24 AWGUTP, Category 5/5e cables, both of which meet the flame spread requirements of WCNOC design document, E-11013, section 3.0. The fiber optic cable carries no electrical energy, cannot conduct electrical current and will not propagate a flame. Consequently these cables pose no risk to Class 1E electrical circuits. The 24 AWGUTP Category 5 copper conductor cables carry digital computer data only and consequently do not pose a risk with respect to degrading the functions of Class 1E electrical circuits.
 
8.3-35 Rev. 27
Transient electrical cables are defined as follows: transient electrical  
 
cables are those non-safety related cables used on a temporary basis in support  


of field work activities or testing/monitoring which will remain in place for a short duration of time and which do not require a permanent plant modification or a temporary modification for their use. Transient cables typically include
WOLF CREEK 8.3.1.4.2 Administrative Responsibilities and Controls for Assuring Separation Criteria During Design and Installation The scheme and raceway channel identification (refer to Section 8.3.1.3) facilitated and ensured the maintenance of separation in the routing of cables and the connection of control boards and panels. At the time of the cable routing assignment in the design office, the routing engineer checked to ensure that the separation group designation on the scheme to be routed was compatible with the raceways in the intended route. Extensive use of computer program checks helped ensure separation. Each circuit and raceway was identified in the computer program, and the identification included the applicable separation group. The program used in routing specifically checked to ensure that cables of a particular separation group were routed through the appropriate raceways.
The routing was also confirmed by quality control personnel, during installation, to be consistent with the design document. Color identification of equipment and cabling (refer to Section 8.3.1.3) assisted field personnel in this effort.
8.3.2 DC POWER SYSTEMS 8.3.2.1 Description Site dc power is supplied at 125 volts from two independent sources within the power block, Buses PK01 and PK02 as shown in Figure 8.3-6 sheet 2, neither of which is a Class 1E power bus. One fused disconnect switch at each source delivers power to the site through underground feeders. Each site feeder supplies a 125-V dc distribution panel at the shop building. Each distribution panel supplies miscellaneous dc loads at the shop building, and a 125-V dc distribution panel at the non-Class 1E circulating water screenhouse. These distribution panels supply miscellaneous dc loads at the screenhouse.
Interconnection of the independent power block buses is prevented at all levels of distribution.
The makeup water screenhouse is provided with a 125-V dc wet cell storage battery. The battery is rated at 160 ampere-hours and is trickle-charged from a static battery charger. The battery supplies a 125-V dc distribution panel, which in turn supplies miscellaneous dc loads at the screenhouse.
The powerblock dc power system for WCGS consists of four independent Class 1E 125-V dc subsystems, four non-Class 1E 125-V dc subsystems, and one non-Class 1E 250-V dc system. The dc power system is designed to provide reliable and continuous power for controls, instrumentation, inverters, and dc emergency auxiliaries.
8.3-36 Rev. 27


but are not limited to:  extension cords, temporary power leads, temporary
WOLF CREEK The Class 1E dc system provides dc electric power to the Class 1E dc loads and for control and switching of the Class 1E systems. Physical separation, electrical isolation, and redundancy are provided to comply with the requirements of IEEE 308. The four class 1E dc power subsystems are shown in Figure 8.3-6, sheet 1. Subsystems 1 and 4 provide control power for ac Load Groups 1 and 2, respectively. These subsystems also provide vital instrumentation and control power for channels 1 and 4, respectively, of the reactor protection and engineered safety features systems. DC subsystems 2 and 3 provide vital instrumentation and control power for channels 2 and 3, respectively, of the reactor protection and engineered safety features systems.
Each Class 1E dc power subsystem consists of one 125-V battery, one battery charger, one inverter, and distribution switchboards. The battery chargers for dc subsystems 1 and 3 are supplied 480-V ac power from different Class 1E busses of Load Group 1. Similarly, the battery chargers for dc subsystems 2 and 4 are supplied 480-V ac power from different Class 1E busses of Load Group 2.
The inverters provide four independent 120-V ac vital instrumentation and control power supplies for the channels of reactor protection and engineered safety features systems.
Two spare battery chargers and two swing (spare) inverters are provided for the power block. The spare chargers are located in the ESF Switchgear rooms and are connected in place of failed chargers via non-automatic transfer switches.
The Train A swing inverter is located in the Train A ESF room and the Train B swing inverter is located in the Train B ESF room. These are aligned to replace the selected inverter via non-automatic transfer switches. In the event of a charger or inverter failure, the spare charger/swing inverter is connected to the affected system permitting the malfunctioning equipment to be repaired without long term disruption of the system.
The batteries, racks, chargers, inverters, and auxiliary distribution equipment (switchboards) are designated seismic Category I, and are designed to maintain their functional capability during and after an SSE. The electrical equipment qualification is discussed in Section 3.10(B) and 3.10(N).
The non-Class IE loads for the power block are supplied by separate dc systems.
A 125-V dc system PK03 and PK04 is provided to supply nonvital control and instrumentation. Two 200-A dc feeders are provided to supply the site system dc control loads. In addition, a 250-V dc system is provided to supply nonvital dc motors, such as emergency lube oil pumps and emergency seal oil pumps. The 125-V dc system, in conjunction with inverters, also serves as the back-up source of power for the computers and fire detection system.
The 250-V dc system includes one battery and two battery chargers, one charger serving as a backup for the other. The non-Class IE 125-V dc system includes four batteries, each of which has one battery charger.
One battery charger of the 250-V dc system and all battery chargers of the non-Class IE 125-V dc system are supplied 480-V ac power from the standby power system.
The 125-V and 250-V dc non-Class 1E and 125-v dc Class 1E systems are subjected to a maximum voltage of 140V (for 125V) and 280V (for 250V) dc. This occurs during the equalization of the batteries. All equipment associated with and connected to the dc systems is designed to withstand the maximum voltage during equalization.
8.3-37 Rev. 29


lighting cords, hand power tool cords, welding leads, communication cables, computer cables, video cables, test leads, (DMM's, recorders, data acquisition equipment, etc.) and instrumentation leads.  
WOLF CREEK 8.3.2.1.1 Safety-Related DC Loads Table 8.3-1 identifies loads related to each Class IE 125-V dc subsystem.
8.3.2.1.2 Class IE Station Batteries and Battery Chargers BATTERY CAPACITY - The WCGS Class IE batteries are sized in excess of that required to supply the loads in Tables 8.3-2 and 8.3-3 for 240 minutes. The required capacity is initially evaluated from design loads, with margin, imposed on each battery throughout the 240-minute duty cycle.
From this capacity, a margin of 25 percent is applied to ensure that the rated battery capacity is at least 125 percent of that required. This margin is consistent with the 80 percent capacity battery replacement criteria given in IEEE 450-1995.
As a result of the above sizing, the WCGS batteries are selected from those larger sizes that are commercially available. The resulting final battery selection is in excess of 150 percent of the system requirements.
BATTERY CHARGER CAPACITY - The capacity of each Class IE battery charger is based on the largest combined demand of all the steady state loads and the charging capacity to restore the battery from the design minimum charge state (one duty cycle) to the fully charged state within 12 hours (irrespective of the status of the plant during which these demands occur).
INSPECTION, MAINTENANCE, AND TESTING - Testing of the dc power system is performed during plant operation, in accordance with Regulatory Guide 1.118 and IEEE Standard 450-1995.
Preoperational tests and inspections were performed in accordance with the procedures described in Chapter 14.0.
8.3.2.1.3 Separation and Ventilation The Class IE batteries, chargers, and dc switchgear of each separation group are located in separate rooms of the seismic Category I control building.
Chargers and dc switchgear are in separate rooms from the batteries. The battery rooms are ventilated by a system which is designed to preclude the possibility of hydrogen accumulation. Section 9.4.1.2 contains a description of the battery room ventilation system. Battery room temperature is controlled or the batteries appropriately derated so that the battery capacity is maintained at a level that satisfies the requirements of Section 8.3.2.1.2.
8.3.2.2 Analysis 8.3.2.2.1 Compliance with General Design Criteria, Regulatory Guides, and Industry Standards The following paragraphs analyze compliance of the Class IE dc power system with Regulatory Guides 1.6, 1.32, 1.41, 1.81, 1.93, 1.128, and 1.129 and IEEE Standards 308-1974 and 450-1995.
Compliance with General Design Criteria 17 and 18 is discussed in Section 3.1.
Refer to Appendix 3A for the applicable revision dates on regulatory guides.
8.3-38 Rev. 27


Transient cable separation requirements are delineated in plant administrative
WOLF CREEK REGULATORY GUIDE 1.6, INDEPENDENCE BETWEEN REDUNDANT STANDBY (ONSITE) POWER SOURCES AND BETWEEN THEIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS - The power block Class IE dc system is separated into four subsystems, two per load group. Each dc subsystem is energized by one battery and one battery charger. Each battery charger is supplied from its associated ac load group. The batteries are exclusively associated with a single 125-V dc bus. No provision exists for transferring loads between redundant 125-V dc subsystems. Thus, sufficient independence and redundancy exist between the 125-V dc subsystems to ensure performance of minimum safety functions, assuming a single failure.
 
Two spare chargers are provided to replace any of the four chargers. The spare chargers are located in the ESF Switchgear rooms, and are connected in place of failed chargers via non-automatic transfer switches.
procedures. All deviations from the administrative procedures will require an
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.32, CRITERIA FOR SAFETY-RELATED ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEMS FOR NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS The requirements of Regulatory Positions C.1 and C.2 pertaining to the dc systems are met as follows:
 
engineering evaluation.
Physical separation between the non-safety related Local Area Network (LAN)
 
cable and Class 1E raceway may on a limited basis, fail to meet the 3 foot
 
horizontal and 5 foot vertical requirement of R.G. 1.75 and IEEE 384-1974. 
 
These cables are installed in "free air". Physical separation of 1 inch horizontal and 3 inches vertical is maintained between the "free air" cables and Class 1E raceway.
 
LAN cables inside the power block consist of fiber optic cables and 4 pair - 24
 
AWGUTP, Category 5/5e cables, both of which meet the flame spread requirements
 
of WCNOC design document, E-11013, section 3.0. The fiber optic cable carries no electrical energy, cannot conduct electrical current and will not propagate a flame. Consequently these cables pose no risk to Class 1E electrical
 
circuits. The 24 AWGUTP Category 5 copper conductor cables carry digital
 
computer data only and consequently do not pose a risk with respect to
 
degrading the functions of Class 1E electrical circuits.
 
8.3-35 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK 8.3.1.4.2 Administrative Responsibilities and Controls for Assuring Separation Criteria During Design and Installation The scheme and raceway channel identification (refer to Section 8.3.1.3)
 
facilitated and ensured the maintenance of separation in the routing of cables
 
and the connection of control boards and panels. At the time of the cable
 
routing assignment in the design office, the routing engineer checked to ensure that the separation group designation on the scheme to be routed was compatible with the raceways in the  intended route. Extensive use of computer program
 
checks helped ensure separation. Each circuit and raceway was identified in the
 
computer program, and the identification included the applicable separation group. The program used in routing specifically checked to ensure that cables of a particular separation group were routed through the appropriate raceways.
 
The routing was also confirmed by quality control personnel, during
 
installation, to be consistent with the design document. Color identification
 
of equipment and cabling (refer to Section 8.3.1.3) assisted field personnel in this effort.
 
8.3.2  DC POWER SYSTEMS
 
8.3.2.1  Description
 
Site dc power is supplied at 125 volts from two independent sources within the
 
power block, Buses PK01 and PK02 as shown in Figure 8.3-6 sheet 2, neither of
 
which is a Class 1E power bus. One fused disconnect switch at each source
 
delivers power to the site through underground feeders. Each site feeder supplies a 125-V dc distribution panel at the shop building. Each distribution panel supplies miscellaneous dc loads at the shop building, and a 125-V dc
 
distribution panel at the non-Class 1E circulating water screenhouse. These
 
distribution panels supply miscellaneous dc loads at the screenhouse. 
 
Interconnection of the independent power block buses is prevented at all levels of distribution.
 
The makeup water screenhouse is provided with a 125-V dc wet cell storage
 
battery. The battery is rated at 160 ampere-hours and is trickle-charged from
 
a static battery charger. The battery supplies a 125-V dc distribution panel, which in turn supplies miscellaneous dc loads at the screenhouse.
 
The powerblock dc power system for WCGS consists of four independent Class 1E
 
125-V dc subsystems, four non-Class 1E 125-V dc subsystems, and one non-Class
 
1E 250-V dc system. The dc power system is designed to provide reliable and continuous power for controls, instrumentation, inverters, and dc emergency auxiliaries.
 
8.3-36 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK The Class 1E dc system provides dc electric power to the Class 1E dc loads and for control and switching of the Class 1E systems. Physical separation, electrical isolation, and redundancy are provided to comply with the requirements of IEEE 308. The four class 1E dc power subsystems are shown in Figure 8.3-6, sheet 1. Subsystems 1 and 4 provide control power for ac Load
 
Groups 1 and 2, respectively. These subsystems also provide vital
 
instrumentation and control power for channels 1 and 4, respectively, of the
 
reactor protection and engineered safety features systems. DC subsystems 2 and 3 provide vital instrumentation and control power for channels 2 and 3, respectively, of the reactor protection and engineered safety features systems.
 
Each Class 1E dc power subsystem consists of one 125-V battery, one battery
 
charger, one inverter, and distribution switchboards. The battery chargers for
 
dc subsystems 1 and 3 are supplied 480-V ac power from different Class 1E busses of Load Group 1. Similarly, the battery chargers for dc subsystems 2 and 4 are supplied 480-V ac power from different Class 1E busses of Load Group 2.
 
The inverters provide four independent 120-V ac vital instrumentation and
 
control power supplies for the channels of reactor protection and engineered safety features systems.
 
Two spare battery chargers and two swing (spare) inverters are provided for the power block. The spare chargers are located in the ESF Switchgear rooms and
 
are connected in place of failed chargers via non-automatic transfer switches.
The Train A swing inverter is located in the Train A ESF room and the Train B swing inverter is located in the Train B ESF room. These are aligned to replace the selected inverter via non-automatic transfer switches. In the event of a charger or inverter failure, the spare charger/swing inverter is connected to the affected system permitting the malfunctioning equipment to be
 
repaired without long term disruption of the system.
 
The batteries, racks, chargers, inverters, and auxiliary distribution equipment (switchboards) are designated seismic Category I, and are designed to maintain
 
their functional capability during and after an SSE. The electrical equipment qualification is discussed in Section 3.10(B) and 3.10(N).
 
The non-Class IE loads for the power block are supplied by separate dc systems. 
 
A 125-V dc system PK03 and PK04 is provided to supply nonvital control and
 
instrumentation. Two 200-A dc feeders are provided to supply the site system dc control loads. In addition, a 250-V dc system is provided to supply nonvital dc motors, such as emergency lube oil pumps and emergency seal oil
 
pumps. The 125-V dc system, in conjunction with inverters, also serves as the
 
back-up source of power for the computers and fire detection system.
 
The 250-V dc system includes one battery and two battery chargers, one charger serving as a backup for the other. The non-Class IE 125-V dc system includes
 
four batteries, each of which has one battery charger.
 
One battery charger of the 250-V dc system and all battery chargers of the non-
 
Class IE 125-V dc system are supplied 480-V ac power from the standby power system.
The 125-V and 250-V dc non-Class 1E and 125-v dc Class 1E systems are subjected
 
to a maximum voltage of 140V (for 125V) and 280V (for 250V) dc. This occurs
 
during the equalization of the batteries. All equipment associated with and connected to the dc systems is designed to withstand the maximum voltage during equalization.
 
8.3-37 Rev. 29 WOLF CREEK 8.3.2.1.1  Safety-Related DC Loads Table 8.3-1 identifies loads related to each Class IE 125-V dc subsystem.
 
8.3.2.1.2  Class IE Station Batteries and Battery Chargers
 
BATTERY CAPACITY - The WCGS Class IE batteries are sized in excess of that
 
required to supply the loads in Tables 8.3-2 and 8.3-3 for 240 minutes. The
 
required capacity is initially evaluated from design loads, with margin, imposed on each battery throughout the 240-minute duty cycle.
 
From this capacity, a margin of 25 percent is applied to ensure that the rated
 
battery capacity is at least 125 percent of that required. This margin is
 
consistent with the 80 percent capacity battery replacement criteria given in IEEE 450-1995.
 
As a result of the above sizing, the WCGS batteries are selected from those
 
larger sizes that are commercially available. The resulting final battery
 
selection is in excess of 150 percent of the system requirements.
BATTERY CHARGER CAPACITY - The capacity of each Class IE battery charger is
 
based on the largest combined demand of all the steady state loads and the
 
charging capacity to restore the battery from the design minimum charge state (one duty cycle) to the fully charged state within 12 hours (irrespective of the status of the plant during which these demands occur).
 
INSPECTION, MAINTENANCE, AND TESTING - Testing of the dc power system is
 
performed during plant operation, in accordance with Regulatory Guide 1.118 and
 
IEEE Standard 450-1995.
Preoperational tests and inspections were performed in accordance with the
 
procedures described in Chapter 14.0.
 
8.3.2.1.3  Separation and Ventilation The Class IE batteries, chargers, and dc switchgear of each separation group
 
are located in separate rooms of the seismic Category I control building. 
 
Chargers and dc switchgear are in separate rooms from the batteries. The
 
battery rooms are ventilated by a system which is designed to preclude the possibility of hydrogen accumulation. Section 9.4.1.2 contains a description of the battery room ventilation system. Battery room temperature is controlled
 
or the batteries appropriately derated so that the battery capacity is
 
maintained at a level that satisfies the requirements of Section 8.3.2.1.2.
 
8.3.2.2  Analysis 8.3.2.2.1  Compliance with General Design Criteria, Regulatory
 
Guides, and Industry Standards
 
The following paragraphs analyze compliance of the Class IE dc power system with Regulatory Guides 1.6, 1.32, 1.41, 1.81, 1.93, 1.128, and 1.129 and IEEE Standards 308-1974 and 450-1995.
 
Compliance with General Design Criteria 17 and 18 is discussed in Section 3.1.
 
Refer to Appendix 3A for the applicable revision dates on regulatory guides.
 
8.3-38 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK REGULATORY GUIDE 1.6, INDEPENDENCE BETWEEN REDUNDANT STANDBY (ONSITE) POWER SOURCES AND BETWEEN THEIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS - The power block Class IE dc  
 
system is separated into four subsystems, two per load group. Each dc subsystem is energized by one battery and one battery charger. Each battery charger is supplied from its associated ac load group. The batteries are  
 
exclusively associated with a single 125-V dc bus. No provision exists for  
 
transferring loads between redundant 125-V dc subsystems. Thus, sufficient  
 
independence and redundancy exist between the 125-V dc subsystems to ensure performance of minimum safety functions, assuming a single failure.  
 
Two spare chargers are provided to replace any of the four chargers. The spare  
 
chargers are located in the ESF Switchgear rooms, and are connected in place of  
 
failed chargers via non-automatic transfer switches.
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.32, CRITERIA FOR SAFETY-RELATED ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEMS FOR  
 
NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS  
 
The requirements of Regulatory Positions C.1 and C.2 pertaining to the dc systems are met as follows:
: a.  
: a.  


Line 2,692: Line 1,054:


==Reference:==
==Reference:==
Paragraph C.1.c of the regulatory guide. The test is performed as specified in IEEE Standard 450-1975 rather than the 3 years specified in Table 2 of IEEE Standard 308-1974.
Paragraph C.1.c of the regulatory guide. The test is performed as specified in IEEE Standard 450-1975 rather than the 3 years specified in Table 2 of IEEE Standard 308-1974.
The battery service test described in IEEE Standard 450-1995 is performed in addition to the battery performance discharge test. The service test intervals will be no longer than 18 months. (See Appendix 3A for discussion of compliance to Regulatory Guide 1.32 in relation to  
The battery service test described in IEEE Standard 450-1995 is performed in addition to the battery performance discharge test. The service test intervals will be no longer than 18 months. (See Appendix 3A for discussion of compliance to Regulatory Guide 1.32 in relation to IEEE Standard 450)
 
IEEE Standard 450)
: c.  
: c.  


Line 2,711: Line 1,071:
Paragraph C.2.b of the regulatory guide.
Paragraph C.2.b of the regulatory guide.
Refer to Regulatory Guide 1.93 below in this section.
Refer to Regulatory Guide 1.93 below in this section.
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.41, PREOPERATIONAL TESTING OF REDUNDANT ON-SITE ELECTRIC  
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.41, PREOPERATIONAL TESTING OF REDUNDANT ON-SITE ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEMS TO VERIFY PROPER LOAD GROUP ASSIGNMENTS - In compliance with this regulatory guide, the Class IE 125-V dc subsystems designed in accordance with Regulatory Guides 1.6 and 1.32 are tested as follows:
: a.
Testing of the dc power system, including an acceptance test of battery capacity, is performed prior to unit operation and after major modifications or repairs in accordance with the procedures described in Chapter 14.0.
: b.
The charger, battery connections, and charger supply are checked for proper assignment to the proper ac load group.
8.3-39 Rev. 27


POWER SYSTEMS TO VERIFY PROPER LOAD GROUP ASSIGNMENTS - In compliance with this regulatory guide, the Class IE 125-V dc subsystems designed in accordance with Regulatory Guides 1.6 and 1.32 are tested as follows:
WOLF CREEK
: a. Testing of the dc power system, including an acceptance test of battery capacity, is performed prior to unit operation and after major modifications or repairs in  accordance with the procedures described in Chapter 14.0. b. The charger, battery connections, and charger supply are checked for proper assignment to the proper ac load
: c. Class IE 125-V dc subsystems are functionally tested, along with the associated ac load group, by discon-necting and isolating the other ac load group, its ac power sources, and the associated dc subsystem. Each test includes simulation of an engineered safety features actuation signal, startup of the standby diesel generator and the load group under test, sequencing of loads, and the functional performance of the loads.
 
During these tests, the ability of the 125-V dc subsystem to perform its intended functions, e.g.,
group.
8.3-39 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK c. Class IE 125-V dc subsystems are functionally tested, along with the associated ac load group, by discon- necting and isolating the other ac load group, its ac power sources, and the associated dc subsystem. Each test includes simulation of an engineered safety features actuation signal, startup of the standby diesel generator and the load group under test, sequencing of loads, and the functional performance of the loads. During these tests, the ability of the 125-V dc subsystem to perform its intended functions, e.g.,
control of diesel generators and Class IE ac switchgear, is checked.
control of diesel generators and Class IE ac switchgear, is checked.
: d. During the testing of the Class IE 125-V dc subsystem associated with one ac load group, the busses of the 125-V dc subsystem associated with the ac load groups not under test are monitored to verify the absence of voltage, indicating no interconnection of the dc  
: d.
 
During the testing of the Class IE 125-V dc subsystem associated with one ac load group, the busses of the 125-V dc subsystem associated with the ac load groups not under test are monitored to verify the absence of voltage, indicating no interconnection of the dc systems.
systems.
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.81, SHARED EMERGENCY AND SHUTDOWN ELECTRIC SYSTEMS FOR MULTI-UNIT NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - WCGS is a single unit plant.
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.81, SHARED EMERGENCY AND SHUTDOWN ELECTRIC SYSTEMS FOR  
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.93, AVAILABILITY OF ELECTRIC POWER SOURCES - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.
 
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.128, INSTALLATION DESIGN AND INSTALLATION OF LARGE LEAD STORAGE BATTERIES FOR NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - The requirements of IEEE 484, 1975 are used for the installation of batteries.
MULTI-UNIT NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - WCGS is a single unit plant.
The battery room ventilation system limits hydrogen concentration to less than 2 percent by volume at any location in the battery area.
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.93, AVAILABILITY OF ELECTRIC POWER SOURCES - Refer to  
Restraining channel beams and tie rods are electrically insulated from the cell cases and are finished with acid-resistant paint.
 
The requirements of Regulatory Guide 1.120 for safety-related battery rooms are complied with. Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.
Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.
The requirements of Regulatory Guide 1.100 are complied with. Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.128, INSTALLATION DESIGN AND INSTALLATION OF LARGE LEAD  
Batteries are located in a well-ventilated location with adequate aisle space and space above cells.
 
STORAGE BATTERIES FOR NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - The requirements of IEEE 484, 1975  
 
are used for the installation of batteries.  
 
The battery room ventilation system limits hydrogen concentration to less than 2 percent by volume at any location in the battery area.  
 
Restraining channel beams and tie rods are electrically insulated from the cell  
 
cases and are finished with acid-resistant paint.
The requirements of Regulatory Guide 1.120 for safety-related battery rooms are  
 
complied with. Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.  
 
The requirements of Regulatory Guide 1.100 are complied with. Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.  
 
Batteries are located in a well-ventilated location with adequate aisle space  
 
and space above cells.  
 
Temperature differential between cells is no greater than 3ø C at a given time.
Temperature differential between cells is no greater than 3ø C at a given time.
The presence of localized heat sources is precluded.  
The presence of localized heat sources is precluded.
 
Eyewash facilities are provided in the corridor between the battery rooms as shown on Figure 1.2-24.
Eyewash facilities are provided in the corridor between the battery rooms as  
Battery racks provide for the mounting of batteries in a two-step configuration.
 
Fire detection sensors and alarms are provided as described in Section 9.5.1.
shown on Figure 1.2-24.
8.3-40 Rev. 27  
Battery racks provide for the mounting of batteries in a two-step  
 
configuration.  
 
Fire detection sensors and alarms are provided as described in Section 9.5.1.  
 
8.3-40 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK During unpacking, any cell with electrolyte level 1/2 inch or more below the top of the plates is replaced.
 
Cells are stored in a clean, level, dry, and cool location. Extremely low ambient temperatures and localized sources of heat are avoided.
 
The recommendations for a freshening charge outlined in IEEE 484, Paragraph
 
5.3.1, are followed after the installation of the batteries.
A hydrogen survey is performed to verify that the ventilation system limits
 
hydrogen concentration to less than 2 percent by volume. This survey data is
 
recorded and maintained in a permanent file for future reference.
 
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.129, MAINTENANCE, TESTING, AND REPLACEMENT OF LARGE LEAD STORAGE BATTERIES FOR NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - The requirements of IEEE 450, 1995
 
are followed as described below.
 
IEEE Standard 308-1974, IEEE Standard Criteria for Class IE Electric Systems for Nuclear Power Generating Stations - For compliance with the ac power requirements of IEEE 308, refer to Section 8.1.4.3.
 
The following provides compliance for the dc power requirements of IEEE 308.
 
The Class IE dc system provides dc electric power to the Class IE dc loads and for the control and switching of the Class IE systems. Physical separation, electrical isolation, and redundancy are provided to prevent the occurrence of
 
common mode failures. The design of the Class IE dc system includes the
 
following:
: a. he dc system is separated into four subsystems.
: b. The safety actions of each group of loads are independent of the safety actions provided by its  redundant counterpart.
: c. Each dc subsystem includes power supplies that consist of one battery and one battery charger.
: d. The batteries are not interconnected.
: e. The batteries do not have a common failure mode.


WOLF CREEK During unpacking, any cell with electrolyte level 1/2 inch or more below the top of the plates is replaced.
Cells are stored in a clean, level, dry, and cool location. Extremely low ambient temperatures and localized sources of heat are avoided.
The recommendations for a freshening charge outlined in IEEE 484, Paragraph 5.3.1, are followed after the installation of the batteries.
A hydrogen survey is performed to verify that the ventilation system limits hydrogen concentration to less than 2 percent by volume. This survey data is recorded and maintained in a permanent file for future reference.
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.129, MAINTENANCE, TESTING, AND REPLACEMENT OF LARGE LEAD STORAGE BATTERIES FOR NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - The requirements of IEEE 450, 1995 are followed as described below.
IEEE Standard 308-1974, IEEE Standard Criteria for Class IE Electric Systems for Nuclear Power Generating Stations - For compliance with the ac power requirements of IEEE 308, refer to Section 8.1.4.3.
The following provides compliance for the dc power requirements of IEEE 308.
The Class IE dc system provides dc electric power to the Class IE dc loads and for the control and switching of the Class IE systems. Physical separation, electrical isolation, and redundancy are provided to prevent the occurrence of common mode failures. The design of the Class IE dc system includes the following:
: a.
he dc system is separated into four subsystems.
: b.
The safety actions of each group of loads are independent of the safety actions provided by its redundant counterpart.
: c.
Each dc subsystem includes power supplies that consist of one battery and one battery charger.
: d.
The batteries are not interconnected.
: e.
The batteries do not have a common failure mode.
Each Class IE dc distribution circuit is capable of transmitting sufficient energy to start and operate all the required loads in that circuit.
Each Class IE dc distribution circuit is capable of transmitting sufficient energy to start and operate all the required loads in that circuit.
Distribution circuits to redundant equipment are independent of each other.
Distribution circuits to redundant equipment are independent of each other.
 
The distribution system is monitored to the extent that it is shown to be ready to perform its intended function. The dc auxiliary devices required to operate the equipment of a specific ac load group are supplied from the dc subsystem of the same load group.
The distribution system is monitored to the extent that it is shown to be ready  
8.3-41 Rev. 27  
 
to perform its intended function. The dc auxiliary devices required to operate  
 
the equipment of a specific ac load group are supplied from the dc subsystem of  
 
the same load group.  
 
8.3-41 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK The batteries are maintained in a fully charged condition and have sufficient stored energy to operate all the necessary circuit breakers and to provide an
 
adequate amount of energy for all required emergency loads for 240 minutes after loss of ac power or charger failure.
 
Each battery charger has sufficient capacity to restore the battery from the
 
design minimum charge (one duty cycle) to its fully charged state while
 
supplying the largest combined demand of the steady-state loads. The battery charger of one subsystem is independent of the battery charger for the redundant subsystem.
 
Instrumentation is provided to monitor the status of each dc subsystem. No
 
instrumentation is shared between subsystems.
A summary annunciator in the control room is provided to alarm on any one of
 
the following conditions. Each condition is also provided with individual
 
alarm windows at the main switchboard.
: a. Charger input breaker open
: b. Charger output breaker open
: c. Charger failure
: d. Charger input ac undervoltage
: e. Charger output dc undervoltage
: f. Charger output dc overvoltage
: g. Dc bus undervoltage
: h. Distribution switchboard undervoltage
: i. Dc ground
: j. Battery circuit continuity monitor
 
Indicating instruments are provided to monitor the following:
: a. Battery output amperes (local and control room)
: b. Bus voltage (local and control room)
: c. Charger output current (local and control room)
: d. Charger output voltage (local only)
: e. Distribution switchboard white light (local only) 
 
8.3-42  Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK Each battery charger has an input ac and output dc circuit breaker for isolation of the charger. Each battery charger power supply is designed to
 
prevent the ac supply from becoming a load on the battery due to a power feedback as the result of the loss of ac power to the chargers.
 
Equipment of the Class IE dc system is protected and isolated by fuses or
 
circuit breakers in the event of a short circuit or overload conditions. 


Indication is provided to identify equipment that is made unavailable per the following:  
WOLF CREEK The batteries are maintained in a fully charged condition and have sufficient stored energy to operate all the necessary circuit breakers and to provide an adequate amount of energy for all required emergency loads for 240 minutes after loss of ac power or charger failure.
Each battery charger has sufficient capacity to restore the battery from the design minimum charge (one duty cycle) to its fully charged state while supplying the largest combined demand of the steady-state loads. The battery charger of one subsystem is independent of the battery charger for the redundant subsystem.
Instrumentation is provided to monitor the status of each dc subsystem. No instrumentation is shared between subsystems.
A summary annunciator in the control room is provided to alarm on any one of the following conditions. Each condition is also provided with individual alarm windows at the main switchboard.
: a.
Charger input breaker open
: b.
Charger output breaker open
: c.
Charger failure
: d.
Charger input ac undervoltage
: e.
Charger output dc undervoltage
: f.
Charger output dc overvoltage
: g.
Dc bus undervoltage
: h.
Distribution switchboard undervoltage
: i.
Dc ground
: j.
Battery circuit continuity monitor Indicating instruments are provided to monitor the following:
: a.
Battery output amperes (local and control room)
: b.
Bus voltage (local and control room)
: c.
Charger output current (local and control room)
: d.
Charger output voltage (local only)
: e.
Distribution switchboard white light (local only) 8.3-42 Rev. 27


WOLF CREEK Each battery charger has an input ac and output dc circuit breaker for isolation of the charger. Each battery charger power supply is designed to prevent the ac supply from becoming a load on the battery due to a power feedback as the result of the loss of ac power to the chargers.
Equipment of the Class IE dc system is protected and isolated by fuses or circuit breakers in the event of a short circuit or overload conditions.
Indication is provided to identify equipment that is made unavailable per the following:
Event Available Indication
Event Available Indication
: a. Battery charger ac Control room summary alarm,   input breaker trip alarm at main switchboard, breaker position at charger
: a. Battery charger ac Control room summary alarm, input breaker trip alarm at main switchboard, breaker position at charger
: b. Battery charger dc Control room summary alarm,   output breaker trip alarm at main switchboard,   breaker position at charger
: b. Battery charger dc Control room summary alarm, output breaker trip alarm at main switchboard, breaker position at charger
: c. Battery fuse blow Control room summary alarm, alarm at main switchboard
: c. Battery fuse blow Control room summary alarm, alarm at main switchboard
: d. Distribution switch- Control room summary alarm, board feeder fuse blow alarm at main switchboard local white light
: d. Distribution switch-Control room summary alarm, board feeder fuse blow alarm at main switchboard local white light
: e. Distribution circuit Individual equipment alarm   fuse blow
: e. Distribution circuit Individual equipment alarm fuse blow
: f. Inverter dc feeder Inverter trouble alarm/static   fuse blow switch transfer
: f. Inverter dc feeder Inverter trouble alarm/static fuse blow switch transfer
: g. Inverter output ac 120-v ac vital bus under-breaker trip voltage alarm
: g. Inverter output ac 120-v ac vital bus under-breaker trip voltage alarm
: h. Battery high rate of Control room computer alarm   discharge  
: h. Battery high rate of Control room computer alarm discharge Periodic testing and surveillance requirements for the Class IE batteries are detailed in the Technical Specifications.
 
Dependable power supplies are provided for the reactor protection system and engineered safety features actuation system. Four independent dc and ac power supplies are provided for control and instrumentation of these systems. The independent dc supplies are provided by distribution circuits from distribution panels on each system. Independent ac supplies are provided by the four inverters and associated 120-v ac vital busses. Refer to Section 8.3.1.1.5 for further description of these vital instrument ac power supplies.
Periodic testing and surveillance requirements for the Class IE batteries are  
8.3-43 Rev. 29


detailed in the Technical Specifications.
WOLF CREEK IEEE STANDARD 450-1995, RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR MAINTENANCE, TESTING, AND REPLACEMENT OF VENTED LEAD-ACID BATTERIES FOR STATIONARY APPLICATIONS - The following recommended practices of IEEE 450 for maintenance, testing, and replacement of batteries are followed for the Class IE batteries:
 
: a.
Dependable power supplies are provided for the reactor protection system and engineered safety features actuation system. Four independent dc and ac power
Maintenance, inspections, and tests, including cell differential temperature measurements, are carried out on a regularly scheduled basis to comply with the requirements of IEEE 450.
 
: b.
supplies are provided for control and instrumentation of these systems. The
An acceptance test of battery capacity is performed at the factory to determine if it meets the specified discharge rate and duration.
 
: c.
independent dc supplies are provided by distribution circuits from distribution
The first performance test of battery capacity was carried out within the first 2 years of service. The subsequent performance tests or modified performance tests of battery capacity are made once every 5 years until the battery shows signs of degradation. Refer to Technical Specification 3.8.4.
 
: d.
panels on each system. Independent ac supplies are provided by the four
Eighteen month performance tests of battery capacity are given to any battery which shows signs of degradation or which has reached 85 percent of the expected service life.
 
: e.
inverters and associated 120-v ac vital busses. Refer to Section 8.3.1.1.5 for further description of these vital instrument ac power supplies.
The battery service tests or modified performance tests described in Sections 5.3 and 5.4 of IEEE Standard 450-1995 are performed at test intervals not to exceed 18 months.
 
If system design is changed so that the previous test is no longer a valid test of the capability of the battery to meet the changed design requirements of the system, a service test is conducted on the new system design.
8.3-43 Rev. 29 WOLF CREEK IEEE STANDARD 450-1995, RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR MAINTENANCE, TESTING, AND  
: f.
 
The rating of the battery when purchased is approximately 50 percent greater than that required to supply the emergency load requirements. 25% of the 50% is reserved for aging margin. This margin permits a battery replacement criteria of 80-percent rated capacity (refer to Section 8.3.2.1.2).
REPLACEMENT OF VENTED LEAD-ACID BATTERIES FOR STATIONARY APPLICATIONS - The following recommended practices of IEEE 450 for maintenance, testing, and replacement of batteries are followed for the Class IE batteries:
: g.
: a. Maintenance, inspections, and tests, including cell differential temperature measurements, are carried out on a regularly scheduled basis to comply with the requirements of IEEE 450.
Records of the data obtained from inspections and tests are kept along with test procedures, to comply with the requirements.
: b. An acceptance test of battery capacity is performed at the factory to determine if it meets the specified discharge rate and duration.
8.3-44 Rev. 27  
: c. The first performance test of battery capacity was carried out within the first 2 years of service. The subsequent performance tests or modified performance tests of battery capacity are made once every 5 years until the   battery shows signs of degradation. Refer to Technical Specification 3.8.4.
: d. Eighteen month performance tests of battery capacity are   given to any battery which shows signs of degradation or   which has reached 85 percent of the expected service life.
: e. The battery service tests or modified performance tests   described in Sections 5.3 and 5.4 of IEEE Standard 450-1995   are performed at test intervals not to exceed 18 months. If system design is changed so that the previous test is no longer a valid test of the capability of the battery to meet the changed design requirements of the system, a service test is conducted on the new system design.
: f. The rating of the battery when purchased is approximately 50 percent greater than that required to supply the emergency load requirements. 25% of the 50% is reserved for aging margin. This margin permits a battery   replacement criteria of 80-percent rated capacity (refer to   Section 8.3.2.1.2).
: g. Records of the data obtained from inspections and tests are kept along with test procedures, to comply with the requirements.  
 
8.3-44 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK 8.3.3  FIRE PROTECTION FOR CABLE SYSTEMS
 
The measures employed for the prevention of and protection against fires in electrical cables are described in Section 9.5.1.
 
Section 8.3.1.4.1, Separation Criteria, provides information regarding
 
separation between redundant cable trays.


WOLF CREEK 8.3.3 FIRE PROTECTION FOR CABLE SYSTEMS The measures employed for the prevention of and protection against fires in electrical cables are described in Section 9.5.1.
Section 8.3.1.4.1, Separation Criteria, provides information regarding separation between redundant cable trays.
8.
8.


==3.4 REFERENCES==
==3.4 REFERENCES==
: 1. Marasco, F. W. and Siroky, R. M., "Westinghouse 7300 Series Process Control System Noise Tests," WCAP-8892-A, June 1977.  
: 1.
Marasco, F. W. and Siroky, R. M., "Westinghouse 7300 Series Process Control System Noise Tests," WCAP-8892-A, June 1977.
8.3-45 Rev. 27


8.3-45 Rev. 27 WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-1 CLASS IE DC SYSTEM LOADS I. DC Subsystem 1 (Separation Group 1)
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-1 CLASS IE DC SYSTEM LOADS I. DC Subsystem 1 (Separation Group 1)
: a. Diesel generator NE01 control and field flashing
: a. Diesel generator NE01 control and field flashing
: b. Solenoid valves, indicating lights, and miscellaneous  
: b. Solenoid valves, indicating lights, and miscellaneous power and controls associated with load group 1
 
power and controls associated with load group 1
: c. Class IE switchgear of load group 1 dc control
: c. Class IE switchgear of load group 1 dc control
: d. Inverter NN11 (or Swing Inverter NN15)
: d. Inverter NN11 (or Swing Inverter NN15)
Line 2,909: Line 1,208:
: g. Load shedder and emergency load sequencer panel
: g. Load shedder and emergency load sequencer panel
: h. Engineered safety feature status panel
: h. Engineered safety feature status panel
: i. Diesel generator 1 control panel  
: i. Diesel generator 1 control panel II. DC Subsystem 4 (Separation Group 4)
 
II. DC Subsystem 4 (Separation Group 4)
: a. Diesel generator NE02 control and field flashing
: a. Diesel generator NE02 control and field flashing
: b. Solenoid valves, indicating lights, and miscellaneous  
: b. Solenoid valves, indicating lights, and miscellaneous power and controls associated with load group 2
 
power and controls associated with load group 2
: c. Class IE switchgear of load group 2 dc control
: c. Class IE switchgear of load group 2 dc control
: d. Inverter NN14 (or Swing Inverter NN16)
: d. Inverter NN14 (or Swing Inverter NN16)
Line 2,923: Line 1,218:
: h. Diesel generator 2 control panel III. DC Subsystem 3 (Separation Group 3)
: h. Diesel generator 2 control panel III. DC Subsystem 3 (Separation Group 3)
: a. Inverter NN13 (or Swing Inverter NN15)
: a. Inverter NN13 (or Swing Inverter NN15)
: b. Miscellaneous indicators, power, and controls associated with Separation Group 3  
: b. Miscellaneous indicators, power, and controls associated with Separation Group 3 Rev. 29  
 
Rev. 29


WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-1 (Sheet 2)
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-1 (Sheet 2)
IV. DC Subsystem 2 (Separation Group 2)
IV. DC Subsystem 2 (Separation Group 2)
: a. Inverter NN12 (or Swing Inverter NN16)
: a. Inverter NN12 (or Swing Inverter NN16)
: b. Miscellaneous indicators, power, controls, and auxiliary feedwater pump turbine controls associated with Separation Group 2  
: b. Miscellaneous indicators, power, controls, and auxiliary feedwater pump turbine controls associated with Separation Group 2 Rev. 29  
 
Rev. 29


WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-2 125 V DC CLASS IE BATTERY LOADING CYCLE (AMPERES REQUIRED PER TIME INTERVAL PER BATTERY AFTER LOSS OF AC POWER)
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-2 125 V DC CLASS IE BATTERY LOADING CYCLE (AMPERES REQUIRED PER TIME INTERVAL PER BATTERY AFTER LOSS OF AC POWER)
SUBSYSTEMS 1 AND 4 Battery Unit and Load 0-1 1-60 60-200 200-201 201-210 210-211 211-220 220-221 221-239 239-240 Profile(1) min min min min min min min min min min  
SUBSYSTEMS 1 AND 4 Battery Unit and Load 0-1 1-60 60-200 200-201 201-210 210-211 211-220 220-221 221-239 239-240 Profile(1) min min min min min min min min min min Total Amps/interval --- NK11 213.38 126.16 129.57 148.68 129.57 148.68 129.57 148.68 129.57 148.68 Total Amps/interval --- NK14 213.17 125.58 125.58 144.56 125.58 144.56 125.58 144.56 125.58 144.56
: 1.
The loading cycle assumes that all continuous loads are running for the entire duration (240 minutes). See applicable engineering calculation for detailed load list. Momentary loads are based on the worst case conditions during the emergency. For example, the first column represents the loads that are required at time zero.
Rev. 32


Total Amps/interval --- NK11 213.38 126.16 129.57 148.68 129.57 148.68 129.57 148.68 129.57 148.68            Total Amps/interval --- NK14 213.17 125.58 125.58 144.56 125.58 144.56 125.58 144.56 125.58 144.56
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-2 (Sheet 2)
: 1. The loading cycle assumes that all continuous loads are running for the entire duration (240 minutes). See applicable engineering calculation for detailed load list. Momentary loads are based on the worst case conditions during the emergency. For example, the first column represents the loads that are required at time zero. 
NOTES:
 
: 1.
Rev. 32 WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-2 (Sheet 2)
The loading cycle assumes that all continuous loads are running for the entire duration (240 minutes).
NOTES: 1. The loading cycle assumes that all continuous loads are running for the entire duration (240 minutes).
Momentary loads are based on the worst case conditions during the emergency. For example, the first column represents the loads that are required at time zero.
Momentary loads are based on the worst case conditions during the emergency. For example, the first column represents the loads that are required at time zero.  
Rev. 26  
 
Rev. 26 WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-3 125 V DC CLASS IE BATTERY LOADING CYCLE (AMPERES REQUIRED PER TIME INTERVAL PER
 
BATTERY AFTER LOSS OF AC POWER)
 
SUBSYSTEMS 2 AND 3
 
Battery Unit and Load 0-1 min 1-240 min Profile(1) 


WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-3 125 V DC CLASS IE BATTERY LOADING CYCLE (AMPERES REQUIRED PER TIME INTERVAL PER BATTERY AFTER LOSS OF AC POWER)
SUBSYSTEMS 2 AND 3 Battery Unit and Load 0-1 min 1-240 min Profile(1)
Total Amps/interval --- NK12 88.08 68.74 Total Amps/interval --- NK13 61.73 61.73
Total Amps/interval --- NK12 88.08 68.74 Total Amps/interval --- NK13 61.73 61.73
: 1. The loading cycle assumes that all continuous loads are running for the entire duration (240 minutes). See applicable engineering calculation for detailed load list.  
: 1.
The loading cycle assumes that all continuous loads are running for the entire duration (240 minutes). See applicable engineering calculation for detailed load list.
Rev. 32


Rev. 32 WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 FAILURE MODES AND EFFECTS ANALYSIS This table presents the failure mode and effects analysis (FMEA) of the engineered safety features (E S F) auxiliary electrical power system. The purpose of the analysis is to demonstrate that the  
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 FAILURE MODES AND EFFECTS ANALYSIS This table presents the failure mode and effects analysis (FMEA) of the engineered safety features (ESF) auxiliary electrical power system. The purpose of the analysis is to demonstrate that the Class IE power system can provide sufficient power to ensure the operation of all ESF loads required for post-accident safe shutdown, assuming a single component failure, as defined in IEEE Standard 308-1974.
 
Components which are included in the analysis are listed on the first sheets of the table. Refer to Figure 8.3-1 sheets 1 through 5 and Figure 8.3-6, sheet 1, for the location of these components in the system.
Class IE power system can provide sufficient power to ensure the  
Rev. 21  
 
operation of all E S F loads required for post-accident safe shutdown, assuming a single component failure, as defined in IEEE  
 
S tandard 308-1974.
Components which are included in the analysis are listed on the  
 
first sheets of the table. Refer to Figure 8.3-1 sheets 1 through  
 
5 and Figure 8.3-6, sheet 1, for the location of these components in the system.
Rev. 21


WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 2)
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 2)
A. LIST OF MAJOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT  
A. LIST OF MAJOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 120-Vac Battery Fusible 125-V 125-V dc Manual Distr 480-V MCC Transformers D-G Chargers Batteries Switches Swbd Distr Swbd Inverters Tsfr Bkr Swbd Breakers 13.8-kV Breakers XNG02 NEO2 NK22 NK12 89NK0201 89NK0402 89NK0404 NK02 NK42 NN12 52NN0201 NN02 52NG02AFF3 252PA0201 (L.G.2) XNG04 XNB02 NK24 NK14 89NK0202 89NK0409 89NK0411 NK04 NK44 NN14 52NN0401 NN04 52NG06EAF1 XNG06 XMR01 NK26* 89NK0209 89NK0204 89NK0405 NK54 NN16 52NG02ADF1 89NK0401 89NK0211 89NK0103 52NG02ABR1 89NK0303 52NG02AFF1 (L.G.1) XNG01 NE01 NK21 NK11 89NK0101 89NK0302 89NK0304 NK01 NK41 NN11 52NN0101 NN01 52NG01ACR3 XNG03 XNB01 NK23 NK13 89NK0102 89NK0309 89NK0311 NK03 NK43 NN13 52NN0301 NN03 52NG05EAF1 XNG05 NK25* 89NK0109 89NK0104 89NK0105 NK51 NN15 52NG01ABF1 89NK0301 89NK0111 89NK0203 52NG01AGF3 89NK0403 52NG01AGF4 AC Transfer Switches DC Transfer Switches (L.G.1) NK77 NK71 NK73 NK75 NK79 (L.G.2) NK78 NK72 NK74 NK76 NK80 Rev. 29  
 
120-Vac                             Battery                   Fusible             125-V 125-V dc               Manual     Distr 480-V MCC Transformers   D-G Chargers Batteries       Switches             Swbd Distr Swbd Inverters   Tsfr Bkr Swbd Breakers   13.8-kV Breakers  
 
XNG02         NEO2 NK22     NK12     89NK0201 89NK0402 89NK0404 NK02 NK42       NN12       52NN0201 NN02   52NG02AFF3 252PA0201 (L.G.2) XNG04 XNB02       NK24     NK14     89NK0202 89NK0409 89NK0411 NK04 NK44       NN14       52NN0401 NN04   52NG06EAF1 XNG06 XMR01       NK26*               89NK0209 89NK0204 89NK0405       NK54       NN16                       52NG02ADF1 89NK0401 89NK0211 89NK0103 52NG02ABR1 89NK0303 52NG02AFF1 (L.G.1) XNG01         NE01 NK21     NK11     89NK0101 89NK0302 89NK0304 NK01 NK41       NN11       52NN0101 NN01   52NG01ACR3         XNG03 XNB01       NK23     NK13     89NK0102 89NK0309 89NK0311 NK03 NK43       NN13       52NN0301 NN03   52NG05EAF1         XNG05               NK25*               89NK0109 89NK0104 89NK0105       NK51       NN15                       52NG01ABF1 89NK0301 89NK0111 89NK0203 52NG01AGF3 89NK0403 52NG01AGF4 AC Transfer Switches DC Transfer Switches (L.G.1) NK77   NK71 NK73       NK75 NK79 (L.G.2) NK78     NK72 NK74       NK76 NK80  
 
Rev. 29 WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (S heet 3)          4160-V    480-V    480-V Bus L.C.
MCC                                    4-kV Breakers 480-V Breakers NG02      NG02A      NG06E        152NB0209    152NB0212    152NB0201    152NB0205      52NG0401    52NG0 206    52NG0208 (L.G.2)  NB02      NG04      NG02B      NG02T        152NB0211    152NB0208    152NB0206    152NB0215      52NG0201    52NG0 207                              NG04C      NG04T        152NB0213    152NB0204    152NB0207    152NB0214*      52NG0406    52NG0 216                              NG04D                  152NB0210    152NB0202    152NB0203    152NB0216      52NG0407    52NG0 405 (L.G.1)              NG01      NG01A      NG05E        152NB0112    152NB0109    152NB0104    152NB0105      52NG0101    52NG0 307    52NG0108 NB01      NG03      NG01B      NG01T        152NB0110    152NB0106    152NB0107    152NB0115      52NG0301    52NG0 306                              NG03C      NG03T        152NB0113    152NB0101    152NB0108    152NB0114*      52NG0106    52NG0 116                              NG03D                  152NB0111    152NB0103    152NB0102    152NB0116      52NG0107    52NG0 305                  Rev. 0 WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (S heet 4)                                                          B. FAILURE MODE S AND EFFECT S ANALY S I S                                                                                          Method                                                                                            of Causes Effect on          Failure            Effect on  of
 
Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode S ubsystem          Detection Total S ystem      FailureN/A          Offsite power      Provides power    Loss of power      Loss of pre-      Undervoltage        None-offsite Offsi te system failure,                                to startup                            ferred power      relays, volt-      power supplied tra nsmission line                                xfmr XMR01                            to xfmr XMR01      meters, lights      by alternate failu re, bus fault,                                                                                                              source through fai lure of swyd C.B.
E S F xfmr XNB01 N/A          Offsite power      Provides power    Loss of power      Loss of pre-                          None-offsite Offsi te system failure,                                to E SF xfmr                          ferred power to                        power supplied transmission line                                XNB01                                XNB01                                  by alternate failu re, bus fault,                                                                                                              source through fai lure of swyd C.B.
startup xfmr
 
XMR01 XMR01 Startup            Provides pre-    Fails to provide    Loss of pre-      Overcurrent,        None-offsite Internal fault,              transformer        ferred power      power              ferred power      neutral ground      power supplied lig htning arrestor to E SF xfmr                          to XNB02          overcurrent,        by alternate failure, bushing                                XNB02                                                    and differen-      source through fai lure, cooling tial relays,        E SF xfmr XNB01 system failure                                                                                          fault pressure (during startup only) annunciation;
 
undervoltage
 
annunciation
 
for bus NB02 at MCB.
Periodic testing and
 
inspection XNB01        E SF transformer    Provides pre-    Fails to provide    Loss of pre-      Undervoltage        None-D-G NE01 Internal fault,                                ferred power      power              ferred power      annunciation        energizes NB01 bus hing failure to bus NB01                          to bus NB01        for bus NB01        until bkr and backup                            and backup        at MCB              152NB0109 is power to bus                          power to bus      Periodic test-NB02                                  NB02              ing and in-
 
spection Rev. 11 WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (S heet 5)                                                                                          Method                                                                                            of Causes Effect on          Failure            Effect on  of
 
Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode S ubsystem          Detection Total S ystem      Failure XNB02        E SF transformer    Provides pre-    Fails to provide    Loss of pre-      Undervoltage        None-D-G NE02 Internal fault,                                ferred power      power              ferred power      annunciation        energized NB02 bus hing failure to bus NB02                          to bus NB02        for bus NB02        until bkr and backup                            and backup        at MCB              152NB0212 is power to bus                          power to bus                          manually closed
 
NB01                                  NB01              Periodic test-
 
ing and in-
 
spection 252PA0201    1,200-A 13.8-      Provides power    Fails open          Loss of pre-      Indicating lights,  None-D-G NE02 Mech anical failure,              kV N.C. in-        to and pro-                          ferred power      undervoltage an-    feeds bus NB02 rel ay failure,              coming feeder      tects E SF                            to xfmr XNB02      nunciation for bus  until bkr control power              bkr                xfmr XNB02                                              NB02 at MCB        152NB0212 is failu re                                                                                                              closed
 
Fails closed S wyd bkr          Periodic test-isolates xfmr      ing and in-XMR01              spection 152NB0209    2,000-A, 4.16-    Provides pre-    Fails open          Loss of pre-      Indicating lights,  None-bus NB02 Mech anical failure,              kV N.C. breaker    ferred power                          ferred power      undervoltage        supplied by relay failure,                                to and pro-                          to bus NB02        annunciation        NE02 loss of contr ol                                tects bus NB02                                          for bus NB02 power at MCB Fails closed        Bus NB02          Periodic test-      None-bus NB02 isolated by        ing and in-        isolated by N.C.
 
N.C. bkr          spection            bkr 252PA0201;
 
252PA0201                              E S F loads fed by L.G.1 Rev. 11 WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (S heet 6) Equip. No.
Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Effect on S ubsystem Method of Failure Detection Effect on
 
Total S ystem Causes of Failures 152NB0109    2,000-A,          Provides back-    Fails open          Loss of backup    Indicating lights,  None-backup Mechan ical failure,              4.16-kV            up power to                          power to bus      undervoltage        power to bus relay failure,              N.0. breaker      and protects                          NB01              annunciation        NB01 supplied loss of control                                bus NB01                                                for bus NB01        by D-G NE01 power
 
at MCB Fails closed        Bus NB01          Periodic test-      None-E S F loads                                                                      isolated by        ing and in-        fed by L.G.2 N.C. bkr          spection
 
252PA0201 152NB0112    2,000-A,          Provides pre-    Fails open          Loss of pre-      Indicating lights,  None-bus NB01 Mech anical failure,              4.16-kV            ferred power                          ferred power      undervoltage        supplied by relay failure,              N.C. breaker      to and protects                      to bus NB01        annunciation        D-G NE01 loss of c ontrol                                bus NB01                                                for bus NB01 power at MCB Fails closed        Bus NB01          Periodic test-      None-bus isolated isolated by        ing and in-        by swyd bkr; E S F                                                                      N.C. swyd bkr      spection            loads fed by L.G.2152NB0212    2,000-A,          Provides back-    Fails open          Backup power      Indicating lights,  None-back up Mecha nical failure,              4.16-kV            up power to                          to bus NB02        undervoltage        power to bus relay failure,              N.O. breaker      and protects                          supplied by        annunciation        NB02 supplied loss of control                                bus NB02                              D-G NE02          for bus NB02        by D-G NE02 power at MCB Fails closed        Bus NB02          Periodic testing    None-E S F loads                                                                      isolated by        and inspection      fed by L.G.1 N.C. swyd bkr NB01        4.16-kV bus        Distributes      Fails to            Loss of E SF        Undervoltage        None-redundant Overload                                electrical        distribute          loads on NB01      annunciation        load group pro-S hort circuit power            power                                  at MCB              vides all EF S                                                                                                              functions
 
Periodic testing and inspection NB02        4.16-kV bus        Distributes      Fails to            Loss of E SF        Undervoltage        None-redundant Overload                                electrical        distribute          loads on NB02      annunciation        load group pro-S hort circuit power            power                                  at MCB              vides all E S F                                                                                                              functions
 
Periodic test-ing and in-
 
spection Rev. 13 WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (S heet 7)                                                                                          Method                                                                                            of Causes Effect on          Failure            Effect on  of
 
Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode S ubsystem          Detection Total S ystem      Failure 152NB0113    1200-A,            Provides power    Fails open          Loss of pre-      Indicating lights,  None-E SF loads Mechanical failure,              4.16-kV            to and protects                      ferred power      undervoltage        on L.C. NG01 relay failure,              N.C. breaker      xfmr XNG01                            to L.C. NG01      annunciation        supplied through c ontrol power                                                                                          for L.C. NG01      tie bkr 52NG0116 f ailure                                                                                          at MCB Fails closed        Bus NB01          Periodic test-      None-redundant
 
isolated by        ing and in-        load group pro-
 
bkr 152NB0112      spection            vides all E S F                                                                                                              functions 152NB0110    1200-A,            Provides power    Fails open          Loss of pre-      Indicating lights,  None-E SF loads Mechanical failure,              4.16-kV            to and pro-                          ferred power      undervoltage        on L.C. NG03 relay failure,              N.C. breaker      tects xfmr                            to L.C. NG03      annunciation        supplied through c ontrol power                                XNG03                                                    for L.C. NG03      tie bkr 52NG0116 f ailure                                                                                          at MCB Fails closed        Bus NB01          Periodic test-      None-redundant isolated by        ing and in-        load group pro-
 
bkr 152NB0112      spection            vides all E S F                                                                                                              functions 152NB0210    1200-A,            Provides power    Fails open          Loss of pre-      Indicating lights  None-E SF loads Mechanical failure,              4.16-kV            to and pro-                          ferred power      undervoltage        on L.C. NG04 relay failure,              N.C. breaker      tects xfmr                            to L.C. NG04      annunciation        supplied through c ontrol power                                XNG04                                                    for L.C. NG04      tie bkr 52NG0216 f ailure                                                                                          at MCB Fails closed        Bus NB02          Periodic test-      None-redundant isolated by        ing and in-        load group pro-
 
bkr 152NB0209      spection            vides all E S F                                                                                                              functions 152NB0213    1200-A,            Provides power    Fails open          Loss of pre-      Indicating lights  None-E SF loads Mechanical failure,              4.16-kV            to and pro-                          ferred power      undervoltage        on L.C. NG02 relay failure,              N.C. breaker      tects xfmr                            to L.C. NG02      annunciation        supplied through c ontrol power                                XNG02                                                    for L.C. NG02      tie bkr 52NG0216 f ailure                                                                                          at MCB Fails closed        Bus NB02          Periodic test-      None-redundant isolated by        ing and in-        load group pro-
 
bkr 152NB0209      spection            vides all E S F                                                                                                              functions XNG01        4.16-kV/480-V      Provides          Fails to            Loss of primary    Overcurrent,        None-L.C. NG01 Int ernal fault,              load center        primary power    provide power      power to L.C.      ground over-        and NG03 sup- bush ing failure xfmr              source to                            NG01 and          current, neutral    plied by xfmr L.C. NG01                            alternate          overcurrent        XNG03
 
and alternate                        power to L.C.      annunciation, power source                          NG03              undervoltage an-
 
to L.C. NG03                                            nunciation for L.C. NG01 at MCB Periodic testing
 
and inspection Rev. 11 WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (S heet 8)                                                                                          Method                                                                                            of Causes Effect on          Failure            Effect on  of
 
Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode S ubsystem          Detection Total S ystem      FailureXNG03        4.16-kV/480-V      Provides          Fails to            Loss of primary    Overcurrent,        None-L.C. NG01 Int ernal fault,              load center        primary power    provide power      power to L.C.      ground over-        and NG03 sup- bush ing failure xfmr              source to                            NG03 and          current, neutral    plied by xfmr
 
C. NG03                              alternate          overcurrent        XNG01
 
and alternate                        power to L.C.      annunciation, power source                          NG01              undervoltage an-
 
to L.C. NG01                                            nunciation for L.C. NG03 at MCB.
Periodic testing
 
and inspection 152NB0111    2,000-A,          Connects die-    Fails open          Loss of die-      Indicating lights,  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              4.16-kV            sel generator                        sel generator      undervoltage        load group pro- re lay failure,              N.O. diesel        NE01 to bus                          power to bus      annunciation        vides all E SF control power              generator bkr      NB01                                  NB01              for bus NB01        functions failure at MCB Fails closed        Damage to D-G      Periodic test-NE01, bus NB01    ing and in-
 
isolated by        spection
 
bkr 152NB0112 152NB0211    2000-A,            Connects die-    Fails open          Loss of die-      Indicating lights,  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              4.16-kV            sel generator                        sel generator      undervoltage        load group pro- re lay failure,              N.O. diesel        NE02 to bus                          power to bus      annunciation        vides all E SF control power              generator bkr      NB02                                  NB02              for bus NB02        functions failure at MCB Fails closed        Damage to D-G      Periodic test-
 
NE02, bus NB02    ing and in-
 
isolated by        spection
 
bkr 152NB0209 NE01        4.16-kV emer-      Provides emer-    Fails to            Loss of emer-      D-G undervoltage/  None-redundant Fau lt, mechanical              gency diesel      gency power      provide emer-      gency power        under freq, over-  load group pro- fa ilure, loss of generator          to bus NB01      gency power        to bus NB01        current, Volt re-  vides all E SF excitation strained O.C.,      functions reverse power, loss of field, differential,                                                                                          and overexcitation neut ground O.C.
 
annunciation. Peri-
 
odic testing, and
 
inspection. Under-
 
voltage annunciation
 
for bus NB01 at MCB Rev. 11 WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (S heet 9)                                                                                          Method                                                                                            of Causes Effect on          Failure            Effect on  of
 
Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode S ubsystem          Detection Total S ystem      FailureNE02        4.16-kV emer-      Provides emer-    Fails to pro-      Loss of emer-      D-G UV/UF, O.C.,    None-redundant Fau lt, mechanical              gency diesel      gency power to    vide emer-          gency power to    Volt restr O.C.,    load group pro- fa ilure, loss of generator          bus NB02          gency power        bus NB02          reverse pwr,        vides all E SF excitation loss of field,      functions overexcitation,                                                                                          diff and neut
 
GRD O.C. annun-
 
ciation. Periodic
 
testing and in-
 
spection. Under-
 
voltage annunciation
 
for bus NB02 at MCB 152NB0106    1,200-A,          Provides power    Fails open          Loss of power      Indicating lights,  None-pressurizer M echanical failure,              4.16-kV            to and pro-                          to pressurizer    undervoltage        heaters are not re lay failure,              N.C. breaker      tects xfmr                            backup heaters    annunciation        safety related con trol power                                XPG21                                                    for L.C. PG21 failure Fails closed        Bus NB01          Periodic test-      None-redundant
 
isolated by N.C. ing and in-        load group pro-
 
bkr 152NB0112      spection            vides all E S F                                                                                                              functions 152NB0208    1,200-A,          Provides power    Fails open          Loss of power      Indicating lights,  None-pressurizer M echanical failure,              4.16-kV            to and pro-                          to pressurizer    undervoltage        heaters are not re lay failure,              N.C. breaker      tects xfmr                            backup heaters    annunciation        safety related con trol power                                XPG22                                                    on L.C. PG22 failure Fails closed        Bus NB02          Periodic test-      None-redundant isolated by N.C. ing and in-        load group pro-
 
bkr 152NB0209      spection            vides all E S F                                                                                                              functions XNG04        4.16-kV/480-V      Provides          Fails to            Loss of primary    Overcurrent,        None-L.C. NG04 Int ernal fault,              L.C. xfmr          primary power    provide power      power to L.C.      ground over-        and L.C. NG02 bush ing failure source to                            NG04 and          current, neutral,  supplied by xfmr L.C. NG04                            alternate          overcurrent        XNG02
 
and alternate                        power to L.C.      annunciation
 
power source                          NG02
 
to L.C. NG02                                            Undervoltage an-
 
nunciation for L.C. NG04 at MCB.
Periodic testing
 
and inspection Rev. 11 WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (S heet 10)                                                                                          Method                                                                                            of Causes Effect on          Failure            Effect on  of
 
Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode S ubsystem          Detection Total S ystem      FailureXNG02        4.16-kV/480-V      Provides          Fails to            Loss of primary    Overcurrent,        None-L.C. NG02 Int ernal fault,              L.C. xfmr          primary power    provide power      power to L.C.      ground over-        and L.L. NG04 bush ing failure to L.C. NG02                          NG02 and          current, neutral    supplied by xfmr
 
and alternate                        alternate          overcurrent,        XNG04
 
power source                          power to L.C.      annunciation
 
to L.C. NG04                          NG04
 
Undervoltage an-
 
nunciation for L.C. NG02 at MCB Periodic testing
 
and inspection 52NG0101    1,600-A,          Provides power    Fails open          None-L.C.          Indicating lights  None-L.C. NG01 Mec hanical failure,              480-V N.C.        to and pro-                          NG01 fed          undervoltage        fed through tie re lay failure, loss of              breaker            tects L.C.                            through tie        annunciation        bkr 52NG0116 contr ol power                                NG01                                  bkr 52NG0116      for L.C. NG01 at MCB Fails closed        L.C. xfmr          Periodic test-      None-redundant isolated by        ing and in-        L.G. provides
 
bkr 152NB0113      spection            all E S F                                                                                                              functions 52NG0301    1,600-A,          Provides power    Fails open          None-L.C.          Indicating lights,  None-L.C. NG03 Mec hanical failure,              480-V N.C.        to and pro-                          NG03 fed          undervoltage        fed through tie re lay failure, loss of              breaker            tects L.C.                            through tie        annunciation        bkr 52NG0116 contr ol power                                NG03                                  bkr 52NG0116      for L.C. NG03 at MCB Fails closed        L.C. xfmr          Periodic test-      None-redundant isolated by        ing and in-        L.G. provides
 
bkr 152NB0110      spection            all E S F                                                                                                              functions 52NG0401    1,600-A,          Provides power    Fails open          None-L.C.          Indicating lights,  None-L.C. NG04 Mec hanical failure,              480-V N.C.        to and pro-                          NG04 fed          undervoltage        fed through tie re lay failure, loss of              breaker            tects L.C.                            through tie        annunciation        bkr 52NG0216 contr ol power                                NG04                                  bkr 52NG0216      for L.C. NG04 at MCB Fails closed        L.C. xfmr          Periodic test-      None-redundant isolated by        ing and in-        L.G. provides
 
bkr 152NB0210      spection            all E S F                                                                                                              functions 52NG0201    1,600-A,          Provides power    Fails open          None-L.C.          Indicating lights,  None-L.C. NG02 Mec hanical failure,              480-V N.C.        to and pro-                          NG02 fed          undervoltage        fed through tie re lay failure, loss of              breaker            tects L.C.                            through tie        annunciation        bkr 52NG0216 contr ol power                                NG02                                  bkr 52NG0216      for L.C. NG02 at MCB                                                  Fails closed        L.C. xfmr          Periodic test-      None-redundant Mec hanical failure,                                                                      isolated by        ing and in-        L.G. provides rela y failure, loss bkr 152NB0213      spection            all E SF of control power functions Rev. 11 WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (S heet 11)                                                                                          Method                                                                                            of Causes Effect on          Failure            Effect on  of
 
Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode S ubsystem          Detection Total S ystem      Failure52NG0116    1,600-A,          Ties L.C. NG01    Fails open          Loss of alter-    Indicating lights,  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              480-V N.O.        with NG03 in                          nate power to      undervoltage        L.G. provides rela y failure, loss of breaker            the event of                          either L.C.        annunciation        all E SF func- control power loss of primary                      NG01 or NG03      for either L.C. tions power to either                                          NG01 or NG03 at MCB Fails closed        L.C. NG01          Periodic test-      None-redundant
 
and NG03          ing and in-        L.G. provides
 
isolated by        spection            all E S F functions bkrs 52NG0101
 
and/or 52NG0301 52NG0216    1,600-A,          Ties L.C. NG04    Fails open          Loss of alter-    Indicating lights,  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              480-V N.O.        with NG02 in                          nate power to      undervoltage        L.G. provides rela y failure, loss of breaker            the event of                          either L.C.        annunciation        all E SF func- control power loss of primary                      NG02 or NG04      for either L.C.
power to either                                          NG02 or NG04 at MCB Fails closed        L.C. NG02          Periodic test-      None-redundant and NG04          ing and in-        L.G. provides
 
isolated by        spection            all E S F                                                                      bkrs 52NG0201                          functions
 
and/or 52NG0401 L.C. NG01    480-V load        Distributes      Fails to            Loss of loads      Undervoltage        None-redundant Ove rload              center            electrical        distribute          on L.C. NG01;      annunciation        L.G. provides all S hort circuit power            power              loss of alter-    at MCB              E S F functiions nate source to    Periodic test-NG03              ing and inspection L.C. NG03    480-V load        Distributes      Fails to            Loss of loads      Undervoltage        None-redundant Ove rload              center            electrical        distribute          L.C. NG03;        annunciation        L.G. provides all S hort circuit power            power              loss of alter-    at MCB              E S F functions nate source to    Periodic test-NG01              ing and inspection L.C. NG04    480-V load        Distributes      Fails to            Loss of loads      Undervoltage        None-redundant Ove rload              center            electrical        distribute          on L.C. NG04;      annunciation        L.G. provides all S hort circuit power            power              loss of alter-    at MCB              F functiions nate source to    Periodic test-NG02              ing and inspection Rev. 11 WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (S heet 12)                                                                                          Method                                                                                            of Causes Effect on          Failure            Effect on  of
 
Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode S ubsystem          Detection Total S ystem      FailureL.C. NG02    480-V load        Distributes      Fails to            Loss of loads      Undervoltage        None-redundant Ove rload              center            electrical        distribute          on L.C. NG02;      annunciation        L.G. provides all S hort circuit power            power              loss of alter-    at MCB              E S F functions nate source to
 
NG04              Periodic test-
 
ing and inspection 52NG0106    800-A,            Provides power    Fails open          Loss of power      Indicating lights,  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              480-V N.C.        to and protects                      to MCC NG01A      trip annunciator    L.G. provides rela y failure, loss of breaker            MCC NG01A                                                                    E SF functions control power Fails closed        L.C. NG01          Periodic test-      None-redundant isolated by        ing and in-        L.G. provides
 
bkr 52NG0101      spection            E S F functions 52NG0107    800-A,            Provides power    Fails open          Loss of power      Indicating lights,  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              480-V N.C.        to and protects                      to MCC NG01B      trip annunciator    L.G. provides rela y failure, loss of breaker            MCC NG01B                                                                    E SF functions control power Fails closed        L.C. NG01          Periodic test-      None-redundant
 
isolated by        ing and in-        L.G. provides
 
bkr 52NG0101      spection            E S F functions 52NG0306    800-A,            Provides power    Fails open          Loss of power      Indicating lights,  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              480-V N.C.        to and protects                      to MCC NG03C      trip annunciator    L.G. provides rela y failure, loss of breaker            MCC NG03C                                                                    E SF functions control power Fails closed        L.C. NG03          Periodic test-      None-redundant
 
isolated by        ing and in-        L.G. provides
 
bkr 52NG0301      spection            E S F functions 52NG0307    800-A,            Provides power    Fails open          Loss of power      Indicating lights,  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              480-V N.C.        to and protects                      to MCC NG03D      trip annunciator    L.G. provides rela y failure, loss of breaker            MCC NG03D                                                                    E SF functions control power Fails closed        L.C. NG03          Periodic test-      None-redundant
 
isolated by        ing and in-        L.G. provides
 
bkr 52NG0301      spection            E S F functions 52NG0406    800-A,            Provides power    Fails open          Loss of power      Indicating lights,  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              480-V N.C.        to and protects                      to MCC NG04C      trip annunciator    L.G. provides rela y failure, loss of breaker            MCC NG04C                                                                    E SF functions control power Fails closed        L.C. NG04          Periodic test-      None-redundant
 
isolated by        ing and in-        L.G. provides
 
bkr 52NG0401      spection            all E S F                                                                                                              functions Rev. 11 WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (S heet 13)                                                                                          Method                                                                                            of Causes Effect on          Failure            Effect on  of
 
Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode S ubsystem          Detection Total S ystem      Failure52NG0407    800-A,            Provides power    Fails open          Loss of power      Indicating lights,  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              480-V N.C.        to and protects                      to MCC NG04D      trip annunciator    L.G. provides rela y failure, loss of breaker            MCC NG04D                                                                    E SF functions control power Fails closed        L.C. NG04          Periodic test-      None-redundant
 
isolated by        ing and in-        L.G. provides
 
bkr 52NG0401      spection            E S F functions 52NG0207    800-A,            Provides power    Fails open          Loss of power      Indicating lights,  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              480-V N.C.        to and protects                      to MCC NG02B      trip annunciator    L.G. provides rela y failure, loss of breaker            MCC NG02B                                                                    all E SF func- control power tions Fails closed        L.C. NG02          Periodic test-      None-redundant isolated by        ing and in-        L.G. provides
 
bkr 52NG0201      spection            E S F functions 52NG0206    800-A,            Provides power    Fails open          Loss of power      Indicating lights,  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              480-V N.C.        to and protects                      to MCC NG02A      trip annunciator    L.G. provides rela y failure, loss of breaker            MCC NG02A                                                                    all E SF func- control power tions Fails closed        L.C. NG02          Periodic test-      None-redundant isolated by        ing and in-        L.G. provides
 
bkr 52NG0201      spection of        all E S F                                                                                          all E S F functions  functions NG01A        480-V motor        Distributes      Fails to            Loss of loads      Annunciation on    None-redundant Ove rload              control center    electrical        distribute          on MCC NG01A      fdr breaker trip,  L.G. provides S hort circuit power            power                                  loss of individual  all E S F functions load indicating
 
lights Periodic testing and inspection NG01B        480-V motor        Distributes      Fails to            Loss of loads      Annunciation on    None-redundant Ove rload              control center    electrical        distribute          on MCC NG01B      fdr breaker trip,  L.G. provides S hort circuit power            power                                  loss of individual  all E S F functions load indicating lights Periodic testing and inspection Rev. 0 WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (S heet 14)                                                                                          Method                                                                                            of Causes Effect on          Failure            Effect on  of
 
Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode S ubsystem          Detection Total S ystem      FailureNG03C        480-V motor        Distributes      Fails to            Loss of loads      Annunciation for    None-redundant Ove rload              control center    electrical        distribute          on MCC NG03C      breaker trip,      L.G. provides S hort circuit power            power                                  loss of individual  all E S F functions ad indicating
 
lights Periodic testing and inspection NG03D        480-V motor        Distributes      Fails to            Loss of loads      Annunciation for    None-redundant Ove rload              control center    electrical        distribute          on MCC NG03D      breaker trip,      L.G. provides S hort circuit power            power                                  loss of individual  all E S F functions load indicating lights Periodic testing and inspection NG04C        480-V motor        Distributes      Fails to            Loss of loads      Annunciation for    None-redundant Ove rload              control center    electrical        distribute          on MCC NG04C      breaker trip,      L.G. provides S hort circuit power            power                                  loss of individual  all E S F functions load indicating lights Periodic testing and inspection NG04D        480-V motor        Distributes      Fails to            Loss of loads      Annunciation for    None-redundant Ove rload              control center    electrical        distribute          on MCC NG04D      breaker trip,      L.G. provides S hort circuit power            power                                  loss of individual  all E S F functions load indicating lights Periodic testing and inspection NG02B        480-V motor        Distributes      Fails to            Loss of loads      Annunciation for    None-redundant Ove rload              control center    electrical        distribute          on NG02B          breaker trip,      L.G. provides S hort circuit power            power                                  loss of individual  all E S F functions load indicating lights Periodic testing and inspection NG02A        480-V motor        Distributes      Fails to            Loss of loads      Annunciation for    None-redundant Ove rload              control center    electrical        distribute          on NG02A          breaker trip,      L.G. provides S hort circuit power            power                                  loss of individual  all E S F functions load indicating lights Periodic testing and inspection Rev. 0 WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (S heet 15)                                                                                          Method                                                                                            of Causes Effect on          Failure            Effect on  of
 
Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode S ubsystem          Detection Total S ystem      Failure52NG0208    800-A,            Provides power    Fails open          Loss of loads      Indicating lights,  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              480-V N.C.        to and protects                      on MCC NG02T      trip annunciation  L.G. provides rela y failure, loss of breaker            NG02T                                                                        all E SF func- control power tions Fails closed        L.C. NG02          Periodic test-      None-redundant isolated by        ing and in-        L.G. provides
 
bkr 52NG0201      spection            all E S F func-                                                                                                              tions 52NG0405    800-A,            Provides power    Fails open          Loss of loads      Indicating lights,  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              480-V N.C.        to and protects                      on MCC NG04T      trip annunciation  L.G. provides rela y failure, loss of breaker            NG04T                                                                        all E SF func- control power tions Fails closed        L.C. NG04          Periodic test-      None-redundant isolated by        ing and in-        L.G. provides
 
bkr 52NG0401      spection            all E S F func-                                                                                                              tions NG01T        480-V motor        Distributes      Fails to            Loss of loads      Annunciation on    None-redundant Ove rload              control center    electric          distribute          on MCC NG01T      FDR breaker trip    L.G. provides S hort circuit power            power                                                      all E S F functions NG03T        480-V motor        Distributes      Fails to            Loss of loads      Annunciation on    None-redundant Ove rload              control center    electric          distribute          on MCC NG03T      FDR breaker trip    L.G. provides S hort circuit power            power                                                      all E S F functions NG02T        480-V motor        Distributes      Fails to            Loss of loads      Annunciation on    None-redundant Ove rload              control center    electric          distribute          on MCC NG02T      FDR breaker trip    L.G. provides S hort circuit power            power                                                      all E S F functions NG04T        480-V motor        Distributes      Fails to            Loss of loads      Annunciation on    None-redundant Ove rload              control center    electric          distribute          on MCC NG04T      FDR breaker trip    L.G. provides S hort circuit power            power                                                      all E S F functions 52NG0108    800-A,            Provides power    Fails open          Loss of power      Indicating lights  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              480-V N.C.        to and protects                      to MCC NG01T      trip annunciator    L.G. provides rela y failure, loss of breaker            MCC NG01T                                                                    all E SF func- control power tions Fails closed        L.C. NG01          Periodic test-      None-redundant isolated by        ing and in-        L.G. provides
 
bkr 52NG0101      spection            all E S F                                                                                                              functions Rev. 0 WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (S heet 16)                                                                                          Method                                                                                            of Causes Effect on          Failure            Effect on  of
 
Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode S ubsystem          Detection Total S ystem      Failure52NG0305    800-A, 480-        Provides          Fails open          Loss of power      Indicating lights  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              Volt N.C.          power to                              to MCC NG03T      trip annunciator    L.G. provides rela y failure, loss breaker            and protects                                                                all E S F functions  of control power MCC NG03T Fails closed        L.C. NG03          Periodic testing    None-redundant isolated by        and inspection      L.G. provides
 
bkr 52NG0301                          all E S F functions 152NB0101    1,200-A, 4.16-    Provides power    Fails open          Power unavail-    Indicating lights  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              kV breaker        to and pro-                          able at PEJ01A                        L.G. provides the relay failure, loss tects RHR PP                                                                E SF function of control power PE J01A Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed        Bus NB01          Undervoltage        None-redundant isolated by        annunciation        L.G. provides
 
bkr 152NB0112      for NB01 at MCB    all E S F functions 152NB0103    1,200-A, 4.16-    Provides power    Fails open          Power unavail-    Indicating lights  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              kV breaker        to and pro-                          able at PEM01A                        L.G. provides the relay failure, loss tects S.I. PP                                                                E SF function of control power PEMO1A Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed        Bus NB01          Undervoltage        None-redundant isolated by        annunciation        L.G. provides
 
bkr 152NB0112      for NB01 at MCB    all E S F functions 152NB0104    1,200-A, 4.16-    Provides power    Fails open          Power unavail-    Indicating lights  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              kV breaker        to and pro-                          able at PBG05A                        L.G. provides the relay failure, loss tects cent                                                                  E SF functions of control power chgng PP
 
PBG05A Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed        Bus NB01          Undervoltage        None-redundant isolated by        annunciation        L.G. provides
 
bkr 152NB0112      for NB01 at MCB    all E S F functions Rev. 11 WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (S heet 17)                                                                                          Method                                                                                            of Causes Effect on          Failure            Effect on  of
 
Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode S ubsystem          Detection Total S ystem      Failure152NB0107    1,200-A, 4.16-    Provides power    Fails open          Power unavail-    Indicating lights  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              kV breaker        to and pro-                          able at PEG01A                        PEG01C provides re lay failure, loss tects comp clg                                                              E SF function of control power wtr PP PEG01A Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed        Bus NB01          Undervoltage        None-redundant isolated by        annunciation        L.G. provides
 
bkr 152NB0112      for NB01 at MCB    all E S F functions 152NB0108    1,200-A, 4.16-    Provides power    Fails open          Power unavail-    Indicating lights  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              kV breaker        to and pro-                          able at PEG01C                        PEG01A provides re lay failure, loss tects comp clg                                                              the E SF function of control power wtr PP PEG01C Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed        Bus NB01          Undervoltage        None-redundant isolated by        annunciation        L.G. provides
 
bkr 152NB0112      for NB02 at MCB    all E S F functions 152NB0102    1,200-A, 4.16-    Provides power    Fails open          Power unavail-    Indicating lights  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              kV breaker        to and pro-                          able at PEN01A                        L.G. provides rela y failure, loss tects cont                                                                  the E SF function of control power spray PP
 
PEN01A Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed        Bus NB01          Undervoltage        None-redundant isolated by        annunciation        L.G. provides
 
bkr 152NB0112      for NB02 at MCB    all E S F functions 152NB0105    1,200-A, 4.16-    Provides power    Fails open          Power unavail-    Indicating lights  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              kV breaker        to and pro-                          able at PAL01A                        L.G. provides rela y failure, loss tects aux fw                                                                the E SF function of control power PP PAL01A Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed        Bus NB01          Undervoltage        None-redundant isolated by        annunciation        L.G. provides
 
bkr 152NB0112      for NB01 at MCB    the E S F functions Rev. 11 WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (S heet 18)                                                                                          Method                                                                                            of Causes Effect on          Failure            Effect on  of
 
Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode S ubsystem          Detection Total S ystem      Failure152NB0204    1,200-A, 4.16-    Provides power    Fails open          Power unavail-    Indicating lights  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              kV breaker        to and pro-                          able at PEJ01B                        L.G. provides rela y failure, loss tects RHR PP                                                                the E SF function of control power PEJ01B
 
Periodic testing
 
and inspection Fails closed        Bus NB02          Undervoltage        None-redundant isolated by        annunciation        L.G. provides
 
bkr 152NB0209      for NB02 at MCB    all E S F functions 152NB0202    1,200-A, 4.16-    Provides power    Fails open          Power unavail-    Indicating lights  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              kV breaker        to and pro-                          able at PEM01B                        L.G. provides rela y failure, loss tects S.I. PP                                                                the E SF function of control power PEM01B Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed        Bus NB02          Undervoltage        None-redundant isolated by        annunciation        L.G. provides
 
bkr 152NB0209      for NB02 at MCB    all E S F functions 152NB0201    1,200-A, 4.16-    Provides power    Fails open          Power unavail-    Indicating lights  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              kV breaker        to and pro-                          able at PBG05B                        L.G. provides rela y failure, loss tects cent                                                                  the E SF function of control power chgng PP
 
PBG05B Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed        Bus NB02          Undervoltage        None-redundant isolated by        annunciation        L.G. provides
 
bkr 152NB0209      for NB02 at MCB    all E S F functions 152NB0206    1,200-A, 4.16-    Provides power    Fails open          Power unavail-    Indicating lights  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              kV breaker        to and pro-                          able at PEG01B                        PEG01D provides re lay failure, loss tects comp clg                                                              the E SF function of control power wtr PEG01B Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed        Bus NB02          Undervoltage        None-redundant isolated by        annunciation        L.G. provides
 
bkr 152NB0209      for NB02 at MCB    all E S F functions Rev. 11 WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (S heet 19)                                                                                          Method                                                                                            of Causes Effect on          Failure            Effect on  of
 
Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode S ubsystem          Detection Total S ystem      Failure152NB0207    1,200-A, 4.16-    Provides power    Fails open          Power unavail-    Indicating lights  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              kV breaker        to and pro-                          able at PEG01D                        PEG01B provides re lay failure, loss tects comp clg                                                              the E SF function of control power wtr PP PEG01D Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed        Bus NB02          Undervoltage        None-redundant isolated by        annunciation for    L.G. provides bkr 152NB0209      NB02 at MCB        all E S F functions 152NB0203    1,200-A, 4.16-    Provides power    Fails open          Power unavail-    Indicating lights  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              kV breaker        to and pro-                          able at PEN01B                        L.G. provides rela y failure, loss tects cont                                                                  the E SF function of control power spray PP
 
PEN01B Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed        Bus NB02          Undervoltage        None-redundant isolated by        annunciation        L.G. provides
 
bkr 152NB0209      for NB02 at MCB    all E S F functions 152NB0205    1,200-A, 4.16-    Provides power    Fails open          Power unavail-    Indicating lights  None-redundant Mec hanical failure,              kV breaker        to and pro-                          able at PAL01B                        L.G. provides rela y failure, loss tects aux FW                                                                the E SF function of control power PP PAL01B Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed        Bus NB02          Undervoltage        None-redundant isolated by        annunciation        L.G. provides
 
bkr 152NB0209      for NB02 at MCB    all E S F functions Rev. 11 WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (S heet 20)                                                                                          Method                                                                                            of Causes Effect on          Failure            Effect on  of
 
Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode S ubsystem          Detection Total S ystem      Failure152NB0116    1,200-A, 4.16-    Provides power    Fails open          Loss of power      Indicating lights,  None-redundant Mec hanical failure              kV N.C.            to and pro-                          to XNG05          loss of indicating  load group pro- Re lay failure              breaker            tects XNG05                                              lights in MCC load  vides all neces- L oss of control power ckts                sary functions Fails closed        Bus NB01          Undervoltage an-    None-redundant isolated by        nunciation for      load group provide s                                                                      N.C. bkr          NB01 at MCB        all necessary 152NB0112                              functions
 
Periodic testing
 
and inspection 152NB0115    1,200-A, 4.16-    Provides power    Fails open          Loss of power      Indicating lights  None-redundant Mec hanical failure              kV N.C.            to and pro-                          to PP DPEF01A                          load group pro-Relay failure              breaker            tects PP                                                                    vides all neces- L oss of control power PEF01A                                                                      sary functions
 
Fails closed        Bus NB01          Undervoltage an-    None-redundant isolated by        nunciation for      load group provide s                                                                      N.C. bkr          NB01 at MCB        all necessary 152NB0112                              functions
 
Periodic testing
 
and inspection 152NB0216    1,200-A, 4.16-    Provides power    Fails open          Loss of power      Indicating lights,  None-redundant Mec hanical failure kV N.C.            to and pro-                          to DPEF01B          loss of indicating  load group pro-Relay failure              breaker            tects XNG06                                              lights in MCC load  vides all neces- L oss of control power ckts                sary functions Fails closed        Bus NB02          Undervoltage an-    None-redundant isolated by        nunciation for      load group provide s                                                                      N.C. bkr          NB02 at MCB        all necessary 152NB0209                              functions
 
Periodic testing
 
and inspection 152NB0215    1,200-A, 4.16-    Provides power    Fails open          Loss of power      Indicating lights,  None-redundant Mec hanical failure kV N.C.            to and pro-                          to DPEF01B      undervoltage an-    load group pro-    Re lay failure              breaker            tects PP                                                nunciation for      vides all neces- L oss of control power PEF01B                                                  NB02 at MCB        sary functions Fails closed        Bus NB02          Periodic testing    None-redundant isolated by        and inspection      load group provide s                                                                      N.C. bkr                              all necessary
 
152NB0209                              functions Rev. 11 WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (S heet 21)                                                                                          Method                                                                                            of Causes Effect on          Failure            Effect on  of
 
Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode S ubsystem          Detection Total S ystem      FailureXNG05        4.00-kV/          Provides power    Fails to pro-      Loss of power      Overcurrent,        None-redundant Int ernal fault 480-V xfmr        to MCC NG05E      vide power          to MCC NG05E      ground over-        load group pro-
 
current, neutral    vides all neces-
 
overcurrent        sary functions
 
annunciator Loss of indicating lights in MCC load
 
ckts Periodic testing and inspection XNG06        4.00-kV/          Provides power    Fails to pro-      Loss of power      Overcurrent,        None-redundant Int ernal fault 480-V xfmr        to MCC NG06E      vide power          to MCC NG06E      ground over-        load group pro-current, neutral    vides all neces-
 
overcurrent        sary functions
 
annunciator Loss of indicating lights in MCC load
 
ckts Periodic testing and inspection 52NG05E      800-A, 480-V      Provides power    Fails open          Loss of power      Indicating lights  None-redundant Mec hanical failure AF1          N.C. breaker      to and pro-                          to MCC NG05E      Trip annunciator    load group pro- Re lay failure                                tects MCC                                                                    vides all neces- L oss of control power NG05E                                                                        sary functions Fails closed        NG05E              Loss of indi-      None-redundant isolated by        cating lights in    load group provide s                                                                      N.C. bkr          MCC load ckts      all necessary
 
152NB0116                              functions
 
Periodic testing
 
and inspection 52NG06E      800-A, 480-V      Provides power    Fails open          Loss of power      Indicating lights  None-redundant Mec hanical failure AF1          N.C. breaker      to and pro-                          to MCC NG06E      Trip annunciator    load group pro- Re lay failure                                tects MCC NG06E                                                              vides all neces- L oss of control power sary functions
 
Fails closed        NG06E              Loss of indi-      None-redundant isolated by        cating lights in    load group provide s                                                                      N.C. bkr          MCC load ckts      all necessary
 
152NB216                              functions Rev. 13 WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (S heet 22)                                                                                          Method                                                                                            of Causes Effect on          Failure            Effect on  of
 
Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode S ubsystem          Detection Total S ystem      Failure Periodic testing
 
and inspection NG05E        480-V motor        Distributes      Fails to            Loss of power to  Trip annunciator    None-redundant Ove rload              control center    electrical        provide power      E S W Intake Struc-  on feeder bkrs      load group pro-S hort circuit power                                ture S eparation                        vides all neces-Group 1            Loss of indicating  sary functions lights in MCC load ckts Periodic testing and inspection NG06E        480-V motor        Distributes      Fails to            Loss of power to  Trip annunciator    None-redundant Ove rload              control center    electrical        provide power      E S W Intake Struc-  on feeder bkrs      load group pro-S hort circuit power                                ture S eparation                        vides all neces-Group 4            Loss of indicating  sary functions lights in MCC load ckts Periodic testing and inspection Rev. 13 WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (S heet 23) Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode S ubsystem Detection Total S ystem Failure Deleted Deleted 152NB0117 Space Periodically N/A N/A N/A None N/A  used for test        device or spare        breaker storage Deleted 152NB0217 Space Periodically N/A N/A N/A None N/A  used for test      device or spare      breaker storage                                                              Rev. 11 WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (S heet 24)                                                                                          Method                                                                                            of Causes Effect on          Failure            Effect on  of
 
Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode S ubsystem          Detection Total S ystem      Failure NK11        125-V battery      Provides back-    Fails to pro-      Loss of backup Solid state        None-redundant S hort to ground,                                up dc power to    vide adequate      dc power to        battery monitor,    dc subsystem inter nal shorts dc bus NK01 if    output voltage      bus NK01          local indication,  provides all
 
charger NK21                                            control room        necessary func-
 
fails; provides                                          annunciation        tions
 
extra power
 
during surges                                            Periodic testing
 
and inspection NK13        125-V battery      Provides back-    Fails to pro-      Loss of backup Solid state        None-redundant S hort to ground,                                up dc power to    vide adequate      dc power to        battery monitor,    dc subsystem inter nal shorts dc bus NK03 if    output voltage      bus NK03          local indication,  provides all charger NK23                                            control room        necessary func-
 
fails; provides                                          annunciation        tions
 
extra power
 
during surges                                            Periodic testing
 
and inspection
 
NK12        125-V battery      Provides back-    Fails to pro-      Loss of backup Solid state        None-redundant S hort to ground,                                up dc power to    vide adequate      dc power to        battery monitor,    dc subsystem inter nal shorts dc bus NK02 if    output voltage      bus NK02          local indication,  provides all
 
charger NK22                                            control room        necessary func-
 
fails; provides                                          annunciation        tions
 
extra power
 
during surges                                            Periodic testing
 
and inspection NK14        125-V battery      Provides back-    Fails to pro-      Loss of backup Solid state        None-redundant S hort to ground,                                up dc power to    vide adequate      dc power to        battery monitor,    dc subsystem inter nal shorts dc bus NK04 if    output voltage      bus NK04          local indication,  provides all charger NK24                                            control room        necessary func-
 
fails; provides                                          annunciation        tions
 
extra power
 
during surges                                            Periodic testing
 
and inspection 89NK0101    125-V, N.C.        Provides power    Fails open          Loss of battery    Battery output      None-battery Mecha nical failure fusible switch    to and protects                      NK11 source        amps indicated      charger NK21 bus NK01                              to bus NK01        in control room    provides power 89NK0301    125-V, N.C.        Provides power    Fails open          Loss of battery    Battery output      None-battery Mecha nical failure fusible switch    to and protects                      NK13 source        amps indicated      charger NK23 bus NK03                              to bus NK03        in control room    provides power 89NK0201    125-V, N.C.        Provides power    Fails open          Loss of battery    Battery output      None-battery Mecha nical failure fusible switch    to and protects                      NK12 source        amps indicated      charger NK22 bus NK02                              to bus NK02        in control room    provides power Rev. 11 WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (S heet 25)                                                                                          Method                                                                                            of Causes Effect on          Failure            Effect on  of
 
Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode S ubsystem          Detection Total S ystem      Failure89NK0401    125-V, N.C.        Provides power    Fails open          Loss of battery    Battery output      None-battery Mecha nical failure fusible switch    to and protects                      NK14 source        amps indicated      charger NK24
 
bus NK04                              to bus NK04        in control room    provides power NK21        125-V battery      Charges bat-      Fails to provide    None-battery      Local indication    None-battery Fault , component              charger            tery NK11;        power              NK11 picks up      and control room    NK11 provides fail ure                                provides pri-                        load until        summary annun-      power (spare is mary power                            spare charger      ciation for        also available)
 
to bus NK03                          NK25 is in-        input under-
 
stalled            voltage and
 
output under and
 
over voltage Periodic testing and inspection NK23        125-V battery      Charges bat-      Fails to provide    None-battery      Local indication    None-battery Fault , component              charger            tery NK13;        power              NK13 picks up      and control room    NK13 provides fail ure                                provides pri-                        load until        summary annun-      power (spare is mary power                            spare charger      ciation for        also available)
 
to bus NK03                          NK25 is in-        input under-
 
stalled            voltage and
 
output under and
 
over voltage Periodic testing and inspection NK22        125-V battery      Charges bat-      Fails to provide    None-battery      Local indication    None-battery Fault , component              charger            tery NK12;        power              NK12 picks up      and control room    NK12 provides fail ure                                provides pri-                        load until        summary annun-      power (spare is
 
mary power                            spare charger      ciation for        also available)
 
to bus NK02                          NK25 is in-        input under-
 
stalled            voltage and
 
output under and
 
over voltage Periodic testing and inspection NK24        125-V battery      Charges bat-      Fails to provide    None-battery      Local indication    None-battery Fault , component              charger            tery NK14;        power              NK14 picks up      and control room    NK14 provides fail ure                                provides pri-                        load until        summary annun-      power (spare is mary power                            spare charger      ciation for        also available)
 
to bus NK04                          NK25 is in-        input under-
 
stalled            voltage and
 
output under and
 
over voltage Periodic testing and inspection Rev. 11 WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (S heet 26)                                                                                          Method                                                                                            of Causes Effect on          Failure            Effect on  of
 
Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode S ubsystem          Detection Total S ystem      Failure89NK0102    125-V, N.C.        Provides power    Fails open          Loss of battery    Charger output      None-battery Mecha nical failure fusible switch    to and protects                      charger NK21      amps indicated      NK11 supplies
 
bus NK01                              source to          in control room    bus NK01
 
bus NK01 89NK0302    125-V, N.C.        Provides power    Fails open          Loss of battery    Charger output      None-battery Mecha nical failure fusible switch    to and pro-                          charger NK23      amps indicated      NK13 supplies tects bus                            source to          in control room    bus NK03
 
NK03                                  bus NK03 89NK0202    125-V, N.C.        Provides power    Fails open          Loss of battery    Charger output      None-battery Mecha nical failure fusible switch    to and pro-                          charger NK22      amps indicated      supplies tects bus                            source to          in control room    bus NK02
 
NK02                                  bus NK02 89NK0402    125-V, N.C.        Provides power    Fails open          Loss of battery    Charger output      None-battery Mecha nical failure fusible switch    to and pro-                          charger NK24      amps indicated      supplies tects bus                            source to          in control room    bus NK04
 
NK04                                  bus NK04 NK01        125-Vdc bus        Distributes      Fails to            Loss of Sep.      Ground detection    None-redundant Overload                                electrical        distribute          Grp. 1 dc power    local indication    subsystem pro-S hort circuit power            power                                  of undervoltage,    vides all neces-and summary        sary functions
 
annunciation
 
at control room Periodic testing and inspection NK03        125-Vdc bus        Distributes      Fails to            Loss of Sep.      Ground detection    None-redundant Overload                                electrical        distribute          Grp. 3 dc power    local indication    subsystem pro-S hort circuit power            power                                  of undervoltage,    vides all neces-and summary        sary functions
 
annunciation
 
at control room Periodic testing and inspection Rev. 11 
 
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 27)
 
Method
 
of Causes Effect on          Failure            Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name        Function          Failure Mode        Subsystem          Detection          Total System Failure NK02        125-Vdc bus        Distributes      Fails to            Loss of Sep.      Ground detection,  None-redundant Overload
 
electrical        distribute          Grp. 2 dc power    local indication    subsystem provides Short circuit
 
power            power                                  of undervoltage,    all necessary
 
and summary        functions
 
annunciation
 
at control room
 
Periodic testing
 
and inspection
 
NK04        125-Vdc bus        Distributes      Fails to            Loss of Sep.      Ground detection,  None-redundant Overload
 
electrical        distribute          Grp. 4 dc power    local indication    subsystem provides Short circuit
 
power            power                                  of undervoltage,    all necessary
 
and summary        functions
 
annunciation
 
at control room
 
Periodic testing
 
and inspection
 
89NK0111    125-V, N.C.        Provides power    Fails open          Loss of invert-    Loss of dc in-      None-bus NN01 Mechanical failure


fusible switch    to and pro-                           er NN11 power      put to inv          fed by inverter
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 3) 4160-V 480-V 480-V Bus L.C. MCC 4-kV Breakers 480-V Breakers NG02 NG02A NG06E 152NB0209 152NB0212 152NB0201 152NB0205 52NG0401 52NG0206 52NG0208 (L.G.2) NB02 NG04 NG02B NG02T 152NB0211 152NB0208 152NB0206 152NB0215 52NG0201 52NG0207 NG04C NG04T 152NB0213 152NB0204 152NB0207 152NB0214* 52NG0406 52NG0216 NG04D 152NB0210 152NB0202 152NB0203 152NB0216 52NG0407 52NG0405 (L.G.1) NG01 NG01A NG05E 152NB0112 152NB0109 152NB0104 152NB0105 52NG0101 52NG0307 52NG0108 NB01 NG03 NG01B NG01T 152NB0110 152NB0106 152NB0107 152NB0115 52NG0301 52NG0306 NG03C NG03T 152NB0113 152NB0101 152NB0108 152NB0114* 52NG0106 52NG0116 NG03D 152NB0111 152NB0103 152NB0102 152NB0116 52NG0107 52NG0305 Rev. 0


tects 7.5-kVA                        to bus NN01        annunciated        alternate CVT sour ce                                inverter NN11                                                                or swing unit NN15
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 4)
B. FAILURE MODES AND EFFECTS ANALYSIS Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure N/A Offsite power Provides power Loss of power Loss of pre-Undervoltage None-offsite Offsite system failure, to startup ferred power relays, volt-power supplied transmission line xfmr XMR01 to xfmr XMR01 meters, lights by alternate failure, bus fault, source through failure of swyd C.B.
ESF xfmr XNB01 N/A Offsite power Provides power Loss of power Loss of pre-None-offsite Offsite system failure, to ESF xfmr ferred power to power supplied transmission line XNB01 XNB01 by alternate failure, bus fault, source through failure of swyd C.B.
startup xfmr XMR01 XMR01 Startup Provides pre-Fails to provide Loss of pre-Overcurrent, None-offsite Internal fault, transformer ferred power power ferred power neutral ground power supplied lightning arrestor to ESF xfmr to XNB02 overcurrent, by alternate failure, bushing XNB02 and differen-source through failure, cooling tial relays, ESF xfmr XNB01 system failure fault pressure (during startup only) annunciation; undervoltage annunciation for bus NB02 at MCB.
Periodic testing and inspection XNB01 ESF transformer Provides pre-Fails to provide Loss of pre-Undervoltage None-D-G NE01 Internal fault, ferred power power ferred power annunciation energizes NB01 bushing failure to bus NB01 to bus NB01 for bus NB01 until bkr and backup and backup at MCB 152NB0109 is power to bus power to bus Periodic test-NB02 NB02 ing and in-spection Rev. 11


89NK0311    125-V, N.C.        Provides power   Fails open         Loss of invert-   Loss of dc in-     None-bus NN03 Mechanical failure  
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 5)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure XNB02 ESF transformer Provides pre-Fails to provide Loss of pre-Undervoltage None-D-G NE02 Internal fault, ferred power power ferred power annunciation energized NB02 bushing failure to bus NB02 to bus NB02 for bus NB02 until bkr and backup and backup at MCB 152NB0212 is power to bus power to bus manually closed NB01 NB01 Periodic test-ing and in-spection 252PA0201 1,200-A 13.8-Provides power Fails open Loss of pre-Indicating lights, None-D-G NE02 Mechanical failure, kV N.C. in-to and pro-ferred power undervoltage an-feeds bus NB02 relay failure, coming feeder tects ESF to xfmr XNB02 nunciation for bus until bkr control power bkr xfmr XNB02 NB02 at MCB 152NB0212 is failure closed Fails closed Swyd bkr Periodic test-isolates xfmr ing and in-XMR01 spection 152NB0209 2,000-A, 4.16-Provides pre-Fails open Loss of pre-Indicating lights, None-bus NB02 Mechanical failure, kV N.C. breaker ferred power ferred power undervoltage supplied by relay failure, to and pro-to bus NB02 annunciation NE02 loss of control tects bus NB02 for bus NB02 power at MCB Fails closed Bus NB02 Periodic test-None-bus NB02 isolated by ing and in-isolated by N.C.
N.C. bkr spection bkr 252PA0201; 252PA0201 ESF loads fed by L.G.1 Rev. 11


fusible switch    to and pro-                           er NN13 power     put to inv          fed by inverter
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 6)
Equip. No.
Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Effect on Subsystem Method of Failure Detection Effect on Total System Causes of Failures 152NB0109 2,000-A, Provides back-Fails open Loss of backup Indicating lights, None-backup Mechanical failure, 4.16-kV up power to power to bus undervoltage power to bus relay failure, N.0. breaker and protects NB01 annunciation NB01 supplied loss of control bus NB01 for bus NB01 by D-G NE01 power at MCB Fails closed Bus NB01 Periodic test-None-ESF loads isolated by ing and in-fed by L.G.2 N.C. bkr spection 252PA0201 152NB0112 2,000-A, Provides pre-Fails open Loss of pre-Indicating lights, None-bus NB01 Mechanical failure, 4.16-kV ferred power ferred power undervoltage supplied by relay failure, N.C. breaker to and protects to bus NB01 annunciation D-G NE01 loss of control bus NB01 for bus NB01 power at MCB Fails closed Bus NB01 Periodic test-None-bus isolated isolated by ing and in-by swyd bkr; ESF N.C. swyd bkr spection loads fed by L.G.2 152NB0212 2,000-A, Provides back-Fails open Backup power Indicating lights, None-back up Mechanical failure, 4.16-kV up power to to bus NB02 undervoltage power to bus relay failure, N.O. breaker and protects supplied by annunciation NB02 supplied loss of control bus NB02 D-G NE02 for bus NB02 by D-G NE02 power at MCB Fails closed Bus NB02 Periodic testing None-ESF loads isolated by and inspection fed by L.G.1 N.C. swyd bkr NB01 4.16-kV bus Distributes Fails to Loss of ESF Undervoltage None-redundant Overload electrical distribute loads on NB01 annunciation load group pro-Short circuit power power at MCB vides all EFS functions Periodic testing and inspection NB02 4.16-kV bus Distributes Fails to Loss of ESF Undervoltage None-redundant Overload electrical distribute loads on NB02 annunciation load group pro-Short circuit power power at MCB vides all ESF functions Periodic test-ing and in-spection Rev. 13


tects 7.5-kVA                        to bus NN03        annunciated        alternate CVT sour ce                                inverter NN13                                                                or swing unit NN15
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 7)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 152NB0113 1200-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of pre-Indicating lights, None-ESF loads Mechanical failure, 4.16-kV to and protects ferred power undervoltage on L.C. NG01 relay failure, N.C. breaker xfmr XNG01 to L.C. NG01 annunciation supplied through control power for L.C. NG01 tie bkr 52NG0116 failure at MCB Fails closed Bus NB01 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-load group pro-bkr 152NB0112 spection vides all ESF functions 152NB0110 1200-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of pre-Indicating lights, None-ESF loads Mechanical failure, 4.16-kV to and pro-ferred power undervoltage on L.C. NG03 relay failure, N.C. breaker tects xfmr to L.C. NG03 annunciation supplied through control power XNG03 for L.C. NG03 tie bkr 52NG0116 failure at MCB Fails closed Bus NB01 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-load group pro-bkr 152NB0112 spection vides all ESF functions 152NB0210 1200-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of pre-Indicating lights None-ESF loads Mechanical failure, 4.16-kV to and pro-ferred power undervoltage on L.C. NG04 relay failure, N.C. breaker tects xfmr to L.C. NG04 annunciation supplied through control power XNG04 for L.C. NG04 tie bkr 52NG0216 failure at MCB Fails closed Bus NB02 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-load group pro-bkr 152NB0209 spection vides all ESF functions 152NB0213 1200-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of pre-Indicating lights None-ESF loads Mechanical failure, 4.16-kV to and pro-ferred power undervoltage on L.C. NG02 relay failure, N.C. breaker tects xfmr to L.C. NG02 annunciation supplied through control power XNG02 for L.C. NG02 tie bkr 52NG0216 failure at MCB Fails closed Bus NB02 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-load group pro-bkr 152NB0209 spection vides all ESF functions XNG01 4.16-kV/480-V Provides Fails to Loss of primary Overcurrent, None-L.C. NG01 Internal fault, load center primary power provide power power to L.C. ground over-and NG03 sup-bushing failure xfmr source to NG01 and current, neutral plied by xfmr L.C. NG01 alternate overcurrent XNG03 and alternate power to L.C. annunciation, power source NG03 undervoltage an-to L.C. NG03 nunciation for L.C. NG01 at MCB Periodic testing and inspection Rev. 11


89NK0211    125-V, N.C.       Provides power   Fails open         Loss of invert-   Loss of dc in-     None-bus NN02 Mechanical failure
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 8)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure XNG03 4.16-kV/480-V Provides Fails to Loss of primary Overcurrent, None-L.C. NG01 Internal fault, load center primary power provide power power to L.C. ground over-and NG03 sup-bushing failure xfmr source to NG03 and current, neutral plied by xfmr C. NG03 alternate overcurrent XNG01 and alternate power to L.C. annunciation, power source NG01 undervoltage an-to L.C. NG01 nunciation for L.C. NG03 at MCB.
Periodic testing and inspection 152NB0111 2,000-A, Connects die-Fails open Loss of die-Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure, 4.16-kV sel generator sel generator undervoltage load group pro-relay failure, N.O. diesel NE01 to bus power to bus annunciation vides all ESF control power generator bkr NB01 NB01 for bus NB01 functions failure at MCB Fails closed Damage to D-G Periodic test-NE01, bus NB01 ing and in-isolated by spection bkr 152NB0112 152NB0211 2000-A, Connects die-Fails open Loss of die-Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure, 4.16-kV sel generator sel generator undervoltage load group pro-relay failure, N.O. diesel NE02 to bus power to bus annunciation vides all ESF control power generator bkr NB02 NB02 for bus NB02 functions failure at MCB Fails closed Damage to D-G Periodic test-NE02, bus NB02 ing and in-isolated by spection bkr 152NB0209 NE01 4.16-kV emer-Provides emer-Fails to Loss of emer-D-G undervoltage/ None-redundant Fault, mechanical gency diesel gency power provide emer-gency power under freq, over-load group pro-failure, loss of generator to bus NB01 gency power to bus NB01 current, Volt re-vides all ESF excitation strained O.C., functions reverse power, loss of field, differential, and overexcitation neut ground O.C.
annunciation. Peri-odic testing, and inspection. Under-voltage annunciation for bus NB01 at MCB Rev. 11


fusible switch    to and pro-                           er NN12 power     put to inv          fed by inverter
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 9)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure NE02 4.16-kV emer-Provides emer-Fails to pro-Loss of emer-D-G UV/UF, O.C., None-redundant Fault, mechanical gency diesel gency power to vide emer-gency power to Volt restr O.C., load group pro-failure, loss of generator bus NB02 gency power bus NB02 reverse pwr, vides all ESF excitation loss of field, functions overexcitation, diff and neut GRD O.C. annun-ciation. Periodic testing and in-spection. Under-voltage annunciation for bus NB02 at MCB 152NB0106 1,200-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights, None-pressurizer Mechanical failure, 4.16-kV to and pro-to pressurizer undervoltage heaters are not relay failure, N.C. breaker tects xfmr backup heaters annunciation safety related control power XPG21 for L.C. PG21 failure Fails closed Bus NB01 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by N.C. ing and in-load group pro-bkr 152NB0112 spection vides all ESF functions 152NB0208 1,200-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights, None-pressurizer Mechanical failure, 4.16-kV to and pro-to pressurizer undervoltage heaters are not relay failure, N.C. breaker tects xfmr backup heaters annunciation safety related control power XPG22 on L.C. PG22 failure Fails closed Bus NB02 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by N.C. ing and in-load group pro-bkr 152NB0209 spection vides all ESF functions XNG04 4.16-kV/480-V Provides Fails to Loss of primary Overcurrent, None-L.C. NG04 Internal fault, L.C. xfmr primary power provide power power to L.C. ground over-and L.C. NG02 bushing failure source to NG04 and current, neutral, supplied by xfmr L.C. NG04 alternate overcurrent XNG02 and alternate power to L.C. annunciation power source NG02 to L.C. NG02 Undervoltage an-nunciation for L.C. NG04 at MCB.
Periodic testing and inspection Rev. 11


tects 7.5-kVA                        to bus NN02        annunciated        alternate CVT sour ce                                inverter NN12                                                                or swing unit NN16
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 10)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure XNG02 4.16-kV/480-V Provides Fails to Loss of primary Overcurrent, None-L.C. NG02 Internal fault, L.C. xfmr primary power provide power power to L.C. ground over-and L.L. NG04 bushing failure to L.C. NG02 NG02 and current, neutral supplied by xfmr and alternate alternate overcurrent, XNG04 power source power to L.C. annunciation to L.C. NG04 NG04 Undervoltage an-nunciation for L.C. NG02 at MCB Periodic testing and inspection 52NG0101 1,600-A, Provides power Fails open None-L.C. Indicating lights None-L.C. NG01 Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and pro-NG01 fed undervoltage fed through tie relay failure, loss of breaker tects L.C. through tie annunciation bkr 52NG0116 control power NG01 bkr 52NG0116 for L.C. NG01 at MCB Fails closed L.C. xfmr Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides bkr 152NB0113 spection all ESF functions 52NG0301 1,600-A, Provides power Fails open None-L.C. Indicating lights, None-L.C. NG03 Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and pro-NG03 fed undervoltage fed through tie relay failure, loss of breaker tects L.C. through tie annunciation bkr 52NG0116 control power NG03 bkr 52NG0116 for L.C. NG03 at MCB Fails closed L.C. xfmr Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides bkr 152NB0110 spection all ESF functions 52NG0401 1,600-A, Provides power Fails open None-L.C. Indicating lights, None-L.C. NG04 Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and pro-NG04 fed undervoltage fed through tie relay failure, loss of breaker tects L.C. through tie annunciation bkr 52NG0216 control power NG04 bkr 52NG0216 for L.C. NG04 at MCB Fails closed L.C. xfmr Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides bkr 152NB0210 spection all ESF functions 52NG0201 1,600-A, Provides power Fails open None-L.C. Indicating lights, None-L.C. NG02 Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and pro-NG02 fed undervoltage fed through tie relay failure, loss of breaker tects L.C. through tie annunciation bkr 52NG0216 control power NG02 bkr 52NG0216 for L.C. NG02 at MCB Fails closed L.C. xfmr Periodic test-None-redundant Mechanical failure, isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides relay failure, loss bkr 152NB0213 spection all ESF of control power functions Rev. 11


89NK0411    125-V, N.C.       Provides power   Fails open          Loss of invert-   Loss of dc in-     None-bus NN04 Mechanical failure
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 11)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 52NG0116 1,600-A, Ties L.C. NG01 Fails open Loss of alter-Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure, 480-V N.O. with NG03 in nate power to undervoltage L.G. provides relay failure, loss of breaker the event of either L.C. annunciation all ESF func-control power loss of primary NG01 or NG03 for either L.C. tions power to either NG01 or NG03 at MCB Fails closed L.C. NG01 Periodic test-None-redundant and NG03 ing and in-L.G. provides isolated by spection all ESF functions bkrs 52NG0101 and/or 52NG0301 52NG0216 1,600-A, Ties L.C. NG04 Fails open Loss of alter-Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure, 480-V N.O. with NG02 in nate power to undervoltage L.G. provides relay failure, loss of breaker the event of either L.C. annunciation all ESF func-control power loss of primary NG02 or NG04 for either L.C.
power to either NG02 or NG04 at MCB Fails closed L.C. NG02 Periodic test-None-redundant and NG04 ing and in-L.G. provides isolated by spection all ESF bkrs 52NG0201 functions and/or 52NG0401 L.C. NG01 480-V load Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Undervoltage None-redundant Overload center electrical distribute on L.C. NG01; annunciation L.G. provides all Short circuit power power loss of alter-at MCB ESF functiions nate source to Periodic test-NG03 ing and inspection L.C. NG03 480-V load Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Undervoltage None-redundant Overload center electrical distribute L.C. NG03; annunciation L.G. provides all Short circuit power power loss of alter-at MCB ESF functions nate source to Periodic test-NG01 ing and inspection L.C. NG04 480-V load Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Undervoltage None-redundant Overload center electrical distribute on L.C. NG04; annunciation L.G. provides all Short circuit power power loss of alter-at MCB F functiions nate source to Periodic test-NG02 ing and inspection Rev. 11


Fusible switch    to and pro-                           er NN14 power     put to inv          fed by inverter
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 12)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure L.C. NG02 480-V load Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Undervoltage None-redundant Overload center electrical distribute on L.C. NG02; annunciation L.G. provides all Short circuit power power loss of alter-at MCB ESF functions nate source to NG04 Periodic test-ing and inspection 52NG0106 800-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and protects to MCC NG01A trip annunciator L.G. provides relay failure, loss of breaker MCC NG01A ESF functions control power Fails closed L.C. NG01 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides bkr 52NG0101 spection ESF functions 52NG0107 800-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and protects to MCC NG01B trip annunciator L.G. provides relay failure, loss of breaker MCC NG01B ESF functions control power Fails closed L.C. NG01 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides bkr 52NG0101 spection ESF functions 52NG0306 800-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and protects to MCC NG03C trip annunciator L.G. provides relay failure, loss of breaker MCC NG03C ESF functions control power Fails closed L.C. NG03 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides bkr 52NG0301 spection ESF functions 52NG0307 800-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and protects to MCC NG03D trip annunciator L.G. provides relay failure, loss of breaker MCC NG03D ESF functions control power Fails closed L.C. NG03 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides bkr 52NG0301 spection ESF functions 52NG0406 800-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and protects to MCC NG04C trip annunciator L.G. provides relay failure, loss of breaker MCC NG04C ESF functions control power Fails closed L.C. NG04 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides bkr 52NG0401 spection all ESF functions Rev. 11


tects 7.5-kVA                        to bus NN04        annunciated        alternate CVT sour ce                                inverter NN14                                                                or swing unit NN16
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 13)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 52NG0407 800-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and protects to MCC NG04D trip annunciator L.G. provides relay failure, loss of breaker MCC NG04D ESF functions control power Fails closed L.C. NG04 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides bkr 52NG0401 spection ESF functions 52NG0207 800-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and protects to MCC NG02B trip annunciator L.G. provides relay failure, loss of breaker MCC NG02B all ESF func-control power tions Fails closed L.C. NG02 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides bkr 52NG0201 spection ESF functions 52NG0206 800-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and protects to MCC NG02A trip annunciator L.G. provides relay failure, loss of breaker MCC NG02A all ESF func-control power tions Fails closed L.C. NG02 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides bkr 52NG0201 spection of all ESF all ESF functions functions NG01A 480-V motor Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Annunciation on None-redundant Overload control center electrical distribute on MCC NG01A fdr breaker trip, L.G. provides Short circuit power power loss of individual all ESF functions load indicating lights Periodic testing and inspection NG01B 480-V motor Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Annunciation on None-redundant Overload control center electrical distribute on MCC NG01B fdr breaker trip, L.G. provides Short circuit power power loss of individual all ESF functions load indicating lights Periodic testing and inspection Rev. 0


89NK0104    125-V, N.C.       Provides power   Fails open          Loss of distr      Undervoltage        None-redundant Mechanical failure
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 14)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure NG03C 480-V motor Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Annunciation for None-redundant Overload control center electrical distribute on MCC NG03C breaker trip, L.G. provides Short circuit power power loss of individual all ESF functions ad indicating lights Periodic testing and inspection NG03D 480-V motor Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Annunciation for None-redundant Overload control center electrical distribute on MCC NG03D breaker trip, L.G. provides Short circuit power power loss of individual all ESF functions load indicating lights Periodic testing and inspection NG04C 480-V motor Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Annunciation for None-redundant Overload control center electrical distribute on MCC NG04C breaker trip, L.G. provides Short circuit power power loss of individual all ESF functions load indicating lights Periodic testing and inspection NG04D 480-V motor Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Annunciation for None-redundant Overload control center electrical distribute on MCC NG04D breaker trip, L.G. provides Short circuit power power loss of individual all ESF functions load indicating lights Periodic testing and inspection NG02B 480-V motor Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Annunciation for None-redundant Overload control center electrical distribute on NG02B breaker trip, L.G. provides Short circuit power power loss of individual all ESF functions load indicating lights Periodic testing and inspection NG02A 480-V motor Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Annunciation for None-redundant Overload control center electrical distribute on NG02A breaker trip, L.G. provides Short circuit power power loss of individual all ESF functions load indicating lights Periodic testing and inspection Rev. 0


fusible switch    to and pro-                           swbd NK41          indication at      dc subsystem pro-  
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 15)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 52NG0208 800-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of loads Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and protects on MCC NG02T trip annunciation L.G. provides relay failure, loss of breaker NG02T all ESF func-control power tions Fails closed L.C. NG02 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides bkr 52NG0201 spection all ESF func-tions 52NG0405 800-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of loads Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and protects on MCC NG04T trip annunciation L.G. provides relay failure, loss of breaker NG04T all ESF func-control power tions Fails closed L.C. NG04 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides bkr 52NG0401 spection all ESF func-tions NG01T 480-V motor Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Annunciation on None-redundant Overload control center electric distribute on MCC NG01T FDR breaker trip L.G. provides Short circuit power power all ESF functions NG03T 480-V motor Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Annunciation on None-redundant Overload control center electric distribute on MCC NG03T FDR breaker trip L.G. provides Short circuit power power all ESF functions NG02T 480-V motor Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Annunciation on None-redundant Overload control center electric distribute on MCC NG02T FDR breaker trip L.G. provides Short circuit power power all ESF functions NG04T 480-V motor Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Annunciation on None-redundant Overload control center electric distribute on MCC NG04T FDR breaker trip L.G. provides Short circuit power power all ESF functions 52NG0108 800-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and protects to MCC NG01T trip annunciator L.G. provides relay failure, loss of breaker MCC NG01T all ESF func-control power tions Fails closed L.C. NG01 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides bkr 52NG0101 spection all ESF functions Rev. 0


tects distr                                              swbd NK41,         vides necessary
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 16)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 52NG0305 800-A, 480- Provides Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, Volt N.C. power to to MCC NG03T trip annunciator L.G. provides relay failure, loss breaker and protects all ESF functions of control power MCC NG03T Fails closed L.C. NG03 Periodic testing None-redundant isolated by and inspection L.G. provides bkr 52NG0301 all ESF functions 152NB0101 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Power unavail-Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, kV breaker to and pro-able at PEJ01A L.G. provides the relay failure, loss tects RHR PP ESF function of control power PE J01A Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed Bus NB01 Undervoltage None-redundant isolated by annunciation L.G. provides bkr 152NB0112 for NB01 at MCB all ESF functions 152NB0103 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Power unavail-Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, kV breaker to and pro-able at PEM01A L.G. provides the relay failure, loss tects S.I. PP ESF function of control power PEMO1A Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed Bus NB01 Undervoltage None-redundant isolated by annunciation L.G. provides bkr 152NB0112 for NB01 at MCB all ESF functions 152NB0104 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Power unavail-Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, kV breaker to and pro-able at PBG05A L.G. provides the relay failure, loss tects cent ESF functions of control power chgng PP PBG05A Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed Bus NB01 Undervoltage None-redundant isolated by annunciation L.G. provides bkr 152NB0112 for NB01 at MCB all ESF functions Rev. 11


swbd NK41                                                undervoltage        functions  
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 17)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 152NB0107 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Power unavail-Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, kV breaker to and pro-able at PEG01A PEG01C provides relay failure, loss tects comp clg ESF function of control power wtr PP PEG01A Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed Bus NB01 Undervoltage None-redundant isolated by annunciation L.G. provides bkr 152NB0112 for NB01 at MCB all ESF functions 152NB0108 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Power unavail-Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, kV breaker to and pro-able at PEG01C PEG01A provides relay failure, loss tects comp clg the ESF function of control power wtr PP PEG01C Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed Bus NB01 Undervoltage None-redundant isolated by annunciation L.G. provides bkr 152NB0112 for NB02 at MCB all ESF functions 152NB0102 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Power unavail-Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, kV breaker to and pro-able at PEN01A L.G. provides relay failure, loss tects cont the ESF function of control power spray PP PEN01A Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed Bus NB01 Undervoltage None-redundant isolated by annunciation L.G. provides bkr 152NB0112 for NB02 at MCB all ESF functions 152NB0105 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Power unavail-Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, kV breaker to and pro-able at PAL01A L.G. provides relay failure, loss tects aux fw the ESF function of control power PP PAL01A Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed Bus NB01 Undervoltage None-redundant isolated by annunciation L.G. provides bkr 152NB0112 for NB01 at MCB the ESF functions Rev. 11


alarm at swbd
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 18)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 152NB0204 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Power unavail-Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, kV breaker to and pro-able at PEJ01B L.G. provides relay failure, loss tects RHR PP the ESF function of control power PEJ01B Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed Bus NB02 Undervoltage None-redundant isolated by annunciation L.G. provides bkr 152NB0209 for NB02 at MCB all ESF functions 152NB0202 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Power unavail-Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, kV breaker to and pro-able at PEM01B L.G. provides relay failure, loss tects S.I. PP the ESF function of control power PEM01B Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed Bus NB02 Undervoltage None-redundant isolated by annunciation L.G. provides bkr 152NB0209 for NB02 at MCB all ESF functions 152NB0201 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Power unavail-Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, kV breaker to and pro-able at PBG05B L.G. provides relay failure, loss tects cent the ESF function of control power chgng PP PBG05B Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed Bus NB02 Undervoltage None-redundant isolated by annunciation L.G. provides bkr 152NB0209 for NB02 at MCB all ESF functions 152NB0206 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Power unavail-Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, kV breaker to and pro-able at PEG01B PEG01D provides relay failure, loss tects comp clg the ESF function of control power wtr PEG01B Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed Bus NB02 Undervoltage None-redundant isolated by annunciation L.G. provides bkr 152NB0209 for NB02 at MCB all ESF functions Rev. 11


NK01, and trouble
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 19)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 152NB0207 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Power unavail-Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, kV breaker to and pro-able at PEG01D PEG01B provides relay failure, loss tects comp clg the ESF function of control power wtr PP PEG01D Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed Bus NB02 Undervoltage None-redundant isolated by annunciation for L.G. provides bkr 152NB0209 NB02 at MCB all ESF functions 152NB0203 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Power unavail-Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, kV breaker to and pro-able at PEN01B L.G. provides relay failure, loss tects cont the ESF function of control power spray PP PEN01B Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed Bus NB02 Undervoltage None-redundant isolated by annunciation L.G. provides bkr 152NB0209 for NB02 at MCB all ESF functions 152NB0205 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Power unavail-Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, kV breaker to and pro-able at PAL01B L.G. provides relay failure, loss tects aux FW the ESF function of control power PP PAL01B Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed Bus NB02 Undervoltage None-redundant isolated by annunciation L.G. provides bkr 152NB0209 for NB02 at MCB all ESF functions Rev. 11


alarm at MCB  
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 20)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 152NB0116 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure kV N.C. to and pro-to XNG05 loss of indicating load group pro-Relay failure breaker tects XNG05 lights in MCC load vides all neces-Loss of control power ckts sary functions Fails closed Bus NB01 Undervoltage an-None-redundant isolated by nunciation for load group provides N.C. bkr NB01 at MCB all necessary 152NB0112 functions Periodic testing and inspection 152NB0115 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure kV N.C. to and pro-to PP DPEF01A load group pro-Relay failure breaker tects PP vides all neces-Loss of control power PEF01A sary functions Fails closed Bus NB01 Undervoltage an-None-redundant isolated by nunciation for load group provides N.C. bkr NB01 at MCB all necessary 152NB0112 functions Periodic testing and inspection 152NB0216 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure kV N.C. to and pro-to DPEF01B loss of indicating load group pro-Relay failure breaker tects XNG06 lights in MCC load vides all neces-Loss of control power ckts sary functions Fails closed Bus NB02 Undervoltage an-None-redundant isolated by nunciation for load group provides N.C. bkr NB02 at MCB all necessary 152NB0209 functions Periodic testing and inspection 152NB0215 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure kV N.C. to and pro-to DPEF01B undervoltage an-load group pro-Relay failure breaker tects PP nunciation for vides all neces-Loss of control power PEF01B NB02 at MCB sary functions Fails closed Bus NB02 Periodic testing None-redundant isolated by and inspection load group provides N.C. bkr all necessary 152NB0209 functions Rev. 11


89NK0103    125-V, N.C.        Provides power   Fails open          Loss of invert-   Loss of dc in-     None-bus NN01 Mechanical failure fusible switch    to and pro-                           er NN15 power    put to inv          fed by inverter tects 7,5-kVA                          to bus NN01      annunciated        alternate CVT sour ce                                inverter NN15                                                                or normal inv unit 89NK0303    125-V, N.C.         Provides power   Fails open           Loss of invert-  Loss of dc in-      None-bus NN03 Mechanical failure fusible switch      to and pro-                           er NN15 power    put to inv          fed by inverter tects 7,5-kVA                          to bus NN03      annunciated        alternate CVT sour ce                                inverter NN15                                                                or normal inv unit
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 21)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure XNG05 4.00-kV/ Provides power Fails to pro-Loss of power Overcurrent, None-redundant Internal fault 480-V xfmr to MCC NG05E vide power to MCC NG05E ground over-load group pro-current, neutral vides all neces-overcurrent sary functions annunciator Loss of indicating lights in MCC load ckts Periodic testing and inspection XNG06 4.00-kV/ Provides power Fails to pro-Loss of power Overcurrent, None-redundant Internal fault 480-V xfmr to MCC NG06E vide power to MCC NG06E ground over-load group pro-current, neutral vides all neces-overcurrent sary functions annunciator Loss of indicating lights in MCC load ckts Periodic testing and inspection 52NG05E 800-A, 480-V Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure AF1 N.C. breaker to and pro-to MCC NG05E Trip annunciator load group pro-Relay failure tects MCC vides all neces-Loss of control power NG05E sary functions Fails closed NG05E Loss of indi-None-redundant isolated by cating lights in load group provides N.C. bkr MCC load ckts all necessary 152NB0116 functions Periodic testing and inspection 52NG06E 800-A, 480-V Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure AF1 N.C. breaker to and pro-to MCC NG06E Trip annunciator load group pro-Relay failure tects MCC NG06E vides all neces-Loss of control power sary functions Fails closed NG06E Loss of indi-None-redundant isolated by cating lights in load group provides N.C. bkr MCC load ckts all necessary 152NB216 functions Rev. 13


Rev. 29 
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 22)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure Periodic testing and inspection NG05E 480-V motor Distributes Fails to Loss of power to Trip annunciator None-redundant Overload control center electrical provide power ESW Intake Struc-on feeder bkrs load group pro-Short circuit power ture Separation vides all neces-Group 1 Loss of indicating sary functions lights in MCC load ckts Periodic testing and inspection NG06E 480-V motor Distributes Fails to Loss of power to Trip annunciator None-redundant Overload control center electrical provide power ESW Intake Struc-on feeder bkrs load group pro-Short circuit power ture Separation vides all neces-Group 4 Loss of indicating sary functions lights in MCC load ckts Periodic testing and inspection Rev. 13


WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 28)  
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 23)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No.
Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure Deleted Deleted 152NB0117 Space Periodically N/A N/A N/A None N/A used for test device or spare breaker storage Deleted 152NB0217 Space Periodically N/A N/A N/A None N/A used for test device or spare breaker storage Rev. 11


Method  
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 24)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure NK11 125-V battery Provides back-Fails to pro-Loss of backup Solid state None-redundant Short to ground, up dc power to vide adequate dc power to battery monitor, dc subsystem internal shorts dc bus NK01 if output voltage bus NK01 local indication, provides all charger NK21 control room necessary func-fails; provides annunciation tions extra power during surges Periodic testing and inspection NK13 125-V battery Provides back-Fails to pro-Loss of backup Solid state None-redundant Short to ground, up dc power to vide adequate dc power to battery monitor, dc subsystem internal shorts dc bus NK03 if output voltage bus NK03 local indication, provides all charger NK23 control room necessary func-fails; provides annunciation tions extra power during surges Periodic testing and inspection NK12 125-V battery Provides back-Fails to pro-Loss of backup Solid state None-redundant Short to ground, up dc power to vide adequate dc power to battery monitor, dc subsystem internal shorts dc bus NK02 if output voltage bus NK02 local indication, provides all charger NK22 control room necessary func-fails; provides annunciation tions extra power during surges Periodic testing and inspection NK14 125-V battery Provides back-Fails to pro-Loss of backup Solid state None-redundant Short to ground, up dc power to vide adequate dc power to battery monitor, dc subsystem internal shorts dc bus NK04 if output voltage bus NK04 local indication, provides all charger NK24 control room necessary func-fails; provides annunciation tions extra power during surges Periodic testing and inspection 89NK0101 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of battery Battery output None-battery Mechanical failure fusible switch to and protects NK11 source amps indicated charger NK21 bus NK01 to bus NK01 in control room provides power 89NK0301 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of battery Battery output None-battery Mechanical failure fusible switch to and protects NK13 source amps indicated charger NK23 bus NK03 to bus NK03 in control room provides power 89NK0201 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of battery Battery output None-battery Mechanical failure fusible switch to and protects NK12 source amps indicated charger NK22 bus NK02 to bus NK02 in control room provides power Rev. 11


of Causes Effect on         Failure             Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name       Function         Failure Mode       Subsystem         Detection           Total System Failure 89NK0304    125-V, N.C.       Provides power   Fails open         Loss of distr      Undervoltage        None-redundant Mechanical failure  
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 25)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 89NK0401 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of battery Battery output None-battery Mechanical failure fusible switch to and protects NK14 source amps indicated charger NK24 bus NK04 to bus NK04 in control room provides power NK21 125-V battery Charges bat-Fails to provide None-battery Local indication None-battery Fault, component charger tery NK11; power NK11 picks up and control room NK11 provides failure provides pri-load until summary annun-power (spare is mary power spare charger ciation for also available) to bus NK03 NK25 is in-input under-stalled voltage and output under and over voltage Periodic testing and inspection NK23 125-V battery Charges bat-Fails to provide None-battery Local indication None-battery Fault, component charger tery NK13; power NK13 picks up and control room NK13 provides failure provides pri-load until summary annun-power (spare is mary power spare charger ciation for also available) to bus NK03 NK25 is in-input under-stalled voltage and output under and over voltage Periodic testing and inspection NK22 125-V battery Charges bat-Fails to provide None-battery Local indication None-battery Fault, component charger tery NK12; power NK12 picks up and control room NK12 provides failure provides pri-load until summary annun-power (spare is mary power spare charger ciation for also available) to bus NK02 NK25 is in-input under-stalled voltage and output under and over voltage Periodic testing and inspection NK24 125-V battery Charges bat-Fails to provide None-battery Local indication None-battery Fault, component charger tery NK14; power NK14 picks up and control room NK14 provides failure provides pri-load until summary annun-power (spare is mary power spare charger ciation for also available) to bus NK04 NK25 is in-input under-stalled voltage and output under and over voltage Periodic testing and inspection Rev. 11


fusible switch     to and pro-                           swbd NK43          indication at       dc subsystem pro-  
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 26)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 89NK0102 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of battery Charger output None-battery Mechanical failure fusible switch to and protects charger NK21 amps indicated NK11 supplies bus NK01 source to in control room bus NK01 bus NK01 89NK0302 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of battery Charger output None-battery Mechanical failure fusible switch to and pro-charger NK23 amps indicated NK13 supplies tects bus source to in control room bus NK03 NK03 bus NK03 89NK0202 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of battery Charger output None-battery Mechanical failure fusible switch to and pro-charger NK22 amps indicated supplies tects bus source to in control room bus NK02 NK02 bus NK02 89NK0402 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of battery Charger output None-battery Mechanical failure fusible switch to and pro-charger NK24 amps indicated supplies tects bus source to in control room bus NK04 NK04 bus NK04 NK01 125-Vdc bus Distributes Fails to Loss of Sep. Ground detection None-redundant Overload electrical distribute Grp. 1 dc power local indication subsystem pro-Short circuit power power of undervoltage, vides all neces-and summary sary functions annunciation at control room Periodic testing and inspection NK03 125-Vdc bus Distributes Fails to Loss of Sep. Ground detection None-redundant Overload electrical distribute Grp. 3 dc power local indication subsystem pro-Short circuit power power of undervoltage, vides all neces-and summary sary functions annunciation at control room Periodic testing and inspection Rev. 11


tects distr                                             swbd NK43,         vides necessary  
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 27)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure NK02 125-Vdc bus Distributes Fails to Loss of Sep. Ground detection, None-redundant Overload electrical distribute Grp. 2 dc power local indication subsystem provides Short circuit power power of undervoltage, all necessary and summary functions annunciation at control room Periodic testing and inspection NK04 125-Vdc bus Distributes Fails to Loss of Sep. Ground detection, None-redundant Overload electrical distribute Grp. 4 dc power local indication subsystem provides Short circuit power power of undervoltage, all necessary and summary functions annunciation at control room Periodic testing and inspection 89NK0111 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of invert-Loss of dc in-None-bus NN01 Mechanical failure fusible switch to and pro-er NN11 power put to inv fed by inverter tects 7.5-kVA to bus NN01 annunciated alternate CVT source inverter NN11 or swing unit NN15 89NK0311 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of invert-Loss of dc in-None-bus NN03 Mechanical failure fusible switch to and pro-er NN13 power put to inv fed by inverter tects 7.5-kVA to bus NN03 annunciated alternate CVT source inverter NN13 or swing unit NN15 89NK0211 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of invert-Loss of dc in-None-bus NN02 Mechanical failure fusible switch to and pro-er NN12 power put to inv fed by inverter tects 7.5-kVA to bus NN02 annunciated alternate CVT source inverter NN12 or swing unit NN16 89NK0411 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of invert-Loss of dc in-None-bus NN04 Mechanical failure Fusible switch to and pro-er NN14 power put to inv fed by inverter tects 7.5-kVA to bus NN04 annunciated alternate CVT source inverter NN14 or swing unit NN16 89NK0104 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of distr Undervoltage None-redundant Mechanical failure fusible switch to and pro-swbd NK41 indication at dc subsystem pro-tects distr swbd NK41, vides necessary swbd NK41 undervoltage functions alarm at swbd NK01, and trouble alarm at MCB 89NK0103 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of invert-Loss of dc in-None-bus NN01 Mechanical failure fusible switch to and pro-er NN15 power put to inv fed by inverter tects 7,5-kVA to bus NN01 annunciated alternate CVT source inverter NN15 or normal inv unit 89NK0303 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of invert-Loss of dc in-None-bus NN03 Mechanical failure fusible switch to and pro-er NN15 power put to inv fed by inverter tects 7,5-kVA to bus NN03 annunciated alternate CVT source inverter NN15 or normal inv unit Rev. 29


swbd NK43                                               undervoltage       functions  
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 28)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 89NK0304 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of distr Undervoltage None-redundant Mechanical failure fusible switch to and pro-swbd NK43 indication at dc subsystem pro-tects distr swbd NK43, vides necessary swbd NK43 undervoltage functions alarm at swbd NK03, and trouble alarm at MCB 89NK0204 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of distr Undervoltage None-redundant Mechanical failure fusible switch to and pro-swbd NK42 indication at dc subsystem pro-tects distr swbd NK42, vides necessary swbd NK42 undervoltage functions alarm at swbd NK02, and trouble alarm at MCB 89NK0404 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of distr Undervoltage None-redundant Mechanical failure fusible switch to and pro-swbd NK44 indication at dc subsystem pro-tects distr swbd NK44, vides necessary swbd NK44 undervoltage functions alarm at swbd NK04, and trouble alarm at MCB NK41 125-Vdc Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Undervoltage None-redundant Overload control dc power distribute on distr swbd indication at dc subsystem Short circuit distribution power NK41 NK41, under-provides necessary switchboard voltage alarm functions at NK01, trouble alarm at MCB NK43 125-Vdc Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Undervoltage None-redundant Overload control dc power distribute on distr swbd indication at dc subsystem Short circuit distribution power NK43 NK43, under-provides necessary switchboard voltage alarm functions at NK03, trouble alarm at MCB NK42 125-Vdc Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Undervoltage None-redundant Overload control dc power distribute on distr swbd indication at dc subsystem Short circuit distribution power NK42 NK42, under-provides necessary switchboard voltage alarm functions at NK02, trouble alarm at MCB 89NK0203 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of invert-Loss of dc in-None-bus NN02 Mechanical failure fusible switch to and pro-er NN16 power put to inv fed by inverter tects 7.5-kVA to bus NN02 annunciated alternate CVT source inverter NN16 or normal inv unit 89NK0403 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of invert-Loss of dc in-None-bus NN04 Mechanical failure fusible switch to and pro-er NN16 power put to inv fed by inverter tects 7.5-kVA to bus NN04 annunciated alternate CVT source inverter NN16 or normal inv unit Rev. 29


alarm at swbd  
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 29)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure NK44 125-Vdc Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Undervoltage None-redundant Overload control dc power distribute on dist swbd indication at dc subsystem Short circuit distribution power NK44 NK44, under-provides necessary switchboard voltage alarm at functions NK04, trouble alarm at MCB NN11 7.5-kVA Provides reg-Fails to Inv source to Loss of ac out-None-redundant Fault, component inverter ulated ac provide swbd NN01 lost; put annunciation ac subsystem failure, output tripped power to power alternate source provides neces-by power surge swbd NN01 CVT auto transfer. Periodic testing sary functions NN15 manually and inspection connected.
NN13 7.5-kVA Provides reg-Fails to Inv source to Loss of ac out-None-redundant Fault, component inverter ulated ac provide swbd NN03 lost; put annunciation ac subsystem failure, output tripped power to power alternate source provides neces-by power surge swbd NN03 CVT auto transfer Periodic testing sary functions NN15 manually and inspection connected.
NN12 7.5-kVA Provides reg-Fails to Inv source to Loss of ac out-None-redundant Fault, component inverter ulated ac provide swbd NN02 lost; put annunciation ac subsystem failure, output tripped power to power alternate source provides neces-by power surge swbd NN02 CVT auto transfer Periodic testing sary functions NN16 manually and inspection connected.
NN14 7.5-kVA Provides reg-Fails to Inv source to Loss of ac out-None-redundant Fault, component inverter ulated ac provide swbd NN04 lost; put annunciation ac subsystem failure, output tripped power to power alternate source provides neces-by power surge swbd NN04 CVT auto transfer Periodic testing sary functions NN16 manually and inspection connected.
52NN0101 100-A/120-V Swbd NN01 fdr Fails open Loss of power Periodic testing None-redundant Mechanical failure normally brkr from to swbd NN01 and inspection channel provides closed non-normal power necessary functions automatic ckt source-inverter Undervoltage bkr NN11 Annunciation for None-redundant swbd NN01 channel provides necessary functions Fails closed Swbd NN01 isolated by inverter output bkr NN15 7.5-kVA Provides reg-Fails to Inv source to Loss of ac out-None-redundant Fault, component swing inverter ulated ac provide swbd NN01/NN03 put annunciation ac subsystem failure, output tripped power to power bst; alternate provides neces-by power surge swbd NN01/NN03 CVT source auto Periodic testing sary functions transfer and inspection NN16 7.5-kVA swing Provides reg-Fails to Inv source to Loss of ac out-None-redundant Fault, component inverter ulated ac provide swbd NN02/NN04; put annunciation ac subsystem failure, output tripped power to power bst; alternate provides neces-by power surge swbd NN02/NN04 CVT source auto Periodic testing sary functions transfer and inspection Rev. 29


NK03, and trouble
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 30)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 52NN0301 100-A/120-V Swbd NN01 fdr Fails open Loss of power Periodic testing None-redundant Mechanical failure normally closed bkr from to swbd NN03 and inspection channel provides nonautomatic normal power necessary functions ckt bkr source-inverter Undervoltage NN13 annunciation for swbd NN03 Fails closed Swbd NN01 isolated None-redundant by inverter out-channel provides put bkr necessary functions 52NN0201 100-A/120-V Swbd NN01 fdr Fails open Loss of power Periodic testing None-redundant Mechanical failure normally closed bkr from to swbd NN02 and inspection channel provides nonautomatic normal power necessary functions ckt bkr source-inverter Undervoltage NN12 annunciation for swbd NN02 Fails closed Swbd NN01 isolated None-redundant by inverter out-channel provides put bkr necessary functions 51NN0401 100-A/120-V Swbd NN01 fdr Fails open Loss of power Periodic testing None-redundant Mechanical failure normally closed bkr from to swbd NN04 and inspection channel provides nonautomatic normal power necessary functions ckt bkr source-inverter Undervoltage NN14 annunciation for swbd NN04 Fails closed Swbd NN01 isolated None-redundant by inverter out-channel provides put bkr necessary functions NN01 120-Vac Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Undervoltage None-redundant Overload instrument electrical provide power on swbd NN01 annunciation channel provides Short circuit switchboard power necessary func-Periodic testing tions.
and inspection Rev. 29


alarm at MCB
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 31)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure NN03 120-Vac Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Undervoltage None-redundant Overload instrument electric provide power on swbd NN03 annunciation channel provides Short circuit switchboard power necessary functions Periodic testing and inspection NN02 120-Vac Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Undervoltage None-redundant Overload instrument electric provide power on swbd NN02 annunciation channel provides Short circuit bus power necessary functions Periodic testing and inspection NN04 120-Vac Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Undervoltage None-redundant Overload instrument electric provide power on swbd NN04 annunciation channel provides Short circuit bus power necessary functions Periodic testing and inspection Rev. 29


89NK0204    125-V, N.C.       Provides power   Fails open         Loss of distr      Undervoltage        None-redundant Mechanical failure  
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 32)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 52NG01ABF1 100-A/480-V Provides Fails open Loss of xfmr Periodic testing None-transformer Mechanical failure N.C. circuit isolation XPN07 and inspection loads are non-breaker between class safety related 1E power supply and Non-Fails closed MCC NG01A is None-redundant class 1E load isolated by L.C. MCC provides Xfmr-XPN07 bkr 52NG0106 necessary functions 52NG02ADF1 100-A/480-V Provides Fails open Loss of xfmr Periodic testing None-transformer Mechanical failure N.C. circuit isolation XPN08 and inspection loads are non-breaker between class safety related 1E power supply and Non-Fails closed MCC NG02A is None-redundant class 1E load isolated by L.C. MCC provides Xfmr-XPN08 bkr 52NG0206 necessary functions 52NG01ACR3 100-A/480-V Provides power Fails open Loss of Inv Periodic testing None-preferred Mechanical failure N.C. circuit to and pro-NN11 backup AC and inspection source provides breaker tects Inv NN11 (CVT) necessary functions CVT Fails closed MCC NG01A iso-None-preferred lated by N.C. source provides bkr 52NG0106 necessary functions Rev. 29


fusible switch     to and pro-                           swbd NK42          indication at      dc subsystem pro-  
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 33)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 52NG02AFF3 100-A/480-V Provides power Fails open Loss of Inv Periodic testing None-preferred Mechanical failure N.C. circuit to and pro-NN14 backup AC and inspection source provides breaker tects Inv NN14 (CVT) necessary functions CVT Fails closed MCC NG02A iso-None-preferred lated by N.C. source provides bkr 52NG0206 necessary functions NK25 Spare 125-V Replaces any Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery as-Fault, component battery of chargers provide replace a and inspection asociated with failure charger NK21, NK23 power failed failed charger charger supplies load 89NK0109 125-V, N.O. Connects Fails open None Periodic testing None Mechanical failure fusible switch battery NK11 and inspection to resistive load for dis-charge testing 89NK0309 125-V, N.O. Connects Fails open None Periodic testing None Mechanical failure fusible switch battery NK13 and inspection to resistive load for dis-charge testing 89NK0209 125-V, N.O. Connects Fails open None Periodic testing None Mechanical failure fusible switch battery NK12 and inspection to resistive load for dis-charge testing 89NK0409 125-V, N.O. Connects Fails open None Periodic testing None Mechanical failure fusible switch battery NK14 and inspection to resistive load for dis-charge testing Rev. 29


tects distr                                              swbd NK42,         vides necessary
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 34)
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No.
Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure NK26 Spare 125-V Replaces any Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Fault, component battery of chargers provide replace a and inspection associated with failure charger NK22, NK24 power failed failed charger charger supplies load NK71 DC transfer Connects Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure switch charger NK21 or transfer replace a and inspection associated with NK25 to bus NK01 failed charger failed charger supplies load NK72 DC transfer Connects Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure switch charger NK22 or transfer replace a and inspection associated with NK26 to bus NK02 failed charger failed charger supplies load NK73 DC transfer Connects Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure switch charger NK23 or transfer replace a and inspection associated with NK25 to bus NK03 failed charger failed charger supplies load NK74 DC transfer Connects Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure switch charger NK24 or transfer replace a and inspection associated with NK26 to bus NK04 failed charger failed charger supplies load NK75 DC transfer Connects spare Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure switch charger NK25 to transfer replace a and inspection associated with bus NK01 or NK03 failed charger failed charger supplies load NK76 DC transfer Connects spare Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure switch charger NK26 to transfer replace a and inspection associated with bus NK02 or NK04 failed charger failed charger supplies load NK77 AC transfer Connects AC Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure switch power from bus transfer replace a and inspection associated with NG01 or PG19 to failed charger failed charger charger NK25 supplies load NK78 AC transfer Connects AC Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure switch power from bus transfer replace a and inspection associated with NG04 or PG20 to failed charger failed charger charger NK26 supplies load NK79 Swing Inverter Connects DC Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure transfer switch power from bus transfer replace a and inspection associated with NK01 or NK03 to failed Swing failed Inverter Swing Inv NN15 Inverter supplies load NK80 Swing Inverter Connects DC Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure transfer switch power from bus transfer replace a and inspection associated with NK02 or NK04 to failed Swing failed Inverter Swing Inv NN16 Inverter supplies load Rev. 29


swbd NK42                                                undervoltage        functions
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 35)
 
Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 89NK0105 125-V, N.C. Provides Fails open Loss of distr Undervoltage None-redundant Mechanical failure fusible switch power to swbd NK51 indication at dc subsystem and protects swbd NK51 by provides necessary distr swbd alarm at swbd functions NK51 NK01 and trouble alarm at MCB 89NK0405 125-V, N.C. Provides Fails open Loss of distr Undervoltage None-redundant Mechanical failure fusible switch power to swbd NK54 indication at dc subsystem and protects swbd NK54, provides necessary distr swbd alarm at swbd functions NK54 NK04 and trouble alarm at MCB NK51 125-V control Distributes dc Fails to Loss of loads Undervoltage None-redundant Overload distribution power distribute on swbd NK51 indication on dc subsystem Short circuit switchboard power swbd NK51, UV provides necessary alarm at NK01, functions and trouble alarm at MCB NK54 125-V dc con-Distributes dc Fails to Loss of loads Undervoltage None-redundant Overload trol distri-power distribute on swbd NK54 indicating on dc subsystem Short circuit bution switch-power swbd NK54, UV provides necessary board alarm at NK04, functions and trouble alarm at MCB 52NG01AGF3 100-A/480-V Provides power Fails open Loss of Inv Periodic testing None-preferred Mechanical failure N. C. circuit to and pro-NN13 backup AC and inspection source provides Breaker tects Inv NN13 (CVT) necessary functions CVT Fails closed MCC NG01A iso-None-preferred lated by N. C. source provides bkr 52NG0106 necessary functions 52NG01AGF4 100-A/480-V Provides power Fails open Loss of Inv Periodic testing None-preferred Mechanical failure N. C. circuit to and pro-NN15 backup AC and inspection source provides Breaker tects Inv NN15 (CVT) necessary functions CVT Fails closed MCC NG04A iso-None-preferred lated by N. C. source provides bkr 52NG0106 necessary functions 52NG02ABR1 100-A/480-V Provides power Fails open Loss of Inv Periodic testing None-preferred Mechanical failure N. C. circuit to and pro-NN12 backup AC and inspection source provides Breaker tects Inv NN12 (CVT) necessary functions CVT Fails closed MCC NG04A iso-None-preferred lated by N. C. source provides bkr 52NG0206 necessary functions 52NG02AFF1 100-A/480-V Provides power Fails open Loss of Inv Periodic testing None-preferred Mechanical failure N. C. circuit to and pro-NN16 backup AC and inspection source provides Breaker tects Inv NN16 (CVT) necessary functions CVT Fails closed MCC NG01A iso-None-preferred lated by N. C. source provides bkr 52NG0206 necessary functions Rev. 29  
alarm at swbd
 
NK02, and trouble
 
alarm at MCB
 
89NK0404    125-V, N.C.        Provides power    Fails open          Loss of distr      Undervoltage        None-redundant Mechanical failure
 
fusible switch    to and pro-                          swbd NK44          indication at      dc subsystem pro-
 
tects distr                                              swbd NK44,          vides necessary
 
swbd NK44                                                undervoltage        functions
 
alarm at swbd
 
NK04, and trouble
 
alarm at MCB
 
NK41        125-Vdc            Distributes      Fails to            Loss of loads      Undervoltage        None-redundant Overload
 
control            dc power          distribute          on distr swbd      indication at      dc subsystem Short circuit
 
distribution                        power              NK41              NK41, under-        provides necessary
 
switchboard                                                                voltage alarm      functions
 
at NK01, trouble
 
alarm at MCB
 
NK43        125-Vdc            Distributes      Fails to            Loss of loads      Undervoltage        None-redundant Overload
 
control            dc power          distribute          on distr swbd      indication at      dc subsystem Short circuit
 
distribution                        power              NK43              NK43, under-        provides necessary
 
switchboard                                                                voltage alarm      functions
 
at NK03, trouble
 
alarm at MCB
 
NK42        125-Vdc            Distributes      Fails to            Loss of loads      Undervoltage        None-redundant Overload
 
control            dc power          distribute          on distr swbd      indication at      dc subsystem Short circuit
 
distribution                        power              NK42              NK42, under-        provides necessary
 
switchboard                                                                voltage alarm      functions
 
at NK02, trouble
 
alarm at MCB
 
89NK0203    125-V, N.C.        Provides power    Fails open          Loss of invert-    Loss of dc in-        None-bus NN02 Mechanical failure fusible switch    to and pro-                          er NN16 power      put to inv            fed by inverter tects 7.5-kVA                        to bus NN02        annunciated          alternate CVT so urce                                inverter NN16                                                                  or normal inv un it  89NK0403    125-V, N.C.        Provides power    Fails open          Loss of invert-    Loss of dc in-      None-bus NN04 Mechanical failure fusible switch    to and pro-                          er NN16 power      put to inv          fed by inverter tects 7.5-kVA                        to bus NN04        annunciated          alternate CVT so urce                                inverter NN16                                                                  or normal inv un it 
 
Rev. 29 
 
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 29)
 
Method
 
of Causes Effect on          Failure            Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name        Function          Failure Mode        Subsystem          Detection          Total System Failure NK44        125-Vdc            Distributes      Fails to            Loss of loads      Undervoltage        None-redundant Overload
 
control            dc power          distribute          on dist swbd      indication at      dc subsystem Short circuit
 
distribution                        power              NK44              NK44, under-        provides necessary
 
switchboard                                                                voltage alarm at    functions
 
NK04, trouble
 
alarm at MCB
 
NN11        7.5-kVA            Provides reg-    Fails to            Inv source to      Loss of ac out-    None-redundant Fault, component
 
inverter          ulated ac        provide            swbd NN01 lost;    put annunciation    ac subsystem failure, output tripped
 
power to          power              alternate source                      provides neces-by power surge swbd NN01                            CVT auto transfer. Periodic testing    sary functions NN15 manually      and inspection connected.
NN13        7.5-kVA            Provides reg-    Fails to            Inv source to      Loss of ac out-    None-redundant Fault, component
 
inverter          ulated ac        provide            swbd NN03 lost;    put annunciation    ac subsystem failure, output tripped
 
power to          power              alternate source                      provides neces-by power surge swbd NN03                            CVT auto transfer  Periodic testing    sary functions NN15 manually      and inspection connected.
NN12        7.5-kVA            Provides reg-    Fails to            Inv source to      Loss of ac out-    None-redundant Fault, component
 
inverter          ulated ac        provide            swbd NN02 lost;    put annunciation    ac subsystem failure, output tripped
 
power to          power              alternate source                      provides neces-by power surge swbd NN02                            CVT auto transfer  Periodic testing    sary functions NN16 manually      and inspection connected.
NN14        7.5-kVA            Provides reg-    Fails to            Inv source to      Loss of ac out-    None-redundant Fault, component
 
inverter          ulated ac        provide            swbd NN04 lost;    put annunciation    ac subsystem failure, output tripped
 
power to          power              alternate source                      provides neces-by power surge swbd NN04                            CVT auto transfer  Periodic testing    sary functions NN16 manually      and inspection connected.
52NN0101    100-A/120-V        Swbd NN01 fdr    Fails open          Loss of power      Periodic testing    None-redundant Mechanical failure
 
normally          brkr from                            to swbd NN01      and inspection      channel provides
 
closed non-        normal power                                                                necessary function s
automatic ckt      source-inverter                                          Undervoltage
 
bkr                NN11 Annunciation for    None-redundant swbd NN01          channel provides necessary function s                                                  Fails closed        Swbd NN01 isolated by
 
inverter output
 
bkr NN15        7.5-kVA            Provides reg-    Fails to            Inv source to      Loss of ac out-    None-redundant Fault, component swing inverter    ulated ac        provide            swbd NN01/NN03    put annunciation    ac subsystem failure, output tripped power to          power              bst; alternate                        provides neces-by power surge swbd NN01/NN03                        CVT source auto    Periodic testing    sary functions transfer          and inspection NN16        7.5-kVA swing      Provides reg-    Fails to            Inv source to      Loss of ac out-    None-redundant Fault, component inverter          ulated ac        provide            swbd NN02/NN04;    put annunciation    ac subsystem failure, output tripped power to          power              bst; alternate                        provides neces-by power surge swbd NN02/NN04                        CVT source auto    Periodic testing    sary functions transfer          and inspection
 
Rev. 29 
 
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 30)
 
Method
 
of Causes Effect on          Failure            Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name        Function          Failure Mode        Subsystem          Detection          Total System Failure 52NN0301    100-A/120-V        Swbd NN01 fdr    Fails open          Loss of power      Periodic testing    None-redundant Mechanical failure
 
normally closed    bkr from                              to swbd NN03      and inspection      channel provides
 
nonautomatic      normal power                                                                necessary function s
ckt bkr            source-inverter                                          Undervoltage
 
NN13                                                    annunciation for swbd NN03 Fails closed        Swbd NN01 isolated                    None-redundant
 
by inverter out-                      channel provides
 
put bkr                                necessary function s
 
52NN0201    100-A/120-V        Swbd NN01 fdr    Fails open          Loss of power      Periodic testing    None-redundant Mechanical failure
 
normally closed    bkr from                              to swbd NN02      and inspection      channel provides
 
nonautomatic      normal power                                                                necessary function s
ckt bkr            source-inverter                                          Undervoltage
 
NN12                                                    annunciation for swbd NN02 Fails closed        Swbd NN01 isolated                    None-redundant
 
by inverter out-                      channel provides
 
put bkr                                necessary function s
 
51NN0401    100-A/120-V        Swbd NN01 fdr    Fails open          Loss of power      Periodic testing    None-redundant Mechanical failure
 
normally closed    bkr from                              to swbd NN04      and inspection      channel provides
 
nonautomatic      normal power                                                                necessary function s
ckt bkr            source-inverter                                          Undervoltage
 
NN14                                                    annunciation for swbd NN04 Fails closed        Swbd NN01 isolated                    None-redundant
 
by inverter out-                      channel provides
 
put bkr                                necessary function s
 
NN01        120-Vac            Distributes      Fails to            Loss of loads      Undervoltage        None-redundant Overload
 
instrument        electrical        provide power      on swbd NN01      annunciation        channel provides Short circuit
 
switchboard        power                                                                        necessary func-
 
Periodic testing    tions.
 
and inspection
 
Rev. 29 
 
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 31)
 
Method
 
of Causes Effect on          Failure            Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name        Function          Failure Mode        Subsystem          Detection          Total System Failure NN03        120-Vac            Distributes      Fails to            Loss of loads      Undervoltage        None-redundant Overload
 
instrument        electric          provide power      on swbd NN03      annunciation        channel provides Short circuit
 
switchboard        power                                                                        necessary function s
Periodic testing
 
and inspection
 
NN02        120-Vac            Distributes      Fails to            Loss of loads      Undervoltage        None-redundant Overload
 
instrument        electric          provide power      on swbd NN02      annunciation        channel provides Short circuit
 
bus                power                                                                        necessary function s
Periodic testing
 
and inspection
 
NN04        120-Vac            Distributes      Fails to            Loss of loads      Undervoltage        None-redundant Overload
 
instrument        electric          provide power      on swbd NN04      annunciation        channel provides Short circuit
 
bus                power                                                                        necessary function s
Periodic testing
 
and inspection
 
Rev. 29 
 
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 32)
 
Method
 
of Causes Effect on          Failure            Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name        Function          Failure Mode        Subsystem          Detection          Total System Failure 52NG01ABF1  100-A/480-V        Provides          Fails open          Loss of xfmr      Periodic testing    None-transformer Mechanical failure N.C. circuit      isolation                            XPN07              and inspection      loads are non-
 
breaker            between class                                                                safety related
 
1E power
 
supply and Non-  Fails closed        MCC NG01A is                          None-redundant
 
class 1E load                        isolated by L.C.                      MCC provides
 
Xfmr-XPN07                            bkr 52NG0106                          necessary function s
 
52NG02ADF1  100-A/480-V        Provides          Fails open          Loss of xfmr      Periodic testing    None-transformer Mechanical failure
 
N.C. circuit      isolation                            XPN08              and inspection      loads are non-
 
breaker            between class                                                                safety related
 
1E power
 
supply and Non-  Fails closed        MCC NG02A is                          None-redundant
 
class 1E load                        isolated by L.C.                      MCC provides
 
Xfmr-XPN08                            bkr 52NG0206                          necessary function s
 
52NG01ACR3  100-A/480-V        Provides power    Fails open          Loss of Inv      Periodic testing    None-preferred Mechanical failure N.C. circuit      to and pro-                          NN11 backup AC    and inspection      source provides breaker            tects Inv NN11                        (CVT)                                necessary functions CVT Fails closed        MCC NG01A iso-                        None-preferred
 
lated by N.C.                          source provides
 
bkr 52NG0106                          necessary function s
 
Rev. 29 
 
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 33)
 
Method
 
of Causes Effect on          Failure            Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name        Function          Failure Mode        Subsystem          Detection          Total System Failure 52NG02AFF3  100-A/480-V        Provides power    Fails open          Loss of Inv      Periodic testing    None-preferred Mechanical failure N.C. circuit      to and pro-                          NN14 backup AC    and inspection      source provides breaker            tects Inv NN14                        (CVT)                                necessary functions CVT Fails closed        MCC NG02A iso-                        None-preferred
 
lated by N.C.                          source provides
 
bkr 52NG0206                          necessary function s
 
NK25        Spare 125-V        Replaces any      Fails to            Inability to      Periodic testing    None-battery as-Fault, component
 
battery            of chargers      provide            replace a          and inspection      asociated with failure charger            NK21, NK23        power              failed                                failed charger
 
charger                                supplies load
 
89NK0109    125-V, N.O.        Connects          Fails open          None              Periodic testing    None Mechanical failure fusible switch    battery NK11                                            and inspection
 
to resistive
 
load for dis-
 
charge testing
 
89NK0309    125-V, N.O.        Connects          Fails open          None              Periodic testing    None Mechanical failure
 
fusible switch    battery NK13                                            and inspection
 
to resistive
 
load for dis-
 
charge testing
 
89NK0209    125-V, N.O.        Connects          Fails open          None              Periodic testing    None Mechanical failure
 
fusible switch    battery NK12                                            and inspection
 
to resistive
 
load for dis-
 
charge testing
 
89NK0409    125-V, N.O.        Connects          Fails open          None              Periodic testing    None Mechanical failure
 
fusible switch    battery NK14                                            and inspection
 
to resistive
 
load for dis-
 
charge testing
 
Rev. 29 
 
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 34)
 
Method        of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure
 
NK26 Spare 125-V Replaces any Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Fault, component battery of chargers provide replace a and inspection associated with failure charger NK22, NK24 power failed  failed charger charger  supplies load 
 
NK71 DC transfer Connects Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure switch charger NK21 or transfer replace a and inspection associated with NK25 to bus NK01  failed charger  failed charger supplies load 
 
NK72 DC transfer Connects Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure switch charger NK22 or transfer replace a and inspection associated with NK26 to bus NK02  failed charger  failed charger supplies load
 
NK73 DC transfer Connects Fails to  Inability to  Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure switch charger NK23 or transfer replace a and inspection associated with NK25 to bus NK03  failed charger  failed charger supplies load
 
NK74 DC transfer Connects Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure switch charger NK24 or transfer replace a and inspection associated with NK26 to bus NK04  failed charger  failed charger supplies load
 
NK75 DC transfer Connects spare Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure switch charger NK25 to transfer replace a and inspection associated with bus NK01 or NK03  failed charger  failed charger supplies load
 
NK76 DC transfer Connects spare Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure switch charger NK26 to transfer replace a and inspection associated with bus NK02 or NK04  failed charger  failed charger supplies load
 
NK77 AC transfer Connects AC Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure switch power from bus transfer replace a and inspection associated with NG01 or PG19 to  failed charger  failed charger charger NK25    supplies load
 
NK78 AC transfer Connects AC Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure switch power from bus transfer replace a and inspection associated with NG04 or PG20 to  failed charger  failed charger charger NK26    supplies load
 
NK79 Swing Inverter Connects DC Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure transfer switch power from bus transfer replace a and inspection associated with NK01 or NK03 to  failed Swing failed Inverter Swing Inv NN15 Inverter  supplies load
 
NK80 Swing Inverter Connects DC Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure transfer switch power from bus transfer replace a and inspection associated with NK02 or NK04 to  failed Swing failed Inverter Swing Inv NN16 Inverter  supplies load
 
Rev. 29 
 
WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 35)  
 
Method  
 
of Causes Effect on         Failure             Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name       Function         Failure Mode       Subsystem         Detection           Total System Failure 89NK0105     125-V, N.C.       Provides         Fails open         Loss of distr     Undervoltage       None-redundant Mechanical failure  
 
fusible switch     power to                             swbd NK51         indication at       dc subsystem  
 
and protects                                             swbd NK51 by       provides necessary
 
distr swbd                                               alarm at swbd       functions  
 
NK51                                                     NK01 and trouble  
 
alarm at MCB  
 
89NK0405     125-V, N.C.       Provides         Fails open         Loss of distr     Undervoltage       None-redundant Mechanical failure  
 
fusible switch     power to                             swbd NK54         indication at       dc subsystem  
 
and protects                                             swbd NK54,         provides necessary
 
distr swbd                                               alarm at swbd       functions  
 
NK54                                                     NK04 and trouble  
 
alarm at MCB  
 
NK51         125-V control     Distributes dc   Fails to           Loss of loads     Undervoltage       None-redundant Overload  
 
distribution       power             distribute         on swbd NK51       indication on       dc subsystem Short circuit  
 
switchboard                         power                                 swbd NK51, UV       provides necessary
 
alarm at NK01,     functions  
 
and trouble  
 
alarm at MCB  
 
NK54         125-V dc con-     Distributes dc   Fails to           Loss of loads     Undervoltage       None-redundant Overload  
 
trol distri-       power             distribute         on swbd NK54       indicating on       dc subsystem Short circuit  
 
bution switch-                       power                                 swbd NK54, UV       provides necessary
 
board                                                                       alarm at NK04,     functions  
 
and trouble  
 
alarm at MCB  
 
52NG01AGF3   100-A/480-V       Provides power   Fails open           Loss of Inv       Periodic testing     None-preferred Mechanical failure N. C. circuit     to and pro-                           NN13 backup AC     and inspection       source provides Breaker           tects Inv NN13                         (CVT)                                   necessary functio ns                                CVT Fails closed         MCC NG01A iso-                         None-preferred lated by N. C.                         source provides bkr 52NG0106                           necessary functio ns 52NG01AGF4   100-A/480-V       Provides power   Fails open           Loss of Inv       Periodic testing     None-preferred Mechanical failure N. C. circuit     to and pro-                           NN15 backup AC     and inspection       source provides Breaker           tects Inv NN15                         (CVT)                                   necessary functio ns                                CVT Fails closed         MCC NG04A iso-                         None-preferred lated by N. C.                         source provides bkr 52NG0106                           necessary functio ns 52NG02ABR1   100-A/480-V       Provides power   Fails open           Loss of Inv       Periodic testing     None-preferred Mechanical failure N. C. circuit     to and pro-                           NN12 backup AC     and inspection       source provides Breaker           tects Inv NN12                         (CVT)                                   necessary functio ns                                CVT Fails closed         MCC NG04A iso-                         None-preferred lated by N. C.                         source provides bkr 52NG0206                           necessary functio ns 52NG02AFF1   100-A/480-V       Provides power   Fails open           Loss of Inv       Periodic testing     None-preferred Mechanical failure N. C. circuit     to and pro-                           NN16 backup AC     and inspection       source provides Breaker           tects Inv NN16                         (CVT)                                   necessary functio ns                                CVT Fails closed         MCC NG01A iso-                         None-preferred lated by N. C.                         source provides bkr 52NG0206                           necessary functio ns 
 
Rev. 29  


Table 8.3-5 (Sheet 1 of 3)
Table 8.3-5 (Sheet 1 of 3)
Minimum Separation Distance Analysis Required by R. G. 1.75 and IEEE 384-74 EQUIPMENT     EQUIPMENT                     FUNCTION                             FAILURE         EFFECT ON S Y STEM              CAU S E  NUMBER       DE S CRIPTION                                                          MODE
Minimum Separation Distance Analysis Required by R. G. 1.75 and IEEE 384-74 EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT FUNCTION FAILURE EFFECT ON SYSTEM CAUSE NUMBER DESCRIPTION MODE GSHV31 & These valves are solenoid These valves are the inside and Valve fails This is a safe condition.
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Loss of power GSHV32 valves with a 120V AC outside containment isolation closed to valve supply voltage and a load valves on the sample supply ______________________________________________________________________
__________________________
of 2 amps.1 line to containment radiation Valve fails This is a safe condition.
G SHV31 &       These valves are solenoid     These valves are the inside and     Valve fails     This is a safe condition.
Short to monitor GTRT32. closed A blown fuse (3A) or tripped ground The phase conductor to breaker (15a) due to overcurrent each valve is protected Both valves are normally conditions is essentially the by a 3 amp fuse located energized, normally open and same as a loss of power. If the in the Main Control fail closed. 15 amp breaker trips at the MCC Board (RL020). distribution panel, it should be The only time these valves noted that the other devices fed The secondary level of are required to be closed, from the breaker will also fail in protection for GSHV31 is excluding testing is during in the safe position.2 the 15 amp circuit breaker a LOCA or MSLB where upon ______________________________________________________________________
Loss of power G SHV32        valves with a 120V AC         outside containment isolation       closed             to valve supply voltage and a load     valves on the sample supply         ____________________________________________
(NG01ACR123) which is receipt of the containment Valve fails Either the valve remains open due Hot short.
__________________________              of 2 amps.1                   line to containment radiation       Valve fails     This is a safe condition.
located in MCC distri-isolation signal the circuits closed to energization of the solenoid bution panel NG01AA1. supplying the solenoids are (see following) or it closes. If deenergized and the valves it closes, this is a safe condition.
The secondary level of are closed. ______________________________________________________________________
protection for GSHV32 is Valve fails This is a safe condition during Hot short.
the 15 amp circuit breaker open normal operations.
(NG02ACR130) which is located in MCC distribution During the following a LOCA or panel NG02AA1. MSLB these valves remaining open could be a concern, however, the Conduit 4U3E7N serves probability of the lack of the valve GSHV32. 3' - 5' separation resulting in both GSHV31 and GSHV32 remaining open during or following a MSLB or LOCA is deemed extremely low and as such not credible.
There-fore the present design is considered acceptable.
Rev. 1


S hort to                                              monitor GTRT32.                      closed          A blown fuse (3A) or trippe d            ground The phase conductor to                                                              breaker (15a) due to overcu rrent              each valve is protected        Both valves are normally                              conditions is essentially t he              by a 3 amp fuse located        energized, normally open and                          same as a loss of power. I f the              in the Main Control            fail closed.                                          15 amp breaker trips at the MCC              Board (RL020).                                                                      distribution panel, it shou ld be                                              The only time these valves                            noted that the other device s fed              The secondary level of        are required to be closed,                            from the breaker will also fail in              protection for G S HV31 is      excluding testing is during                          in the safe position.2 the 15 amp circuit breaker    a LOCA or M S LB where upon            ______________________________________________________________________
Table 8.3-5 (Sheet 2 of 3)
(NG01ACR123) which is          receipt of the containment          Valve fails      Either the valve remains op en due      Hot short.
EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT FUNCTION FAILURE EFFECT ON SYSTEM CAUSE NUMBER DESCRIPTION MODE The following sequence of events would be necessary for both valves to fail open:
located in MCC distri-        isolation signal the circuits        closed          to energization of the sole noid              bution panel NG01AA1.          supplying the solenoids are                          (see following) or it close
: 1. A failure or fault internal to the exposed cable on skid GTRT32 must cause a fire.
: s. If                                              deenergized and the valves                            it closes, this is a safe c ondition.              The secondary level of        are closed.                          ____________________________________________
: 2. The fuses(s) which protect the skid must fail to clear the fault.
__________________________
: 3. The breaker(s) which protect the cable(s) supplying the skid must fail to clear the fault.
protection for G S HV32 is                                            Valve fails      This is a safe condition during        Hot short.
: 4. The cable(s) supplying the skid must overheat to the point of combustion.
the 15 amp circuit breaker                                          open            normal operations.
: 5. The fire in item 4 must propagate to the GSHV31 cable.
(NG02ACR130) which is located in MCC distribution                                                          During the following a LOCA or              panel NG02AA1.                                                                      M S LB these valves remaining open could be a concern, however , the              Conduit 4U3E7N serves                                                                probability of the lack of the              valve G S HV32.                                                                        3' - 5' separation resulting in both G S HV31 and G S HV32 remaining open during or following a M S LB                                                                                                    or LOCA is deemed extremely low                                                                                                    and as such not credible.Th ere-                                                                                                    fore the present design is considered acceptable.
: 6. GSHV31 cable conductors must develop a hot short with another voltage source.
Rev. 1 Table 8.3-5 (S heet 2 of 3)
: 7. The hot short in item 6 must result in GSHV31 being open.
EQUIPMENT     EQUIPMENT                     FUNCTION                             FAILURE         EFFECT ON S Y STEM              CAU S E  NUMBER       DE S CRIPTION                                                          MODE
: 8. The fire in item 4 must generate sufficient heat to cause the GSHV32 cable to fail resulting in a hot short. This hot short must then cause the valve itself to fail open.
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
This sequence of events is not considered credible.
__________________________
Rev. 1
The following sequence of e vents                                                                                                    would be necessary for both valves                                                                                                   to fail open:
: 1. A failure or fault inte rnal to                                                                                                       the exposed cable on sk id                                                                                                        GTRT32 must cause a fir
: e.                                                                                                    2. The fuses(s) which prot ect the                                                                                                       skid must fail to clear the fault.
: 3. The breaker(s) which pr otect the                                                                                                       cable(s) supplying the skid must                                                                                                       fail to clear the fault
.                                                                                                    4. The cable(s) supplying the skid                                                                                                       must overheat to the po int of                                                                                                       combustion.
: 5. The fire in item 4 must propagate to the G S HV31 cable.
: 6. G S HV31 cable conductors must develop a hot short wit h another                                                                                                       voltage source.
: 7. The hot short in item 6 must                                                                                                       result in G S HV31 being open.
: 8. The fire in item 4 must generate                                                                                                       sufficient heat to caus e the                                                                                                       G S HV32 cable to fail resulting in a hot short. This h ot short                                                                                                       must then cause the val ve itself                                                                                                       to fail open.
This sequence of events is not                                                                                                       considered credible.
Rev. 1 Table 8.3-5 (S heet 3 of 3)
Notes 1. S ee Vendor Print J-603A-0071.
: 2. Devices associated with MCC Distribution Panel NG02AA1 Breaker 30 (15A).


S olenoid valves - G S HV36, G S HV39, G S HV32, G S HV33, GGRV28A, B, C, & D.
Table 8.3-5 (Sheet 3 of 3)
Dampers - GGRZ36, GGHZ43, GGHZ44, GGHZ57, GGHZ14, GGHZ33-1 & 33-2, GLHZ70, GLHZ72, GLHZ74, GLHZ62.  
Notes
 
: 1. See Vendor Print J-603A-0071.
Devices associated with MCC Distribution Panel NG01AA1 Breaker 23 (15A).  
: 2. Devices associated with MCC Distribution Panel NG02AA1 Breaker 30 (15A).
 
Solenoid valves - GSHV36, GSHV39, GSHV32, GSHV33, GGRV28A, B, C, & D.
S olenoid valves - G S HV31, G S HV34, G S HV37, G S HV38, GGRV27A, B, C, & D.
Dampers - GGRZ36, GGHZ43, GGHZ44, GGHZ57, GGHZ14, GGHZ33-1 & 33-2, GLHZ70, GLHZ72, GLHZ74, GLHZ62.
Devices associated with MCC Distribution Panel NG01AA1 Breaker 23 (15A).
Solenoid valves - GSHV31, GSHV34, GSHV37, GSHV38, GGRV27A, B, C, & D.
Dampers - GGRZ37, GGHZ40, GGHZ41, GGHZ42, GGHZ56, GLHZ13, GLHZ32-1 & 32-2, GLHZ69, GLHZ71, GLHZ73, GLHZ75.
Dampers - GGRZ37, GGHZ40, GGHZ41, GGHZ42, GGHZ56, GLHZ13, GLHZ32-1 & 32-2, GLHZ69, GLHZ71, GLHZ73, GLHZ75.
Rev. 8
Rev. 8  


WOLF CREEK APPENDIX 8.3A STATION BLACKOUT 8.3A.1 INTRODUCTION On July 21, 1988, the Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) amended its regulations in 10 C.F.R., Part 50. A new section, 50.63, was added which requires that each light-water-cooled nuclear power plant be able to withstand and recover from a station blackout (SBO) of a specified duration. It also identifies the factors that must be considered in specifying the station blackout duration. Section 50.63 requires that, for the station blackout duration, the plant be capable of maintaining core cooling and appropriate containment integrity. Section 50.63 further requires the following information:
WOLF CREEK APPENDIX 8.3A STATION BLACKOUT 8.3A.1 INTRODUCTION On July 21, 1988, the Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) amended its regulations in 10 C.F.R., Part 50. A new section, 50.63, was added which requires that each light-water-cooled nuclear power plant be able to withstand and recover from a station blackout (SBO) of a specified duration. It also identifies the factors that must be considered in specifying the station blackout duration. Section 50.63 requires that, for the station blackout duration, the plant be capable of maintaining core cooling and appropriate containment integrity. Section 50.63 further requires the following information:
: 1) A proposed station blackout duration including a justification for the selection based on the redundancy and reliability of the onsite emergency AC power sources, the expected frequency of loss of offsite power (LOOP), and the probable time needed to restore offsite power;
: 1)
: 2) A description of the procedures that will be implemented for station blackout events for the duration (as determined in 1 above) and for recovery therefrom; and
A proposed station blackout duration including a justification for the selection based on the redundancy and reliability of the onsite emergency AC power sources, the expected frequency of loss of offsite power (LOOP),
: 3) A list and proposed schedule for any needed modifications to equipment and associated procedures necessary for the specified SBO duration.
and the probable time needed to restore offsite power;
: 2)
A description of the procedures that will be implemented for station blackout events for the duration (as determined in 1 above) and for recovery therefrom; and
: 3)
A list and proposed schedule for any needed modifications to equipment and associated procedures necessary for the specified SBO duration.
Late in 1985, the Nuclear Management and Resources Council, NUMARC, established a working group on station blackout. A Nuclear Utility Group on Station Blackout (NUGSBO) provided the major portion of the technical support for the NUMARC station blackout working group. NUMARC determined that many of the concerns related to station blackout could be alleviated through industry initiatives to reduce overall station blackout risk.
Late in 1985, the Nuclear Management and Resources Council, NUMARC, established a working group on station blackout. A Nuclear Utility Group on Station Blackout (NUGSBO) provided the major portion of the technical support for the NUMARC station blackout working group. NUMARC determined that many of the concerns related to station blackout could be alleviated through industry initiatives to reduce overall station blackout risk.
The NUMARC Executive Committee approved industry initiatives to address the more important contributors to station blackout risk.
The NUMARC Executive Committee approved industry initiatives to address the more important contributors to station blackout risk.
In order to provide guidance and methodologies for implementing the NUMARC station blackout initiatives, NUMARC published the document NUMARC 87-00, Guidelines and Technical Bases for NUMARC Initiatives addressing Station Blackout at Light Water Reactors.
In order to provide guidance and methodologies for implementing the NUMARC station blackout initiatives, NUMARC published the document NUMARC 87-00, Guidelines and Technical Bases for NUMARC Initiatives addressing Station Blackout at Light Water Reactors.
The NRC has issued Regulatory Guide 1.155 "Station Blackout" which describes a means acceptable to the NRC Staff for meeting the requirements of 10 C.F.R.
The NRC has issued Regulatory Guide 1.155 Station Blackout which describes a means acceptable to the NRC Staff for meeting the requirements of 10 C.F.R.
50.63. Regulatory Guide (RG) 1.155 states that the NRC Staff has determined that NUMARC 87-00 "Guidelines and Technical Bases for NUMARC Initiatives addressing Station Blackout at Light Water Reactors" also provides guidance that is, in a large part, identical to the RG 1.155 guidance and is acceptable to the NRC Staff for meeting these requirements.
50.63. Regulatory Guide (RG) 1.155 states that the NRC Staff has determined that NUMARC 87-00 Guidelines and Technical Bases for NUMARC Initiatives addressing Station Blackout at Light Water Reactors also provides guidance that is, in a large part, identical to the RG 1.155 guidance and is acceptable to the NRC Staff for meeting these requirements.
8.3A-1 Rev. 14 WOLF CREEK 8.3A.2 STATION BLACKOUT GENERAL CRITERIA AND ASSUMPTIONS Procedures and equipment relied upon in a station blackout should ensure that satisfactory performance of necessary decay heat removal systems is maintained for the required station blackout coping duration. Additional requirements are to keep the core covered and to provide appropriate containment integrity to the extent that isolation valves perform their intended function without AC power. The general criteria and baseline assumptions used to evaluate the station blackout event are discussed in detail in Reference 1, NUMARC 87-00.
8.3A-1 Rev. 14  
 
WOLF CREEK 8.3A.2 STATION BLACKOUT GENERAL CRITERIA AND ASSUMPTIONS Procedures and equipment relied upon in a station blackout should ensure that satisfactory performance of necessary decay heat removal systems is maintained for the required station blackout coping duration. Additional requirements are to keep the core covered and to provide appropriate containment integrity to the extent that isolation valves perform their intended function without AC power. The general criteria and baseline assumptions used to evaluate the station blackout event are discussed in detail in Reference 1, NUMARC 87-00.
8.3A.3 WOLF CREEK BLACKOUT DURATION NUMARC 87-00, Section 3 was used to determine a station blackout duration of four hours for Wolf Creek. This duration was determined based on the following plant considerations.
8.3A.3 WOLF CREEK BLACKOUT DURATION NUMARC 87-00, Section 3 was used to determine a station blackout duration of four hours for Wolf Creek. This duration was determined based on the following plant considerations.
8.3A.3.1 AC Power Design Characteristic Group NUMARC 87-00 distinguishes between sites having particular susceptibilities to losing off-site power due to plant-centered, grid-related, and weather-related events. Three off-site power design groups are provided and are designed to be mutually exclusive. Of the three groups, group P1 includes those sites characterized by redundant and independent power sources that are considered less susceptible to loss as a result of plant-centered and weather-initiated events. Based upon NUMARC 87-00 guidance, Wolf Creek is determined to be in AC Power Design Characteristic Group, P1. This determination is based upon the following criteria of NUMARC 87-00.
8.3A.3.1 AC Power Design Characteristic Group NUMARC 87-00 distinguishes between sites having particular susceptibilities to losing off-site power due to plant-centered, grid-related, and weather-related events. Three off-site power design groups are provided and are designed to be mutually exclusive. Of the three groups, group P1 includes those sites characterized by redundant and independent power sources that are considered less susceptible to loss as a result of plant-centered and weather-initiated events. Based upon NUMARC 87-00 guidance, Wolf Creek is determined to be in AC Power Design Characteristic Group, P1. This determination is based upon the following criteria of NUMARC 87-00.
a) The expected frequency of grid-related loss of offsite power (LOOPs) does not exceed once per twenty years. As discussed in the Wolf Creek USAR Section 8.2.2, the grid design and past performance of the transmission system support the projection of uninterrupted transmission grid availability necessary to meet all requirements over the life of Wolf Creek. b) Sites are categorized in groups based upon the estimated frequency of LOOPs due to extremely severe weather. The estimated frequency of loss of off-site power due to extremely severe weather is determined by the annual expectation of storms at the site with wind velocities greater than or equal to 125 mph. Sites within the Extreme Severe Weather Group 1 have an annual frequency of storms, with wind velocities greater than or equal to 125 mph, less than 3.3 x 10
a)
-4. Wolf Creek is in Extreme Severe Weather Group 1.
The expected frequency of grid-related loss of offsite power (LOOPs) does not exceed once per twenty years. As discussed in the Wolf Creek USAR Section 8.2.2, the grid design and past performance of the transmission system support the projection of uninterrupted transmission grid availability necessary to meet all requirements over the life of Wolf Creek.
c) The estimated frequency of LOOPs due to severe weather places Wolf Creek in Severe Weather Group 2. Based on site specific factors, an empirical formula is used to determine the estimated frequency of LOOP due to severe weather in events per year. The factors include the annual expectation of tornados of severity f2 (windspeeds greater than or equal to 113 miles per hour) in events per square mile; and the annual expectation of storms for the site with wind velocities between 75 and 124 mph. Plants within Severe Weather Group 2 have an estimated frequency of loss of off-site power due to severe weather of 0.0033 or greater, up to but not including 0.0100.
b)
d) The potential for long duration loss of off-site power events can have a significant impact on station blackout risk and required coping durations. Long duration LOOP events are associated with grid failures 8.3A-2 Rev. 14  
Sites are categorized in groups based upon the estimated frequency of LOOPs due to extremely severe weather. The estimated frequency of loss of off-site power due to extremely severe weather is determined by the annual expectation of storms at the site with wind velocities greater than or equal to 125 mph. Sites within the Extreme Severe Weather Group 1 have an annual frequency of storms, with wind velocities greater than or equal to 125 mph, less than 3.3 x 10-4. Wolf Creek is in Extreme Severe Weather Group 1.
c)
The estimated frequency of LOOPs due to severe weather places Wolf Creek in Severe Weather Group 2. Based on site specific factors, an empirical formula is used to determine the estimated frequency of LOOP due to severe weather in events per year. The factors include the annual expectation of tornados of severity f2 (windspeeds greater than or equal to 113 miles per hour) in events per square mile; and the annual expectation of storms for the site with wind velocities between 75 and 124 mph. Plants within Severe Weather Group 2 have an estimated frequency of loss of off-site power due to severe weather of 0.0033 or greater, up to but not including 0.0100.
d) The potential for long duration loss of off-site power events can have a significant impact on station blackout risk and required coping durations. Long duration LOOP events are associated with grid failures 8.3A-2 Rev. 14  


WOLF CREEK due to severe weather conditions or unique transmission system features.
WOLF CREEK due to severe weather conditions or unique transmission system features.
Shorter duration LOOP events tend to be associated with specific switchyard features, in particular, (1) the independence of the off-site power sources constituting the preferred power supply to the shutdown buses on-site, and (2) the power transfer schemes when the normal source of AC power is lost. Two plant groupings, I 1/2 and I 3, are used for classifying the interface of the preferred power supply to the safe shutdown bus. Of the two groups, the I 1/2 group is characterized by features associated with greater independence and redundancy of sources, and a more desirable transfer scheme. The plant groupings are based upon the applicability of three conditions A, B (1), or B (2), for a given plant. Condition A requires that all off-site power sources are connected to the unit's safe shutdown buses through either the switchyards or two or more electrically connected switchyards. This condition applies at Wolf Creek.
Shorter duration LOOP events tend to be associated with specific switchyard features, in particular, (1) the independence of the off-site power sources constituting the preferred power supply to the shutdown buses on-site, and (2) the power transfer schemes when the normal source of AC power is lost. Two plant groupings, I 1/2 and I 3, are used for classifying the interface of the preferred power supply to the safe shutdown bus. Of the two groups, the I 1/2 group is characterized by features associated with greater independence and redundancy of sources, and a more desirable transfer scheme. The plant groupings are based upon the applicability of three conditions A, B (1), or B (2), for a given plant. Condition A requires that all off-site power sources are connected to the units safe shutdown buses through either the switchyards or two or more electrically connected switchyards. This condition applies at Wolf Creek.
Condition B (1) requires the normal source of AC power to be from the unit main generator with no automatic transfers and one or more manual transfers of all safe shutdown buses to preferred or alternate off-site sources. Condition B (2) requires the normal source of AC power to be from the unit main generator with one automatic transfer and no manual transfers of all safe shutdown buses to one preferred or one alternate off-site power source.
Condition B (1) requires the normal source of AC power to be from the unit main generator with no automatic transfers and one or more manual transfers of all safe shutdown buses to preferred or alternate off-site sources. Condition B (2) requires the normal source of AC power to be from the unit main generator with one automatic transfer and no manual transfers of all safe shutdown buses to one preferred or one alternate off-site power source.
Conditions B (1) and B (2) are not applicable to Wolf Creek. At Wolf Creek the normal source of AC power to the shutdown buses is from the switchyard. Since Condition A is applicable to Wolf Creek and Conditions B (1) and B (2) are not, the Wolf Creek off-site power system is assigned to the I 1/2 Group per NUMARC 87-00 guidance.
Conditions B (1) and B (2) are not applicable to Wolf Creek. At Wolf Creek the normal source of AC power to the shutdown buses is from the switchyard. Since Condition A is applicable to Wolf Creek and Conditions B (1) and B (2) are not, the Wolf Creek off-site power system is assigned to the I 1/2 Group per NUMARC 87-00 guidance.
Line 3,926: Line 1,437:
8.3A.3.2 Emergency AC Power Configuration Group Wolf Creek is determined to be in the emergency AC power configuration group C (EAC Group C). After the likelihood of losing off-site power, the redundancy of the emergency AC power system is the next most important contributor to station blackout risk. With greater EAC system redundancy, the potential for station blackout diminishes, as does the likelihood of core damage. The importance of EAC redundancy is reflected through the use of four distinct EAC configuration groups. Those sites in group C have typical redundant and independent EAC sources to safe shutdown equipment.
8.3A.3.2 Emergency AC Power Configuration Group Wolf Creek is determined to be in the emergency AC power configuration group C (EAC Group C). After the likelihood of losing off-site power, the redundancy of the emergency AC power system is the next most important contributor to station blackout risk. With greater EAC system redundancy, the potential for station blackout diminishes, as does the likelihood of core damage. The importance of EAC redundancy is reflected through the use of four distinct EAC configuration groups. Those sites in group C have typical redundant and independent EAC sources to safe shutdown equipment.
Placement in this group depends on the number of EAC standby power supplies available and the number required to operate AC-powered decay heat removal equipment necessary to achieve and maintain safe shutdown in a station blackout. Overall, the greater the level of EAC redundancy, the less restrictive are the station blackout coping durations and maximum emergency diesel generator (EDG) failure rates before longer coping durations are required, or corrective actions become necessary.
Placement in this group depends on the number of EAC standby power supplies available and the number required to operate AC-powered decay heat removal equipment necessary to achieve and maintain safe shutdown in a station blackout. Overall, the greater the level of EAC redundancy, the less restrictive are the station blackout coping durations and maximum emergency diesel generator (EDG) failure rates before longer coping durations are required, or corrective actions become necessary.
8.3A-3 Rev. 14 WOLF CREEK The potential for excess EAC power sources to be used as Alternate AC is directly related to the existing level of EAC redundancy. Since EAC redundancy is an important parameter for determining station blackout coping duration categories, EAC power sources relied upon as Alternate AC power sources must not also be considered when assessing the required coping duration.
8.3A-3 Rev. 14  
 
WOLF CREEK The potential for excess EAC power sources to be used as Alternate AC is directly related to the existing level of EAC redundancy. Since EAC redundancy is an important parameter for determining station blackout coping duration categories, EAC power sources relied upon as Alternate AC power sources must not also be considered when assessing the required coping duration.
The Wolf Creek designation of Group C is based on the following:
The Wolf Creek designation of Group C is based on the following:
: 1) There are two emergency AC power supplies not credited as alternate AC power sources; and
: 1)
: 2) One emergency AC power supply is necessary to operate safe shutdown equipment following a loss of off-site power.
There are two emergency AC power supplies not credited as alternate AC power sources; and
: 2)
One emergency AC power supply is necessary to operate safe shutdown equipment following a loss of off-site power.
8.3A.3.3 Emergency Diesel Generator (EDG) Reliability The target emergency diesel generator reliability for Wolf Creek is selected to be 0.95. The selection of this value is consistent with NUMARC 87-00 and is based upon having a nuclear unit average EDG reliability for the last 100 demands as of April 17, 1989 greater than 0.95.
8.3A.3.3 Emergency Diesel Generator (EDG) Reliability The target emergency diesel generator reliability for Wolf Creek is selected to be 0.95. The selection of this value is consistent with NUMARC 87-00 and is based upon having a nuclear unit average EDG reliability for the last 100 demands as of April 17, 1989 greater than 0.95.
The unit EDG reliability is used in conjunction with the site's off-site power design characteristic, P1, and the EAC configuration Group C, to determine the unit's required station blackout coping duration. The unit EDG reliability was calculated by averaging the individual EDG reliability for the last 20, 50, and 100 demands for each machine as of April 17, 1989.
The unit EDG reliability is used in conjunction with the sites off-site power design characteristic, P1, and the EAC configuration Group C, to determine the units required station blackout coping duration. The unit EDG reliability was calculated by averaging the individual EDG reliability for the last 20, 50, and 100 demands for each machine as of April 17, 1989.
The objective of the three-tier approach (i.e., 20, 50, and 100 Demands) to reliability measurements is to provide greater depth of understanding regarding reliability trends. The 20-demand sample set is the most volatile, and offers a very sensitive indication of EDG performance. Since this indicator moves with each incremental failure or success, it is not considered a reliable measure of long-term performance. Similarly, the 100-demand sample set offers a long-term trend indication, while providing limited insight to recent trends due to data smoothing effects. The 50-demand sample set bridges the two indicators while also providing an intermediate level. Taken together, the set of indicators provides a fairly complete picture of EDG reliability.
The objective of the three-tier approach (i.e., 20, 50, and 100 Demands) to reliability measurements is to provide greater depth of understanding regarding reliability trends. The 20-demand sample set is the most volatile, and offers a very sensitive indication of EDG performance. Since this indicator moves with each incremental failure or success, it is not considered a reliable measure of long-term performance. Similarly, the 100-demand sample set offers a long-term trend indication, while providing limited insight to recent trends due to data smoothing effects. The 50-demand sample set bridges the two indicators while also providing an intermediate level. Taken together, the set of indicators provides a fairly complete picture of EDG reliability.
Wolf Creek maintains an EDG reliability monitoring program to ensure reliability remains greater than 0.95.
Wolf Creek maintains an EDG reliability monitoring program to ensure reliability remains greater than 0.95.
8.3A.3.4 Coping Duration Category Using Table 3-8 of NUMARC 87-00, Wolf Creek has a required coping duration category of four hours. The criteria supporting this four hour duration include the Wolf Creek off-site power group 'P1', discussed in Section 8.3A.3.1, the EAC Group "C", discussed in Section 8.3A.3.2, and the minimum EDG target reliability of 0.95, discussed in Section 8.3A.3.3.
8.3A.3.4 Coping Duration Category Using Table 3-8 of NUMARC 87-00, Wolf Creek has a required coping duration category of four hours. The criteria supporting this four hour duration include the Wolf Creek off-site power group P1, discussed in Section 8.3A.3.1, the EAC Group C, discussed in Section 8.3A.3.2, and the minimum EDG target reliability of 0.95, discussed in Section 8.3A.3.3.
8.3A-4 Rev. 14 WOLF CREEK 8.3A.4 Procedures for SBO
8.3A-4 Rev. 14  
 
Wolf Creek procedures comply with the guidelines of NUMARC 87-00, Section 4. 
 
SBO response guidelines provide for operator actions to be taken in a SBO
 
event; guidance is provided to operations and load dispatcher personnel for actions to restore AC power in a station blackout; and guidance is given for
 
operators to determine the proper actions due to the onset of severe weather. 
 
Wolf Creek procedures incorporate these guidelines and are described as
 
follows:
: 1) The station blackout response guidelines of NUMARC 87-00, Section 4.2.1 are met by plant procedures, Loss of all AC Power; Security Diesel
 
Generator Operability Test; Technical Support Center Diesel Generator
 
Operability Test and Emergency Operations Facility Diesel Generator


Operability Test.
WOLF CREEK 8.3A.4 Procedures for SBO Wolf Creek procedures comply with the guidelines of NUMARC 87-00, Section 4.
: 2) The AC power restoration guidelines of NUMARC 87-00, Section 4.2.2, are met by plant procedure, Loss of All AC Power Recovery Without SI  
SBO response guidelines provide for operator actions to be taken in a SBO event; guidance is provided to operations and load dispatcher personnel for actions to restore AC power in a station blackout; and guidance is given for operators to determine the proper actions due to the onset of severe weather.
Wolf Creek procedures incorporate these guidelines and are described as follows:
: 1)
The station blackout response guidelines of NUMARC 87-00, Section 4.2.1 are met by plant procedures, Loss of all AC Power; Security Diesel Generator Operability Test; Technical Support Center Diesel Generator Operability Test and Emergency Operations Facility Diesel Generator Operability Test.
: 2)
The AC power restoration guidelines of NUMARC 87-00, Section 4.2.2, are met by plant procedure, Loss of All AC Power Recovery Without SI Required.
: 3)
The severe weather preparation guidelines of NUMARC 87-00, Section 4.2.3, are met by plant procedure, Natural Events OFF Normal.
8.3A.5 Summary of SBO Coping Assessment The ability of Wolf Creek to cope with a station blackout for four hours has been assessed in accordance with NUMARC 87-00. The coping assessment assures that Wolf Creek has adequate condensate inventory for decay heat removal during a SBO of the four hour duration; has adequate battery capacity to support decay heat removal during the four hour duration; air operated valves required for decay heat removal have sufficient reserve air or can be manually operated under station blackout conditions for four hours; operability of equipment by determination of the average steady state temperature in dominant areas containing equipment necessary to achieve and maintain safe shutdown during the SBO; containment integrity can be provided during the SBO for the four hour duration, and the ability to maintain adequate reactor coolant system inventory. Each item of assessment is discussed in the following paragraphs.
8.3A.5.1 Condensate Inventory for Decay Heat Removal It was originally determined using guidelines in Section 7.2.1 of NUMARC 87-00 that 151,000 gallons of water are required for decay heat removal for a four-hour coping duration. This number has changed to 156,300 gallons due to power rerate and condensate storage tank temperature analysis for elevated tank temperatures when using recirculation of the tank via the condensate demineralizer system. The minimum permissible condensate storage tank level per Technical Specifications provides 281,000 gallons of water, which exceeds the required quantity for coping with a four-hour station blackout. Hence this new number still satisfies a four-hour coping duration.
8.3A-5 Rev. 26


Required.
WOLF CREEK 8.3A.5.2 Class 1E Battery (ies) Capacity A battery capacity calculation has been performed pursuant to NUMARC 87-00, Section 7.2.2, to verify that the Class 1E battery (ies) has sufficient capacity to meet station blackout loads for four hours.
: 3) The severe weather preparation guidelines of NUMARC 87-00, Section 4.2.3, are met by plant procedure, Natural Events OFF Normal.
8.3A.5.3 Compressed Air Air-operated valves relied upon to cope with a station blackout for four hours have sufficient backup sources independent of the blacked out units preferred and Class 1E power supplies. The valves are identified in plant procedures.
 
8.3A.5.4 Effects of Loss of Ventilation The calculated peak air temperature for the steam driven AFW pump room (the dominant area of concern for a PWR) during a station blackout induced loss of ventilation is 150° F provided corridor doors are opened. This requirement is incorporated in the plant procedures for Loss of All AC Power.
8.3A.5 Summary of SBO Coping Assessment The ability of Wolf Creek to cope with a station blackout for four hours has
 
been assessed in accordance with NUMARC 87-00. The coping assessment assures
 
that Wolf Creek has adequate condensate inventory for decay heat removal
 
during a SBO of the four hour duration; has adequate battery capacity to support decay heat removal during the four hour duration; air operated valves
 
required for decay heat removal have sufficient reserve air or can be manually
 
operated under station blackout conditions for four hours; operability of
 
equipment by determination of the average steady state temperature in dominant
 
areas containing equipment necessary to achieve and maintain safe shutdown
 
during the SBO; containment integrity can be provided during the SBO for the
 
four hour duration, and the ability to maintain adequate reactor coolant
 
system inventory. Each item of assessment is discussed in the following
 
paragraphs.
 
8.3A.5.1 Condensate Inventory for Decay Heat Removal
 
It was originally determined using guidelines in Section 7.2.1 of NUMARC 87-00
 
that 151,000 gallons of water are required for decay heat removal for a four-
 
hour coping duration. This number has changed to 156,300 gallons due to power
 
rerate and condensate storage tank temperature analysis for elevated tank
 
temperatures when using recirculation of the tank via the condensate
 
demineralizer system. The minimum permissible condensate storage tank level
 
per Technical Specifications provides 281,000 gallons of water, which exceeds
 
the required quantity for coping with a four-hour station blackout. Hence
 
this new number still satisfies a four-hour coping duration.
 
8.3A-5 Rev. 26 WOLF CREEK 8.3A.5.2 Class 1E Battery (ies) Capacity A battery capacity calculation has been performed pursuant to NUMARC 87-00, Section 7.2.2, to verify that the Class 1E battery (ies) has sufficient capacity to meet station blackout loads for four hours.
8.3A.5.3 Compressed Air Air-operated valves relied upon to cope with a station blackout for four hours have sufficient backup sources independent of the blacked out unit's preferred and Class 1E power supplies. The valves are identified in plant procedures.
8.3A.5.4 Effects of Loss of Ventilation The calculated peak air temperature for the steam driven AFW pump room (the dominant area of concern for a PWR) during a station blackout induced loss of ventilation is 150 F provided corridor doors are opened. This requirement is incorporated in the plant procedures for Loss of All AC Power.
Reasonable assurance of the operability of station blackout response equipment in the above dominant area of concern has been assessed using Appendix F to NUMARC 87-00. No modifications are required to provide reasonable assurance for equipment operability.
Reasonable assurance of the operability of station blackout response equipment in the above dominant area of concern has been assessed using Appendix F to NUMARC 87-00. No modifications are required to provide reasonable assurance for equipment operability.
The assumption in NUMARC 87-00, Section 2.7.1 that the control room will not exceed 120 F during a station blackout has been assessed. Calculations verify that the control room at Wolf Creek will not exceed 120 F during a station blackout provided certain doors are opened. The doors are listed in an Attachment in plant procedure Loss of All AC Power.
The assumption in NUMARC 87-00, Section 2.7.1 that the control room will not exceed 120°F during a station blackout has been assessed. Calculations verify that the control room at Wolf Creek will not exceed 120°F during a station blackout provided certain doors are opened. The doors are listed in an Attachment in plant procedure Loss of All AC Power.
8.3A.5.5 Containment Isolation The plant list of containment isolation valves has been reviewed to verify that valves which must be capable of being closed or that must be operated (cycled) under station blackout conditions can be positioned (with indication) independent of the preferred Class 1E power supplies. No plant modifications were determined to be required to ensure that appropriate containment integrity can be provided under SBO conditions. Wolf Creek procedures include all actions necessary to assure containment integrity.
8.3A.5.5 Containment Isolation The plant list of containment isolation valves has been reviewed to verify that valves which must be capable of being closed or that must be operated (cycled) under station blackout conditions can be positioned (with indication) independent of the preferred Class 1E power supplies. No plant modifications were determined to be required to ensure that appropriate containment integrity can be provided under SBO conditions. Wolf Creek procedures include all actions necessary to assure containment integrity.
8.3A.5.6 Reactor Coolant Inventory The ability to maintain adequate reactor coolant system inventory to ensure that the core is cooled for four hours has been assessed. A plant-specific analysis was used for this assessment. The expected rates of reactor coolant inventory loss under SBO conditions do not result in uncovering the core in an SBO of four hours. Therefore, makeup systems under SBO conditions are not required to maintain core cooling under natural circulation (including reflux boiling).
8.3A.5.6 Reactor Coolant Inventory The ability to maintain adequate reactor coolant system inventory to ensure that the core is cooled for four hours has been assessed. A plant-specific analysis was used for this assessment. The expected rates of reactor coolant inventory loss under SBO conditions do not result in uncovering the core in an SBO of four hours. Therefore, makeup systems under SBO conditions are not required to maintain core cooling under natural circulation (including reflux boiling).
8.3A-6 Rev. 14 WOLF CREEK 8.3A.6 REFERENCES
8.3A-6 Rev. 14  
: 1. NUMARC 87-00, Guidelines and Technical Bases for NUMARC Initiatives addressing Station Blackout at Light Water Reactors, November 1987.
: 2. NRC NUREG-1032, Evaluation of Station Blackout Accidents at Nuclear Power Plants, 1985.
: 3. NRC Regulatory Guide 1.155, Station Blackout.
: 4. Wolf Creek Calculations:  AN 93-056, AN 99-004, GK-E-001, GK-EW-001, GK-M-005, GK-MW-004, NK-E-001, SR-88-001, SA-89-004, YY-01-W.
: 5. NO 89-0072, dated April 17, 1989 (Response to Station Blackout Rule).
: 6. ET 90-0057, dated March 30, 1990 (Supplemental Response to Station Blackout Rule).
: 7. ET 92-0072, dated March 24, 1992 (Response to Request for additional information on Station Blackout Analysis for the Wolf Creek Generating


Station).
WOLF CREEK 8.3A.6 REFERENCES
: 8. NRC letter dated Janurary 16, 1992 (Safety Evaluation and Request for Additional Information Concerning Station Blackout Analysis for the Wolf  
: 1.
 
NUMARC 87-00, Guidelines and Technical Bases for NUMARC Initiatives addressing Station Blackout at Light Water Reactors, November 1987.
Creek Generating Station, TAC No. M68626).
: 2.
: 9. NRC letter dated June 16, 1992, Wolf Creek Generating Station -
NRC NUREG-1032, Evaluation of Station Blackout Accidents at Nuclear Power Plants, 1985.
: 3.
NRC Regulatory Guide 1.155, Station Blackout.
: 4.
Wolf Creek Calculations: AN 93-056, AN 99-004, GK-E-001, GK-EW-001, GK-M-005, GK-MW-004, NK-E-001, SR-88-001, SA-89-004, YY-01-W.
: 5.
NO 89-0072, dated April 17, 1989 (Response to Station Blackout Rule).
: 6.
ET 90-0057, dated March 30, 1990 (Supplemental Response to Station Blackout Rule).
: 7.
ET 92-0072, dated March 24, 1992 (Response to Request for additional information on Station Blackout Analysis for the Wolf Creek Generating Station).
: 8.
NRC letter dated Janurary 16, 1992 (Safety Evaluation and Request for Additional Information Concerning Station Blackout Analysis for the Wolf Creek Generating Station, TAC No. M68626).
: 9.
NRC {{letter dated|date=June 16, 1992|text=letter dated June 16, 1992}}, Wolf Creek Generating Station -
Supplemental Safety Evaluation Regarding Blackout Rule.
Supplemental Safety Evaluation Regarding Blackout Rule.
: 10. WCAP-12231, Station Blackout Coping Assessment for Wolf Creek Generating Station, dated April 15, 1989.
: 10.
: 11. Wolf Creek Procedure EMG C-0, Loss of All AC Power.
WCAP-12231, Station Blackout Coping Assessment for Wolf Creek Generating Station, dated April 15, 1989.
: 12. Wolf Creek Procedure EMG CS-01, Loss of All AC Power Recovery without SI Required.
: 11.
: 13. Wolf Creek Procedure AP20A-007, Station Blackout Quality Program Requirements.  
Wolf Creek Procedure EMG C-0, Loss of All AC Power.
 
: 12.
Wolf Creek Procedure EMG CS-01, Loss of All AC Power Recovery without SI Required.
: 13.
Wolf Creek Procedure AP20A-007, Station Blackout Quality Program Requirements.
8.3A-7 Rev. 25}}
8.3A-7 Rev. 25}}

Latest revision as of 03:57, 5 January 2025

2 to Updated Safety Analysis Report, Chapter 8, Electric Power
ML19092A081
Person / Time
Site: Wolf Creek Wolf Creek Nuclear Operating Corporation icon.png
Issue date: 03/11/2019
From:
Wolf Creek
To:
Office of Nuclear Reactor Regulation
Shared Package
ML19092A099 List: ... further results
References
WO 19-0010
Download: ML19092A081 (140)


Text

WOLF CREEK CHAPTER 8.0 TABLE OF CONTENTS ELECTRIC POWER Section Title Page

8.1 INTRODUCTION

8.1-1 8.1.1 UTILITY GRID DESCRIPTION 8.1-1 8.1.2 ONSITE POWER SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 8.1-2 8.1.3 SAFETY-RELATED LOADS 8.1-3 8.1.4 DESIGN BASES 8.1-3 8.1.4.1 Offsite Power System 8.1-3 8.1.4.2 Onsite Power System 8.1-4 8.1.4.3 Design Criteria, Regulatory Guides, IEEE Standards and IE Bulletins 8.1-5 8.

1.5 REFERENCES

8.1-27 8.2 OFFSITE POWER SYSTEM 8.2-1 8.

2.1 DESCRIPTION

8.2-1 8.2.1.1 Transmission Network 8.2-2 8.2.1.2 Switchyard and Connection to the Onsite Distribution System 8.2-4 8.2.1.3 Compliance with Design Criteria and Standards 8.2-6 8.2.2 ANALYSIS 8.2-9 8.3 ONSITE POWER SYSTEMS 8.3-1 8.3.1 AC POWER SYSTEMS 8.3-1 8.3.1.1 Description 8.3-1 8.3.1.2 Analysis 8.3-25 8.3.1.3 Physical Identification of Safety-Related Equipment 8.3-25 8.3.1.4 Independence of Redundant Systems 8.3-27 8.3.2 DC POWER SYSTEMS 8.3-36 8.3.2.1 Description 8.3-36 8.3.2.2 Analysis 8.3-38 8.3.3 FIRE PROTECTION FOR CABLE SYSTEMS 8.3-45 8.

3.4 REFERENCES

8.3-45 8.0-i Rev. 29

WOLF CREEK TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

LIST OF TABLES Table No. Title App. 8.3A STATION BLACKOUT 8.3A.1 INTRODUCTION 8.3A-1 8.3A.2 STATION BLACKOUT GENERAL CRITERIA AND ASSUMPTION 8.3A-2 8.3A.3 WOLF CREEK BLACKOUT DURATION 8.3A-2 8.3A.4 Procedures for SBO 8.3A-5 8.3A.5 Summary for SBO Coping Assessment 8.3A-5 8.3A.6 REFERENCES 8.3A-7 8.3-1 Class IE DC System Loads 8.3-2 125 V DC Class IE Battery Loading Cycle (Amperes Required per Time Interval per Battery After Loss of AC Power) Subsystems 1 and 4 8.3-3 125 V DC Class IE Battery Loading Cycle (Amperes Required per Time Interval per Battery After Loss of AC Power) Subsystems 2 and 3 8.3-4 Failure Modes and Effects Analysis 8.3-5 Minimum Separation Distance Analysis Required by Regulatory Guide 1.75 and IEEE 384-74 8.0-ii Rev. 26

WOLF CREEK CHAPTER 8 - LIST OF FIGURES

  • Refer to Section 1.6 and Table 1.6-3. Controlled drawings were removed from the USAR at Revision 17 and are considered incorporated by reference.

Figure #

Sheet Title Drawing #*

8.1-1 0

Southwest Power Pool Transmission System and MoKan Companies Service Area (Historical) 8.2-1 0

345 kV System in MoKan Area (Historical) 8.2-2 0

161 kV and Below KG&E Transmission System Near Wolf Creek Plant 8.2-3 0

Wolf Creek Substation General Plan KD-7750 8.2-4 0

One-Line Diagram KD-7496 8.2-5 0

Electrical One-Line Diagram of Wolf Creek 345 kV Switchyard and Adjacent Subs 8.3-1 1

Main Single Line Diagram E-11001 8.3-1 2

Single Line Diagram, Essential Service Water System E-K1001 8.3-1 3

Single Line Diagram Site Area Loads E-1001 8.3-2 0

List of Loads Supplied by the Emergency Diesel Generator E-11005 8.3-3 0

Logic Diagram Standby Generation Excitation Control E-12NE01 8.3-4 0

Logic Diagram Standby Generator System Protection E-12NE02 8.3-5 0

Logic Diagram Standby Generator Engine and Governor Control E-12KJ01 8.3-6 1

DC Main Single Line Diagram E-11010 8.3-6 2

DC Auxiliary Power System 8.3-7 0

DC Main Single Line Diagram (PK03 and PK04 Bus)

E-11010A 8.0-iii Rev. 32

WOLF CREEK CHAPTER 8.0 ELECTRIC POWER

8.1 INTRODUCTION

8.1.1 UTILITY GRID DESCRIPTION The generator unit is connected to the respective transmission systems. The transmission system voltage is 345 kV for Wolf Creek. The utility has integrated transmission networks and interconnections with neighboring systems.

The Southwest Power Pool is the regional reliability council of which Kansas City Power & Light Company (KCPL) and Westar, Evergy companies are members. It is made up of 38 member systems, extending throughout an area covering the states of Arkansas, Louisiana, Kansas, Oklahoma and portions of Mississippi, Missouri, New Mexico and Texas. The Southwest Power Pool is highly interconnected with transmission lines of many voltages, including 345 and 500-kV. Figure 8.1-1 is a map of the Southwest Power Pool, showing its extensive transmission facilities as of January, 1979.

Kansas Electric Power Cooperative (KEPCo) is a member of the Southwest Power Pool with limited (peaking) generating capacity.

8.1-1 Rev. 32

WOLF CREEK 8.1.2 ONSITE POWER SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The onsite power system is provided with preferred (offsite) power from the offsite system through two independent and redundant sources of power. One preferred circuit from the switchyard supplies power to a three-winding startup transformer. This startup transformer feeds two medium-voltage 13.8-kV busses and a 13.8/4.16-kV ESF transformer. The second preferred (offsite) circuit is connected to the second 13.8/4.16-kV ESF transformer. Each transformer normally supplies its associated medium voltage 4.16-kV Class 1E bus. Refer to Figure 8.3-1.

The two 13.8-kV busses supply power to the nonsafety-related auxiliary loads of the unit. The 13.8-kV busses are also connected to a three-winding unit auxiliary transformer, in addition to the startup transformer. The unit auxiliary transformer is connected to the main generator through an isolated phase bus duct.

Two 4.16-kV non-Class 1E busses are supplied power from two 13.8-kV busses through two 13.8/4.16-kV station service transformers.

Non-Class 1E low-voltage 480-V loads are supplied power from two 13.8-kV busses through 480-V load centers and 480-V motor control centers.

The onsite power system is divided into two separate load groups, each load group consisting of an arrangement of busses, transformers, switching equipment, and loads fed from a common power supply. Power is supplied to auxiliaries at 13.8 kV, 4.16 kV, 480 V, 480/277 V, 208/120 V, 120 V ac, 250 V dc, and 125 V dc.

The onsite standby power system includes the Class 1E ac and dc power for equipment used to maintain a cold shutdown of the plant and to mitigate the consequences of a DBA.

Class 1E ac system loads are separated into two load groups which are powered from separate ESF transformers or two independent diesel generators (one per load group). Each load group distributes power by a 4.16-kV bus, 480-V load centers, and 480-V motor control centers.

The Class 1E dc system provides four separate 125-V dc battery supplies for Class 1E controls, instrumentation, power, and control inverters. Refer to Figure 8.3-6, sheet 1.

8.1-2 Rev. 32

WOLF CREEK The Station Blackout Diesel Generator (SBO DG) system consists of three (3) non-safety related diesel generators that are capable of supplying essential loads on bus NB001 or bus NB002 required to reliably and safely shut down the unit following a station blackout event. The SBO DG system is also capable of supplying power to the non-safety auxiliary feedwater pump (NSAFP). Station blackout means the complete loss of alternating current (ac) electric power to the essential and nonessential switchgear buses in a nuclear power plant (i.e.,

loss of offsite electric power system concurrent with turbine trip and unavailability of the onsite emergency ac power system).

The SBO DG system is not credited for coping with a station blackout per NRC Regulatory Guide 1.155 and NUMARC 87-00, but is instead installed to provide plant MSPI/PRA margin.

The SBO DGs are located with a missile barrier designed to limit the average wind speed downstream of the barrier entrance to less than or equal to 150 mph during a 230 mph tornado event in accordance with NRC Regulatory Guide 1.76, Rev. 1.

8.1.3 SAFETY-RELATED LOADS Refer to Figure 8.3-2 for a listing of loads supplied by the Class IE ac system. Refer to Table 8.3-1 for a list of loads supplied by the Class IE dc system. Specific safety related loads and safety functions are identified in Table 8.3-4.

8.1.4 DESIGN BASES 8.1.4.1 Offsite Power System 8.1.4.1.1 Safety Design Bases SAFETY DESIGN BASIS ONE - Electrical power from the power grid to the plant site is supplied by two physically independent circuits designed and located so as to minimize the likelihood of simultaneous failure.

SAFETY DESIGN BASIS TWO - Each of these independent circuits has the capability to safely shut down the unit. The first preferred circuit, which is connected to the startup transformer, has the capacity to supply the startup and all the auxiliary loads (both group 1 and group 2 simultaneously) of the unit.

SAFETY DESIGN BASIS THREE - The second preferred power circuit, which supplies power to the ESF transformer, has the capacity to supply all the safety-related loads of the unit.

SAFETY DESIGN BASIS FOUR - The loss of the nuclear unit or the most critical unit on the grid will not result in the loss of offsite power to the Class IE busses.

8.1.4.1.2 Power Generation Design Bases POWER GENERATION DESIGN BASIS ONE - The switchyard power circuit breaker control is designed with duplicate and redundant systems, i.e., two independent battery systems, two trip coils per breaker, and two independent protective relay schemes.

8.1-3 Rev. 30

WOLF CREEK 8.1.4.2 Onsite Power System 8.1.4.2.1 Safety Design Bases SAFETY DESIGN BASIS ONE - The onsite power system includes a separate and independent Class IE electric power system (GDC-17).

SAFETY DESIGN BASIS TWO - The onsite Class IE electric power system is divided into two independent load groups, each with its own power supply, busses, transformers, loads, and associated 125-V dc control power. Each load group is independently capable of maintaining the plant in a cold shutdown (GDC-17).

SAFETY DESIGN BASIS THREE - One independent diesel generator is provided for each Class IE ac load group.

SAFETY DESIGN BASIS FOUR - No provisions are made for automatic transfer of load groups between redundant power sources.

SAFETY DESIGN BASIS FIVE - No portion (ac or dc) of the onsite standby power systems is shared with another unit (GDC-5).

SAFETY DESIGN BASIS SIX - The Class IE electric systems are designed to satisfy the single failure criterion (GDC-17).

SAFETY DESIGN BASIS SEVEN - For each of four protection channels, one independent 125-V dc and one 120-V vital ac power source are provided.

Batteries are sized for 240 minutes of operation without the support of battery chargers.

SAFETY DESIGN BASIS EIGHT - Raceways are not shared by Class IE and non-Class IE cables. However, associated cables connected to Class IE busses are treated as Class IE cables with regard to separation and identification and are run in their related Class IE raceway system.

SAFETY DESIGN BASIS NINE - Special identification criteria are applied for Class IE equipment, including cabling and raceways. Refer to Section 8.3.1.3.

SAFETY DESIGN BASIS TEN - Separation criteria are applied which establish requirements for preserving the independence of redundant Class IE load groups or power systems. Refer to Section 8.3.1.4.1.

SAFETY DESIGN BASIS ELEVEN - Class IE equipment is designed with the capability of being tested periodically (GDC-18).

8.1-4 Rev. 9

WOLF CREEK SAFETY DESIGN BASIS TWELVE - Two physically and electrically independent ESF transformers are provided to supply the Class IE ac electric power system.

8.1.4.2.2 Power Generation Design Bases POWER GENERATION DESIGN BASIS ONE - A separate non-Class IE dc system is provided for non-Class IE controls and dc motors.

8.1.4.3 Design Criteria, Regulatory Guides, IEEE Standards and IE Bulletins The onsite power system is generally designed in accordance with IEEE Standards 279, 308, 317, 323, 334, 344, 379, 382, 383, 384, 387, 450, and 484.

Compliance with Regulatory Guides 1.6, 1.9, 1.22, 1.29, 1.30, 1.32, 1.40, 1.41, 1.47, 1.53, 1.62, 1.63, 1.68, 1.73, 1.75, 1.81, 1.89, 1.93, 1.100, 1.106, 1.108, 1.118, and 1.131 and IEEE Standards 323-1974, 338-1971, 344-1975, 384-1974, 387-1984, 308-1974, and 317-1976 are discussed below:

Refer to Appendix 3A for the applicable revision dates on regulatory guides.

Compliance with General Design Criteria 17 and 18 is discussed in Section 3.1.

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.6, INDEPENDENCE BETWEEN REDUNDANT STANDBY (ONSITE) POWER SOURCES AND BETWEEN THEIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS - The Class IE system is divided into redundant load groups so that loss of any one group does not prevent the minimum safety functions from being performed. Figure 8.3-1 shows this arrangement.

Each ac load group has connections to two preferred (offsite) power supplies and to a single diesel generator. Each diesel generator is exclusively connected to a single Class IE 4.16-kV load group and has no automatic connection to the redundant load group.

For a discussion of this regulatory guide, with respect to the Class IE dc system, refer to Section 8.3.2.2.1.

No provisions exist for automatic transfer of loads between redundant onsite power supplies.

The diesel generator of one load group cannot be automatically paralleled with the diesel generator of the redundant load group.

8.1-5 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK Interlocks are provided to assure that a single operator error would not parallel the standby power sources of redundant load groups. Refer to Section 8.3.1.1.3.

There is no interconnection of load groups.

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.9, SELECTION, DESIGN, QUALIFICATION, and TESTING OF EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR UNITS USED AS CLASS 1E ONSITE ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEMS AT NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS WCGS was initially licensed to Regulatory Guide 1.108 and Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 1 with regard to the original design and qualification of the emergency diesel generators. Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 1 was essentially an endorsement of IEEE Standard 387-1977 with a number of provisions specified in the Regulatory Position of the regulatory guide.

For ongoing testing of the emergency diesel generators, WCGS conforms to the Technical Specifications and with exceptions (as described in the Technical Specification 3.8.1 Bases) to the test recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 3. Revision 3 of Regulatory Guide 1.9 integrates the pertinent guidance previously addressed in Revisions 1 and 2 of Regulatory Guide 1.9 and the guidance of Revision 1 of Regulatory Guide 1.108. Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 3 endorses IEEE 387-1984 with respect to design, qualification and periodic testing of diesel generator units, subject to the supplemental design considerations specified in Section C.1 and the diesel generator testing provisions specified in Section C.2 of the Regulatory Guide.

In accordance with Amendment No. 101, the ESW pump starting transient during the LOCA sequencing test will be demonstrated to be within a minimum voltage of 3120 Vac and recover to 3680 Vac within 3 seconds and to be within a maximum voltage of 4784 Vac and recover to 4320 Vac within 2 seconds.

Load requirements are listed in Figure 8.3-2.

The following exception applies to Regulatory guide 1.9, Revision 3, Regulatory Position C.1.3:

The predicted loads for short-time operation are less than the diesel generator short-time load rating and the predicted loads for continuous operation are less than the diesel generator continuous load rating.

The diesel generators are designed as follows:

a. To start and accelerate to rated speed, in the sequence shown in Figure 8.3-2, all the needed engineered safety features and emergency hot shutdown loads.
b. So that at no time during the loading sequence do the frequency and voltage decrease to less than 95 percent of 60 Hz (when operating at nominal 60Hz) and 75 percent of 4.16 kV, respectively. Calculations demonstrate that if the diesel generators are operating at the lower end of the Technical Specification frequency band and if the frequency momentarily dips below 95 percent of 60 Hz, that the equipment will still perform its safety function with no equipment damage. (Reference 1) 8.1-6 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK

c.

Frequency is restored to within 2 percent of nominal in less than 60 percent of each load-sequence interval for step load increase and in less than 80 percent of each load sequence interval for disconnection of the single largest load, and voltage is restored to within 10 percent of nominal within 60 percent of each load-sequence time interval. (A greater percentage of the time interval may be used if it can be justified by analysis. However, the load-sequence time interval should include sufficient margin to account for the accuracy and repeatability of the load-sequence timer.) During recovery from transients caused by the disconnection of the largest single load, the speed of the diesel generator unit does not exceed the nominal speed plus 75 percent of the difference between nominal speed and the over-speed trip setpoint of 115 percent of nominal, whichever is lower.

Furthermore, the transient following the complete loss of load does not cause the speed of the unit to attain the overspeed trip setpoint.

The suitability of each diesel generator is confirmed by the manufacturer's prototype qualification test data and preoperational tests.

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.22, PERIODIC TESTING OF PROTECTION SYSTEM ACTUATION FUNCTIONS - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.29, SEISMIC DESIGN CLASSIFICATION - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.30, QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR THE INSTALLATION, INSPECTION, AND TESTING OF INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.32, CRITERIA FOR SAFETY-RELATED ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEMS FOR NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - Compliance with IEEE Standard 450-1995 and the dc power requirements of IEEE Standard 308-1974 is discussed in Section 8.3.2.2.1. (See Appendix 3A for discussion of compliance to Regulatory Guide 1.32 in relation to IEEE Standard 450)

Compliance with ac power requirements of IEEE Standard 308-1974 is as follows:

The Class 1E ac power system is designed to ensure that any design basis event, as listed in Table 1 of IEEE 308, does not cause either (1) loss of electric power to a number of engineered safety features, surveillance, or protection system device sufficient to jeopardize the safety of the unit or (2) loss of electric power to equipment that could result in a reactor power transient capable of causing significant damage to the fuel or the reactor coolant system.

The Class 1E power system is capable of performing its function when subjected to the effects of any of the design basis events. The Class 1E loads are designed to perform their functions adequately for the design variations of voltage and frequency in the Class 1E system.

Circuit breaker control is provided in the control room and on the circuit breakers of the preferred power supplies and diesel generator supplies to the 4.16-kV busses of the Class 1E system. Controls are provided in each diesel generator room for local operation of the diesel generator.

Class 1E equipment and associated design, operating, and maintenance documents are distinctly identified as described in Section 8.3.1.3.

8.1-7 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK Each type of Class 1E equipment is qualified by analysis, by successful use under similar conditions, or by actual test to demonstrate its ability to perform its function under applicable design basis events.

A failure modes and effects analysis is performed. Refer to Section 8.3.1.2.1.

Supplementary design criteria of IEEE 308 are addressed in the applicable sections describing specific Class 1E equipment.

The surveillance requirements of IEEE 308 are followed in the design, installation, and operation of Class 1E systems and consist of the following:

a. Preoperational equipment tests and inspections were performed in accordance with the procedures described in Chapter 14.0 with all components installed.
b. Preoperational system tests were performed in accordance with the procedure described in Chapter 14.0 with all components installed.
c. Periodic equipment tests are performed at the scheduled intervals to detect deterioration of the system toward an unacceptable condition and to demonstrate that the standby power equipment and other components that are not running during normal operation of the station are operable.
d. Surveillance system tests referred to in item c above are performed at scheduled intervals to demonstrate the operational readiness of the system.

With regard to Section 7 of IEEE 308 and Regulatory Guide 1.93, The Technical Specifications discuss operating alternatives under degraded Class IE ac system conditions.

Section 8 of IEEE 308 describes multiunit considerations and is not applicable to WCGS.

The electrical and physical independence between redundant standby (onsite) power sources is discussed in the responses to Regulatory Guides 1.6 and 1.75.

Connection of non-Class 1E equipment to Class 1E systems is discussed in the response to Regulatory Guide 1.75.

Diesel generator set capacity is discussed in the response to Regulatory Guide 1.9.

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.40, QUALIFICATION TESTS OF CONTINUOUS-DUTY MOTORS INSTALLED INSIDE THE CONTAINMENT OF WATER-COOLED NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.41, PREOPERATIONAL TESTING OF REDUNDANT ONSITE ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEMS TO VERIFY PROPER LOAD GROUP ASSIGNMENTS - The onsite electric power systems, designed in accordance with Regulatory Guides 1.6 and 1.32, were tested as part of the preoperational testing program and also after major modifications. The tests were performed in accordance with the 8.1-8 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK procedures outlined in Chapter 14.0. These tests verify the independence between the redundant onsite power sources and their load groups.

The Class IE power system is isolated from the preferred (offsite) transmission network by direct actuation of the Class IE undervoltage relays monitoring the Class IE busses, resulting in tripping of the supply breakers.

The Class IE power system is tested functionally, one load group at a time, by allowing one load group to be powered only by its associated diesel generator while the bus is disconnected from the preferred power source. The redundant load group remains completely disconnected from its associated diesel generator and preferred power source.

An engineered safety features actuation signal (ESFAS) is simulated to start the diesel generators and initiate automatic sequencing. Functional performance of the loads is checked. Each test is of sufficient duration to achieve stable operating conditions and thus permit the onset and detection of adverse conditions which could result from improper assignment of loads.

During testing of one Class IE load group, the busses of the redundant load groups not under test are monitored to verify absence of voltage on these busses and loads, indicating no interconnection of load groups.

Refer to Section 8.3.2.2.1 for a discussion of this regulatory guide with respect to dc systems.

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.47, BYPASSED AND INOPERABLE STATUS INDICATION FOR NUCLEAR POWER PLANT SAFETY SYSTEMS - A detailed description of the engineered safety features status panel is provided in Section 7.5. A section of this panel is devoted to providing indication of the configuration and, therefore, the operability of the Class IE ac power distribution system.

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.53, APPLICATION OF THE SINGLE FAILURE CRITERION TO NUCLEAR POWER PLANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS - Refer to Section 7.3 for the response to this regulatory guide.

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.62, MANUAL INITIATION OF PROTECTIVE ACTIONS - Refer to Appendix 3A, Responses to Regulatory Guides.

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.63, ELECTRIC PENETRATION ASSEMBLIES IN CONTAINMENT STRUCTURES FOR LIGHT-WATER-COOLED NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - The electric penetration assemblies conform to IEEE Standard 317-1976.

8.1-9 Rev. 0

WOLF CREEK The electrical penetration assemblies do not incorporate self-fusing characteristics. They are designed to withstand the maximum possible fault current versus time conditions (which could occur because of single random failures of circuit overload protection devices) for any electrical fault external to the penetration within the two leads of any one single-phase circuit or the three leads of any one three-phase circuit.

In accordance with Regulatory Guide 1.63, the following system features are provided to ensure compliance with this requirement of the regulatory guide.

a. Medium Voltage System For medium voltage circuits feeding loads (e.g. RCPs) in the reactor building, the primary protection is provided by the individual load circuit breakers, which are backed up by the main bus feeder breaker. Spatial separation is achieved by locating the primary (load breaker) and backup (bus feeder breaker) relays in separate switchgear cubicles on a given bus. Primary and backup circuit protection for control power are supplied from two separate dc sources. The penetration withstands the maximum available fault current for the respective durations which are characteristic of both the primary and backup protection. The switchgear is located in the turbine building. Separate non-Class IE battery sources are provided for the primary and backup protection and circuit breaker control. (No 4.16-kV loads are located within the reactor building).
b. Low Voltage Load Center Loads
1. Class IE Loads For low voltage Class IE load centers feeding loads in the reactor building, the primary and backup protection is provided by a fuse or a MCC breaker in series with the individual load center load circuit breakers respectively.

Spatial separation is achieved, since the primary (fuse or MCC breaker) and backup (load center breaker) protective devices are in separate physical locations. The penetration withstands the available range of fault current and time duration for the load center breaker trip. No battery sources are necessary, since the breaker trip units are direct acting.

8.1-10 Rev. 28

WOLF CREEK

2. Non-Class IE load center loads are few in number, and are treated on an individual basis as follows:

(a) Containment Polar Crane and Non-Class IE MCC The containment polar crane and MCC are powered from their respective non-class IE load centers located in the auxiliary building. For the non-Class IE MCC, primary and backup protection is provided in a manner similar to that described for Class IE load center loads in Item 1. The primary and backup protection is provided by the individual load circuit breaker and the associated load center main feeder breaker, respectively. For the containment polar crane, primary and backup protection is provided by the individual load center feeder breaker and properly rated fuses, respectively. The penetration will withstand the range of fault current and the time duration which is characteristic of the primary and backup protection devices.

(b) Pressurizer Backup Heaters The pressurizer backup heaters are supplied from non-Class IE load centers, which are located in the auxiliary building. Individual 480-V molded case circuit breakers feeding the heaters provide the primary protection. Fuses in series with these circuit breakers provide backup protection. The fuses are located in a different vertical section than the molded case circuit breakers. The penetrations will withstand the range of fault current and the time duration which is characteristic of the primary and backup protection devices.

(c) Pressurizer Control Group Heaters The pressurizer control group heaters are supplied from a non-Class IE load center through an SCR controller and a bank of molded case circuit breakers. Since the SCR controller is fused, the primary protection is provided by the molded case circuit breakers, and the backup protection is provided by the fuses in the SCR controller. The penetration withstands the range of fault current and time duration which are characteristic of the primary and backup devices.

8.1-11 Rev. 0

WOLF CREEK c.Low Voltage Motor Control Center Loads

1. General MCC loads The 480-V loads within the reactor building are supplied power from Class IE or non-Class IE MCCs (as applicable) which are located in the auxiliary building. In this case, the primary protection is provided by the combination of a molded case circuit breaker (instantaneous only) and the thermal overload relays in the starter, for motor loads. The pri-mary protection is provided by a thermal-magnetic circuit breaker in the case of feeder tap breakers.

In both cases, backup protection is provided by introducing properly rated fuses in each cubicle between the breaker and the load. Although the primary (circuit breaker) and backup (fuse) protection are located within the same MCC compartment, these two protection means are diverse in their fault clearing mechanisms. There are two exceptions. First, primary protection in non Class 1E MCCs may be provided by fused disconnect switches equipped with current limiting fuses having circuit protection characteristics equal to or better than molded case circuit breakers in similar applications.

An exception also occurs in the case of large feeder tap breakers and larger motors connected to the MCCs.

In this case, where the penetration is relatively large and can practicably be coordinated with the MCC incoming breaker, the fuses are not used. In all cases, the penetration withstands the available current and time duration which are characteristic of the primary and backup devices.

2. Motor-Operated Valves Class 1E motor-operated valves (MOVs), similar to the 480-V motor loads previously discussed, require properly rated fuses to be added to the individual motor starter cubicles for backup protection. However, the Class 1E motor-operated valves have their thermal overload (TOL) relays in the control circuit bypassed in order to ensure run to failure. Eliminating the TOL relays removes a portion of their primary protection. Complete primary protection for the MOV circuits is maintained using one of two methods, as follows:

(a) The typical method uses a magnetic-only molded-case circuit breaker with an adjustable trip setting (vertical intercept) that provides the primary protection. The trip setting is set low enough to stay below the thermal limit of the penetration (considering the upper limit of the breaker tripping tolerance band), and high enough to avoid nuisance tripping of the MOV during starts (considering the lower limit of the breaker tripping tolerance band).

Although the primary (circuit breaker) and backup (fuse) protection are located within the same MCC compartment, these two protection means are diverse as to their sensing and fault clearing mechanisms.

8.1-12 Rev. 30

WOLF CREEK (b) The alternate method uses a second set of fuses to complement and complete the primary protection, as a magnetic-only molded-case circuit breaker with an adjustable trip setting may not be fully coordinated with the penetrations thermal limits as described above in (a). The molded-case circuit breaker trip setting is set high enough to avoid nuisance tripping of the MOV during starts (considering the lower limit of the breaker tripping tolerance band). The primary protection fuses are sized such that they actuate prior to the backup protection fuses. Although the primary (circuit breaker and fuse) and backup (fuse) protection may be located within the same MCC compartment, these three protection means are diverse as to their sensing and fault clearing mechanisms. In addition, the primary and backup fuses are of a different type, which reduces the potential for the fuses to have a common failure mode.

In all cases, the penetrations are sized such that their thermal limits are greater than the time-current curves of both the primary and backup protection devices.

d. Low Voltage Control Systems Primary protection is provided by a fuse in the control circuit. Backup protection is provided by fuses in the control power transformer primary. The penetrations will withstand the range of fault current and the time duration which is characteristic of the primary and backup protection devices.
e. Instrument Systems The energy levels in the instrument systems are sufficiently low so that no damage occurs to the electric penetration.
f. DC Loads Primary and backup fuses are provided with the penetrations withstanding the available fault current and time duration which are characteristic of those devices.

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.68, INITIAL TEST PROGRAMS FOR WATER-COOLED NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.73, QUALIFICATION TESTS OF ELECTRIC VALVE OPERATORS INSTALLED INSIDE THE CONTAINMENT OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.75, PHYSICAL INDEPENDENCE OF ELECTRIC SYSTEMS - This regulatory guide sets forth criteria for the separation of circuits and electric equipment. These circuits and equipment either comprise or are associated with the Class IE power systems, the protection system, systems actuated or controlled by the protection system, and auxiliary or supporting systems that are essential to the operation of these systems. The separation criteria are discussed in Section 8.3.1.4.1 and meet the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.75. The following discussion supplements and clarifies 8.1-13 Rev. 30

WOLF CREEK several of the items presented in the guide. Paragraph numbers herein correspond to paragraph numbers in IEEE 384-1974.

Paragraph 4.1 Two completely separate and independent load groups, each of which is capable of safely shutting down the unit, are provided. Separation between these load groups and between associated circuits and non-Class IE circuits is implemented to an extent commensurate with the hazard potential of the areas in which they are installed. See Section 8.3.1.4.1.

Paragraph 4.2 Equipment and circuits requiring separation are determined and delineated early in the design stage. Distinctive identification on documents and drawings is provided. See Section 8.3.1.3.

Paragraph 4.3 Various means of attaining physical separation of safety-related circuits and equipment include separate cable spreading rooms, separate cable chases, raceways, barriers, and distance. See Section 8.3.1.4.1.

Paragraph 4.4 Section 8.3.1.4.1.1 satisfies this guide paragraph.

Paragraph 4.5 Associated circuits are separated and identified as if safety related.

Associated circuits are not uniquely labeled as such; rather, they are identified as any safety-related circuit of the same separation group would be.

Where non-Class IE circuits are associated by reason of their sharing of Class IE sources, the following specific criteria are followed:

The non-Class 1E loads connected to Class 1E power buses are isolated with an isolation device as described below.

1.

Circuit Breaker tripped by a safety injection signal (SIS).

2.

Starter contactor opened by a safety injection signal (SIS).

3.

Two circuit breakers, two fuses, or a breaker and a fuse in series, both coordinated with an upstream circuit breaker, and the circuit breaker periodically tested.

These power circuit loads are described as follows:

a. Tripped AC Loads Non-Class IE loads which are tripped on occurrence of an SIS are as given below. These circuits beyond the isolation device (Class IE breaker or contactor) are treated per non-Class IE and non-associated criteria.
1. Air compressors
2. Standby ac lighting
3. Battery chargers, 125 V and 250 V 8.1-14 Rev. 30

WOLF CREEK

4. Pressurizer heaters backup groups
5. CRDM cooling fans
6. Boric acid transfer pumps
7. Boric acid heat tracing
8. NPIS Computer Equipment
9. Boric acid filter to charging pump valve
10. ESW unit heaters
11. Deleted
b. Non-Class IE AC Loads not Tripped
1.

Each separation group of the non-class IE instrument ac power system is supplied from a delta-star connected, three phase transformer. In order to assure that the class IE system is not compromised and to eliminate the accidental imposition of 480-Vac on the transformer secondary (120-Vac) circuit, two circuit breakers in series are utilized in the transformer primary circuit of each separation group. For these reasons, the circuits beyond the second circuit breaker are treated per non-class 1E and non-associated criteria. The non-class IE instrument ac power system is not tripped upon the occurrence of an SIS.

2.

Boric acid heat tracing in Room 1311 that is not tripped on SIS.

c. Control Room DC Lighting The 125-V dc system supplies control board emergency lighting from the class IE dc battery. These cables are identified and separated as safety-related.

8.1-15 Rev. 30

WOLF CREEK Paragraph 4.6 Two channels of non-safety-related cables and raceway are associated with the normal plant systems and equipment. These channels require no specific separation. However, they are separated from the four safety-related separation groups by the same criteria that is applied to the separation of the four safety-related separation groups from each other.

All non-safety-related circuits are routed separately from safety-related and associated circuits to the above criteria. The specific separation distance required by Paragraphs 5.1.3, 5.1.4, or 5.6 is complied with.

Paragraph 5.1.1.1 The requirements of this paragraph are met. See Section 8.3.1.4.1.1.

Paragraph 5.1.1.2 Areas in which the only source of fire is electrical are divided into two groups--cable spreading areas and general plant areas. Section 8.3.1.4.1.1 is followed.

Paragraph 5.1.1.3 The separation distances of 1 horizontal and 3 vertical feet in the cable spreading and main control rooms and 3 horizontal and 5 vertical feet in general plant areas are provided, and are described in Section 8.3.1.4.1.1.

Cables and raceways are selected with flame-retardant properties.

Hazards are limited to failures or faults internal to the electrical equipment.

The use of splices in Class IE systems is limited to the following areas:

a. Splices are used in long duct bank runs to site buildings, such as intake structures for ESW systems, where cables are longer than is practical to manufacture and pull. Splices in the long duct bank runs are done in the vicinity of the manholes.

8.1-16 Rev. 0

WOLF CREEK

b. Where small control or instrument devices are supplied with short pigtails, the field cable may be terminated to the pigtail by means of an approved connection, which is adequately insulated, located close to the device, and enclosed in the connecting conduit.
c. Another possible area would be in the event of cable damage in an operating plant where a splice might be preferable over total replacement of the cable. Such instances are resolved on a case-by-case basis.
d. In cases in which field-run cables are incompatible with the terminal size on the devices to which they must terminate, a splice to a short, appropriate pigtail may be made to permit the required termination. Such instances are approved on a case-by-case basis, where the adequacy of the pigtail is confirmed and splices are made with qualified materials and are restricted to enclosures such as MCCs, termination compartments, and panels.
e. Splices made with qualified materials are used within enclosures where specified by design.
f. The 600 volt fire-resistive control and power cables are fitted with termination kits on both ends that are either factory installed or field installed. The termination kits provide transition from solid cable conductors to stranded pigtails suited for making cable terminations. The kits, along with the fire-resistive cables are covered by specification E-057C. Splices for terminating the fire-resisitive cables will be in accordance with paragraphs b, d and e above.
g. The 600 volt fire-resistive control and power cables typically have a maximum manufactured length of 100 feet. Factory installed or field installed splices provide for increased cable length. The splices are covered in the fire-resistive cable specification E-057C, and maintain the fire rating and structural integrity of the cables.

Paragraph 5.1.2 Exposed Class IE raceways are marked in a distinct, permanent manner at intervals not exceeding 15 feet and at points of entry to and exit from enclosed areas.

In addition, separate color identification is provided for each separation group of field wired, safety-related cables.

As stated in reference to Paragraph 4.5, associated circuits are identified the same as their related Class IE circuits, and are, therefore, distinguished from one another as stated above.

See Section 8.3.1.3.

Paragraph 5.1.3 8.1-17 Rev. 24

WOLF CREEK Section 8.3.1.4.1.1 satisfies this paragraph.

Paragraph 5.1.4 Section 8.3.1.4.1.1 satisfies this paragraph.

Paragraph 5.2.1 Sections 8.3.1.1.3 satisfy this paragraph.

Paragraph 5.2.2 Section 8.3.1.1.3 satisfies this paragraph.

Paragraph 5.3.1 Each of the four Class IE batteries is located in a separate room of the control building.

Paragraph 5.3.2 As per Section 8.3.2.1 and 8.3.2.2.1, physical separation, electrical isolation, and redundancy are provided for the entire Class IE dc system, including the battery chargers.

Paragraph 5.4.1 As per Section 8.3.1.1.7, Class IE switchgear of redundant load groups is located in separate rooms in the control building.

Paragraph 5.4.2 As per Section 8.3.1.1.7, Class IE motor control centers of redundant load groups are located in separate rooms within seismic Category I buildings.

Paragraph 5.4.3 Vital distribution switchboards of different separation groups are located in separate rooms in the control building. Each switchboard is located with the vital switchgear of its respective separation group.

Paragraph 5.5 Two separate penetration areas are provided. One area contains cables for separation groups 2 and 4, each group having separate penetration assemblies.

The other area contains cables for separation groups 1 and 3, each group again having separate penetration assemblies. Raceway separation criteria apply to the penetrations. See Section 8.3.1.4.1.1.

Paragraph 5.6.1 Sections 8.3.1.1.6, 8.3.1.3 and 8.3.1.4.1.2 satisfy this guide paragraph.

8.1-18 Rev. 24

WOLF CREEK Paragraph 5.6.2 Separation criteria for wiring internal to control boards are satisfied by Section 8.3.1.4.1.2.

Paragraph 5.6.3 Identification of wiring internal to control boards is provided by separation group designation. See Section 8.3.1.3.

Paragraph 5.6.4 Single control devices to which different separation groups are connected are avoided, wherever practicable. Where single devices are unavoidable, electrical isolation is provided. Where separation by distance is not practicable and internal fire is the only consideration, fire barriers, conduit, or wire duct are used. See Section 8.3.1.4.1.2.

Paragraph 5.6.5 Within control boards and other panels, nonsafety-related wiring is not harnessed with safety-related wiring. Where both types of wiring are contained within the same board or panel, the nonsafety-related wiring is separated from the safety-related wiring by means of barriers or by a distance equal to or greater than 6 inches.

Paragraph 5.6.6 Load Group l and Protection Channels 1 and 3 enter the lower cable spreading room and hence enter from the bottom of the control board. Load Group 2 and Protection Channels 2 and 4 generally enter the upper cable spreading room and hence enter from the top of the control board. The only exception to this is in the console which has channels 2 and 4 brought directly from the channel 2 and 4 vertical shaft via embedded floor raceways into separate openings into the bottom of the console. The scheme meets all requirements of Paragraph 5.1.3. See Section 8.3.1.4.1.1.

Paragraph 5.7 Class IE instruments of different separation groups are generally precluded from occupying the same cabinet. Where this is not practicable, such instruments are located in separate compartments of the cabinet, or are adequately separated by barriers.

8.1-19 Rev. 0

WOLF CREEK Paragraph 5.8 Section 7.3 satisfies the requirements of this paragraph.

Paragraph 5.9 Location of Class 1E actuated equipment is evaluated to ensure that adequate separation for redundant equipment is implemented.

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.81, SHARED EMERGENCY AND SHUTDOWN ELECTRIC SYSTEMS FOR MULTI-UNIT NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - Wolf Creek is a one unit site.

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.89, QUALIFICATION OF CLASS 1E EQUIPMENT FOR NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.93, AVAILABILITY OF ELECTRIC POWER SOURCES - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.100, SEISMIC QUALIFICATION OF ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT FOR NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.106, THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION FOR ELECTRIC MOTORS ON MOTOR-OPERATED VALVES - Overload protection for safety-related, motor-operated valves is discussed in Section 8.3.1.1.2. Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.108 - PERIODIC TESTING OF DIESEL GENERATOR UNITS USED AS ONSITE ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEMS AT NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - The original testing of the emergency diesel generators was performed in conformance with Regulatory Guide 1.108. After final assembly and preliminary startup testing, each diesel generator was tested as described in Section 8.3.1.1.3.

Ongoing, periodic surveillance testing of the diesel generators is performed in accordance with the plant Technical Specifications. The testing requirements in the plant Technical Specifications are based on Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 3. The testing guidance of Regulatory Guide 1.108 was largely incorporated into Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 3. Refer to Appendix 3A for additional information regarding Regulatory Guide 1.108.

8.1-20 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK REGULATORY GUIDE 1.118, PERIODIC TESTING OF ELECTRIC POWER AND PROTECTION SYSTEMS - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.131, QUALIFICATION TESTS OF ELECTRIC CABLES, FIELD SPLICES, AND CONNECTIONS FOR LIGHT-WATER-COOLED NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - The requirements of IEEE Standard 383, 1974 have been used for the qualification of cables, field splices, and connections.

The cable, field splices, and connections are qualified to the environmental conditions and all design basis events (e.g., steam line break) by testing and/or analysis.

Type tests for design basis event conditions consist of subjecting nonaged and aged cables, field splices, and connections to a sequence of environmental extremes that simulate the most severe postulated conditions of a design basis event and specified conditions of installation. Type tests demonstrate margin by application of multiple transients or increased level. Electrical and physical performance of the cable is measured during and following the environmental cycle. All environmental conditions are enveloped by the qualification program. However, the factors for margin given in Section 6.3.1.5 of IEEE 323 are not used.

Testing data is provided to establish the long-term performance of the insulation. Data is evaluated using the Arrhenius technique, using a minimum of three data points including 136 C and two others at least 10 C apart in temperature. No on-going qualification is used.

The recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.89 are discussed later in this section.

Vertical tray flame testing is performed in accordance with IEEE 383, Paragraph 2.5. However, aged samples are not used.

No field splices are used in the cable trays.

Fire tests are performed with the vertical tray perpendicular to the plane of the horizon.

A gas burner flame source releasing approximately 70,000 Btu/hr is used.

The ribbon gas burner flame source is mounted in accordance with the requirements of the regulatory guide, except that the flame is directed from the back side of the cable tray.

The 600 volt fire-resistive control and power cables are type tested to 1925 F to verify 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> and 3 hour3.472222e-5 days <br />8.333333e-4 hours <br />4.960317e-6 weeks <br />1.1415e-6 months <br /> fire ratings, and to verify environmental qualifications in accordance with NRC Generic Letter 86-10, Supplement 1. The fire testing requirements of NRC Generic Letter 86-10, Supplement 1, exceed the flame test requirements of IEEE 383.

Oil or burlap as an alternate flame source is not used.

The requirements outlined in Regulatory Guide Position 13 are met.

IEEE 323-1974 IEEE STANDARD FOR QUALIFYING CLASS IE EQUIPMENT FOR NUCLEAR POWER GENERATING STATIONS - Environmental qualification of Class IE electric equipment and the extent of compliance with IEEE 323 are discussed in Section 3.11(B) and 3.11(N).

8.1-21 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK IEEE 338-1971 CRITERIA FOR THE PERIODIC TESTING OF NUCLEAR POWER GENERATING STATION PROTECTION SYSTEMS - Refer to Table 7.1-2 for application of this standard to various systems.

IEEE 344-1975 SEISMIC QUALIFICATION OF CLASS IE ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT FOR NUCLEAR POWER GENERATING STATIONS - Seismic qualification of Class IE electric equipment and the extent of compliance with IEEE 344 are discussed in Section 3.10(B) and 3.10(N).

IEEE 387-1984 CRITERIA FOR DIESEL GENERATOR UNITS APPLIED AS STANDBY POWER SUPPLIES FOR NUCLEAR POWER GENERATING STATIONS - The original design and testing of the emergency diesel generators conformed to Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 1 and Regulatory Guide 1.108. Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 1 endorsed IEEE Standard 387-1977, and original compliance was demonstrated based on the design criteria as stated below. The following demonstrates compliance with design criteria of IEEE 387:

a. Service Environment The diesel generator unit provides power to appropriate ventilation equipment to maintain an acceptable environment within the diesel generator rooms.
b. Starting, Loading, and Design Load Profile The diesel generator unit is capable of starting, accelerating, being loaded, and carrying the design load described in Section 8.3.1.1.3. The unit energizes its cooling equipment within an acceptable time.
c. Quality of Power Refer to previous discussions in this section on Regulatory Guide 1.9 concerning frequency and voltage limits.
d. Ratings Refer to previous discussions in this section on Regulatory Guide 1.9 concerning the basis for the continuous rating of the diesel generator.

Periodic, in-service testing of the diesel generators is performed in accordance with the plant Technical Specifications and the test recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 3. Regulatory Position C.2 of Regulatory Guide 1.9, Revision 3 endorses requirements of IEEE Standard 387-1984 with respect to Section 3, Definitions, Section 6, Testing, and Section 7, Qualification Requirements, subject to the supplemental design considerations specified in Section C.1 and the diesel generator testing provisions specified in Section C.2 of the Regulatory Guide. Differences between the test requirements of the plant Technical Specifications and the recommendations of the Regulatory Guide are due to the Standard Technical Specifications and/or approved changes to the plant Technical Specifications.

8.1-22 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK

e. Interactions Refer to previous discussions in this section for an analysis per Regulatory Guide 1.6 for assurance that independence is provided between redundant diesel generators and the Class IE electric system. Mechanical systems are designed so that a single failure affects the operation of only a single diesel generator.
f. Qualification Refer to Section 3.11(B) for the extent of compliance to IEEE 323.
g. Design and Application Considerations Design conditions such as vibration, torsional vibration, and overspeed are considered in accordance with the requirements of IEEE 387.
h. Governor and Voltage Regulator Operation Governor and voltage regulator manually actuated droop modes are automatically reset in the isochronous modes in the event of the loss of offsite power.
i. Control The diesel generator is provided with control systems permitting automatic and manual control. The start-diesel signal is functional, except in the local (repair and maintenance) mode. The capability is provided at each diesel generator for restricted manual starting in the event of a control room emergency. Refer to previous discussions in this section for a further description of the control systems.
j. Surveillance Voltage, current, frequency, and power metering are provided in the control room to permit assessment of the operating condition of each diesel generator.

Surveillance instrumentation is provided in accordance with IEEE 387, as described in Sections 9.5.4 through 9.5.8.

8.1-23 Rev. 0

WOLF CREEK

k. Testing Tests are conducted on each diesel-generator unit in accordance with IEEE 387, as listed in Section 8.3.1.1.3.

IEEE 317-1976 IEEE STANDARD FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATION ASSEMBLIES IN CONTAINMENT STRUCTURES FOR NUCLEAR POWER GENERATING STATIONS - Electrical penetration assemblies are used for all electrical cables that pass through the reactor building. These assemblies are designed and tested in accordance with IEEE Standard 317.

Principal design criteria for these assemblies include the following:

a. The mechanical design, materials, fabrication, examination, and testing of the pressure-retaining boundary of the electrical penetration assembly, excluding electrical conductors, feed-through connectors, insulation, potting compounds, and gaskets, are in accordance with the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section III, Subsection NE, for Class MC components.
b. The electrical penetration assembly is designed to meet all the electrical requirements for the specified service environment without dielectric breakdown or overheating.
c. The electrical penetration assembly is designed to have a total gas leakage rate through its pressure-retaining boundary exclusive of the aperture seal not greater than 1 x 10-6 standard (20 C at one atmosphere of pressure) cubic centimeters per second of dry helium (or equivalent means of measurement) at the maximum specified containment design pressure.
d. A leak test is performed on each penetration assembly following installation. The test is capable of detecting a leakage rate of 10-2 cubic centimeters per second or less of dry nitrogen with maximum containment pressure applied across the penetration assembly pressure barrier seal at ambient temperature.
e. Each penetration room has a continuous nitrogen supply system manifolded to each penetration assembly. The design and installation of the system facilitates periodic individual penetration assembly gas leak rate testing after installation.

8.1-24 Rev. 12

WOLF CREEK

f. The electrical penetration assembly design is such that safety-related channel separation is maintained.
g. The penetration assembly design is qualified by testing for the intended service within the service and DBE environment.

IEEE 317-1983 IEEE STANDARD FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATION ASSEMBLIES IN CONTAINMENT STRUCTURES FOR NUCLEAR POWER GENERATING STATIONS - An Electrical penetration assembly is used for all fiber optic cables that pass through the reactor building. This assembly is designed and tested in accordance with the applicable portions (non-electrical) of IEEE Standard 317.

Principal design criteria for this assembly include the following:

a. The mechanical design, materials, fabrication, examination, and testing of the pressure-retaining boundary of the electrical penetration assembly used for fiber optic cables, excluding the fiber conductors, fiber covering/sealant and spare port plugs/ferrule assemblies, are in accordance with the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section III, Subsection NE, for Class MC components.
b. The electrical penetration assembly used for fiber optic cables is designed to have a total gas leakage rate through its pressure-retaining boundary exclusive of the aperture seal not greater than 1 x 10-3 standard cubic centimeters per second of dry nitrogen (@20 C + 15 C) at the maximum specified containment design pressure.
c. A leak test is performed on the Electrical penetration assembly used for fiber optic cables, following installation. A post installation leakage test is conducted in accordance with Appendix J requirements.
d. The electrical penetration assembly used for fiber optic cables does not incorporate O-rings and does not require constant nitrogen pressurization in order to provide the pressure boundary seal. The design facilitates periodic penetration assembly gas leak rate testing after installation.

IE BULLETIN 79-27 Power for the vital reactor instrumentation and protection systems is provided by the Class 1E instrument ac power system. This system is composed of four independent 120-volt ac power supplies to provide power for the four channels of the vital reactor protection and instrumentation systems. With one channel inoperable, the remaining three channels are capable of monitoring the vital reactor parameters continuously and safely shutting down the reactor.

Each essential power panel is fed from a dedicated Class 1E inverter, which, in turn, is fed from one of four independent Class 1E batteries. Each essential power panel is fed from a dedicated Class 1E inverter, which, in turn, is fed from one or four independent Class 1E batteries. Each inverter has a 125 VDC supply and a separate 120VAC supply to an internal constant voltage transformer. In the event of a failure of the inverter DC rectifier section, the inverter internal constant voltage transformer will supply the 120VAC power panel until the swing (backup) inverter can be placed in service to replace it.

Each battery has an associated charger that is fed from a diesel generator backed bus. Each battery has an associated charger that is fed from a diesel generator backed bus.

8.1-25 Rev. 29

WOLF CREEK Power for the four non-Class 1E reactor process control channels is provided by the non-Class 1E ac power system through two non-Class IE uninterruptible power supplies (UPSs). Each power supply train supplies a dedicated UPS that, in turn, supplies two process control cabinets. A backup dc supply is provided to the UPS in the event that the primary source is not available.

The backup dc power source is the non-Class 1E dc system. This system is composed of two station batteries and two battery chargers. Both of the chargers are powered from a diesel generator backed bus.

In the event of loss of power as a result of an inverter failure, two trains of backup power to the process cabinets are provided by manual switches from the non-Class 1E ac system. These trains of ac power are provided with a cross tie for additional reliability.

Power for miscellaneous non-Class 1E instrument loads is provided by the non-Class 1E instrument ac power system. This system is powered from the Class 1E power system through a qualified isolating regulating transformer. One transformer is provided for each train of instrument ac. No cross ties are provided.

The Class IE instrument ac power system is provided with the following alarms in the control room:

a. Inverter Trouble
b. Inverter Static Switch Transfer
c. Loss of switchboard voltage The non-Class IE dc system is provided with the following alarms which are grouped into a summary alarm in the control room:
a. System ground
b. Battery imbalance
c. Charger dc overvoltage
d. Charger ac undervoltage
e. Charger dc undervoltage
f. Charger ac and dc breakers open
g. Charge failure
h. Loss of distribution board voltage
i. Loss of switchboard voltage The non-Class IE instrument ac system is provided with a loss of bus voltage alarm in the control room.

Procedures have been developed that address Action Item No. 2 of IE Bulletin 79-27 (i.e. emergency procedures, administrative procedures, and/or alarm procedures). As a result of the review of IE Bulletin 79-27 and IE Circular 79-02, no design modifications are required. However, the ongoing development of procedures and administrative controls will consider these IE issuances.

8.1-26 Rev. 29

WOLF CREEK 8.

1.5 REFERENCES

1.

Calculation NE-E-001, Rev. 0, Emergency Diesel Transient Loading Analysis 8.1-27 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK 8.2 OFFSITE POWER SYSTEM 8.

2.1 DESCRIPTION

The WCGS offsite ac power supply for the startup, normal operation, and safe shutdown is supplied from the transmission network. The principal design bases as applied to the offsite power system are described in Section 8.1.4.

The portion of the offsite power system from the startup transformer and ESF transformer XNB01 to the 4.16-kV Class 1E busses is discussed here. The offsite power system from the transmission line network to the startup transformer and ESF transformer XNB01 is discussed in Section 8.2.1.1.

Two physically independent sources of offsite power are brought to the onsite power system. One circuit is fed from ESF transformer XNB01 and supplies power normally to its associated 4.16-kV Class 1E bus.

The other circuit is fed from one secondary winding of the startup transformer, through ESF transformer XNB02, and supplies power normally to its associated 4.16-kV Class lE bus. In addition, each offsite power circuit can be manually aligned to supply power to the opposite or both 4.16-kV Class lE busses, if required. Each of these offsite power circuits is designed to be available in sufficient time to ensure that specified acceptable fuel design limits and design conditions of the reactor coolant pressure boundary are not exceeded following a loss of all onsite power sources and the remaining offsite power circuit.

The two ESF transformers XNB01 and XNB02 are separated by a 3-hour fire wall.

The cables associated with each of these offsite power circuits are routed in separate and distinct raceways. The duct banks and other routing features of the two circuits are shown on drawings E-OR0224, E-OR3321, E-OR3221, and E-1R3211 for the cables for the ESF transformers to the 4.16-kV Class lE busses, on drawings E-1R0223, E-OR4331, E-OR4321, and E-OR0224 for cables from the startup transformer to the 13.8-kV switchgear and from the 13.8-kV switchgear to ESF transformer XNB02.

The offsite power circuits, including the transformers and cables, have been sized to carry their anticipated loads continuously. Each ESF transformer is sized to carry its associated safety-related load group continuously. The secondary feeder cables to the 4.16-kV Class lE busses are sized in excess of that required to carry their maximum load continuously. The startup transformer is sized to carry its anticipated load continuously, but may be slightly overloaded under certain abnormal conditions. For additional details of the sizing of these components, refer to Section 8.3.1.

8.2-1 Rev. 25

WOLF CREEK These two circuits are fully testable. Since they are continuously energized and largely passive, they are continuously tested by their use. When one circuit is shutdown, relays, meters, and other instruments can be tested and calibrated as required.

Control and instrumentation power for these offsite power circuits is provided by the Non-Class lE dc system. A dc power source from separate station batteries is provided to each offsite power circuit for control and relaying purposes.

From the above considerations, it is concluded that the installation, sizing, and control of both of the offsite power circuits are designed so as to minimize the likelihood of their simultaneous failure under operating and accident conditions.

For additional details concerning the compliance of the offsite power system with General Design Criteria, refer to Section 3.1.

The instrumentation associated with the offsite ac power system provides sufficient information to determine the system availability at any time.

Table 1.7-1 of the USAR contains drawings 10466-E-01NB01 and 10466-E-01NB02, Single Line Meter and Relay Diagrams for the Safety-Related 4.16-kV Busses NB01 and NB02. These drawings show the surveillance details of the ESF transformers and their associated 4.16-kV bus. Table 8.3-4 of the USAR, Failure Modes and Effects Analysis, shows the system failure modes and the method of such failure detection.

8.2.1.1 Transmission Network The KG&E and KCPL transmission systems serve as the main outlet and source of offsite power for WCGS. Connection of the station output to the system is achieved via a 345-kV overhead line from the plant yard to the Wolf Creek 345-kV switchyard.

A rather extensive 345-kV network forms the backbone of the KG&E-KCPL and neighboring systems, as can be seen from Figure 8.2-1. This transmission system provides a highly reliable source of continuous power for plant shutdown.

KCPL and KG&E maintains voltage between a maximum and minimum range of +5%, -2%

of nominal. The frequency range is 60 +/-.002 Hertz.

8.2-2 Rev. 32

WOLF CREEK There are three 345-kV lines connecting the Wolf Creek 345-kV Substation to the area transmission system. The three lines are as follows:

a. Wolf Creek-Waverly-LaCygne 345-kV Line:

The Wolf Creek-Waverly-LaCygne line is sectioned into two line sections. The first is a 5 miles long line connecting Wolf Creek to the Waverly Switching Station followed by a 53 miles long line connecting Waverly Switching Station to LaCygne Steam Electric Station which has three additional 345-kV lines.

b. Wolf Creek-Rose Hill 345-kV Line:

98 miles long, connecting to the Rose Hill Substation southeast of Wichita. Rose Hill Substation has three additional 345-kV connections.

c. Wolf Creek-Benton 345-kV Line:

90 miles long, connecting to the Benton Substation northeast of Wichita. Benton Substation has two additional 345-kV lines, one of which is to the Wichita 345-kV Substation, near the Gordon Evans Steam Electric Station.

The above 345-kV lines do not share common rights-of-way, do not have any crossovers, and are not in close proximity of one another, except in the immediate vicinity of the switchyard. In those areas, the design is such as to maintain clearances as required by the National Electric Safety Code (4).

In addition, a 27-mile long 69-kV line connects the Wolf Creek 345-kV switchyard to the Athens Switching Station located south of the Wolf Creek Plant site. The Wolf Creek-Rose Hill 345-kV line crosses over this 69-kV line once approximately 7 miles from the Wolf Creek Plant site. The physical separation of the two lines meets or exceeds the requirements of the National Electric Safety Code (4).

If one of the three 345-kV lines faulted, the breakers located at Wolf Creek Substation would trip, deenergizing the line (in the case of the Wolf Creek-Waverly-LaCygne Line only one segment of the line would normally be deenergized due to the Waverly tap, however, the remaining segment would no longer be credited as a source of power for the plant). Any one of the two remaining incoming 345-kV transmission lines at Wolf Creek Substation (in the case of the Waverly/LaCygne Line both line segments must be in-service) can carry the total ESF load required for safe shutdown by controlled switching of te Wolf Creek substation breakers, providing a separate transmission line feeding each ESF transformer.

The Phillips 69-kV line, Figure 8.2-5, is owned and maintained by the Lyon-Coffey County REC. It is not a supply line for the 69-kV system. Should a fault occur on this line, a 69-kV breaker located in the Wolf Creek Substation would trip, deenergizing the line -- not adversely affecting the 345-kV offsite source.

8.2-3 Rev. 29

WOLF CREEK All line designs are such as to minimize the possibility of conductor vibration and/or galloping. The design of these overhead lines meets or exceeds the requirements of the National Electric Safety Code (4) for heavy loading district, Grade B construction, and is based on a lightning performance of less than one outage per 100 miles per year.

8.2.1.2 Switchyard and Connection to the Onsite Distribution System Figure 8.2-3 shows the physical orientation and separation of the 345-kV and 69-kV switchyards; the main, startup, 345/13.8 kV, 345/69-kV and 67/13.8-kV transformers; the manual throwover switch and the transmission line routing.

Figure 8.2-4 provides a one-line diagram of the electrical distribution on the site. The electrical one-line diagram of the installation showing connections to offsite substations is shown in Figure 8.2-5.

The 345-kV switchyard design includes a breaker-and-a-half arrangement. A 69-kV line and transformers connected to the local transmission system are provided.

The 345-13.8-kV unit startup transformer, through switchyard breaker 345-100 or 345-110, serves one of the two Class IE busses by way of the ESF number two transformer. The No. 7 transformer (also 345/13.8-kV, through switchyard breaker 345-80 or 345-90, is the primary source for the second Class IE bus by way of breaker 13-48, the manual throwover switch and the ESF number one transformer. The No. 7 transformer is an installed spare for the unit startup and would require being moved to the location of the unit startup should it become necessary to replace the unit startup transformer. The unit startup is a physically independent offsite power source from the No. 7 transformer as neither source shares common protective equipment. As an alternate to the No.

7 transformer source, the No. 6 (345/69-kV) transformer (with No. 4 and No. 5 67/13.8-kV transformers) is available to serve the second Class IE bus via the manual throwover switch. This off-site power source does not have open phase detection capability. This alternate power source is also physically independent from the unit startup transformer, as it does not have common protective equipment with the unit startup transformer. Figure 8.2-3 shows the routing of the overhead line from the 345-kV switchyard to the startup transformer, which serves one of the load groups. This figure also shows the underground circuits encased in concrete from the primary 345/13.8-kV source and the alternate 345/69-kV source to the manual throwover switch, then from the manual throwover switch in the 69-kV switchyard via an underground circuit encased in concrete to the ESF number one transformer. Voltage studies have been performed and cables have been sized to assure that either offsite source is capable of supplying the entire Class IE loads should it become necessary.

8.2-4 Rev. 32

WOLF CREEK When the ESF No., 1 transformer is fed through the primary offsite power source (345/13.8-kV transformer), the offsite 69-kV system may be connected to the 345-kV system through the 345/69-kV transformer. When the ESF No. 1 transformer is being fed from the 345-kV switchyard through the alternate offsite power source (345/69-kV transformer and two parallel 67/13.8-kV transformers), the offsite 69-kV shall not be connected to the 345-kV system.

The 13.8-kV side of both 67/13.8-kV transformers is connected to five underground circuits. These five circuits feed through metal clad switchgear with drawout type breakers and a transfer bus which serve the ESF No. 1 transformer, one switchyard station power transformer, the site distribution system, and the east and west construction loops.

Three single-phase, one-third size, step-up transformers provided for the unit raise the generator voltage to 345-kV prior to transmission, via an overhead line, to the 345-kV switchyard located approximately 700 feet due north of the turbine building. This overhead line is not carried on the same supporting structures as the line to the unit startup transformer. The design of these overhead lines meets or exceeds the requirements of the National Electric Safety Code (4) for heavy loading district, Grade B construction.

The generating unit is to be synchronized to the system across the generator circuit breakers located in the 345-kV switchyard. Control of these synchronizing breakers and the 13.8-kV breakers is administered from the plant main control room. Control Room indication is provided for all 345-kV breakers and 69-kV feeder breakers. Control of all other transmission breakers in the Wolf Creek switchyard is via supervisory control from the Operating Agent's System Control Center in Topeka.

In addition to status indication of all 345-kV breakers and line disconnect switches, the 69-kV feeder breakers and the 13.8-kV breakers, eight main control board annunciator windows are provided to alert the operator to any failure which could result in loss of availability of either preferred offsite source to perform its intended function. These alarms include the following:

345-kV Trouble 345-kV Supervisory Trouble 345-kV Battery Trouble SL2 Buss 13-40 Breaker Trip 69-kV Trouble No.4/No.5 Transformers not Parallel No. 1 Switchgear Breaker Trip 13-48 Breaker Trip 8.2-5 Rev. 32

WOLF CREEK A partial breakdown of many of these alarms is provided on the plant computer alarm listing with a further breakdown on the local annunciator panel in the switchyard buildings and equipment cabinets. A voltmeter is provided on the main control board for monitoring the voltage on the 13.8-kV busses SL7 and SL8 and breaker 13-48.

The 345/13.8 kV transformer is equipped with Open Phase Detection (OPD) equipment. The purpose of the OPD equipment is to detect an Open Phase Condition (OPC) event. An OPC is created when there is not proper circuit continuity for one or more phases of an offsite source.

No failure causing a loss of function of one offsite source can occur without alarming on the Main Control Board in some manner. The main switchyard bus and interconnections between various switchyard components are comprised of rigid aluminum bus.

8.2.1.3 Compliance with Design Criteria and Standards The offsite power systems are capable of providing reliable sources of power to the Class IE systems in compliance with GDC 17 and 18 of 10 CFR Part 50 and Regulatory Guide 1.32. Design of the offsite power systems for Wolf Creek exceeds the minimum requirements cited in the above documents as demonstrated by the following analysis.

Criterion 17 - Electric Power Systems In addition to the features detailed in Sections 8.2.1.1 and 8.2.1.2, compliance with Criterion 17 is further demonstrated by the following:

a. In the event any one of the overhead 345-kV transmission lines were to be interrupted, either one of the remaining two lines is capable (in the case of the Waverly/LaCygne Line both line segments must be in-service) of carrying the total ESF load required for post-accident and post-fire safe shutdown.

Controlled switching of the Wolf Creek substation breakers, providing a separate transmission line feeding each ESF transformer, based on grid conditions, is an acceptable means of maintaining acceptable voltage to carry the ESF load required for post-accident and post-fire safe shutdown.

b. The two 345-kV transmission lines from the plant yard to the switching station are supported on their own individual structures. Structural design and circuit separation are such as to eliminate the possibility of a structural collapse causing an outage of both 345-kV transmission lines.
c. The 345-kV system is protected from lightning and switching surges by lightning protective equipment and by overhead static lines.

8.2-6 Rev. 30

WOLF CREEK

d. The design of all overhead lines meets or exceeds the requirements of the National Electric Safety Code (4) for heavy loading district, Grade B construction, and is based on a lightning performance of less than one outage per 100 miles per year. Design of switchyard components is in accordance with the latest standards of the IEEE, ANSI and NEMA.
e. The design of the 125-V dc system for the 345-kV portion of the switchyard consists of two independent dc systems. Each of the two systems consists of a separate 125-V dc battery, battery charger, and distribution system. Cable separation is maintained between the two systems. A single failure caused by a malfunction of either of the two 125-V dc systems will not affect the performance of the other system. The ability of the switchyard to supply offsite power to the plant will not be affected by the loss of one of the two 125-V dc systems. The surveillance of battery charger operation and battery voltage for each battery system is provided by individual alarms monitored in the switchyard control building. Alarms are also monitored in the plant control room. The 69-kV portion of the switchyard has its own 125-Vdc battery for relaying. There is no dc tie between the switchyard batteries and those in the power block.
f. Two isolated 13.8-kV supplies from separate sources are provided to the switchyard. One supply is from the offsite 13.8-kV bus and the other is from a site 13.8-kV bus. Each supply serves a station power transformer which is capable of supplying the total ac load of the station. Loss of the normal source will initiate automatic throwover of all load to the standby transformer.

Subsequent loss of the standby source will initiate automatic throwover to a standby diesel generator.

g. For reliability and operating flexibility, the 345-kV switchyard design includes a breaker-and-a-half arrangement for each circuit. Along with breaker failure backup protection. Each 345-kV breaker has two trip coils on separate isolated dc control circuits. The above provisions permit the following:
1. Any transmission line can be cleared under normal or fault conditions without affecting any other transmission line.
2. Any 345-kV circuit breaker can be isolated for maintenance without interrupting the power or protection to any circuit.
3. Short circuits on a section of bus can be isolated without interrupting service to any circuit other than that connected to the faulted bus section.
h. Both offsite sources from the 345-kV switchyard are separate and independent. The failure or structural collapse of one will not affect the other.

8.2-7 Rev. 30

WOLF CREEK

i. The offsite sources from the startup and the primary 345/13.8-kV transformers to the ESF transformers and associated switchgear are independently and separately routed. The offsite sources from the startup and the alternate 345/69-kV, 67/13.8-kV transformers to the ESF transformers and associated switchgear are independently and separately routed.
j. Two physically independent circuits are provided to supply offsite power to the onsite distribution system.

The offsite sources from the 345-kV switchyard are each normally connected to their own individual ESF transformers, and are both immediately available following a LOCA to supply components important to safety.

Criterion 18 - Inspection and Testing of Electric Power Systems The 345-kV and 69-kV circuit breakers are inspected, maintained and tested on a routine basis. This can be accomplished without removing the generators, transformers or transmission lines from service.

Transmission line protective relays are tested on a routine basis. This can be accomplished without removing the transmission lines from service. The OPD equipment includes abnormal condition alarms and can be functionality tested with the system online. Generator, main, startup and standby transformer relays are tested on a routine basis when the generator is off line.

Regulatory Guide 1.32 As described in the paragraph above, the two offsite sources are immediate access circuits from the transmission network.

This design conforms to the preferred design as outlined in Regulatory Guide 1.32.

Industry Standards The design complies with the following industry standards and recommendations:

1. Institute of Electrical Electronics Engineers, Inc (IEEE)
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
4. American Institute Steel Construction (AISC)
5. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 8.2-8 Rev. 30

WOLF CREEK

6. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
7. American Welding Society (AWS)
8. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)
9. National Environmental Systems Contractors (NESC)
10. National Electrical Code (NEC)
11. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)
12. Underwriters Laboratory, Inc (UL)
13. Local Building Codes
14. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)
15. Metal Building Manufacturers Association (MBMA)
16. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) 8.2.2 ANALYSIS The 345-kV system to which the WCGS is connected is quite extensive with several major interconnections to other regions. One major benefit to be derived from such a system is that, through proper design, the system continues to function properly on loss of a generating unit, loss of a heavily loaded circuit, or various other contingency conditions.

Analysis of conditions during plant operation demonstrate the following regarding the Wolf Creek 345-kV Substation and its associated lines:

1. The system can successfully withstand loss of the Wolf Creek unit when fully loaded.
2. With all 345-kV lines in service and the Wolf Creek unit fully loaded, the system can successfully withstand loss of any one 345-kV line from Wolf Creek Substation under three-phase fault conditions with the fault cleared in normal clearing sequence.
3. With all 345-kV lines in service and the Wolf Creek unit fully loaded, the system can successfully withstand loss of any two elements caused by a single phase fault being cleared by back-up breaker operation in back-up clearing sequences.

8.2-9 Rev. 0

WOLF CREEK

4.

Any one 345-kV line, when energized from the remote end (in the case of the Waverly/LaCygne 345kV Line both line segments must be energized), can successfully carry the total ESF load required for post-accident and post-fire safe shutdown should it become necessary to do so.

Controlled switching of the Wolf Creek substation breakers, providing a separate transmission line feeding each ESF transformer, based on grid conditions, is an acceptable means of maintaining acceptable voltage to carry the ESF load required for post-accident and post-fire safe shutdown.

5. All of the above comments apply on both a transient stability and a steady state basis.

The analyses of the WCGS demonstrate that the transmission system is fully capable of delivering the output from WCGS and of providing adequate power for safe operation of WCGS.

A transmission system analysis has shown the frequency decay rate to be below 5.0 Hz/sec, therefore, the reactor coolant pump motor breakers are not required to be safety grade.

Transmission grid availability of the KG&E and KCPL systems has historically been very high with no recorded incidents of system islanding within the twenty year period prior to licensing. During the period 1942 to the mid-sixties, KG&E and KCPL established multiple 138 and 161-kV interconnections with their neighboring utilities, significantly strengthening the reliability of the bulk power systems. Grid availability has been further strengthened by multiple 345-kV lines constructed in this and surrounding areas since 1966.

The area's historical outage rate prior to licensing for 345-kV circuits is below 1.0 per 100 circuit miles/year for outages of over 15 minutes duration and less than 2.0 per 100 circuit miles/year for all outages including momentary interruptions. This compares favorably with the historical performance of other 345-kV transmission systems. These outages are caused primarily by lightning, wind and ice.

In view of the applied system design, and based on past performance of the transmission system, uninterrupted transmission grid availability to meet all requirements is projected over the life of WCGS.

8.2-10 Rev. 29

IOWA T 0 MrNNE APOLIS TO DES MOINES

\\.. - -..

TO OMAHA'-

TO LINCOLN

\\

NEBRASKA KANSAS TO OKLAHOMA CITY OKLAHOMA HOYT STRANGER CREEK TO TULSA MISSOURI TO TO ST. LOUIS TO ST. LOUIS 1\\

  • WIND POWER

~ STATION e SUBSTATION POWER STATION 345 KV TRANSMISSION LINE

---STATE BORDER Rev. 32 WOIJF1 CREEK UPDATElD fiAFElmY ANALYf!I REPORT Figure 8.2-1 345 KV SYSTEM (Historical)

6

TO WICHITA..........----.......

345KV BENTON 345KV TO WAVERLY WIND FARM COLLECTOR SUB 345KV TO BENTON

~O MILES 5 MILES

~

WAVERLY 345KV TO 138KV SWITCH YARD TO TO 138KV SWITCH YARD 13 8 K V ______....

SWITCH YARD TO 138KV...,..___...

SWITCH YARD TO l38KV~

SWITCH YARD 14 MILES ROSEHILL 345KV TO SOONER AREA OF CHANGE 345KV TO WAVERLY 5 MILES WOLF CREEK 345KV 345KV TO~---~

ROSEHILL 98 MILES LATHAM 345/69KV XFMR 69KV TO ATHENS 27 MILES REC 69KV TO PHILLIPS

,......,.,........ 67/13.8KV XFMR I

I

~- -------- -*-------....J POWER BLOCK

,---.---______,.... TO WEST GARDNER I CRAIG 0----3 ')--------,

,...-------~~0 STILWELL UNIT 2

~-~-~To NEOSHO 345KV TO LACYGNE 53 MILES 345/13.8KV XFMR REV.32 WOLF CREEK UPDATED SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Figure 8.2-5 ELECTRICAL ONE LINE DIAGRAM OF WOLF CREEK 345KV SWITCHYARD AND ADJACIENT SUBS

WOLF CREEK 8.3 ONSITE POWER SYSTEMS The onsite power system is comprised of a standardized portion within the power block which uses the same design as Callaway and a nonstandardized portion outside of the power block.

8.3.1 AC POWER SYSTEMS 8.3.1.1 Description The onsite ac power system includes a Class IE system and a non-Class IE system.

8.3.1.1.1 Non-Class IE System 8.3.1.1.1.1 Non Class IE Site Auxiliary Power System A single-line diagram of the AC auxiliary power system is shown in Figure 8.3-1, sheet 3.

Site auxiliary power is supplied at 13.8-kV from two independent sources within the power block: Buses PA01 and PA02. Neither of these is a Class IE power bus. Two air circuit breakers at each source (four total) deliver power to the site through underground feeder cables. Controls, metering, instrumentation and protective relaying for each site feeder are provided within the power block.

One of the site feeders serves the makeup water screenhouse and makeup water discharge structure. At the makeup water discharge structure, the feeder is tapped to supply a 480-volt unit substation through a 13.8-kV-480V transformer for the raw water pumps. At the screenhouse, the feeder supplies 4.16-kV switchgear through a 13.8/4.16-kV transformer. The transformer is rated 5.0 MVA, OA, and is equipped for automatic tap changing under load. The 4.16-kV switchgear supplies the makeup water pumps and a 480-volt unit substation for various auxiliaries.

One site feeder from each of the power block buses serves the non-Class IE circulating water screenhouse. At the screenhouse, each feeder supplies 13.8-kV switchgear through a manually operated, normally closed disconnect. A normally open disconnect between the two switchgears permits manual interconnection of the buses, but mechanical interlocks prevent interconnection of the independent site feeders. Each of the site feeders is sized to carry the entire screenhouse in the event the other feeder is disabled. Each 13.8-kV switchgear supplies circulating water pumps, a 480-volt unit substation for auxiliaries, and a 4.16-kV switchgear through a 13.8/4.16-kV transformer rated 5.0 MVA, OA. Electrically operated circuit breakers at the 4.16-kV switchgear permit interconnection of the buses, but electrical interlocks prevent 8.3-1 Rev. 13

WOLF CREEK parallel operation of the 13.8/4.16-kV transformers. Each transformer is sized to carry the entire 4.16-kV screenhouse load in the event the other transformer is disabled. The 4.16-kV switchgear supplies the service water pumps and the motor-driven fire pump.

The remaining site feeder serves 13.8-kV switchgear located in the shop building. This switchgear supplies standby station power for the 345-kV switchyard, an emergency feed for the town of Burlington, Kansas, and 480-volt unit substations for auxiliaries at the shop building, administration building, main warehouse, auxiliary warehouse, technical support center, guardhouse, and Water Treatment Building North.

Electrical interlocks, or administrative controls, prevent interconnection of the onsite auxiliary power system with the Burlington normal source or the switchyard station power normal source.

The selection, application, and design of the equipment used in the onsite auxiliary power system is compatible with that of the power block and is in compliance with applicable standards and regulations.

8.3.1.1.1.2 Non-Class IE Powerblock Power System The non-Class IE ac system is that part of the power system outside the broken-line enclosures indicated in Figure 8.3-1, sheet 1. The non-Class IE ac system distributes power at 13.8 kV, 4.16 kV, 480 V, and 208/120 V ac for all nonsafety-related loads. The non-Class IE ac system also supplies preferred (offsite) power to the Class IE ac system through two ESF transformers. One ESF transformer is supplied power directly, by one of the preferred power circuits, from the offsite power system. The second ESF transformer is supplied power from one of the secondary windings of the startup transformer.

This startup transformer is supplied power from the second preferred power circuit from the offsite power system. Routing of cables from the ESF transformers to the Class IE switchgear is shown on drawings E-0R0224, E-0R3321, E-OR3221, and E-1R3211. Routing of cables from the startup transformer to the 13.8-kV switchgear and from the 13.8-kV switchgear to ESF transformer XNB02 is shown on drawings E-1R0223, E-0R4331, E-0R4321, and E-OR0224. Feeds to ESF transformer XNB01 and the startup transformer are described in Section 8.2.1.2.

The unit auxiliary transformer and the startup transformer each have two secondary windings rated at 13.8 kV.

Two 13.8-kV busses supply power to nonsafety-related loads. Each 13.8-kV bus is connected to a secondary winding of the startup transformer and also to a secondary winding of the unit auxiliary transformer. During starting of the unit, both 13.8-kV busses are 8.3-2 Rev. 19

WOLF CREEK supplied power from the startup transformer. The busses are later transferred to the unit auxiliary transformer, during power generation, by a manually initiated transfer. Automatic transfer of the 13.8-kV busses from the unit auxiliary transformer to the startup transformer is provided.

a. The bus transfer is performed immediately after electrical faults where the generator/network can no longer supply power to the reactor coolant pumps.
b. The bus transfer is performed approximately three seconds after generator vital trips (trips initiated by a turbine trip due to a mechanical fault) where the generator/network can no longer supply power to the reactor coolant pumps. Generator vital trips are initiated by turbine trips on low vacuum, thrust bearing wear, low bearing oil pressure and high vibration.
c. The bus transfer is performed approximately 33 seconds after generator non-vital trips (trips not involving electrical or turbine faults).

The turbine generator remains connected to the switchyard during the delay to allow the switchyard to supply power to the reactor coolant pump busses for at least 30 seconds before any transfer is made.

The startup transformer has the capacity to supply both non-Class IE and both Class IE load groups simultaneously. Refer to Section 8.1.2 for a definition of load group. Figure 8.3-1 shows the transformers, feeders, busses, and their connections. It also lists all loads directly supplied from each 13.8-kV and 4.16-kV bus.

Two feeders from each of the two 13.8-kV busses supply power to non-Class IE site loads located outside the power block. Loads and power distribution systems for WCGS are described in detail in Section 8.3.1 of the USAR.

The startup transformer is equipped with two secondary windings, each rated at 13.8 kV, 50 MVA FOA.

The startup transformer, ESF transformers, and their associated feeder cables have all been sized to carry their expected loads continuously. During normal system operation, transformer loads are below the manufacturer's FOA design limitations. Under abnormal system configurations, such as when ESF No. 2 or a station service transformer have lost their normal feeds, loads may be transferred to the alternate startup transformer secondary winding. (NOTE:

The previous statement is for very limited conditions of plant operation which include as stated, abnormal or complicated scenarios. Refer to USAR Fig. 8.2-4 for a better description of actual system configuration.) Provisions exist for the automatic transfer of busses PB03/PB04 to their alternate source. Under these conditions, additional loads may be placed on a startup transformer secondary winding.

8.3-3 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK Analyses have been performed to evaluate the maximum bus and transformer loadings that may result from these transformer failures. These loads represent the maximum credible loads that may be achieved during abnormal system operation.

Using the guidelines of ANSI C57.92-1962, operation of oil-immersed power transformers in an overloaded condition is permissible. Measurable loss of transformer life occurs if the overload is allowed to persist for extended periods of time.

The protective relays associated with the startup transformer are set above these maximum overload values.

The continuous ampacity of the feeder cables from the startup transformer to the 13.8 kV switchgear PA02 and ESF transformer XNB02 is not exceeded under any loading condition described above.

8.3.1.1.1.3, Station Blackout Diesel Generators The Station Blackout Diesel Generator (SBO DG)System consists of a missile barrier located outside of the Protected Area (PA) that contains the necessary equipment required to provide reliable power to 4.16 kV Class 1E bus NB001 or NB002 during a station blackout event, and to the non-safety auxiliary feedwater pump (NSAFP).

This equipment includes three diesel generators (DGs) and one power equipment center (PEC). The PEC includes nine 4.16 kV switchgear sections, four control panels and one 125 VDC battery system in addition to other auxiliary equipment required to support the operation of the system.

One control panel is also located in each of the ESF Switchgear Rooms to allow operation of the SBO DG system without the need for plant personnel to be present in the missile barrier.

Each diesel generator is housed within its own enclosure which contains all equipment necessary to start the DGs. Starting of the SBO DGs must be initiated by an operator, from any of the following locations:

1) Engine control panels located within the diesel generator enclosure.
2) Local control panel located inside the PEC. The diesel generators can be started simultaneously through a Human-Machine Interface (HMI) touchscreen. They can also be started individually through the HMI touchscreen or through control switches.
3) Remote control panels located inside the ESF Switchgear Room. The diesel generators can be started either individually or simultaneously through HMI touchscreens.

Note:

The SBO DG control switches must be in the auto position in order to be controlled through the HMI touchscreens.

a.

Installed Capability All system operation within the control system for the diesel generators, including each of the HMIs, is performed in what is described as Minimum Requirements Mode. The SBO vendor has provided alternate modes of operation that involve modifications to the NB switchgear, running the SBO DGs in parallel with energized NB switchgear or the construction loop, and installing an external load bank. However, these options have not been installed.

8.3-4 Rev. 30

WOLF CREEK Minimum Requirements Mode is the installed configuration. There are no connections between the existing switchgear (NB001 and NB002) and the Kohler switchgear except for the differential CT wires and the open/closed status of NB00114 and NB00214. The operation of breakers NB00114 and NB00214 is manual only with no automatic protective features.

The Kohler-supplied switchgear is designed to control three Kohler 3250 kW generators in parallel with each other. All transfers and tests are manually initiated using an HMI (touchscreen).

There is one 15" HMI (touchscreen) mounted on the control section in the PEC for system monitoring and control. The Kohler-provided PLC-based control system consists of one hot standby master PLC and a PLC for each generator. In the event of a complete PLC system failure, the operator can use the control switches on the KU100 Local Control Panel to synchronize the generators and manually connect them to PB005.

There are two remote control panel enclosures. One is located in the NB00l Switchgear room and the other in the NB002 Switchgear room. There is one 15" HMI (touchscreen) mounted on each remote enclosure for system monitoring and control. The control switches on each remote control panel enclosure, with the exception of the emergency stop push buttons, are not functional in Minimum Requirements Mode. All breakers in NB001 and NB002 must be operated locally. No status (except open/closed status of NB00114 and NB00214) or control of these breakers is available.

To protect the cables going from the PB bus to the NB buses, monitoring, alarms and protective relaying are utilized. The loading on the cables will be monitored by the PLC, using an elapsed time counter to track the amount of time that the cables are loaded beyond a specified setpoint. The HMI will also alarm when the cables are loaded beyond the same setpoint. The setpoint along with a time delay is configurable through the HMI. Protective relaying is present at the PB bus that prevents cable overload damage while allowing the required loads to be powered without spurious tripping.

b.

Periodic Testing The SBO DG system will be periodically tested to ensure continued reliability of the system. The system is capable of performing the following tests while in the Minimum Requirements Mode:

No Load Test This test is performed from the PEC local control panel. This test will run the SBO diesels for an operator defined amount of time to verify readiness to operate.

8.3-5 Rev. 30

WOLF CREEK

  • NSAFP Load Test This test is performed from either the PEC local control panel or one of the ESF Switchgear Room remote control panels.

This test will start and synchronize at least two diesel generators to the PB005 bus and will prevent the PB005 bus from powering the NB busses, before closing the PB00506 breaker.

The SBO DGs will provide power to the NSAFWP for the specified period of time to verify readiness to operate.

  • NB Functional Load Test This test is performed from either of the ESF switchgear room remote control panels. This test will unload and de-energize the NB busses, then start at least two SBO DGs, energize the NB busses from the SBO DGs, and carry necessary plant loads for a Station Blackout Event.

8.3.1.1.2 Class 1E AC System The Class 1E AC system is that portion of the onsite power system inside the broken-line enclosures shown in Figure 8.3-1, sheet 1, and sheet 2.

The Class 1E AC system distributes power at 4.16 kV, 480 V, 208/120 V, and 120 V ac to all safety-related loads. Also, the Class 1E AC system supplies certain selected loads which are not safety related but are important to the plant operation. Figure 8.3-2 lists the major safety-related and isolated nonsafety-related loads supplied from the Class 1E AC system.

In addition to the above power distribution, the Class 1E AC system contains standby power sources diesel generator which provide the power required for post-accident and post-fire safe shutdown in the event of a loss of the preferred power sources.

The following describes various features of the Class 1E systems:

POWER SUPPLY FEEDERS - Each 4.16-kV load group is supplied by two preferred power supply feeders and one diesel generator (standby) supply feeder. Each 4.16-kV bus supplies motor loads and 4.0-kV/480-V load center transformers with their associated 480-V busses.

BUS ARRANGEMENTS - The Class 1E AC system is divided into two redundant load groups (load groups 1 and 2). Either one of the load groups is capable of providing power to safely reach cold shutdown. Each ac load group consists of a 4.16-kV bus, 480-V load centers, 480-V motor control centers, and lower voltage ac supplies.

LOADS SUPPLIED FROM EACH BUS - Refer to Figure 8.3-2 for a listing of Class 1E system loads and their respective busses.

MANUAL AND AUTOMATIC INTERCONNECTIONS BETWEEN BUSSES, BUSSES AND LOADS, AND BUSSES AND SUPPLIES - No provisions exist for automatically connecting one Class IE load group to another redundant Class IE load group or for automatically transferring loads between load groups. The incoming preferred power supply associated with a load group can supply the 4.16-kV Class 1E bus of the other load group by manual operation of the requisite 4.16-kV circuit breakers when required.

8.3-6 Rev. 30

WOLF CREEK For a discussion of interlocks, refer to Section 8.3.1.1.3.

INTERCONNECTIONS BETWEEN SAFETY-RELATED AND NONSAFETY-RELATED BUSSES - No interconnections are provided between the safety-and nonsafety-related busses.

The startup transformer supplies power through the same winding to a 13.8-kV bus and a 13.8/4.16-kV ESF transformer.

REDUNDANT BUS SEPARATION - The Class 1E switchgear, load centers, and motor control centers for the redundant load groups are located in separate rooms of the control building and auxiliary building in such a way as to ensure physical separation. Refer to Section 8.3.1.4.1 and Section 8.3.1.1.7 for the criteria governing redundant bus separation.

CLASS 1E EQUIPMENT CAPACITIES -

a. 4.16-kV Switchgear Bus 2000A continuous rating Incoming breakers 2000A continuous, 350 MVA interrupting Feeder breakers 1200A continuous, 350 MVA interrupting
b. 480-V Unit Load Centers Transformers 1000 kVA, 3 phase, 60-Hz, 4000/480 V Bus 1600A continuous Incoming breakers 1600A continuous, 50,000A rms symmetrical interrupting Feeder breakers 800A continuous, 30,000A rms symmetrical interrupting (AKR) 800A continuous, 42,000A rms symmetrical interrupting (MP)
c. 480-V Motor Control Centers Horizontal bus 600A continuous, 25,000A rms symmetrical Vertical bus 300A continuous, 25,000A rms symmetrical Breakers 25,000A rms symmetrical, (molded case) minimum interrupting (singly for thermal-magnetic breakers and in combination with a starter for magnetic only breakers)

AUTOMATIC LOADING AND LOAD SHEDDING - The automatic loading sequence of the Class IE busses is indicated in Figure 8.3-2.

If preferred power is available to the 4.16-kV Class 1E bus following a LOCA, the Class 1E loads are started in programmed time increments by the load sequencer. The emergency standby diesel generator is automatically started but not connected to the bus. However, in the event that preferred power is lost following a LOCA, the load sequencer will function to shed selected loads and automatically start the associated standby diesel generator (connection of the standby diesel generator to the 4.16-kV Class 1E bus is performed by the diesel generator control circuitry). Load sequencers then function to start the required Class 1E loads in programmed time increments.

8.3-7 Rev. 30

WOLF CREEK A failure modes and effects analysis and a reliability study have been performed on the load shedder emergency load sequencers (LSELS). These studies have shown that no failure within a single LSELS can result in the failure of both sources of offsite power, that there are no credible sneak circuits or common mode failures in the LSELS that could render both the onsite and offsite power sources unavailable, and that sequencing of loads on the offsite power system does not compromise the reliability of the offsite power source.

There are no permissive devices (e.g., lube oil pressure) incorporated into the final actuation control circuitry for large horsepower, safety-related motors.

Refer to Section 8.3.1.1.3 for additional information on load shedding and sequencing.

CLASS 1E EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION - Refer to Section 8.3.1.3 for details regarding the physical identification of Class 1E equipment.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR THE APPLICABLE POWER SYSTEMS WITH THE ASSIGNED POWER SUPPLY IDENTIFIED - The dc control supplies for switchgear breaker operation are separate and independent so that Class 1E dc load group 1 supplies Class 1E load group 1 switchgear. The battery chargers for dc load group 1 are fed from the same load group switchgear. Class 1E dc load group 2 supplies Class 1E load group 2 switchgear. For further information on the dc power system, refer to Section 8.3.2.

Each 4.16-kV switchgear bus and 480-V load center bus is equipped with an undervoltage relay for annunciation in the control room. All Class 1E 4.16-kV buses are provided with voltage and current indication. The 480 volt system is provided with current indications only.

ELECTRIC CIRCUIT PROTECTION SYSTEMS - Protective relay schemes or direct-acting trip devices on primary and backup circuit breakers are provided throughout the onsite power system in order to:

a. Isolate faulted equipment and/or circuits from unfaulted equipment and/or circuits
b. Prevent damage to equipment
c. Protect personnel
d. Minimize system disturbances The short circuit protective system is analyzed to ensure that the various adjustable devices are applied within their ratings and set to be coordinated with each other to attain selectivity in their operation. The combination of devices and settings applied affords the selectivity necessary to isolate a faulted area quickly with a minimum of disturbance to the rest of the system.

8.3-8 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK Major types of protection applications that are used consist of the following:

a. Overcurrent Relaying Each bus supply breaker (except the standby diesel breaker) is equipped with three inverse-time overcurrent relays and one inverse-time ground fault relay for bus faults and to provide backup for feeder circuit relays.

Bus supply breakers from the standby emergency diesel generator are equipped with three inverse-time overcurrent relays only. Ground protection is provided on each generator neutral.

Each 4.16-kV motor circuit breaker has three overcurrent relays, each with one long-time and two instantaneous elements for overload, locked rotor, and short circuit protection. Each 4.16-kV motor circuit breaker is also equipped with an instantaneous ground current relay.

The current for Class 1E motors is monitored by computer in the control room and at the Class 1E switchgear.

Each 4.16-kV supply circuit breaker to a load center transformer has three overcurrent relays with long-time and instantaneous elements. An instantaneous overcurrent ground current relay provides sensitive ground fault protection.

b. Undervoltage Relaying Each 4.16-kV Class 1E bus is equipped with undervoltage relays for diesel generator start initiation and undervoltage annunciation.

Each 480-V Class 1E load center bus is equipped with undervoltage relays for undervoltage annunciation.

c. Differential Relaying The main, unit auxiliary, startup, station service, and ESF transformers are equipped with differential relays.

These relays provide high-speed disconnection to prevent severe damage in the event of transformer internal faults.

Motors rated above 3,500 horsepower are equipped with differential protection.

The main generator and the standby emergency diesel generator are provided with differential protection.

d. 480-V Load Center Overcurrent Relaying Each 480-V load center circuit breaker is equipped with a solid state device which has an adjustable phase and ground overcurrent trip.

8.3-9 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK

e.

480-V Motor Control Center Overcurrent Relaying Molded case circuit breakers provide time overcurrent and/or instantaneous short circuit protection for connected loads. The molded case circuit breakers for motor circuits are equipped with instantaneous trip only. Motor overload protection is provided by ambient compensated thermal trip units in the motor controller.

The molded case breakers for nonmotor feeder circuits provide thermal time overcurrent protection as well as instantaneous short circuit protection.

All starters for motor-operated valves are equipped with thermal overload relays. The thermal overload relay trip contacts located in 480-V motor control centers for all Class 1E valves, are bypassed in accordance with Regulatory Guide 1.106, Rev. 1, dated March 1977.

The starters and the feeder circuit breakers located in the motor control center are coordinated with the motor control center incoming supply breakers so that, upon ground fault, the protective device nearest the fault trips first. Where coordination is not possible using the protective devices normally furnished in a standard motor control center module, solid-state ground fault protectors are added to the affected modules on an individual basis.

TESTING OF THE AC SYSTEMS DURING POWER OPERATION - All Class 1E circuit breakers and motor controllers are testable during reactor operation, except for the electric equipment associated with those Class 1E loads identified in Chapter 7.0. During periodic Class 1E system tests, subsystems of the engineered safety features actuation system, such as safety injection, containment spray, and containment isolation, are actuated, thereby causing appropriate circuit breaker or contactor operation. The 4.16-kV and 480-V circuit breakers and control circuits can also be tested independently while individual equipment is shut down. The circuit breakers can be placed in the test position and exercised without operation of the associated equipment.

8.3.1.1.3 Standby Power Supply The standby power supply for each safety-related load group consists of one diesel generator complete with its accessories and fuel storage and transfer systems. It is capable of supplying essential loads necessary to reliably and safely shut down and isolate the reactor. Each diesel generator is rated at 6,201 kW for continuous operation. Additional ratings are 6,635 kW for 2,000 hours0 days <br />0 hours <br />0 weeks <br />0 months <br />, 6,821 kW for 7 days, and 7,441 kW for 30 minutes. The generator 2-hour rating is equal to the 7-day rating. Each diesel generator is connected exclusively to a single 4.16-kV safety feature bus for one load group. The load groups are redundant and have similar safety-related equipment. Each load group is adequate to satisfy minimum engineered safety features demand caused by a LOCA and/or loss of preferred power supply. The diesel generators are electrically isolated from each other. Physical separation for fire and missile protection is provided between the diesel generators, since they are housed in separate rooms of a seismic Category I structure. Power and control cables for the diesel generators and associated switchgear are routed to maintain physical separation.

8.3-10 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK Ratings for diesel generator sets are established in order to satisfy the requirements set forth in Regulatory Guide 1.9. Refer to Section 8.1.4.3.

The diesel generator loads are determined on the basis of nameplate rating, pump pressure and flow conditions, or pump runout conditions. The basis for each load is noted in Figure 8.3-2. The continuous rating of the diesel generator is based on the maximum total load required at any time.

The functional aspects of the onsite power system are discussed below.

STARTING INITIATING CIRCUITS - The diesel generators are started on the following:

a. Receipt of a safety injection signal (SIS)
b. Loss of voltage to the respective 4.16-kV Class 1E bus to which each generator is connected
c. Manual - Remote switch actuation (main control room)
d. Manual - Local switch actuation (diesel generator room)
e. Emergency Manual - Local switch actuation (diesel generator room)

Refer to logic diagrams - Figures 8.3-3, 8.3-4, and 8.3-5.

DIESEL STARTING MECHANISM AND SYSTEM - Refer to Section 9.5.6.

TRIPPING DEVICES - The following protective functions are for each diesel generator:

a. Start failure relay
b. Engine overspeed
c. High jacket coolant temperature
d. Low lube oil pressure
e. High crankcase pressure
f. Generator differential The above protective devices, which function to shut down the diesel or trip the diesel generator breaker, are also functional following an SIS or loss of offsite power.

The high jacket water coolant temperature, and low lube oil pressure, switches initiate shutdown only upon coincidence of a modified two-out-of-four logic.

The high crankcase pressure switches initiate shutdown only upon coincidence of a modified two-out-of-three logic. That is, a false trip on one channel does not erroneously shut down the diesel generator.

8.3-11 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK The remaining protective functions that are retained during an SIS are (1) generator differential, (2) engine overspeed, and (3) start failure.

In accordance with the provisions of Reg. Guide 1.9, the engine overspeed and generator differential trips are retained to protect the diesel generator set from massive damage. The start failure protection functions to interrupt the starting of the diesel generator if a predetermined speed is not reached or if lube oil pressure is not established within a predetermined time following the start initiation.

Reverse power, loss of field, generator overcurrent, generator voltage-restrained overcurrent, generator ground overcurrent, overexcitation and underfrequency protection are also provided but cause a trip only during tests when the diesel generator is operating in parallel with the preferred power system.

During testing with a loss of offsite power event the diesel generator may trip due to one of the seven (7) previously mentioned protective trips. If the diesel generator trips, operator action may be required to reset a lockout relay. If the diesel generator does not trip, operator action is required to disable the seven (7) protective trips and place the diesel generator in isochronous mode.

Underfrequency protection is provided for safely separating the diesel generators from the preferred source (when previously synchronized to it) without damage to or shutdown of the diesel generators.

The diesel generators are monitored from the control room, and each device, when actuated, initiates an annunciator in the diesel generator room, a summary annunciator in the control room, and in some cases individual annunciation in the control room (see Section 8.3.1.1.3). The alarms are set to provide a warning of impending trouble prior to trip of the diesels.

INTERLOCKS - Circuit breaker electrical interlocks are provided to prevent automatic closing of a diesel generator breaker to an energized or faulted bus.

If the preferred power has been lost, undervoltage relays on the incoming (offsite) side of the 4.16-kV feeder breakers prevent closure of these breakers.

The two 4.16-kV circuit breakers which control the incoming preferred source power to a 4.16-kV Class 1E bus are so interlocked that only one breaker can be closed at any one time. This is to prevent parallel operation of the preferred sources.

When operating from the diesel generator supply (loss of offsite power),

redundant load groups cannot be manually connected together since the 4.16-kV circuit breakers controlling the incoming preferred power supplies to the Class 1E busses are interlocked to prevent paralleling of the diesel generators.

During normal operation (offsite power available), synchronizing check relays provide an interlock function. They prevent an operator error that would parallel the standby power source with the offsite power source when the two are out-of-synchronism.

8.3-12 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK PERMISSIVES - A single switch (AUTO, LOCAL/ MANUAL) in the diesel generator room is provided for each diesel generator to block automatic start signals when the diesel is out for maintenance (i.e., LOCAL/MANUAL position). When in the LOCAL/MANUAL position, an annunciator is initiated in the control room.

A pushbutton in the control room and a local pushbutton are provided to allow manual start capability.

During periodic diesel generator tests, subsequent to diesel start and prior to synchronization to the preferred system, a switch in the control room allows parallel operation with the preferred system.

LOAD-SHEDDING CIRCUITS - Upon recognition of a loss of or degraded voltage on a 4.16-kV Class 1E bus, a logic signal is initiated to effect the following on each load group:

a. Shed selected loads
b. Send signal to start diesel
c. Trip 4.16-kV preferred power supply breakers Two voltage sensing schemes are employed on each 4.16-kV Class lE bus to initiate the required logic signal. One scheme recognizes a loss of voltage, and the other recognizes a degraded voltage. Four potential transformers on each bus provide the necessary input voltages to the protective devices necessary to achieve the above protection.

In order to recognize a loss of voltage, four instantaneous undervoltage relays are used. The output contacts of these relays are directed to logic circuits that process the four undervoltage input circuits into the 2-out-of-4 logic circuit described above. This scheme is used on each bus.

The loss of voltage logic signal is set below the minimum bus voltage encountered during diesel generator sequential loading. A brief time delay is employed to prevent false trips arising from transient undervoltage (spike) conditions.

In order to recognize a degraded voltage, a diverse protection scheme is used.

The above four potential transformers each provide an analog output signal of 0-120 volts. This signal is directed to logic circuits and processors that convert the analog signals into a 2-out-of-4 logic signal, whenever the signal drops below a preset value. This scheme serves only to trip the incoming offsite power circuit breakers when that power source has been determined to be degraded. This design cannot adversely affect the sequential loading of the diesel generators.

The degraded voltage logic signal is set at the minimum permissible continuous bus voltage. A time delay is provided that prevents damage to or spurious tripping of the permanently connected Class lE loads by limiting the amount of time they are exposed to a degraded voltage. The final voltage and time setpoints was determined based on an analysis of the auxiliary power distribution system, including the Class lE busses at all voltage levels. The use of an SIS contact in series with the degraded voltage logic circuit output contact ensures that the Class lE busses are immediately separated from the offsite power system whenever an accident occurs and the offsite power system is not able to accept the loads continuously. An alarm is also provided to alert the operator to a degraded voltage condition. It is delayed until any motor starting-induced voltage transient bus has had sufficient time to clear.

8.3-13 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK As each generator reaches rated voltage and frequency, the generator breaker connecting it to the corresponding 4.16-kV bus closes. With the SIS, connection of the diesel generator to the 4.16-kV bus is not made unless the preferred source of power is lost. The diesel generator is able to accept loads within 12 seconds after receipt of a starting signal, and all automatically sequenced loads are connected to the Class 1E bus within 35 seconds thereafter. Refer to Figure 8.3-2. Relays at the diesel generator detect generator rated voltage and frequency conditions and provide a permissive interlock for the closing of the respective generator circuit breaker. Upon loss of the preferred source of power without a LOCA, the load sequencer system initiates the starting of the diesel generators and sheds all loads, except the load centers and the centrifugal charging pumps.

Following diesel start and connection to the Class 1E bus, the loads are automatically sequenced onto the bus at programmed time intervals. A fast responding exciter and voltage regulator ensure voltage recovery of the diesel generator after each load step. Field flashing is utilized on the diesel generators for fast voltage buildup during the start sequence. Momentary voltage and frequency dips will not exceed a maximum of 25 percent below nominal rating (4.16 kV) for voltage and 5 percent for frequency.

The voltage levels at safety-related buses are optimized for the expected load conditions throughout the anticipated range of voltage of the offsite system by adjustment of transformer taps. This analysis is verified to be accurate by testing.

TESTING - Because the diesel generator is not of the type or size that has been previously used as a standby emergency power source in nuclear power plant service, the following tests are performed at the manufacturer's facility:

a. Load capability qualification tests were performed as follows:
1. The engine was brought to temperature equilibrium conditions and then run at rated load for 22 hours2.546296e-4 days <br />0.00611 hours <br />3.637566e-5 weeks <br />8.371e-6 months <br />.

Immediately following this period, the diesel was run for 2 additional hours at the rated short-time load.

This is in accordance with Paragraph 6.3.1(1) and (2) of IEEE 387-1977.

2. A load rejection from rated load was performed in one step. The engine speed did not exceed the normal speed plus 75 percent of the difference between normal speed and the overspeed setpoint. This is in accordance with Paragraph 6.3.1(3) of IEEE 387-1977.
3. A no load test was conducted for 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> followed by loading to the rated load to demonstrate the capability to carry full load following operation at no load. This is in accordance with Paragraph 6.3.1(4) of IEEE 387-1977. Refer to Section 9.5.8.2.3 for a discussion of the manufacturer's operating recommendations for light and no load operations for extended periods. (Note that IEEE-387 contains no requirement for analyzing or inspecting the exhaust gas or the exhaust system during or following this test. The acceptance criterion is the acceptance of the rated load.)

8.3-14 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK

b. At least 300 valid start and load tests are performed on one diesel generator. This includes all valid tests performed offsite. A valid start and load test is defined as an unloaded start from design conditions with subsequent loading to at least 50 percent of the continuous rating within the required time interval and continued operation until temperature equilibrium is attained. This is in accordance with Paragraph 6.3.2 of IEEE 387-1977. At least 90 percent of these start tests were made from hot standby conditions and 10 percent from design hot equilibrium.

A failure-to-start rate in excess of one per hundred requires further testing as well as a review of the system design adequacy.

If failures to start are found to be caused by failures of a generic nature in a single component, it may be possible to correct the problem by use of a different kind of component or to correct the deficiency in the component.

If it is possible to independently test the component after its deficiencies have been corrected, it is not necessary to repeat the 300 starting tests of the complete diesel generator unit. If the component is successfully tested 300 times or more under acceptable simulated starting conditions, it is only necessary to continue and complete the original required 300 unit tests with the replacement component.

If starting failures are of a random nature or cannot be readily identified as being generic component failures, additional starting tests of the complete unit are performed after each starting problem has been corrected. The additional tests are of a sufficient number to verify the required starting reliability.

c. At least two full load and margin tests are performed on each diesel generator to demonstrate the start and load capability of these units with some margin in excess of the design requirements. The margin test includes step-loading the diesel generator with a test load at least 10 percent larger than the largest design single-step load.

This is in accordance with Paragraph 6.3.3 of IEEE 387-1977.

In addition to the above tests, after final assembly and preliminary startup testing each diesel generator was tested at the site prior to reactor fuel loading to verify actual electrical loading on the diesel generator and to demonstrate its ability to perform its intended function. The diesel generator is given each 8.3-15 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK of the following tests, in accordance with Paragraph 6.4 of IEEE 387-1977 to certify the adequacy of the unit for the intended service.

a. Starting tests to demonstrate the ability to start automatically on simulation of loss of ac voltage and attain stabilized frequency and voltage within the rated limits and time.
b. Load acceptance tests to demonstrate the ability to accept the design loads in the design accident loading sequence and to maintain voltage and frequency within acceptable limits.
c. Rated load tests, with the diesel in parallel with the offsite system, to demonstrate the ability to carry the continuous rated load until temperature equilibrium is reached, followed by operation for 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> at the short-time rated load of the diesel generator, followed by operation for 22 hours2.546296e-4 days <br />0.00611 hours <br />3.637566e-5 weeks <br />8.371e-6 months <br /> at the continuous rated load, without exceeding the manufacturer's design limits.
d. Functional tests to demonstrate diesel generator capability at full load temperature conditions by rerunning tests a and b above immediately following c above. If these tests are not satisfactorily completed, it is not necessary to repeat the tests of item c above prior to rerunning this test. Instead, prior to rerunning these tests, the diesel generator may be operated at the continuous rated load for 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> or until operating temperature has stabilized.
e. Design load tests to demonstrate the ability to carry the design load for a time required to reach equilibrium temperature plus 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> without exceeding the manufacturer's design limits.
f. Load rejection tests to demonstrate the ability to reject the maximum rated load without exceeding speeds or voltages that cause tripping, mechanical damage, or harmful overstresses.
g. Electrical tests to demonstrate that the electrical properties of the generator, excitation system, voltage regulator, engine governor system, and the control and surveillance systems are acceptable for the intended application including:

8.3-16 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK

1. Synchronize the diesel generator unit with offsite system while the unit is connected to the emergency load.
2. Transfer the emergency load to the offsite system.
3. Isolate the diesel generator unit from the offsite system.
4. Restore diesel unit to standby status.
h. A minimum of 35 consecutive valid tests are to be run with no failures to demonstrate the required reliability.
i. Subsystem tests to demonstrate the capability of the control, surveillance, and protection systems to function in accordance with their intended application.
j. Tests to demonstrate the capability of the diesel generator unit to respond to an emergency start signal within the required time.

After being placed in service, the standby power system is tested periodically in accordance with the plant Technical Specifications to demonstrate the continued ability of the unit to perform its intended function.

REPAIRS AND MAINTENANCE - Preventative and corrective maintenance records are maintained and reviewed on a continuing basis for parts failure data. In cases where repeated failures of a certain part or component are identified, then investigative maintenance is performed to try to identify the root cause of the problem.

Upon completion of repairs or maintenance and prior to an actual start, run, and load test, a final equipment check is made to ensure the diesel generators are ready for operation.

FUEL OIL STORAGE AND TRANSFER SYSTEMS - The diesel generator fuel oil system is described in Section 9.5.4.

DIESEL GENERATOR COOLING AND HEATING SYSTEMS - The diesel generator cooling water system is described in Section 9.5.5.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR STANDBY POWER SUPPLY - Equipment is provided in the control room for each diesel generator for the following operations:

a. Remote manual starting and stopping 8.3-17 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK

b. Remote manual synchronization
c. Remote manual frequency adjustment Remote manual voltage adjustment for the NE001 EDG and remote manual voltage adjustment for the NE002 EDG while in automatic voltage control only.
d. Governor and voltage drop selection
e. Automatic or manual voltage regulator selection (The NE002 EDG can only be switched between automatic and manual voltage control locally.)

A master transfer switch is provided in the diesel room for automatic and local-manual control selection. The switch is normally in the automatic position, whereby the engineered safety features system senses an accident or loss of preferred power and starts the diesel. The master transfer switch is placed in the local-manual position to allow manual operation of the diesel locally when it is out for maintenance. Equipment is provided locally at each diesel generator for manual starting in case of a control room evacuation. The local emergency start functions to start the diesel generator, regardless of the position of the master transfer switch.

Equipment is provided at each local control panel for the following operation (when the master transfer switch is in the local position):

a. Manual starting
b. Manual stopping
c. Frequency and voltage regulation
d. Automatic or manual regulation selection
e. Exciter field removal and reset The local control operation is annunciated in the control room. The dc power source for the diesel generator instrumentation and control system is of the same load group as the respective diesel generator.

Each diesel generator is equipped with the following alarms at the local control panel:

a. Lube oil pressure low
b. Lube oil temperature high
c. Lube oil temperature low 8.3-18 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK

d. Lube oil level high in sump
e. Lube oil level low in sump
f. Lube oil filter differential pressure high
g. Lube oil strainer differential pressure high
h. Fuel oil filter differential pressure high
i. Fuel oil strainer differential pressure high
j. Fuel oil pressure low
k. Jacket coolant pressure low
1. Jacket coolant temperature high
m. Jacket coolant temperature low
n. Jacket coolant level low in expansion tank
o. Diesel generator undervoltage
p. Start failure
q. Engine trouble shutdown
r. Generator underfrequency
s. Barring device engaged
t. DC control power failure
u. Starting air pressure low train 1
v. Starting air pressure low train 2
w. Crankcase pressure high
x. Engine overspeed trip
y. Any switch not in auto position
z. Generator protective relay trip aa. Diesel main bearing temperature high 8.3-19 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK bb. Combustion air pressure low cc. Intercooler water pressure low dd. Intercooler water temperature high ee. Intercooler water temperature low ff. Rocker arm lube oil filter differential pressure high gg. Rocker arm lube oil level high hh. Rocker arm lube oil pressure low ii. Diesel generator underexcitation jj. Diesel generator field grounded kk. Exciter power potential transformer fuse failure The following conditions are separately alarmed in the control room:

a. Diesel out of service
b. Diesel local alarm
c. Diesel generator undervoltage or underfrequency
d. Diesel overvoltage
e. Diesel negative phase sequence Electrical instruments are provided in the control room and at the diesel generator for surveillance of generator voltage, current, frequency, power, and reactive volt amperes. The breaker status of each 4.16-kV breaker of the engineered safety features system is displayed by red and green indicating lamps in the control room. Local indication is provided at the switchgear.

A window is provided on the engineered safety features status panel in order to determine the availability of the diesel generator. The window reads "Emergency Diesel Generator" and operates as described in Section 7.5.2.2.

This window is activated by all conditions which render the diesel inoperable.

These conditions are listed as follows:

a. Loss of dc control power
b. Generator relay trip 8.3-20 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK

c. Barring device engaged
d. Starting air pressure low
e. Engine shutdown
f. Start failure
g. Diesel generator control switch not in auto position
h. Diesel generator auxiliaries control switch in off position.

Controls and monitoring instruments for the WCGS emergency diesel generators are installed in free standing, floor-mounted control panels, separate from the engine skid. Only those sensors and other electrical controls (solenoid valves and governor actuator) which send or receive signals to and from the control panels are mounted on the diesel generator unit.

Although the WCGS panels are mounted on the same floor as the engine skid they do not employ vibration mounts because the floor is of sufficient mass to dampen the engine vibrations.

8.3.1.1.4 Control Rod Drive Power Supply Electric power to control rod drive mechanisms is supplied by two full-capacity, motor-generator sets. Each motor-generator set is connected to a separate non-Class IE 480-V load center. Each generator is of the synchronous type and is driven by a 200-hp induction motor. The ac power is distributed to the rod control power cabinets through two series-connected reactor trip breakers.

8.3.1.1.5 Vital Instrument AC Power Supply Four independent Class IE 120-V vital instrument ac power supplies are provided to supply the four channels of the protection systems and reactor control systems. Each vital instrument ac power supply consists of one normal inverter equipped with an integral bypass constant voltage transformer and one distribution bus. Normally, the inverter is operating to supply the vital ac bus. Each inverter is supplied by a separate Class IE battery system, as described in Section 8.3.2. If an inverter is inoperable or is to be removed from service, the vital ac bus can be supplied from the integral constant voltage transformer until the trains swing (backup) inverter is configured to operate in its place. The swing unit can supply either inverter in that train.

A selector switch located on the inverter is positioned to select the appropriate inverter to be replaced (a keylock is used to maintain the position). The swing unit will be fed from the dc bus associated with the affected inverters power supply. A 125 VDC power source is selected on the DC manual transfer switch via key operated switches.

Refer to Figure 8.3-6, sheet 1, for the single-line arrangement of the vital instrument ac power supply.

8.3-21 Rev. 29

WOLF CREEK 8.3.1.1.6 Non-vital Instrument AC Power Supply The non-vital 120/208-V instrument ac power supply is designed to furnish reliable power to all nonsafety-related plant instruments. In addition, it is utilized as the source of power for the public address system.

The non-vital instrument ac power supply system is divided into four panelboards. Two of the panel boards are normally supplied by three phase transformers, each connected to a Class 1E motor control center. In the event of the loss of normal auxiliary power, the transformers are automatically energized by the emergency diesel generators. In the event that the transformers fail, the instrument buses will be automatically transferred to an alternate regulated source from non-vital motor control centers. The other two panelboards are fed from uninterruptible power supplies. These panelboards supply instrument loads which are required for stable plant operation and cannot withstand an interruption in power.

8.3.1.1.7 Electric Equipment Layout The following are the general features of the electric equipment layout:

a. Class IE switchgear, load centers, and motor control centers of redundant load groups are located in separate rooms within seismic Category I buildings.
b. Four Class IE battery supplies are located in the control building. Each battery is located in a separate room.

Battery ventilation considerations are addressed in Section 9.4.1.

c. The battery charger, inverter, and dc busses associated with each of the four subsystems are in separate rooms outside the battery rooms.
d. Two cable spreading rooms are provided, one above and one below the control room. This enhances redundant cable separation.
e. Redundant diesel generators and associated supporting equipment are located in separate rooms in the seismic Category I diesel generator building.

Electrical equipment layout drawings showing the location of electrical equipment and equipment and cable raceways are listed in Section 1.7.

8.3-22 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK 8.3.1.1.8 Design Criteria for Class IE Equipment Design criteria are discussed below for the Class IE equipment:

MOTOR SIZE - For all motors rated above 480 Volts, some have the nameplate rated horsepower less than the horsepower required by the driven load under runout condition, but still within the service factor of the motor.

In the case of containment spray pumps (500 hp nameplate rating and 505 brake horsepower), residual heat removal pumps (500 hp nameplate rating and 510 brake horsepower), centrifugal charging pumps (600 hp nameplate rating and 680 brake horsepower), and safety injection pumps (450 hp nameplate rating and 460 brake horsepower) which are under the scope of the NSSS supplier, the brake horsepower exceeds the nameplate rating of the motor, but is within the capability of the motors which have a service factor of 1.15.

MINIMUM MOTOR ACCELERATING VOLTAGE - All Class IE motors fed from the 4.16-kV busses are specified with accelerating capability at 75 percent of the motor nameplate rating (4,000 volts). IE motors rated for use on lower voltage busses, which are required to start concurrently with large 4-kV motors, are specified with accelerating capability at 65 percent of the motor nameplate rating.

To prevent valve damage from the oversizing of motors, motor-operated valve actuators are specified with accelerating capability at 80 percent of the nameplating rating.

The electrical system is designed so that the total voltage drop on the Class IE motor circuits is less than that required to accelerate those motors.

MOTOR STARTING TORQUE - The motor starting torque is capable of starting and accelerating the connected load to normal speed within sufficient time to perform its safety function for all expected operating conditions, including the design minimum bus voltage stated in Section 8.3.1.1.3.

MINIMUM MOTOR TORQUE MARGIN OVER PUMP TORQUE THROUGH ACCELERATING PERIOD - The minimum torque margin (accelerating torque) is such that the pump-motor assembly reaches nominal speed within sufficient time to perform its safety function at design minimum terminal voltage.

MOTOR INSULATION - Insulation systems are selected on the basis of the particular ambient conditions to which insulation is exposed. For Class IE motors located within the containment, the insulation system is selected to withstand the postulated accident environment.

8.3-23 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK TEMPERATURE MONITORING DEVICES PROVIDED IN LARGE HORSEPOWER MOTORS - Each motor in excess of 1,500 hp is provided with six resistance temperature detectors (RTD) embedded in the motor slots, two per phase. In normal operation, the RTD at the hottest location (selected by test) monitors the motor temperature and provides a computer alarm in the control room on high temperature. Each 4.16-kV motor bearing (except residual heat removal) is provided with one thermocouple which will provide an alarm on bearing high temperature.

INTERRUPTING CAPACITIES - The interrupting capacities of the protective equipment are determined as follows:

a. Switchgear Switchgear interrupting capacities are greater than the maximum short circuit current available at the point of application. The magnitude of the short circuit currents in the medium voltage systems is determined in accordance with ANSI C37.010-1972. The offsite power system, a single operating diesel generator, and running motor contributions are considered in determining the fault level. All motors connected to the bus are considered to be running when the short circuit is postulated.

High voltage power circuit breaker interrupting capacity ratings are selected in accordance with ANSI C37.06-1971.

b. Load Centers, Motor Control Centers, and Distribution Panels Load centers, motor control centers, and distribution panel circuit breakers have a symmetrical rated interrupting current as great as the determined total available symmetrical current at the point of application. Symmetrical current is determined in accordance with the procedures of ANSI C37-1973 for low-voltage circuit breakers other than molded-case breakers and of NEMA Standards Publication AB l for molded case circuit breakers.

ELECTRIC CIRCUIT PROTECTION - Refer to Section 8.3.1.1.2 for criteria regarding the electric circuit protection.

GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS - Equipment and system grounding were designed using IEEE 80, 1971 "Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding," and IEEE 142, 1972, "Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems" as a guide.

8.3-24 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK 8.3.1.1.9 Cable Derating and Cable Tray Fill The ampacity and group derating factors for cables in conduit duct bank and maintained space trays are in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and IPCEA P-46-426 or the NEC. For randomly filled trays, ICEA P-54-440 with IPCEA P-46-426, as appropriate, is used in conjunction with the manufacturers recommendation for cable ampacity and group derating factors.

The cable ampacities are based on a maximum conductor temperature of 90 C, 100-percent load factor, and all cables fully loaded.

Cable tray fill, for the various randomly filled tray configurations, is generally limited by the percentage criteria as follows: 45% for raceway containing control and low voltage power cables inside the cable spreading rooms and for raceway containing instrumentation cables; 30% for raceway containing control and low voltage power cables outside the cable spreading rooms. Where these conditions cannot be maintained, a design engineer reviews each case for the adequacy of the design for both physical fill and derating.

Conduit fill is in compliance with the provisions of the NEC. Where these provisions cannot be maintained, a design engineer reviews each case and will allow a higher fill percentage based on actual cable sizes, conduit sizes, length of conduit, and number of bends.

8.3.1.2 Analysis 8.3.1.2.1 Compliance with General Design Criteria 17 and 18 and Regulatory Guides For discussion of regulatory guides in regard to Class IE ac systems, refer to Section 8.1.4.3.

Compliance with General Design Criteria 17 and 18 is discussed in Section 3.1.

A failure modes and effects analysis is provided in accordance with IEEE 352-1972. Refer to Table 8.3-4.

8.3.1.2.2 Safety-Related Equipment Exposed to Hostile Environment The detailed information on all Class IE equipment that must operate in a hostile environment during and/or subsequent to an accident is furnished in Section 3.11(B) and 3.11(N).

8.3.1.3 Physical Identification of Safety-Related Equipment Each circuit (scheme) and raceway is given a unique alphanumeric identification. This identification provides a means of distinguishing a circuit or raceway association with a particular channel or load group, and is assigned on the basis of the following criteria:

8.3-25 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK SEPARATION GROUP 1 - A safety-related instrumentation, control, or power scheme/raceway associated with safety-related load group 1 or protection system channel 1.

SEPARATION GROUP 2 - A safety-related instrumentation, control, or power scheme/raceway associated with protection system channel 2.

SEPARATION GROUP 3 - A safety-related instrumentation, power, or control scheme/raceway associated with protection system channel 3.

SEPARATION GROUP 4 - A safety-related instrumentation, control, or power scheme/raceway associated with safety-related load group 2 or protection system channel 4.

Nonsafety-related cables and raceways associated with normal plant (non-Class IE) equipment are uniquely identified and separately routed from safety-related cables and raceways, as described in Section 8.1.4.3.

The unique identification afforded all nonsafety-related cables is generally black; however, other colors (other than Red, White, Blue and Yellow) may be used for non-safety related cable in isolated cases.

Nameplates with colored backgrounds are provided for all IEEE 308 Class lE equipment (such as transformers, motors, motor control centers, switchgear, panels, and switchboards) under A/E scope. Each separation group has its distinguishing color. The applicable channel or load group designation is marked on each nameplate. For the identification of instrumentation and control equipment, refer to Section 7.1.2.3.

Raceways are marked in a distinct, permanent manner at intervals not to exceed 15 feet and at points of entry to, and exit from, enclosed areas.

The 600 volt fire-resistive control and power cables are routed independent of raceways. The fire-resisitive cables are distinctly and permanently marked in the same manner as described above for raceways.

Color identification is provided for each separation group of field-wired, safety-related cables.

Within control panels where more than one separation group is present, wiring is identified by separation group designation or, if enclosed by conduit, the conduit is identified by separation group designation.

8.3-26 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK Within a cabinet or panel which is associated and identified with a single separation group, the internal wiring is exclusively associated with the same separation group and, therefore, requires no further identification.

In cases where the majority of the wiring within a cabinet or panel is primarily one separation group, standard color wire and/or sleeves for the majority separation group is used. The remaining wiring is identified, using the appropriate color, as defined in applicable specifications or drawings.

When colored sleeves are used in lieu of colored wiring, the sleeves are provided at both ends of the wire and at strategic intervals along its length.

Design drawings provide distinct identification of Class IE equipment.

Operating and maintenance documents pertaining to Class IE equipment are distinctly identified.

8.3.1.4 Independence of Redundant Systems 8.3.1.4.1 Separation Criteria This section establishes the criteria and the bases for preserving the independence of redundant Class IE power systems.

8.3.1.4.1.1 Raceway and Cable Routing

a.

Wherever possible, cable trays are arranged from top to bottom, with trays containing the highest voltage cables at the top and trays containing the lowest voltage cables at the bottom. A raceway designated for a single voltage category of cables contains only cables of the same voltage category. Voltage categories are:

1.

15-kV power (non-Class IE)

2.

5-kV power

3.

Large 600-V power (cables from load centers)

4.

600-V power (cables from motor control centers, control and digital signal cables)

5.

Instrumentation cables

b.

Cables associated with each safety-related separation group, as defined in Section 8.3.1.3, are run in separate conduits, cable trays, ducts, and penetrations.

8.3-27 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK The 600 volt fire-resistive control and power cables are routed independent of raceways. The fire-resistive cables are routed in the same manner as conduits.

c.

The arrangement of electrical equipment and cabling minimizes the possibility of a fire in one separation group from propagating to another separation group.

In the absence of confirming analyses to support less stringent requirements, the following rules apply to those areas in which the only source of fire is electrical. Areas in which the only source of fire is electrical are divided into two groups--cable spreading rooms and general plant areas. (See Section 8.3.1.4.1.4 for exemptions) Table 8.3-5 contains analyses of alternate minimum separation distances as allowed by RG 1.75.

GENERAL - Routing of instrumentation, control, or power cables through rooms or spaces where there is a potential for accumulation of large quantities of combustible fluids is avoided. Where such routing is unavoidable, only cables of one separation group are allowed. In addition, the cables are enclosed in conduit. Openings in solid floors for vertical runs of cables are sealed with fire resistant material.

GENERAL PLANT AREAS - In plant areas from which equipment with potential hazards such as missiles, external fires, and pipe whip are excluded, the separation criteria are as follows:

a.

Cable trays of different separation groups have a minimum horizontal separation of 3 feet if no physical barrier exists between the trays. In the limited number of areas where horizontal separation of 3 feet is unattainable, a fire barrier is installed extending at least 1 foot above the top of the tray (or to the ceiling) and 1 foot below the bottom of the tray (or to the floor).

b.

For cable trays of different separation groups, there is a minimum vertical separation of 5 feet between open-top trays stacked vertically. In the limited number of areas where trays of different separation groups are stacked with less than 5 feet of vertical separation, a fire barrier is placed between the two separation groups. The barrier extends 1 foot to each side of the tray system (or to the wall).

8.3-28 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK

c.

In the case where a tray of one separation group crosses over a tray of a different separation group and the vertical separation is less than 5 feet, a fire barrier is installed extending 1 foot from each side of each tray and 5 feet along each tray from the crossover.

d.

Where it is necessary that cables of different separation groups approach the same or adjacent control panels with less than 3-foot horizontal or 5-foot vertical spacing, isolation is maintained by installing both separation groups in steel conduit or enclosed wireway or by installing fire barriers between the separation groups. In the case of horizontal separation, the barrier extends 1 foot below the bottom of the tray (or to the floor) to 1 foot above the top of the tray (or to the ceiling). In the case of vertical spacing, the barrier extends 1 foot on each side of the tray system (or to the wall).

e.

Isolation between separation groups is considered to be adequate where physical separation is less than that indicated in Items a, b, and c above, provided the circuits of different separation groups are run in enclosed raceways that qualify as barriers or other barriers are installed between the different separation groups. The minimum distance between these enclosed raceways and between barriers and raceways is 1 inch.

The barriers are installed as described in a through d above. Additionally, 600 volt fire-resistive control and power cables are capable of withstanding fire and can be routed with 1.5 inch isolation distance from other separation groups and non-safety raceways and fire resistive cables.

In cases of open trays containing safety-related cables and totally enclosed conduits containing non-safety-related cables, the safety design basis is to protect the safety-related cables from failure of the non-safety-related circuits, and not vice-versa. In consideration of this limit, enclosing the non-safety circuits in raceway and maintaining at least one inch separation provides an acceptable level of protection.

The conduit can contain only a limited quantity of combustible material (cable insulation and jacket).

Furthermore, there is insufficient oxygen inside the conduit to support combustion of more than a fraction of the available material.

Based on these considerations, it is established that one-inch separation between a conduit containing non-safety-related circuits and an open tray containing safety-related circuits is sufficient to assure that any failure within the non-safety related circuits will not propagate into and compromise the integrity of the safety related circuits.

8.3-29 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK CABLE SPREADING AREAS - The cable spreading area does not contain high energy equipment such as switchgear, transformers, rotating equipment, or potential sources of missiles or pipe whip and is not used for storing flammable materials. (Circuits in the cable spreading area are limited to control and instrument functions and also those power supply circuits and facilities serving the control room and instrument systems.) Power supply feeders 480 V and above are installed in enclosed raceways. Separation criteria are as follows:

a.

he minimum separation distance between redundant Class IE cable trays is 1 foot between trays separated horizontally and 3 feet between trays separated vertically.

b.

Where termination arrangements preclude maintaining the minimum separation distance, the redundant circuits are run in enclosed raceways or other barriers are provided between redundant circuits. The minimum distance between these redundant enclosed raceways and between barriers and raceways is 1 inch. The fire barriers are installed as described above in "General Plant Areas."

c.

Arrangement and/or protective barriers preclude locally generated forces or missiles from destroying redundant systems. In the absence of confirming analyses to support less stringent requirements, the following rules have been used:

1.

The routing of Class IE circuits and the location of Class IE electrical equipment is reviewed for exposure to hazards such as high pressure piping, missiles, flammable material, and flooding.

A degree of separation or physical protection commensurate with the damage potential of the hazard is provided so that the independence of redundant Class IE subsystems is maintained. The separation of redundant Class IE circuits and equipment makes use of features inherent in the plant design, such as using different rooms or opposite sides of rooms or areas.

2.

The separation of Class IE circuits and equipment is such that the required independence is not compromised by the failure of mechanical systems served by the Class IE systems. For example, Class IE circuits are routed or protected so that failure 8.3-30 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK of related mechanical equipment of one redundant subsystem cannot jeopardize Class IE circuits or equipment essential to the operation of the other redundant subsystem.

d.

Nonsafety-related cables are not routed through safety-related raceways. However, if a nonsafety-related cable is fed from a safety-related power service it may be routed through safety-related raceways of the same separation group as that of the power service. For discussion of nonsafety-related circuits fed from safety-related sources through isolation devices, refer to Section 8.1.4.3 - Regulatory Guide 1.75.

e.

Load group 1 and protection channels 1 and 3 and load group 2 and protection channels 2 and 4 cables are routed through separate cable chases and cable spreading rooms. The former circuits enter the lower cable spreading room, while the latter circuits enter the upper cable spreading room.

f.

The independence of redundant NSSS safety-related systems is discussed below:

Safety-related reactor trip, engineered safety features actuation, and instrumentation and control power supply systems are designed to meet the independence and separation requirements of Criterion 22 of the 1971 General Design Criteria and Paragraph 4.6 of IEEE 279, 1971.

Channel independence is carried throughout the system, extending from the sensor through to the devices actuating the protective function. Physical separation of wiring for each redundant channel set is used.

Redundant analog equipment is separated by locating modules in different protection rack sets.

Each redundant channel set is energized from a separate ac power feed.

There are four separate process protection analog rack sets. Separation of redundant analog channels begins at the process sensors and is maintained in the analog protection racks to the redundant trains in the logic racks. Redundant analog channels are separated by locating modules in different rack sets. Within these racks, field run nonsafety-related shielded cables having a signal level of 100 V or less are routed in common 8.3-31 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK wireways with safety-related shielded cables with no physical separation. Internal cabinet safety and nonsafety-related cables are similarly routed.

Justification for this method of routing is contained in Reference 1. The field run non safety-related shielded cables to these cabinets are routed in accordance with Reference 1.

Two reactor trip breakers are actuated by two separate logic matrices which interrupt power to the control rod drive mechanisms. The breaker main contacts are connected in series with the power supply so that opening either breaker interrupts power to all control rod drive mechanisms, permitting the rods to free fall into the core.

Protection system channel inputs are separated from the solid state protection system train outputs as follows:

1.

Shielded cables defined in the NSSS vendor protection system documentation (process sensing circuits, solid state protection system logic cabinet inputs from control board switches, and pushbuttons) are separated from 120-V ac instrumentation and vital instrument bus voltage cables and 120-V ac and 125-V dc control voltage cables.

2.

Prefabricated cables which connect process control system 24-V dc signals to the protection system input are separated from the 120-V ac instrumentation and vital instrument bus voltage cables, 120-V ac and 125-V dc control voltage cables.

3.

The 48-V dc reactor trip logic Train A and Train B output circuits are installed in separate conduits.

4.

Train A protection system outputs (120-V ac and 125-V dc Class IE control voltage unshielded cables only) are contained in the same tray as protection system channel I unshielded cables.

5.

Train B protection system outputs (120-V ac and 125-V dc Class IE control voltage unshielded cables only) are contained in the same tray as protection system channel IV unshielded cables.

These requirements are complied with in the field circuiting.

8.3-32 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK 8.3.1.4.1.2 Control Boards and Other Panels Within the control boards and other panels associated with protection systems, circuits and instruments of different separation groups (see Section 8.3.1.3) are independent and physically separated horizontally and vertically by a distance of 6 inches. Where physical separation is impracticable, conduit and/or fire barriers are utilized to maintain independence.

Single control devices to which different separation groups are connected are avoided, wherever practicable. Where single devices are unavoidable, electrical isolation is provided. Devices that provide electrical isolation include relays, isolation amplifiers, and solid-state optical couplers. A small number of control switches (e.g., reactor trip switches, lockout relays) contain different separation group wiring to their control contacts. For these switches, electrical independence is maintained, and physical barriers are provided between each separation group. Within control boards and other panels, nonsafety-related wiring is not harnessed together with safety-related wiring.

However, if an associated nonsafety-related cable is supplied from a safety-related bus it is treated as a safety-related cable and is harnessed with safety-related cables of the same group. Harnesses of different separation groups are separated physically by a distance of 6 inches. Where physical separation is impracticable, fire barriers, conduit, or wire duct is used to maintain independence.

8.3.1.4.1.3 Reactor Containment Penetration Areas Two separate penetration areas are provided for cables that must pass through the containment wall. The south penetration area contains cable for Separation Groups 2 and 4, each group having separate penetration assemblies. The north penetration area contains cable for Separation Groups l and 3, each group again having separate penetration assemblies. Raceway separation criteria, as described in this section, apply in routing cable through the penetration areas.

8.3.1.4.1.4 Exemptions from Physical Separation Requirements A limited number of specific raceway and panel configurations exist for which the previously given separation requirements are not imposed due to practical limitations. These exemptions are identified in E-1R8902. The evaluation criteria for acceptance of these exemptions is as follows:

A)

Class 1E raceway is assumed lost and the effects are determined.

Exception is allowed provided the loss does not affect safe shutdown; OR B)

Non-Class 1E circuits are energized only during maintenance when Class 1E circuits are out of service. Non-Class 1E circuits are isolated from the Class 1E circuits by administrative controls; OR C)

Deviations are evaluated based upon a review of Electrical Raceway Separation Verification Test Reports for Limerick Units 1 & 2 and the WCNOC overcurrent protection system.

8.3-33 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK Review/Analysis -- Wyle Laboratories conducted tests for Limerick Units 1 and 2 (Test Report 46960-1 and 46960-3) to justify separation which is less than the standard distance. They used similar cables of the same size (and larger) as the WCNOC cables in question. Their tests are based on the following failure mode assumptions:

1. The cable or equipment in the circuit develops a fault that is not cleared due to the failure of the primary overcurrent protective device.
2. The fault current level (660 amps) is just below the long-term trip setpoint of the next higher level overcurrent device.
3. The impedance of the fault adjusts itself automatically to maintain the fault current magnitude at a constant level as the resistance of the wire increases due to heating.
4. There are no other loads on the same circuit which would cause the next high level overcurrent device to trip.
5. The overload wire can maintain the continuous overheated condition without an operator being aware of the condition.

Philadelphia Electric Company's Design Verification Test Report #48503 showed that heating effects due to wiring faults which caused sustained overcurrent conditions with the above assumptions had the greatest impact on adjacent wires. The results of their tests revealed the following:

1. Cable sized #4/0 AWG and smaller when energized with 660 amps and routed in an open cable tray, did not ignite.

Cables were tested in both horizontal and vertical tray configurations and did not ignite in any case.

Configuration with a 1" vertical separation between cable trays and zero separation between cable tray and enclosed raceway were tested successfully without damage.

2. No separation was required between an enclosed raceway and another enclosed raceway or cable tray when the enclosed raceway contains cables which are #4/0 AWG and smaller.
3. One inch separation between an enclosed raceway and another enclosed raceway or cable tray is required when the enclosed raceway contains cables larger than #4/0 AWG.

8.3-34 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK The Electrical Raceway Separation Verification Test reports for Limerick Units 1 & 2 are applicable to WCNOC for the following reasons:

1. WCNOC uses similar cables made by the same manufactures as the cables used in the test. Cables used by WCNOC made by different manufactures than those used in the test use the same type of insulation material (cross-linked polyethylene or cross-linked ethylene propylene rubber) and jacket material (chlorosulfonated polyethylene or neoprene). In addition, all class 1E cables, with the exception of stanless steel fire-resistive cables, are qualified to the same standards such as IEEE-323 and IEEE-383 and are manufactured to the same IPCEA standards. Stanless steel fire-resistive cables have been type tested for exceeding the standards of IEEE-323 and IEEE-383.
2. The WCNOC electrical raceway configurations are similar to the electrical raceway configurations used in the test.
3. The fault current used in the test is very conservative compared to the maximum credible fault current that could develop for the configuration of circuits described above in this section.

Physical separation between transient electrical cables and Class 1E raceway/cables/equipment may on a temporary basis fail to meet the 3 foot - 5 foot requirement per Reg. Guide 1.75 Rev. 1 and IEEE 384-1974.

Transient electrical cables are defined as follows: transient electrical cables are those non-safety related cables used on a temporary basis in support of field work activities or testing/monitoring which will remain in place for a short duration of time and which do not require a permanent plant modification or a temporary modification for their use. Transient cables typically include but are not limited to: extension cords, temporary power leads, temporary lighting cords, hand power tool cords, welding leads, communication cables, computer cables, video cables, test leads, (DMMs, recorders, data acquisition equipment, etc.) and instrumentation leads.

Transient cable separation requirements are delineated in plant administrative procedures. All deviations from the administrative procedures will require an engineering evaluation.

Physical separation between the non-safety related Local Area Network (LAN) cable and Class 1E raceway may on a limited basis, fail to meet the 3 foot horizontal and 5 foot vertical requirement of R.G. 1.75 and IEEE 384-1974.

These cables are installed in free air. Physical separation of 1 inch horizontal and 3 inches vertical is maintained between the free air cables and Class 1E raceway.

LAN cables inside the power block consist of fiber optic cables and 4 pair - 24 AWGUTP, Category 5/5e cables, both of which meet the flame spread requirements of WCNOC design document, E-11013, section 3.0. The fiber optic cable carries no electrical energy, cannot conduct electrical current and will not propagate a flame. Consequently these cables pose no risk to Class 1E electrical circuits. The 24 AWGUTP Category 5 copper conductor cables carry digital computer data only and consequently do not pose a risk with respect to degrading the functions of Class 1E electrical circuits.

8.3-35 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK 8.3.1.4.2 Administrative Responsibilities and Controls for Assuring Separation Criteria During Design and Installation The scheme and raceway channel identification (refer to Section 8.3.1.3) facilitated and ensured the maintenance of separation in the routing of cables and the connection of control boards and panels. At the time of the cable routing assignment in the design office, the routing engineer checked to ensure that the separation group designation on the scheme to be routed was compatible with the raceways in the intended route. Extensive use of computer program checks helped ensure separation. Each circuit and raceway was identified in the computer program, and the identification included the applicable separation group. The program used in routing specifically checked to ensure that cables of a particular separation group were routed through the appropriate raceways.

The routing was also confirmed by quality control personnel, during installation, to be consistent with the design document. Color identification of equipment and cabling (refer to Section 8.3.1.3) assisted field personnel in this effort.

8.3.2 DC POWER SYSTEMS 8.3.2.1 Description Site dc power is supplied at 125 volts from two independent sources within the power block, Buses PK01 and PK02 as shown in Figure 8.3-6 sheet 2, neither of which is a Class 1E power bus. One fused disconnect switch at each source delivers power to the site through underground feeders. Each site feeder supplies a 125-V dc distribution panel at the shop building. Each distribution panel supplies miscellaneous dc loads at the shop building, and a 125-V dc distribution panel at the non-Class 1E circulating water screenhouse. These distribution panels supply miscellaneous dc loads at the screenhouse.

Interconnection of the independent power block buses is prevented at all levels of distribution.

The makeup water screenhouse is provided with a 125-V dc wet cell storage battery. The battery is rated at 160 ampere-hours and is trickle-charged from a static battery charger. The battery supplies a 125-V dc distribution panel, which in turn supplies miscellaneous dc loads at the screenhouse.

The powerblock dc power system for WCGS consists of four independent Class 1E 125-V dc subsystems, four non-Class 1E 125-V dc subsystems, and one non-Class 1E 250-V dc system. The dc power system is designed to provide reliable and continuous power for controls, instrumentation, inverters, and dc emergency auxiliaries.

8.3-36 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK The Class 1E dc system provides dc electric power to the Class 1E dc loads and for control and switching of the Class 1E systems. Physical separation, electrical isolation, and redundancy are provided to comply with the requirements of IEEE 308. The four class 1E dc power subsystems are shown in Figure 8.3-6, sheet 1. Subsystems 1 and 4 provide control power for ac Load Groups 1 and 2, respectively. These subsystems also provide vital instrumentation and control power for channels 1 and 4, respectively, of the reactor protection and engineered safety features systems. DC subsystems 2 and 3 provide vital instrumentation and control power for channels 2 and 3, respectively, of the reactor protection and engineered safety features systems.

Each Class 1E dc power subsystem consists of one 125-V battery, one battery charger, one inverter, and distribution switchboards. The battery chargers for dc subsystems 1 and 3 are supplied 480-V ac power from different Class 1E busses of Load Group 1. Similarly, the battery chargers for dc subsystems 2 and 4 are supplied 480-V ac power from different Class 1E busses of Load Group 2.

The inverters provide four independent 120-V ac vital instrumentation and control power supplies for the channels of reactor protection and engineered safety features systems.

Two spare battery chargers and two swing (spare) inverters are provided for the power block. The spare chargers are located in the ESF Switchgear rooms and are connected in place of failed chargers via non-automatic transfer switches.

The Train A swing inverter is located in the Train A ESF room and the Train B swing inverter is located in the Train B ESF room. These are aligned to replace the selected inverter via non-automatic transfer switches. In the event of a charger or inverter failure, the spare charger/swing inverter is connected to the affected system permitting the malfunctioning equipment to be repaired without long term disruption of the system.

The batteries, racks, chargers, inverters, and auxiliary distribution equipment (switchboards) are designated seismic Category I, and are designed to maintain their functional capability during and after an SSE. The electrical equipment qualification is discussed in Section 3.10(B) and 3.10(N).

The non-Class IE loads for the power block are supplied by separate dc systems.

A 125-V dc system PK03 and PK04 is provided to supply nonvital control and instrumentation. Two 200-A dc feeders are provided to supply the site system dc control loads. In addition, a 250-V dc system is provided to supply nonvital dc motors, such as emergency lube oil pumps and emergency seal oil pumps. The 125-V dc system, in conjunction with inverters, also serves as the back-up source of power for the computers and fire detection system.

The 250-V dc system includes one battery and two battery chargers, one charger serving as a backup for the other. The non-Class IE 125-V dc system includes four batteries, each of which has one battery charger.

One battery charger of the 250-V dc system and all battery chargers of the non-Class IE 125-V dc system are supplied 480-V ac power from the standby power system.

The 125-V and 250-V dc non-Class 1E and 125-v dc Class 1E systems are subjected to a maximum voltage of 140V (for 125V) and 280V (for 250V) dc. This occurs during the equalization of the batteries. All equipment associated with and connected to the dc systems is designed to withstand the maximum voltage during equalization.

8.3-37 Rev. 29

WOLF CREEK 8.3.2.1.1 Safety-Related DC Loads Table 8.3-1 identifies loads related to each Class IE 125-V dc subsystem.

8.3.2.1.2 Class IE Station Batteries and Battery Chargers BATTERY CAPACITY - The WCGS Class IE batteries are sized in excess of that required to supply the loads in Tables 8.3-2 and 8.3-3 for 240 minutes. The required capacity is initially evaluated from design loads, with margin, imposed on each battery throughout the 240-minute duty cycle.

From this capacity, a margin of 25 percent is applied to ensure that the rated battery capacity is at least 125 percent of that required. This margin is consistent with the 80 percent capacity battery replacement criteria given in IEEE 450-1995.

As a result of the above sizing, the WCGS batteries are selected from those larger sizes that are commercially available. The resulting final battery selection is in excess of 150 percent of the system requirements.

BATTERY CHARGER CAPACITY - The capacity of each Class IE battery charger is based on the largest combined demand of all the steady state loads and the charging capacity to restore the battery from the design minimum charge state (one duty cycle) to the fully charged state within 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> (irrespective of the status of the plant during which these demands occur).

INSPECTION, MAINTENANCE, AND TESTING - Testing of the dc power system is performed during plant operation, in accordance with Regulatory Guide 1.118 and IEEE Standard 450-1995.

Preoperational tests and inspections were performed in accordance with the procedures described in Chapter 14.0.

8.3.2.1.3 Separation and Ventilation The Class IE batteries, chargers, and dc switchgear of each separation group are located in separate rooms of the seismic Category I control building.

Chargers and dc switchgear are in separate rooms from the batteries. The battery rooms are ventilated by a system which is designed to preclude the possibility of hydrogen accumulation. Section 9.4.1.2 contains a description of the battery room ventilation system. Battery room temperature is controlled or the batteries appropriately derated so that the battery capacity is maintained at a level that satisfies the requirements of Section 8.3.2.1.2.

8.3.2.2 Analysis 8.3.2.2.1 Compliance with General Design Criteria, Regulatory Guides, and Industry Standards The following paragraphs analyze compliance of the Class IE dc power system with Regulatory Guides 1.6, 1.32, 1.41, 1.81, 1.93, 1.128, and 1.129 and IEEE Standards 308-1974 and 450-1995.

Compliance with General Design Criteria 17 and 18 is discussed in Section 3.1.

Refer to Appendix 3A for the applicable revision dates on regulatory guides.

8.3-38 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK REGULATORY GUIDE 1.6, INDEPENDENCE BETWEEN REDUNDANT STANDBY (ONSITE) POWER SOURCES AND BETWEEN THEIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS - The power block Class IE dc system is separated into four subsystems, two per load group. Each dc subsystem is energized by one battery and one battery charger. Each battery charger is supplied from its associated ac load group. The batteries are exclusively associated with a single 125-V dc bus. No provision exists for transferring loads between redundant 125-V dc subsystems. Thus, sufficient independence and redundancy exist between the 125-V dc subsystems to ensure performance of minimum safety functions, assuming a single failure.

Two spare chargers are provided to replace any of the four chargers. The spare chargers are located in the ESF Switchgear rooms, and are connected in place of failed chargers via non-automatic transfer switches.

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.32, CRITERIA FOR SAFETY-RELATED ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEMS FOR NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS The requirements of Regulatory Positions C.1 and C.2 pertaining to the dc systems are met as follows:

a.

Reference:

Paragraph C.1.b of the regulatory guide.

Refer to Section 8.3.2.1.2.

b.

Reference:

Paragraph C.1.c of the regulatory guide. The test is performed as specified in IEEE Standard 450-1975 rather than the 3 years specified in Table 2 of IEEE Standard 308-1974.

The battery service test described in IEEE Standard 450-1995 is performed in addition to the battery performance discharge test. The service test intervals will be no longer than 18 months. (See Appendix 3A for discussion of compliance to Regulatory Guide 1.32 in relation to IEEE Standard 450)

c.

Reference:

Paragraph C.1.d of the regulatory guide.

Refer to Regulatory Guide 1.6 above in this section.

d.

Reference:

Paragraph C.2.a of the regulatory guide.

Refer to Regulatory Guide 1.81 below in this section.

e.

Reference:

Paragraph C.2.b of the regulatory guide.

Refer to Regulatory Guide 1.93 below in this section.

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.41, PREOPERATIONAL TESTING OF REDUNDANT ON-SITE ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEMS TO VERIFY PROPER LOAD GROUP ASSIGNMENTS - In compliance with this regulatory guide, the Class IE 125-V dc subsystems designed in accordance with Regulatory Guides 1.6 and 1.32 are tested as follows:

a.

Testing of the dc power system, including an acceptance test of battery capacity, is performed prior to unit operation and after major modifications or repairs in accordance with the procedures described in Chapter 14.0.

b.

The charger, battery connections, and charger supply are checked for proper assignment to the proper ac load group.

8.3-39 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK

c. Class IE 125-V dc subsystems are functionally tested, along with the associated ac load group, by discon-necting and isolating the other ac load group, its ac power sources, and the associated dc subsystem. Each test includes simulation of an engineered safety features actuation signal, startup of the standby diesel generator and the load group under test, sequencing of loads, and the functional performance of the loads.

During these tests, the ability of the 125-V dc subsystem to perform its intended functions, e.g.,

control of diesel generators and Class IE ac switchgear, is checked.

d.

During the testing of the Class IE 125-V dc subsystem associated with one ac load group, the busses of the 125-V dc subsystem associated with the ac load groups not under test are monitored to verify the absence of voltage, indicating no interconnection of the dc systems.

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.81, SHARED EMERGENCY AND SHUTDOWN ELECTRIC SYSTEMS FOR MULTI-UNIT NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - WCGS is a single unit plant.

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.93, AVAILABILITY OF ELECTRIC POWER SOURCES - Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.128, INSTALLATION DESIGN AND INSTALLATION OF LARGE LEAD STORAGE BATTERIES FOR NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - The requirements of IEEE 484, 1975 are used for the installation of batteries.

The battery room ventilation system limits hydrogen concentration to less than 2 percent by volume at any location in the battery area.

Restraining channel beams and tie rods are electrically insulated from the cell cases and are finished with acid-resistant paint.

The requirements of Regulatory Guide 1.120 for safety-related battery rooms are complied with. Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.

The requirements of Regulatory Guide 1.100 are complied with. Refer to Appendix 3A for the response to this regulatory guide.

Batteries are located in a well-ventilated location with adequate aisle space and space above cells.

Temperature differential between cells is no greater than 3ø C at a given time.

The presence of localized heat sources is precluded.

Eyewash facilities are provided in the corridor between the battery rooms as shown on Figure 1.2-24.

Battery racks provide for the mounting of batteries in a two-step configuration.

Fire detection sensors and alarms are provided as described in Section 9.5.1.

8.3-40 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK During unpacking, any cell with electrolyte level 1/2 inch or more below the top of the plates is replaced.

Cells are stored in a clean, level, dry, and cool location. Extremely low ambient temperatures and localized sources of heat are avoided.

The recommendations for a freshening charge outlined in IEEE 484, Paragraph 5.3.1, are followed after the installation of the batteries.

A hydrogen survey is performed to verify that the ventilation system limits hydrogen concentration to less than 2 percent by volume. This survey data is recorded and maintained in a permanent file for future reference.

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.129, MAINTENANCE, TESTING, AND REPLACEMENT OF LARGE LEAD STORAGE BATTERIES FOR NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS - The requirements of IEEE 450, 1995 are followed as described below.

IEEE Standard 308-1974, IEEE Standard Criteria for Class IE Electric Systems for Nuclear Power Generating Stations - For compliance with the ac power requirements of IEEE 308, refer to Section 8.1.4.3.

The following provides compliance for the dc power requirements of IEEE 308.

The Class IE dc system provides dc electric power to the Class IE dc loads and for the control and switching of the Class IE systems. Physical separation, electrical isolation, and redundancy are provided to prevent the occurrence of common mode failures. The design of the Class IE dc system includes the following:

a.

he dc system is separated into four subsystems.

b.

The safety actions of each group of loads are independent of the safety actions provided by its redundant counterpart.

c.

Each dc subsystem includes power supplies that consist of one battery and one battery charger.

d.

The batteries are not interconnected.

e.

The batteries do not have a common failure mode.

Each Class IE dc distribution circuit is capable of transmitting sufficient energy to start and operate all the required loads in that circuit.

Distribution circuits to redundant equipment are independent of each other.

The distribution system is monitored to the extent that it is shown to be ready to perform its intended function. The dc auxiliary devices required to operate the equipment of a specific ac load group are supplied from the dc subsystem of the same load group.

8.3-41 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK The batteries are maintained in a fully charged condition and have sufficient stored energy to operate all the necessary circuit breakers and to provide an adequate amount of energy for all required emergency loads for 240 minutes after loss of ac power or charger failure.

Each battery charger has sufficient capacity to restore the battery from the design minimum charge (one duty cycle) to its fully charged state while supplying the largest combined demand of the steady-state loads. The battery charger of one subsystem is independent of the battery charger for the redundant subsystem.

Instrumentation is provided to monitor the status of each dc subsystem. No instrumentation is shared between subsystems.

A summary annunciator in the control room is provided to alarm on any one of the following conditions. Each condition is also provided with individual alarm windows at the main switchboard.

a.

Charger input breaker open

b.

Charger output breaker open

c.

Charger failure

d.

Charger input ac undervoltage

e.

Charger output dc undervoltage

f.

Charger output dc overvoltage

g.

Dc bus undervoltage

h.

Distribution switchboard undervoltage

i.

Dc ground

j.

Battery circuit continuity monitor Indicating instruments are provided to monitor the following:

a.

Battery output amperes (local and control room)

b.

Bus voltage (local and control room)

c.

Charger output current (local and control room)

d.

Charger output voltage (local only)

e.

Distribution switchboard white light (local only) 8.3-42 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK Each battery charger has an input ac and output dc circuit breaker for isolation of the charger. Each battery charger power supply is designed to prevent the ac supply from becoming a load on the battery due to a power feedback as the result of the loss of ac power to the chargers.

Equipment of the Class IE dc system is protected and isolated by fuses or circuit breakers in the event of a short circuit or overload conditions.

Indication is provided to identify equipment that is made unavailable per the following:

Event Available Indication

a. Battery charger ac Control room summary alarm, input breaker trip alarm at main switchboard, breaker position at charger
b. Battery charger dc Control room summary alarm, output breaker trip alarm at main switchboard, breaker position at charger
c. Battery fuse blow Control room summary alarm, alarm at main switchboard
d. Distribution switch-Control room summary alarm, board feeder fuse blow alarm at main switchboard local white light
e. Distribution circuit Individual equipment alarm fuse blow
f. Inverter dc feeder Inverter trouble alarm/static fuse blow switch transfer
g. Inverter output ac 120-v ac vital bus under-breaker trip voltage alarm
h. Battery high rate of Control room computer alarm discharge Periodic testing and surveillance requirements for the Class IE batteries are detailed in the Technical Specifications.

Dependable power supplies are provided for the reactor protection system and engineered safety features actuation system. Four independent dc and ac power supplies are provided for control and instrumentation of these systems. The independent dc supplies are provided by distribution circuits from distribution panels on each system. Independent ac supplies are provided by the four inverters and associated 120-v ac vital busses. Refer to Section 8.3.1.1.5 for further description of these vital instrument ac power supplies.

8.3-43 Rev. 29

WOLF CREEK IEEE STANDARD 450-1995, RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR MAINTENANCE, TESTING, AND REPLACEMENT OF VENTED LEAD-ACID BATTERIES FOR STATIONARY APPLICATIONS - The following recommended practices of IEEE 450 for maintenance, testing, and replacement of batteries are followed for the Class IE batteries:

a.

Maintenance, inspections, and tests, including cell differential temperature measurements, are carried out on a regularly scheduled basis to comply with the requirements of IEEE 450.

b.

An acceptance test of battery capacity is performed at the factory to determine if it meets the specified discharge rate and duration.

c.

The first performance test of battery capacity was carried out within the first 2 years of service. The subsequent performance tests or modified performance tests of battery capacity are made once every 5 years until the battery shows signs of degradation. Refer to Technical Specification 3.8.4.

d.

Eighteen month performance tests of battery capacity are given to any battery which shows signs of degradation or which has reached 85 percent of the expected service life.

e.

The battery service tests or modified performance tests described in Sections 5.3 and 5.4 of IEEE Standard 450-1995 are performed at test intervals not to exceed 18 months.

If system design is changed so that the previous test is no longer a valid test of the capability of the battery to meet the changed design requirements of the system, a service test is conducted on the new system design.

f.

The rating of the battery when purchased is approximately 50 percent greater than that required to supply the emergency load requirements. 25% of the 50% is reserved for aging margin. This margin permits a battery replacement criteria of 80-percent rated capacity (refer to Section 8.3.2.1.2).

g.

Records of the data obtained from inspections and tests are kept along with test procedures, to comply with the requirements.

8.3-44 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK 8.3.3 FIRE PROTECTION FOR CABLE SYSTEMS The measures employed for the prevention of and protection against fires in electrical cables are described in Section 9.5.1.

Section 8.3.1.4.1, Separation Criteria, provides information regarding separation between redundant cable trays.

8.

3.4 REFERENCES

1.

Marasco, F. W. and Siroky, R. M., "Westinghouse 7300 Series Process Control System Noise Tests," WCAP-8892-A, June 1977.

8.3-45 Rev. 27

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-1 CLASS IE DC SYSTEM LOADS I. DC Subsystem 1 (Separation Group 1)

a. Diesel generator NE01 control and field flashing
b. Solenoid valves, indicating lights, and miscellaneous power and controls associated with load group 1
c. Class IE switchgear of load group 1 dc control
d. Inverter NN11 (or Swing Inverter NN15)
e. Reactor trip switchgear, channel 1 dc control
f. Main control room dc emergency lighting
g. Load shedder and emergency load sequencer panel
h. Engineered safety feature status panel
i. Diesel generator 1 control panel II. DC Subsystem 4 (Separation Group 4)
a. Diesel generator NE02 control and field flashing
b. Solenoid valves, indicating lights, and miscellaneous power and controls associated with load group 2
c. Class IE switchgear of load group 2 dc control
d. Inverter NN14 (or Swing Inverter NN16)
e. Reactor trip switchgear channel 2 dc control
f. Engineered safety features status panel
g. Load shedder and emergency load sequencer panel
h. Diesel generator 2 control panel III. DC Subsystem 3 (Separation Group 3)
a. Inverter NN13 (or Swing Inverter NN15)
b. Miscellaneous indicators, power, and controls associated with Separation Group 3 Rev. 29

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-1 (Sheet 2)

IV. DC Subsystem 2 (Separation Group 2)

a. Inverter NN12 (or Swing Inverter NN16)
b. Miscellaneous indicators, power, controls, and auxiliary feedwater pump turbine controls associated with Separation Group 2 Rev. 29

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-2 125 V DC CLASS IE BATTERY LOADING CYCLE (AMPERES REQUIRED PER TIME INTERVAL PER BATTERY AFTER LOSS OF AC POWER)

SUBSYSTEMS 1 AND 4 Battery Unit and Load 0-1 1-60 60-200 200-201 201-210 210-211 211-220 220-221 221-239 239-240 Profile(1) min min min min min min min min min min Total Amps/interval --- NK11 213.38 126.16 129.57 148.68 129.57 148.68 129.57 148.68 129.57 148.68 Total Amps/interval --- NK14 213.17 125.58 125.58 144.56 125.58 144.56 125.58 144.56 125.58 144.56

1.

The loading cycle assumes that all continuous loads are running for the entire duration (240 minutes). See applicable engineering calculation for detailed load list. Momentary loads are based on the worst case conditions during the emergency. For example, the first column represents the loads that are required at time zero.

Rev. 32

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-2 (Sheet 2)

NOTES:

1.

The loading cycle assumes that all continuous loads are running for the entire duration (240 minutes).

Momentary loads are based on the worst case conditions during the emergency. For example, the first column represents the loads that are required at time zero.

Rev. 26

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-3 125 V DC CLASS IE BATTERY LOADING CYCLE (AMPERES REQUIRED PER TIME INTERVAL PER BATTERY AFTER LOSS OF AC POWER)

SUBSYSTEMS 2 AND 3 Battery Unit and Load 0-1 min 1-240 min Profile(1)

Total Amps/interval --- NK12 88.08 68.74 Total Amps/interval --- NK13 61.73 61.73

1.

The loading cycle assumes that all continuous loads are running for the entire duration (240 minutes). See applicable engineering calculation for detailed load list.

Rev. 32

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 FAILURE MODES AND EFFECTS ANALYSIS This table presents the failure mode and effects analysis (FMEA) of the engineered safety features (ESF) auxiliary electrical power system. The purpose of the analysis is to demonstrate that the Class IE power system can provide sufficient power to ensure the operation of all ESF loads required for post-accident safe shutdown, assuming a single component failure, as defined in IEEE Standard 308-1974.

Components which are included in the analysis are listed on the first sheets of the table. Refer to Figure 8.3-1 sheets 1 through 5 and Figure 8.3-6, sheet 1, for the location of these components in the system.

Rev. 21

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 2)

A. LIST OF MAJOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 120-Vac Battery Fusible 125-V 125-V dc Manual Distr 480-V MCC Transformers D-G Chargers Batteries Switches Swbd Distr Swbd Inverters Tsfr Bkr Swbd Breakers 13.8-kV Breakers XNG02 NEO2 NK22 NK12 89NK0201 89NK0402 89NK0404 NK02 NK42 NN12 52NN0201 NN02 52NG02AFF3 252PA0201 (L.G.2) XNG04 XNB02 NK24 NK14 89NK0202 89NK0409 89NK0411 NK04 NK44 NN14 52NN0401 NN04 52NG06EAF1 XNG06 XMR01 NK26* 89NK0209 89NK0204 89NK0405 NK54 NN16 52NG02ADF1 89NK0401 89NK0211 89NK0103 52NG02ABR1 89NK0303 52NG02AFF1 (L.G.1) XNG01 NE01 NK21 NK11 89NK0101 89NK0302 89NK0304 NK01 NK41 NN11 52NN0101 NN01 52NG01ACR3 XNG03 XNB01 NK23 NK13 89NK0102 89NK0309 89NK0311 NK03 NK43 NN13 52NN0301 NN03 52NG05EAF1 XNG05 NK25* 89NK0109 89NK0104 89NK0105 NK51 NN15 52NG01ABF1 89NK0301 89NK0111 89NK0203 52NG01AGF3 89NK0403 52NG01AGF4 AC Transfer Switches DC Transfer Switches (L.G.1) NK77 NK71 NK73 NK75 NK79 (L.G.2) NK78 NK72 NK74 NK76 NK80 Rev. 29

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 3) 4160-V 480-V 480-V Bus L.C. MCC 4-kV Breakers 480-V Breakers NG02 NG02A NG06E 152NB0209 152NB0212 152NB0201 152NB0205 52NG0401 52NG0206 52NG0208 (L.G.2) NB02 NG04 NG02B NG02T 152NB0211 152NB0208 152NB0206 152NB0215 52NG0201 52NG0207 NG04C NG04T 152NB0213 152NB0204 152NB0207 152NB0214* 52NG0406 52NG0216 NG04D 152NB0210 152NB0202 152NB0203 152NB0216 52NG0407 52NG0405 (L.G.1) NG01 NG01A NG05E 152NB0112 152NB0109 152NB0104 152NB0105 52NG0101 52NG0307 52NG0108 NB01 NG03 NG01B NG01T 152NB0110 152NB0106 152NB0107 152NB0115 52NG0301 52NG0306 NG03C NG03T 152NB0113 152NB0101 152NB0108 152NB0114* 52NG0106 52NG0116 NG03D 152NB0111 152NB0103 152NB0102 152NB0116 52NG0107 52NG0305 Rev. 0

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 4)

B. FAILURE MODES AND EFFECTS ANALYSIS Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure N/A Offsite power Provides power Loss of power Loss of pre-Undervoltage None-offsite Offsite system failure, to startup ferred power relays, volt-power supplied transmission line xfmr XMR01 to xfmr XMR01 meters, lights by alternate failure, bus fault, source through failure of swyd C.B.

ESF xfmr XNB01 N/A Offsite power Provides power Loss of power Loss of pre-None-offsite Offsite system failure, to ESF xfmr ferred power to power supplied transmission line XNB01 XNB01 by alternate failure, bus fault, source through failure of swyd C.B.

startup xfmr XMR01 XMR01 Startup Provides pre-Fails to provide Loss of pre-Overcurrent, None-offsite Internal fault, transformer ferred power power ferred power neutral ground power supplied lightning arrestor to ESF xfmr to XNB02 overcurrent, by alternate failure, bushing XNB02 and differen-source through failure, cooling tial relays, ESF xfmr XNB01 system failure fault pressure (during startup only) annunciation; undervoltage annunciation for bus NB02 at MCB.

Periodic testing and inspection XNB01 ESF transformer Provides pre-Fails to provide Loss of pre-Undervoltage None-D-G NE01 Internal fault, ferred power power ferred power annunciation energizes NB01 bushing failure to bus NB01 to bus NB01 for bus NB01 until bkr and backup and backup at MCB 152NB0109 is power to bus power to bus Periodic test-NB02 NB02 ing and in-spection Rev. 11

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 5)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure XNB02 ESF transformer Provides pre-Fails to provide Loss of pre-Undervoltage None-D-G NE02 Internal fault, ferred power power ferred power annunciation energized NB02 bushing failure to bus NB02 to bus NB02 for bus NB02 until bkr and backup and backup at MCB 152NB0212 is power to bus power to bus manually closed NB01 NB01 Periodic test-ing and in-spection 252PA0201 1,200-A 13.8-Provides power Fails open Loss of pre-Indicating lights, None-D-G NE02 Mechanical failure, kV N.C. in-to and pro-ferred power undervoltage an-feeds bus NB02 relay failure, coming feeder tects ESF to xfmr XNB02 nunciation for bus until bkr control power bkr xfmr XNB02 NB02 at MCB 152NB0212 is failure closed Fails closed Swyd bkr Periodic test-isolates xfmr ing and in-XMR01 spection 152NB0209 2,000-A, 4.16-Provides pre-Fails open Loss of pre-Indicating lights, None-bus NB02 Mechanical failure, kV N.C. breaker ferred power ferred power undervoltage supplied by relay failure, to and pro-to bus NB02 annunciation NE02 loss of control tects bus NB02 for bus NB02 power at MCB Fails closed Bus NB02 Periodic test-None-bus NB02 isolated by ing and in-isolated by N.C.

N.C. bkr spection bkr 252PA0201; 252PA0201 ESF loads fed by L.G.1 Rev. 11

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 6)

Equip. No.

Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Effect on Subsystem Method of Failure Detection Effect on Total System Causes of Failures 152NB0109 2,000-A, Provides back-Fails open Loss of backup Indicating lights, None-backup Mechanical failure, 4.16-kV up power to power to bus undervoltage power to bus relay failure, N.0. breaker and protects NB01 annunciation NB01 supplied loss of control bus NB01 for bus NB01 by D-G NE01 power at MCB Fails closed Bus NB01 Periodic test-None-ESF loads isolated by ing and in-fed by L.G.2 N.C. bkr spection 252PA0201 152NB0112 2,000-A, Provides pre-Fails open Loss of pre-Indicating lights, None-bus NB01 Mechanical failure, 4.16-kV ferred power ferred power undervoltage supplied by relay failure, N.C. breaker to and protects to bus NB01 annunciation D-G NE01 loss of control bus NB01 for bus NB01 power at MCB Fails closed Bus NB01 Periodic test-None-bus isolated isolated by ing and in-by swyd bkr; ESF N.C. swyd bkr spection loads fed by L.G.2 152NB0212 2,000-A, Provides back-Fails open Backup power Indicating lights, None-back up Mechanical failure, 4.16-kV up power to to bus NB02 undervoltage power to bus relay failure, N.O. breaker and protects supplied by annunciation NB02 supplied loss of control bus NB02 D-G NE02 for bus NB02 by D-G NE02 power at MCB Fails closed Bus NB02 Periodic testing None-ESF loads isolated by and inspection fed by L.G.1 N.C. swyd bkr NB01 4.16-kV bus Distributes Fails to Loss of ESF Undervoltage None-redundant Overload electrical distribute loads on NB01 annunciation load group pro-Short circuit power power at MCB vides all EFS functions Periodic testing and inspection NB02 4.16-kV bus Distributes Fails to Loss of ESF Undervoltage None-redundant Overload electrical distribute loads on NB02 annunciation load group pro-Short circuit power power at MCB vides all ESF functions Periodic test-ing and in-spection Rev. 13

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 7)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 152NB0113 1200-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of pre-Indicating lights, None-ESF loads Mechanical failure, 4.16-kV to and protects ferred power undervoltage on L.C. NG01 relay failure, N.C. breaker xfmr XNG01 to L.C. NG01 annunciation supplied through control power for L.C. NG01 tie bkr 52NG0116 failure at MCB Fails closed Bus NB01 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-load group pro-bkr 152NB0112 spection vides all ESF functions 152NB0110 1200-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of pre-Indicating lights, None-ESF loads Mechanical failure, 4.16-kV to and pro-ferred power undervoltage on L.C. NG03 relay failure, N.C. breaker tects xfmr to L.C. NG03 annunciation supplied through control power XNG03 for L.C. NG03 tie bkr 52NG0116 failure at MCB Fails closed Bus NB01 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-load group pro-bkr 152NB0112 spection vides all ESF functions 152NB0210 1200-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of pre-Indicating lights None-ESF loads Mechanical failure, 4.16-kV to and pro-ferred power undervoltage on L.C. NG04 relay failure, N.C. breaker tects xfmr to L.C. NG04 annunciation supplied through control power XNG04 for L.C. NG04 tie bkr 52NG0216 failure at MCB Fails closed Bus NB02 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-load group pro-bkr 152NB0209 spection vides all ESF functions 152NB0213 1200-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of pre-Indicating lights None-ESF loads Mechanical failure, 4.16-kV to and pro-ferred power undervoltage on L.C. NG02 relay failure, N.C. breaker tects xfmr to L.C. NG02 annunciation supplied through control power XNG02 for L.C. NG02 tie bkr 52NG0216 failure at MCB Fails closed Bus NB02 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-load group pro-bkr 152NB0209 spection vides all ESF functions XNG01 4.16-kV/480-V Provides Fails to Loss of primary Overcurrent, None-L.C. NG01 Internal fault, load center primary power provide power power to L.C. ground over-and NG03 sup-bushing failure xfmr source to NG01 and current, neutral plied by xfmr L.C. NG01 alternate overcurrent XNG03 and alternate power to L.C. annunciation, power source NG03 undervoltage an-to L.C. NG03 nunciation for L.C. NG01 at MCB Periodic testing and inspection Rev. 11

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 8)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure XNG03 4.16-kV/480-V Provides Fails to Loss of primary Overcurrent, None-L.C. NG01 Internal fault, load center primary power provide power power to L.C. ground over-and NG03 sup-bushing failure xfmr source to NG03 and current, neutral plied by xfmr C. NG03 alternate overcurrent XNG01 and alternate power to L.C. annunciation, power source NG01 undervoltage an-to L.C. NG01 nunciation for L.C. NG03 at MCB.

Periodic testing and inspection 152NB0111 2,000-A, Connects die-Fails open Loss of die-Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure, 4.16-kV sel generator sel generator undervoltage load group pro-relay failure, N.O. diesel NE01 to bus power to bus annunciation vides all ESF control power generator bkr NB01 NB01 for bus NB01 functions failure at MCB Fails closed Damage to D-G Periodic test-NE01, bus NB01 ing and in-isolated by spection bkr 152NB0112 152NB0211 2000-A, Connects die-Fails open Loss of die-Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure, 4.16-kV sel generator sel generator undervoltage load group pro-relay failure, N.O. diesel NE02 to bus power to bus annunciation vides all ESF control power generator bkr NB02 NB02 for bus NB02 functions failure at MCB Fails closed Damage to D-G Periodic test-NE02, bus NB02 ing and in-isolated by spection bkr 152NB0209 NE01 4.16-kV emer-Provides emer-Fails to Loss of emer-D-G undervoltage/ None-redundant Fault, mechanical gency diesel gency power provide emer-gency power under freq, over-load group pro-failure, loss of generator to bus NB01 gency power to bus NB01 current, Volt re-vides all ESF excitation strained O.C., functions reverse power, loss of field, differential, and overexcitation neut ground O.C.

annunciation. Peri-odic testing, and inspection. Under-voltage annunciation for bus NB01 at MCB Rev. 11

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 9)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure NE02 4.16-kV emer-Provides emer-Fails to pro-Loss of emer-D-G UV/UF, O.C., None-redundant Fault, mechanical gency diesel gency power to vide emer-gency power to Volt restr O.C., load group pro-failure, loss of generator bus NB02 gency power bus NB02 reverse pwr, vides all ESF excitation loss of field, functions overexcitation, diff and neut GRD O.C. annun-ciation. Periodic testing and in-spection. Under-voltage annunciation for bus NB02 at MCB 152NB0106 1,200-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights, None-pressurizer Mechanical failure, 4.16-kV to and pro-to pressurizer undervoltage heaters are not relay failure, N.C. breaker tects xfmr backup heaters annunciation safety related control power XPG21 for L.C. PG21 failure Fails closed Bus NB01 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by N.C. ing and in-load group pro-bkr 152NB0112 spection vides all ESF functions 152NB0208 1,200-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights, None-pressurizer Mechanical failure, 4.16-kV to and pro-to pressurizer undervoltage heaters are not relay failure, N.C. breaker tects xfmr backup heaters annunciation safety related control power XPG22 on L.C. PG22 failure Fails closed Bus NB02 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by N.C. ing and in-load group pro-bkr 152NB0209 spection vides all ESF functions XNG04 4.16-kV/480-V Provides Fails to Loss of primary Overcurrent, None-L.C. NG04 Internal fault, L.C. xfmr primary power provide power power to L.C. ground over-and L.C. NG02 bushing failure source to NG04 and current, neutral, supplied by xfmr L.C. NG04 alternate overcurrent XNG02 and alternate power to L.C. annunciation power source NG02 to L.C. NG02 Undervoltage an-nunciation for L.C. NG04 at MCB.

Periodic testing and inspection Rev. 11

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 10)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure XNG02 4.16-kV/480-V Provides Fails to Loss of primary Overcurrent, None-L.C. NG02 Internal fault, L.C. xfmr primary power provide power power to L.C. ground over-and L.L. NG04 bushing failure to L.C. NG02 NG02 and current, neutral supplied by xfmr and alternate alternate overcurrent, XNG04 power source power to L.C. annunciation to L.C. NG04 NG04 Undervoltage an-nunciation for L.C. NG02 at MCB Periodic testing and inspection 52NG0101 1,600-A, Provides power Fails open None-L.C. Indicating lights None-L.C. NG01 Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and pro-NG01 fed undervoltage fed through tie relay failure, loss of breaker tects L.C. through tie annunciation bkr 52NG0116 control power NG01 bkr 52NG0116 for L.C. NG01 at MCB Fails closed L.C. xfmr Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides bkr 152NB0113 spection all ESF functions 52NG0301 1,600-A, Provides power Fails open None-L.C. Indicating lights, None-L.C. NG03 Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and pro-NG03 fed undervoltage fed through tie relay failure, loss of breaker tects L.C. through tie annunciation bkr 52NG0116 control power NG03 bkr 52NG0116 for L.C. NG03 at MCB Fails closed L.C. xfmr Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides bkr 152NB0110 spection all ESF functions 52NG0401 1,600-A, Provides power Fails open None-L.C. Indicating lights, None-L.C. NG04 Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and pro-NG04 fed undervoltage fed through tie relay failure, loss of breaker tects L.C. through tie annunciation bkr 52NG0216 control power NG04 bkr 52NG0216 for L.C. NG04 at MCB Fails closed L.C. xfmr Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides bkr 152NB0210 spection all ESF functions 52NG0201 1,600-A, Provides power Fails open None-L.C. Indicating lights, None-L.C. NG02 Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and pro-NG02 fed undervoltage fed through tie relay failure, loss of breaker tects L.C. through tie annunciation bkr 52NG0216 control power NG02 bkr 52NG0216 for L.C. NG02 at MCB Fails closed L.C. xfmr Periodic test-None-redundant Mechanical failure, isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides relay failure, loss bkr 152NB0213 spection all ESF of control power functions Rev. 11

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 11)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 52NG0116 1,600-A, Ties L.C. NG01 Fails open Loss of alter-Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure, 480-V N.O. with NG03 in nate power to undervoltage L.G. provides relay failure, loss of breaker the event of either L.C. annunciation all ESF func-control power loss of primary NG01 or NG03 for either L.C. tions power to either NG01 or NG03 at MCB Fails closed L.C. NG01 Periodic test-None-redundant and NG03 ing and in-L.G. provides isolated by spection all ESF functions bkrs 52NG0101 and/or 52NG0301 52NG0216 1,600-A, Ties L.C. NG04 Fails open Loss of alter-Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure, 480-V N.O. with NG02 in nate power to undervoltage L.G. provides relay failure, loss of breaker the event of either L.C. annunciation all ESF func-control power loss of primary NG02 or NG04 for either L.C.

power to either NG02 or NG04 at MCB Fails closed L.C. NG02 Periodic test-None-redundant and NG04 ing and in-L.G. provides isolated by spection all ESF bkrs 52NG0201 functions and/or 52NG0401 L.C. NG01 480-V load Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Undervoltage None-redundant Overload center electrical distribute on L.C. NG01; annunciation L.G. provides all Short circuit power power loss of alter-at MCB ESF functiions nate source to Periodic test-NG03 ing and inspection L.C. NG03 480-V load Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Undervoltage None-redundant Overload center electrical distribute L.C. NG03; annunciation L.G. provides all Short circuit power power loss of alter-at MCB ESF functions nate source to Periodic test-NG01 ing and inspection L.C. NG04 480-V load Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Undervoltage None-redundant Overload center electrical distribute on L.C. NG04; annunciation L.G. provides all Short circuit power power loss of alter-at MCB F functiions nate source to Periodic test-NG02 ing and inspection Rev. 11

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 12)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure L.C. NG02 480-V load Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Undervoltage None-redundant Overload center electrical distribute on L.C. NG02; annunciation L.G. provides all Short circuit power power loss of alter-at MCB ESF functions nate source to NG04 Periodic test-ing and inspection 52NG0106 800-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and protects to MCC NG01A trip annunciator L.G. provides relay failure, loss of breaker MCC NG01A ESF functions control power Fails closed L.C. NG01 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides bkr 52NG0101 spection ESF functions 52NG0107 800-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and protects to MCC NG01B trip annunciator L.G. provides relay failure, loss of breaker MCC NG01B ESF functions control power Fails closed L.C. NG01 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides bkr 52NG0101 spection ESF functions 52NG0306 800-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and protects to MCC NG03C trip annunciator L.G. provides relay failure, loss of breaker MCC NG03C ESF functions control power Fails closed L.C. NG03 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides bkr 52NG0301 spection ESF functions 52NG0307 800-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and protects to MCC NG03D trip annunciator L.G. provides relay failure, loss of breaker MCC NG03D ESF functions control power Fails closed L.C. NG03 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides bkr 52NG0301 spection ESF functions 52NG0406 800-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and protects to MCC NG04C trip annunciator L.G. provides relay failure, loss of breaker MCC NG04C ESF functions control power Fails closed L.C. NG04 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides bkr 52NG0401 spection all ESF functions Rev. 11

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 13)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 52NG0407 800-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and protects to MCC NG04D trip annunciator L.G. provides relay failure, loss of breaker MCC NG04D ESF functions control power Fails closed L.C. NG04 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides bkr 52NG0401 spection ESF functions 52NG0207 800-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and protects to MCC NG02B trip annunciator L.G. provides relay failure, loss of breaker MCC NG02B all ESF func-control power tions Fails closed L.C. NG02 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides bkr 52NG0201 spection ESF functions 52NG0206 800-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and protects to MCC NG02A trip annunciator L.G. provides relay failure, loss of breaker MCC NG02A all ESF func-control power tions Fails closed L.C. NG02 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides bkr 52NG0201 spection of all ESF all ESF functions functions NG01A 480-V motor Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Annunciation on None-redundant Overload control center electrical distribute on MCC NG01A fdr breaker trip, L.G. provides Short circuit power power loss of individual all ESF functions load indicating lights Periodic testing and inspection NG01B 480-V motor Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Annunciation on None-redundant Overload control center electrical distribute on MCC NG01B fdr breaker trip, L.G. provides Short circuit power power loss of individual all ESF functions load indicating lights Periodic testing and inspection Rev. 0

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 14)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure NG03C 480-V motor Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Annunciation for None-redundant Overload control center electrical distribute on MCC NG03C breaker trip, L.G. provides Short circuit power power loss of individual all ESF functions ad indicating lights Periodic testing and inspection NG03D 480-V motor Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Annunciation for None-redundant Overload control center electrical distribute on MCC NG03D breaker trip, L.G. provides Short circuit power power loss of individual all ESF functions load indicating lights Periodic testing and inspection NG04C 480-V motor Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Annunciation for None-redundant Overload control center electrical distribute on MCC NG04C breaker trip, L.G. provides Short circuit power power loss of individual all ESF functions load indicating lights Periodic testing and inspection NG04D 480-V motor Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Annunciation for None-redundant Overload control center electrical distribute on MCC NG04D breaker trip, L.G. provides Short circuit power power loss of individual all ESF functions load indicating lights Periodic testing and inspection NG02B 480-V motor Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Annunciation for None-redundant Overload control center electrical distribute on NG02B breaker trip, L.G. provides Short circuit power power loss of individual all ESF functions load indicating lights Periodic testing and inspection NG02A 480-V motor Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Annunciation for None-redundant Overload control center electrical distribute on NG02A breaker trip, L.G. provides Short circuit power power loss of individual all ESF functions load indicating lights Periodic testing and inspection Rev. 0

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 15)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 52NG0208 800-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of loads Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and protects on MCC NG02T trip annunciation L.G. provides relay failure, loss of breaker NG02T all ESF func-control power tions Fails closed L.C. NG02 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides bkr 52NG0201 spection all ESF func-tions 52NG0405 800-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of loads Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and protects on MCC NG04T trip annunciation L.G. provides relay failure, loss of breaker NG04T all ESF func-control power tions Fails closed L.C. NG04 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides bkr 52NG0401 spection all ESF func-tions NG01T 480-V motor Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Annunciation on None-redundant Overload control center electric distribute on MCC NG01T FDR breaker trip L.G. provides Short circuit power power all ESF functions NG03T 480-V motor Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Annunciation on None-redundant Overload control center electric distribute on MCC NG03T FDR breaker trip L.G. provides Short circuit power power all ESF functions NG02T 480-V motor Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Annunciation on None-redundant Overload control center electric distribute on MCC NG02T FDR breaker trip L.G. provides Short circuit power power all ESF functions NG04T 480-V motor Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Annunciation on None-redundant Overload control center electric distribute on MCC NG04T FDR breaker trip L.G. provides Short circuit power power all ESF functions 52NG0108 800-A, Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, 480-V N.C. to and protects to MCC NG01T trip annunciator L.G. provides relay failure, loss of breaker MCC NG01T all ESF func-control power tions Fails closed L.C. NG01 Periodic test-None-redundant isolated by ing and in-L.G. provides bkr 52NG0101 spection all ESF functions Rev. 0

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 16)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 52NG0305 800-A, 480- Provides Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, Volt N.C. power to to MCC NG03T trip annunciator L.G. provides relay failure, loss breaker and protects all ESF functions of control power MCC NG03T Fails closed L.C. NG03 Periodic testing None-redundant isolated by and inspection L.G. provides bkr 52NG0301 all ESF functions 152NB0101 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Power unavail-Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, kV breaker to and pro-able at PEJ01A L.G. provides the relay failure, loss tects RHR PP ESF function of control power PE J01A Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed Bus NB01 Undervoltage None-redundant isolated by annunciation L.G. provides bkr 152NB0112 for NB01 at MCB all ESF functions 152NB0103 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Power unavail-Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, kV breaker to and pro-able at PEM01A L.G. provides the relay failure, loss tects S.I. PP ESF function of control power PEMO1A Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed Bus NB01 Undervoltage None-redundant isolated by annunciation L.G. provides bkr 152NB0112 for NB01 at MCB all ESF functions 152NB0104 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Power unavail-Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, kV breaker to and pro-able at PBG05A L.G. provides the relay failure, loss tects cent ESF functions of control power chgng PP PBG05A Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed Bus NB01 Undervoltage None-redundant isolated by annunciation L.G. provides bkr 152NB0112 for NB01 at MCB all ESF functions Rev. 11

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 17)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 152NB0107 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Power unavail-Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, kV breaker to and pro-able at PEG01A PEG01C provides relay failure, loss tects comp clg ESF function of control power wtr PP PEG01A Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed Bus NB01 Undervoltage None-redundant isolated by annunciation L.G. provides bkr 152NB0112 for NB01 at MCB all ESF functions 152NB0108 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Power unavail-Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, kV breaker to and pro-able at PEG01C PEG01A provides relay failure, loss tects comp clg the ESF function of control power wtr PP PEG01C Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed Bus NB01 Undervoltage None-redundant isolated by annunciation L.G. provides bkr 152NB0112 for NB02 at MCB all ESF functions 152NB0102 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Power unavail-Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, kV breaker to and pro-able at PEN01A L.G. provides relay failure, loss tects cont the ESF function of control power spray PP PEN01A Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed Bus NB01 Undervoltage None-redundant isolated by annunciation L.G. provides bkr 152NB0112 for NB02 at MCB all ESF functions 152NB0105 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Power unavail-Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, kV breaker to and pro-able at PAL01A L.G. provides relay failure, loss tects aux fw the ESF function of control power PP PAL01A Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed Bus NB01 Undervoltage None-redundant isolated by annunciation L.G. provides bkr 152NB0112 for NB01 at MCB the ESF functions Rev. 11

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 18)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 152NB0204 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Power unavail-Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, kV breaker to and pro-able at PEJ01B L.G. provides relay failure, loss tects RHR PP the ESF function of control power PEJ01B Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed Bus NB02 Undervoltage None-redundant isolated by annunciation L.G. provides bkr 152NB0209 for NB02 at MCB all ESF functions 152NB0202 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Power unavail-Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, kV breaker to and pro-able at PEM01B L.G. provides relay failure, loss tects S.I. PP the ESF function of control power PEM01B Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed Bus NB02 Undervoltage None-redundant isolated by annunciation L.G. provides bkr 152NB0209 for NB02 at MCB all ESF functions 152NB0201 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Power unavail-Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, kV breaker to and pro-able at PBG05B L.G. provides relay failure, loss tects cent the ESF function of control power chgng PP PBG05B Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed Bus NB02 Undervoltage None-redundant isolated by annunciation L.G. provides bkr 152NB0209 for NB02 at MCB all ESF functions 152NB0206 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Power unavail-Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, kV breaker to and pro-able at PEG01B PEG01D provides relay failure, loss tects comp clg the ESF function of control power wtr PEG01B Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed Bus NB02 Undervoltage None-redundant isolated by annunciation L.G. provides bkr 152NB0209 for NB02 at MCB all ESF functions Rev. 11

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 19)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 152NB0207 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Power unavail-Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, kV breaker to and pro-able at PEG01D PEG01B provides relay failure, loss tects comp clg the ESF function of control power wtr PP PEG01D Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed Bus NB02 Undervoltage None-redundant isolated by annunciation for L.G. provides bkr 152NB0209 NB02 at MCB all ESF functions 152NB0203 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Power unavail-Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, kV breaker to and pro-able at PEN01B L.G. provides relay failure, loss tects cont the ESF function of control power spray PP PEN01B Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed Bus NB02 Undervoltage None-redundant isolated by annunciation L.G. provides bkr 152NB0209 for NB02 at MCB all ESF functions 152NB0205 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Power unavail-Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure, kV breaker to and pro-able at PAL01B L.G. provides relay failure, loss tects aux FW the ESF function of control power PP PAL01B Periodic testing and inspection Fails closed Bus NB02 Undervoltage None-redundant isolated by annunciation L.G. provides bkr 152NB0209 for NB02 at MCB all ESF functions Rev. 11

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 20)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 152NB0116 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure kV N.C. to and pro-to XNG05 loss of indicating load group pro-Relay failure breaker tects XNG05 lights in MCC load vides all neces-Loss of control power ckts sary functions Fails closed Bus NB01 Undervoltage an-None-redundant isolated by nunciation for load group provides N.C. bkr NB01 at MCB all necessary 152NB0112 functions Periodic testing and inspection 152NB0115 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure kV N.C. to and pro-to PP DPEF01A load group pro-Relay failure breaker tects PP vides all neces-Loss of control power PEF01A sary functions Fails closed Bus NB01 Undervoltage an-None-redundant isolated by nunciation for load group provides N.C. bkr NB01 at MCB all necessary 152NB0112 functions Periodic testing and inspection 152NB0216 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure kV N.C. to and pro-to DPEF01B loss of indicating load group pro-Relay failure breaker tects XNG06 lights in MCC load vides all neces-Loss of control power ckts sary functions Fails closed Bus NB02 Undervoltage an-None-redundant isolated by nunciation for load group provides N.C. bkr NB02 at MCB all necessary 152NB0209 functions Periodic testing and inspection 152NB0215 1,200-A, 4.16-Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights, None-redundant Mechanical failure kV N.C. to and pro-to DPEF01B undervoltage an-load group pro-Relay failure breaker tects PP nunciation for vides all neces-Loss of control power PEF01B NB02 at MCB sary functions Fails closed Bus NB02 Periodic testing None-redundant isolated by and inspection load group provides N.C. bkr all necessary 152NB0209 functions Rev. 11

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 21)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure XNG05 4.00-kV/ Provides power Fails to pro-Loss of power Overcurrent, None-redundant Internal fault 480-V xfmr to MCC NG05E vide power to MCC NG05E ground over-load group pro-current, neutral vides all neces-overcurrent sary functions annunciator Loss of indicating lights in MCC load ckts Periodic testing and inspection XNG06 4.00-kV/ Provides power Fails to pro-Loss of power Overcurrent, None-redundant Internal fault 480-V xfmr to MCC NG06E vide power to MCC NG06E ground over-load group pro-current, neutral vides all neces-overcurrent sary functions annunciator Loss of indicating lights in MCC load ckts Periodic testing and inspection 52NG05E 800-A, 480-V Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure AF1 N.C. breaker to and pro-to MCC NG05E Trip annunciator load group pro-Relay failure tects MCC vides all neces-Loss of control power NG05E sary functions Fails closed NG05E Loss of indi-None-redundant isolated by cating lights in load group provides N.C. bkr MCC load ckts all necessary 152NB0116 functions Periodic testing and inspection 52NG06E 800-A, 480-V Provides power Fails open Loss of power Indicating lights None-redundant Mechanical failure AF1 N.C. breaker to and pro-to MCC NG06E Trip annunciator load group pro-Relay failure tects MCC NG06E vides all neces-Loss of control power sary functions Fails closed NG06E Loss of indi-None-redundant isolated by cating lights in load group provides N.C. bkr MCC load ckts all necessary 152NB216 functions Rev. 13

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 22)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure Periodic testing and inspection NG05E 480-V motor Distributes Fails to Loss of power to Trip annunciator None-redundant Overload control center electrical provide power ESW Intake Struc-on feeder bkrs load group pro-Short circuit power ture Separation vides all neces-Group 1 Loss of indicating sary functions lights in MCC load ckts Periodic testing and inspection NG06E 480-V motor Distributes Fails to Loss of power to Trip annunciator None-redundant Overload control center electrical provide power ESW Intake Struc-on feeder bkrs load group pro-Short circuit power ture Separation vides all neces-Group 4 Loss of indicating sary functions lights in MCC load ckts Periodic testing and inspection Rev. 13

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 23)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No.

Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure Deleted Deleted 152NB0117 Space Periodically N/A N/A N/A None N/A used for test device or spare breaker storage Deleted 152NB0217 Space Periodically N/A N/A N/A None N/A used for test device or spare breaker storage Rev. 11

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 24)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure NK11 125-V battery Provides back-Fails to pro-Loss of backup Solid state None-redundant Short to ground, up dc power to vide adequate dc power to battery monitor, dc subsystem internal shorts dc bus NK01 if output voltage bus NK01 local indication, provides all charger NK21 control room necessary func-fails; provides annunciation tions extra power during surges Periodic testing and inspection NK13 125-V battery Provides back-Fails to pro-Loss of backup Solid state None-redundant Short to ground, up dc power to vide adequate dc power to battery monitor, dc subsystem internal shorts dc bus NK03 if output voltage bus NK03 local indication, provides all charger NK23 control room necessary func-fails; provides annunciation tions extra power during surges Periodic testing and inspection NK12 125-V battery Provides back-Fails to pro-Loss of backup Solid state None-redundant Short to ground, up dc power to vide adequate dc power to battery monitor, dc subsystem internal shorts dc bus NK02 if output voltage bus NK02 local indication, provides all charger NK22 control room necessary func-fails; provides annunciation tions extra power during surges Periodic testing and inspection NK14 125-V battery Provides back-Fails to pro-Loss of backup Solid state None-redundant Short to ground, up dc power to vide adequate dc power to battery monitor, dc subsystem internal shorts dc bus NK04 if output voltage bus NK04 local indication, provides all charger NK24 control room necessary func-fails; provides annunciation tions extra power during surges Periodic testing and inspection 89NK0101 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of battery Battery output None-battery Mechanical failure fusible switch to and protects NK11 source amps indicated charger NK21 bus NK01 to bus NK01 in control room provides power 89NK0301 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of battery Battery output None-battery Mechanical failure fusible switch to and protects NK13 source amps indicated charger NK23 bus NK03 to bus NK03 in control room provides power 89NK0201 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of battery Battery output None-battery Mechanical failure fusible switch to and protects NK12 source amps indicated charger NK22 bus NK02 to bus NK02 in control room provides power Rev. 11

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 25)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 89NK0401 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of battery Battery output None-battery Mechanical failure fusible switch to and protects NK14 source amps indicated charger NK24 bus NK04 to bus NK04 in control room provides power NK21 125-V battery Charges bat-Fails to provide None-battery Local indication None-battery Fault, component charger tery NK11; power NK11 picks up and control room NK11 provides failure provides pri-load until summary annun-power (spare is mary power spare charger ciation for also available) to bus NK03 NK25 is in-input under-stalled voltage and output under and over voltage Periodic testing and inspection NK23 125-V battery Charges bat-Fails to provide None-battery Local indication None-battery Fault, component charger tery NK13; power NK13 picks up and control room NK13 provides failure provides pri-load until summary annun-power (spare is mary power spare charger ciation for also available) to bus NK03 NK25 is in-input under-stalled voltage and output under and over voltage Periodic testing and inspection NK22 125-V battery Charges bat-Fails to provide None-battery Local indication None-battery Fault, component charger tery NK12; power NK12 picks up and control room NK12 provides failure provides pri-load until summary annun-power (spare is mary power spare charger ciation for also available) to bus NK02 NK25 is in-input under-stalled voltage and output under and over voltage Periodic testing and inspection NK24 125-V battery Charges bat-Fails to provide None-battery Local indication None-battery Fault, component charger tery NK14; power NK14 picks up and control room NK14 provides failure provides pri-load until summary annun-power (spare is mary power spare charger ciation for also available) to bus NK04 NK25 is in-input under-stalled voltage and output under and over voltage Periodic testing and inspection Rev. 11

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 26)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 89NK0102 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of battery Charger output None-battery Mechanical failure fusible switch to and protects charger NK21 amps indicated NK11 supplies bus NK01 source to in control room bus NK01 bus NK01 89NK0302 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of battery Charger output None-battery Mechanical failure fusible switch to and pro-charger NK23 amps indicated NK13 supplies tects bus source to in control room bus NK03 NK03 bus NK03 89NK0202 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of battery Charger output None-battery Mechanical failure fusible switch to and pro-charger NK22 amps indicated supplies tects bus source to in control room bus NK02 NK02 bus NK02 89NK0402 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of battery Charger output None-battery Mechanical failure fusible switch to and pro-charger NK24 amps indicated supplies tects bus source to in control room bus NK04 NK04 bus NK04 NK01 125-Vdc bus Distributes Fails to Loss of Sep. Ground detection None-redundant Overload electrical distribute Grp. 1 dc power local indication subsystem pro-Short circuit power power of undervoltage, vides all neces-and summary sary functions annunciation at control room Periodic testing and inspection NK03 125-Vdc bus Distributes Fails to Loss of Sep. Ground detection None-redundant Overload electrical distribute Grp. 3 dc power local indication subsystem pro-Short circuit power power of undervoltage, vides all neces-and summary sary functions annunciation at control room Periodic testing and inspection Rev. 11

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 27)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure NK02 125-Vdc bus Distributes Fails to Loss of Sep. Ground detection, None-redundant Overload electrical distribute Grp. 2 dc power local indication subsystem provides Short circuit power power of undervoltage, all necessary and summary functions annunciation at control room Periodic testing and inspection NK04 125-Vdc bus Distributes Fails to Loss of Sep. Ground detection, None-redundant Overload electrical distribute Grp. 4 dc power local indication subsystem provides Short circuit power power of undervoltage, all necessary and summary functions annunciation at control room Periodic testing and inspection 89NK0111 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of invert-Loss of dc in-None-bus NN01 Mechanical failure fusible switch to and pro-er NN11 power put to inv fed by inverter tects 7.5-kVA to bus NN01 annunciated alternate CVT source inverter NN11 or swing unit NN15 89NK0311 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of invert-Loss of dc in-None-bus NN03 Mechanical failure fusible switch to and pro-er NN13 power put to inv fed by inverter tects 7.5-kVA to bus NN03 annunciated alternate CVT source inverter NN13 or swing unit NN15 89NK0211 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of invert-Loss of dc in-None-bus NN02 Mechanical failure fusible switch to and pro-er NN12 power put to inv fed by inverter tects 7.5-kVA to bus NN02 annunciated alternate CVT source inverter NN12 or swing unit NN16 89NK0411 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of invert-Loss of dc in-None-bus NN04 Mechanical failure Fusible switch to and pro-er NN14 power put to inv fed by inverter tects 7.5-kVA to bus NN04 annunciated alternate CVT source inverter NN14 or swing unit NN16 89NK0104 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of distr Undervoltage None-redundant Mechanical failure fusible switch to and pro-swbd NK41 indication at dc subsystem pro-tects distr swbd NK41, vides necessary swbd NK41 undervoltage functions alarm at swbd NK01, and trouble alarm at MCB 89NK0103 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of invert-Loss of dc in-None-bus NN01 Mechanical failure fusible switch to and pro-er NN15 power put to inv fed by inverter tects 7,5-kVA to bus NN01 annunciated alternate CVT source inverter NN15 or normal inv unit 89NK0303 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of invert-Loss of dc in-None-bus NN03 Mechanical failure fusible switch to and pro-er NN15 power put to inv fed by inverter tects 7,5-kVA to bus NN03 annunciated alternate CVT source inverter NN15 or normal inv unit Rev. 29

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 28)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 89NK0304 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of distr Undervoltage None-redundant Mechanical failure fusible switch to and pro-swbd NK43 indication at dc subsystem pro-tects distr swbd NK43, vides necessary swbd NK43 undervoltage functions alarm at swbd NK03, and trouble alarm at MCB 89NK0204 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of distr Undervoltage None-redundant Mechanical failure fusible switch to and pro-swbd NK42 indication at dc subsystem pro-tects distr swbd NK42, vides necessary swbd NK42 undervoltage functions alarm at swbd NK02, and trouble alarm at MCB 89NK0404 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of distr Undervoltage None-redundant Mechanical failure fusible switch to and pro-swbd NK44 indication at dc subsystem pro-tects distr swbd NK44, vides necessary swbd NK44 undervoltage functions alarm at swbd NK04, and trouble alarm at MCB NK41 125-Vdc Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Undervoltage None-redundant Overload control dc power distribute on distr swbd indication at dc subsystem Short circuit distribution power NK41 NK41, under-provides necessary switchboard voltage alarm functions at NK01, trouble alarm at MCB NK43 125-Vdc Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Undervoltage None-redundant Overload control dc power distribute on distr swbd indication at dc subsystem Short circuit distribution power NK43 NK43, under-provides necessary switchboard voltage alarm functions at NK03, trouble alarm at MCB NK42 125-Vdc Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Undervoltage None-redundant Overload control dc power distribute on distr swbd indication at dc subsystem Short circuit distribution power NK42 NK42, under-provides necessary switchboard voltage alarm functions at NK02, trouble alarm at MCB 89NK0203 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of invert-Loss of dc in-None-bus NN02 Mechanical failure fusible switch to and pro-er NN16 power put to inv fed by inverter tects 7.5-kVA to bus NN02 annunciated alternate CVT source inverter NN16 or normal inv unit 89NK0403 125-V, N.C. Provides power Fails open Loss of invert-Loss of dc in-None-bus NN04 Mechanical failure fusible switch to and pro-er NN16 power put to inv fed by inverter tects 7.5-kVA to bus NN04 annunciated alternate CVT source inverter NN16 or normal inv unit Rev. 29

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 29)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure NK44 125-Vdc Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Undervoltage None-redundant Overload control dc power distribute on dist swbd indication at dc subsystem Short circuit distribution power NK44 NK44, under-provides necessary switchboard voltage alarm at functions NK04, trouble alarm at MCB NN11 7.5-kVA Provides reg-Fails to Inv source to Loss of ac out-None-redundant Fault, component inverter ulated ac provide swbd NN01 lost; put annunciation ac subsystem failure, output tripped power to power alternate source provides neces-by power surge swbd NN01 CVT auto transfer. Periodic testing sary functions NN15 manually and inspection connected.

NN13 7.5-kVA Provides reg-Fails to Inv source to Loss of ac out-None-redundant Fault, component inverter ulated ac provide swbd NN03 lost; put annunciation ac subsystem failure, output tripped power to power alternate source provides neces-by power surge swbd NN03 CVT auto transfer Periodic testing sary functions NN15 manually and inspection connected.

NN12 7.5-kVA Provides reg-Fails to Inv source to Loss of ac out-None-redundant Fault, component inverter ulated ac provide swbd NN02 lost; put annunciation ac subsystem failure, output tripped power to power alternate source provides neces-by power surge swbd NN02 CVT auto transfer Periodic testing sary functions NN16 manually and inspection connected.

NN14 7.5-kVA Provides reg-Fails to Inv source to Loss of ac out-None-redundant Fault, component inverter ulated ac provide swbd NN04 lost; put annunciation ac subsystem failure, output tripped power to power alternate source provides neces-by power surge swbd NN04 CVT auto transfer Periodic testing sary functions NN16 manually and inspection connected.

52NN0101 100-A/120-V Swbd NN01 fdr Fails open Loss of power Periodic testing None-redundant Mechanical failure normally brkr from to swbd NN01 and inspection channel provides closed non-normal power necessary functions automatic ckt source-inverter Undervoltage bkr NN11 Annunciation for None-redundant swbd NN01 channel provides necessary functions Fails closed Swbd NN01 isolated by inverter output bkr NN15 7.5-kVA Provides reg-Fails to Inv source to Loss of ac out-None-redundant Fault, component swing inverter ulated ac provide swbd NN01/NN03 put annunciation ac subsystem failure, output tripped power to power bst; alternate provides neces-by power surge swbd NN01/NN03 CVT source auto Periodic testing sary functions transfer and inspection NN16 7.5-kVA swing Provides reg-Fails to Inv source to Loss of ac out-None-redundant Fault, component inverter ulated ac provide swbd NN02/NN04; put annunciation ac subsystem failure, output tripped power to power bst; alternate provides neces-by power surge swbd NN02/NN04 CVT source auto Periodic testing sary functions transfer and inspection Rev. 29

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 30)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 52NN0301 100-A/120-V Swbd NN01 fdr Fails open Loss of power Periodic testing None-redundant Mechanical failure normally closed bkr from to swbd NN03 and inspection channel provides nonautomatic normal power necessary functions ckt bkr source-inverter Undervoltage NN13 annunciation for swbd NN03 Fails closed Swbd NN01 isolated None-redundant by inverter out-channel provides put bkr necessary functions 52NN0201 100-A/120-V Swbd NN01 fdr Fails open Loss of power Periodic testing None-redundant Mechanical failure normally closed bkr from to swbd NN02 and inspection channel provides nonautomatic normal power necessary functions ckt bkr source-inverter Undervoltage NN12 annunciation for swbd NN02 Fails closed Swbd NN01 isolated None-redundant by inverter out-channel provides put bkr necessary functions 51NN0401 100-A/120-V Swbd NN01 fdr Fails open Loss of power Periodic testing None-redundant Mechanical failure normally closed bkr from to swbd NN04 and inspection channel provides nonautomatic normal power necessary functions ckt bkr source-inverter Undervoltage NN14 annunciation for swbd NN04 Fails closed Swbd NN01 isolated None-redundant by inverter out-channel provides put bkr necessary functions NN01 120-Vac Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Undervoltage None-redundant Overload instrument electrical provide power on swbd NN01 annunciation channel provides Short circuit switchboard power necessary func-Periodic testing tions.

and inspection Rev. 29

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 31)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure NN03 120-Vac Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Undervoltage None-redundant Overload instrument electric provide power on swbd NN03 annunciation channel provides Short circuit switchboard power necessary functions Periodic testing and inspection NN02 120-Vac Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Undervoltage None-redundant Overload instrument electric provide power on swbd NN02 annunciation channel provides Short circuit bus power necessary functions Periodic testing and inspection NN04 120-Vac Distributes Fails to Loss of loads Undervoltage None-redundant Overload instrument electric provide power on swbd NN04 annunciation channel provides Short circuit bus power necessary functions Periodic testing and inspection Rev. 29

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 32)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 52NG01ABF1 100-A/480-V Provides Fails open Loss of xfmr Periodic testing None-transformer Mechanical failure N.C. circuit isolation XPN07 and inspection loads are non-breaker between class safety related 1E power supply and Non-Fails closed MCC NG01A is None-redundant class 1E load isolated by L.C. MCC provides Xfmr-XPN07 bkr 52NG0106 necessary functions 52NG02ADF1 100-A/480-V Provides Fails open Loss of xfmr Periodic testing None-transformer Mechanical failure N.C. circuit isolation XPN08 and inspection loads are non-breaker between class safety related 1E power supply and Non-Fails closed MCC NG02A is None-redundant class 1E load isolated by L.C. MCC provides Xfmr-XPN08 bkr 52NG0206 necessary functions 52NG01ACR3 100-A/480-V Provides power Fails open Loss of Inv Periodic testing None-preferred Mechanical failure N.C. circuit to and pro-NN11 backup AC and inspection source provides breaker tects Inv NN11 (CVT) necessary functions CVT Fails closed MCC NG01A iso-None-preferred lated by N.C. source provides bkr 52NG0106 necessary functions Rev. 29

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 33)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 52NG02AFF3 100-A/480-V Provides power Fails open Loss of Inv Periodic testing None-preferred Mechanical failure N.C. circuit to and pro-NN14 backup AC and inspection source provides breaker tects Inv NN14 (CVT) necessary functions CVT Fails closed MCC NG02A iso-None-preferred lated by N.C. source provides bkr 52NG0206 necessary functions NK25 Spare 125-V Replaces any Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery as-Fault, component battery of chargers provide replace a and inspection asociated with failure charger NK21, NK23 power failed failed charger charger supplies load 89NK0109 125-V, N.O. Connects Fails open None Periodic testing None Mechanical failure fusible switch battery NK11 and inspection to resistive load for dis-charge testing 89NK0309 125-V, N.O. Connects Fails open None Periodic testing None Mechanical failure fusible switch battery NK13 and inspection to resistive load for dis-charge testing 89NK0209 125-V, N.O. Connects Fails open None Periodic testing None Mechanical failure fusible switch battery NK12 and inspection to resistive load for dis-charge testing 89NK0409 125-V, N.O. Connects Fails open None Periodic testing None Mechanical failure fusible switch battery NK14 and inspection to resistive load for dis-charge testing Rev. 29

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 34)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No.

Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure NK26 Spare 125-V Replaces any Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Fault, component battery of chargers provide replace a and inspection associated with failure charger NK22, NK24 power failed failed charger charger supplies load NK71 DC transfer Connects Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure switch charger NK21 or transfer replace a and inspection associated with NK25 to bus NK01 failed charger failed charger supplies load NK72 DC transfer Connects Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure switch charger NK22 or transfer replace a and inspection associated with NK26 to bus NK02 failed charger failed charger supplies load NK73 DC transfer Connects Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure switch charger NK23 or transfer replace a and inspection associated with NK25 to bus NK03 failed charger failed charger supplies load NK74 DC transfer Connects Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure switch charger NK24 or transfer replace a and inspection associated with NK26 to bus NK04 failed charger failed charger supplies load NK75 DC transfer Connects spare Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure switch charger NK25 to transfer replace a and inspection associated with bus NK01 or NK03 failed charger failed charger supplies load NK76 DC transfer Connects spare Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure switch charger NK26 to transfer replace a and inspection associated with bus NK02 or NK04 failed charger failed charger supplies load NK77 AC transfer Connects AC Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure switch power from bus transfer replace a and inspection associated with NG01 or PG19 to failed charger failed charger charger NK25 supplies load NK78 AC transfer Connects AC Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure switch power from bus transfer replace a and inspection associated with NG04 or PG20 to failed charger failed charger charger NK26 supplies load NK79 Swing Inverter Connects DC Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure transfer switch power from bus transfer replace a and inspection associated with NK01 or NK03 to failed Swing failed Inverter Swing Inv NN15 Inverter supplies load NK80 Swing Inverter Connects DC Fails to Inability to Periodic testing None-battery Mechanical failure transfer switch power from bus transfer replace a and inspection associated with NK02 or NK04 to failed Swing failed Inverter Swing Inv NN16 Inverter supplies load Rev. 29

WOLF CREEK TABLE 8.3-4 (Sheet 35)

Method of Causes Effect on Failure Effect on of Equip. No. Equip. Name Function Failure Mode Subsystem Detection Total System Failure 89NK0105 125-V, N.C. Provides Fails open Loss of distr Undervoltage None-redundant Mechanical failure fusible switch power to swbd NK51 indication at dc subsystem and protects swbd NK51 by provides necessary distr swbd alarm at swbd functions NK51 NK01 and trouble alarm at MCB 89NK0405 125-V, N.C. Provides Fails open Loss of distr Undervoltage None-redundant Mechanical failure fusible switch power to swbd NK54 indication at dc subsystem and protects swbd NK54, provides necessary distr swbd alarm at swbd functions NK54 NK04 and trouble alarm at MCB NK51 125-V control Distributes dc Fails to Loss of loads Undervoltage None-redundant Overload distribution power distribute on swbd NK51 indication on dc subsystem Short circuit switchboard power swbd NK51, UV provides necessary alarm at NK01, functions and trouble alarm at MCB NK54 125-V dc con-Distributes dc Fails to Loss of loads Undervoltage None-redundant Overload trol distri-power distribute on swbd NK54 indicating on dc subsystem Short circuit bution switch-power swbd NK54, UV provides necessary board alarm at NK04, functions and trouble alarm at MCB 52NG01AGF3 100-A/480-V Provides power Fails open Loss of Inv Periodic testing None-preferred Mechanical failure N. C. circuit to and pro-NN13 backup AC and inspection source provides Breaker tects Inv NN13 (CVT) necessary functions CVT Fails closed MCC NG01A iso-None-preferred lated by N. C. source provides bkr 52NG0106 necessary functions 52NG01AGF4 100-A/480-V Provides power Fails open Loss of Inv Periodic testing None-preferred Mechanical failure N. C. circuit to and pro-NN15 backup AC and inspection source provides Breaker tects Inv NN15 (CVT) necessary functions CVT Fails closed MCC NG04A iso-None-preferred lated by N. C. source provides bkr 52NG0106 necessary functions 52NG02ABR1 100-A/480-V Provides power Fails open Loss of Inv Periodic testing None-preferred Mechanical failure N. C. circuit to and pro-NN12 backup AC and inspection source provides Breaker tects Inv NN12 (CVT) necessary functions CVT Fails closed MCC NG04A iso-None-preferred lated by N. C. source provides bkr 52NG0206 necessary functions 52NG02AFF1 100-A/480-V Provides power Fails open Loss of Inv Periodic testing None-preferred Mechanical failure N. C. circuit to and pro-NN16 backup AC and inspection source provides Breaker tects Inv NN16 (CVT) necessary functions CVT Fails closed MCC NG01A iso-None-preferred lated by N. C. source provides bkr 52NG0206 necessary functions Rev. 29

Table 8.3-5 (Sheet 1 of 3)

Minimum Separation Distance Analysis Required by R. G. 1.75 and IEEE 384-74 EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT FUNCTION FAILURE EFFECT ON SYSTEM CAUSE NUMBER DESCRIPTION MODE GSHV31 & These valves are solenoid These valves are the inside and Valve fails This is a safe condition.

Loss of power GSHV32 valves with a 120V AC outside containment isolation closed to valve supply voltage and a load valves on the sample supply ______________________________________________________________________

of 2 amps.1 line to containment radiation Valve fails This is a safe condition.

Short to monitor GTRT32. closed A blown fuse (3A) or tripped ground The phase conductor to breaker (15a) due to overcurrent each valve is protected Both valves are normally conditions is essentially the by a 3 amp fuse located energized, normally open and same as a loss of power. If the in the Main Control fail closed. 15 amp breaker trips at the MCC Board (RL020). distribution panel, it should be The only time these valves noted that the other devices fed The secondary level of are required to be closed, from the breaker will also fail in protection for GSHV31 is excluding testing is during in the safe position.2 the 15 amp circuit breaker a LOCA or MSLB where upon ______________________________________________________________________

(NG01ACR123) which is receipt of the containment Valve fails Either the valve remains open due Hot short.

located in MCC distri-isolation signal the circuits closed to energization of the solenoid bution panel NG01AA1. supplying the solenoids are (see following) or it closes. If deenergized and the valves it closes, this is a safe condition.

The secondary level of are closed. ______________________________________________________________________

protection for GSHV32 is Valve fails This is a safe condition during Hot short.

the 15 amp circuit breaker open normal operations.

(NG02ACR130) which is located in MCC distribution During the following a LOCA or panel NG02AA1. MSLB these valves remaining open could be a concern, however, the Conduit 4U3E7N serves probability of the lack of the valve GSHV32. 3' - 5' separation resulting in both GSHV31 and GSHV32 remaining open during or following a MSLB or LOCA is deemed extremely low and as such not credible.

There-fore the present design is considered acceptable.

Rev. 1

Table 8.3-5 (Sheet 2 of 3)

EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT FUNCTION FAILURE EFFECT ON SYSTEM CAUSE NUMBER DESCRIPTION MODE The following sequence of events would be necessary for both valves to fail open:

1. A failure or fault internal to the exposed cable on skid GTRT32 must cause a fire.
2. The fuses(s) which protect the skid must fail to clear the fault.
3. The breaker(s) which protect the cable(s) supplying the skid must fail to clear the fault.
4. The cable(s) supplying the skid must overheat to the point of combustion.
5. The fire in item 4 must propagate to the GSHV31 cable.
6. GSHV31 cable conductors must develop a hot short with another voltage source.
7. The hot short in item 6 must result in GSHV31 being open.
8. The fire in item 4 must generate sufficient heat to cause the GSHV32 cable to fail resulting in a hot short. This hot short must then cause the valve itself to fail open.

This sequence of events is not considered credible.

Rev. 1

Table 8.3-5 (Sheet 3 of 3)

Notes

1. See Vendor Print J-603A-0071.
2. Devices associated with MCC Distribution Panel NG02AA1 Breaker 30 (15A).

Solenoid valves - GSHV36, GSHV39, GSHV32, GSHV33, GGRV28A, B, C, & D.

Dampers - GGRZ36, GGHZ43, GGHZ44, GGHZ57, GGHZ14, GGHZ33-1 & 33-2, GLHZ70, GLHZ72, GLHZ74, GLHZ62.

Devices associated with MCC Distribution Panel NG01AA1 Breaker 23 (15A).

Solenoid valves - GSHV31, GSHV34, GSHV37, GSHV38, GGRV27A, B, C, & D.

Dampers - GGRZ37, GGHZ40, GGHZ41, GGHZ42, GGHZ56, GLHZ13, GLHZ32-1 & 32-2, GLHZ69, GLHZ71, GLHZ73, GLHZ75.

Rev. 8

WOLF CREEK APPENDIX 8.3A STATION BLACKOUT 8.3A.1 INTRODUCTION On July 21, 1988, the Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) amended its regulations in 10 C.F.R., Part 50. A new section, 50.63, was added which requires that each light-water-cooled nuclear power plant be able to withstand and recover from a station blackout (SBO) of a specified duration. It also identifies the factors that must be considered in specifying the station blackout duration. Section 50.63 requires that, for the station blackout duration, the plant be capable of maintaining core cooling and appropriate containment integrity. Section 50.63 further requires the following information:

1)

A proposed station blackout duration including a justification for the selection based on the redundancy and reliability of the onsite emergency AC power sources, the expected frequency of loss of offsite power (LOOP),

and the probable time needed to restore offsite power;

2)

A description of the procedures that will be implemented for station blackout events for the duration (as determined in 1 above) and for recovery therefrom; and

3)

A list and proposed schedule for any needed modifications to equipment and associated procedures necessary for the specified SBO duration.

Late in 1985, the Nuclear Management and Resources Council, NUMARC, established a working group on station blackout. A Nuclear Utility Group on Station Blackout (NUGSBO) provided the major portion of the technical support for the NUMARC station blackout working group. NUMARC determined that many of the concerns related to station blackout could be alleviated through industry initiatives to reduce overall station blackout risk.

The NUMARC Executive Committee approved industry initiatives to address the more important contributors to station blackout risk.

In order to provide guidance and methodologies for implementing the NUMARC station blackout initiatives, NUMARC published the document NUMARC 87-00, Guidelines and Technical Bases for NUMARC Initiatives addressing Station Blackout at Light Water Reactors.

The NRC has issued Regulatory Guide 1.155 Station Blackout which describes a means acceptable to the NRC Staff for meeting the requirements of 10 C.F.R. 50.63. Regulatory Guide (RG) 1.155 states that the NRC Staff has determined that NUMARC 87-00 Guidelines and Technical Bases for NUMARC Initiatives addressing Station Blackout at Light Water Reactors also provides guidance that is, in a large part, identical to the RG 1.155 guidance and is acceptable to the NRC Staff for meeting these requirements.

8.3A-1 Rev. 14

WOLF CREEK 8.3A.2 STATION BLACKOUT GENERAL CRITERIA AND ASSUMPTIONS Procedures and equipment relied upon in a station blackout should ensure that satisfactory performance of necessary decay heat removal systems is maintained for the required station blackout coping duration. Additional requirements are to keep the core covered and to provide appropriate containment integrity to the extent that isolation valves perform their intended function without AC power. The general criteria and baseline assumptions used to evaluate the station blackout event are discussed in detail in Reference 1, NUMARC 87-00.

8.3A.3 WOLF CREEK BLACKOUT DURATION NUMARC 87-00, Section 3 was used to determine a station blackout duration of four hours for Wolf Creek. This duration was determined based on the following plant considerations.

8.3A.3.1 AC Power Design Characteristic Group NUMARC 87-00 distinguishes between sites having particular susceptibilities to losing off-site power due to plant-centered, grid-related, and weather-related events. Three off-site power design groups are provided and are designed to be mutually exclusive. Of the three groups, group P1 includes those sites characterized by redundant and independent power sources that are considered less susceptible to loss as a result of plant-centered and weather-initiated events. Based upon NUMARC 87-00 guidance, Wolf Creek is determined to be in AC Power Design Characteristic Group, P1. This determination is based upon the following criteria of NUMARC 87-00.

a)

The expected frequency of grid-related loss of offsite power (LOOPs) does not exceed once per twenty years. As discussed in the Wolf Creek USAR Section 8.2.2, the grid design and past performance of the transmission system support the projection of uninterrupted transmission grid availability necessary to meet all requirements over the life of Wolf Creek.

b)

Sites are categorized in groups based upon the estimated frequency of LOOPs due to extremely severe weather. The estimated frequency of loss of off-site power due to extremely severe weather is determined by the annual expectation of storms at the site with wind velocities greater than or equal to 125 mph. Sites within the Extreme Severe Weather Group 1 have an annual frequency of storms, with wind velocities greater than or equal to 125 mph, less than 3.3 x 10-4. Wolf Creek is in Extreme Severe Weather Group 1.

c)

The estimated frequency of LOOPs due to severe weather places Wolf Creek in Severe Weather Group 2. Based on site specific factors, an empirical formula is used to determine the estimated frequency of LOOP due to severe weather in events per year. The factors include the annual expectation of tornados of severity f2 (windspeeds greater than or equal to 113 miles per hour) in events per square mile; and the annual expectation of storms for the site with wind velocities between 75 and 124 mph. Plants within Severe Weather Group 2 have an estimated frequency of loss of off-site power due to severe weather of 0.0033 or greater, up to but not including 0.0100.

d) The potential for long duration loss of off-site power events can have a significant impact on station blackout risk and required coping durations. Long duration LOOP events are associated with grid failures 8.3A-2 Rev. 14

WOLF CREEK due to severe weather conditions or unique transmission system features.

Shorter duration LOOP events tend to be associated with specific switchyard features, in particular, (1) the independence of the off-site power sources constituting the preferred power supply to the shutdown buses on-site, and (2) the power transfer schemes when the normal source of AC power is lost. Two plant groupings, I 1/2 and I 3, are used for classifying the interface of the preferred power supply to the safe shutdown bus. Of the two groups, the I 1/2 group is characterized by features associated with greater independence and redundancy of sources, and a more desirable transfer scheme. The plant groupings are based upon the applicability of three conditions A, B (1), or B (2), for a given plant. Condition A requires that all off-site power sources are connected to the units safe shutdown buses through either the switchyards or two or more electrically connected switchyards. This condition applies at Wolf Creek.

Condition B (1) requires the normal source of AC power to be from the unit main generator with no automatic transfers and one or more manual transfers of all safe shutdown buses to preferred or alternate off-site sources. Condition B (2) requires the normal source of AC power to be from the unit main generator with one automatic transfer and no manual transfers of all safe shutdown buses to one preferred or one alternate off-site power source.

Conditions B (1) and B (2) are not applicable to Wolf Creek. At Wolf Creek the normal source of AC power to the shutdown buses is from the switchyard. Since Condition A is applicable to Wolf Creek and Conditions B (1) and B (2) are not, the Wolf Creek off-site power system is assigned to the I 1/2 Group per NUMARC 87-00 guidance.

The combination of the above Factors places Wolf Creek in the P1 off-site power design characteristic group per NUMARC 87-00.

8.3A.3.2 Emergency AC Power Configuration Group Wolf Creek is determined to be in the emergency AC power configuration group C (EAC Group C). After the likelihood of losing off-site power, the redundancy of the emergency AC power system is the next most important contributor to station blackout risk. With greater EAC system redundancy, the potential for station blackout diminishes, as does the likelihood of core damage. The importance of EAC redundancy is reflected through the use of four distinct EAC configuration groups. Those sites in group C have typical redundant and independent EAC sources to safe shutdown equipment.

Placement in this group depends on the number of EAC standby power supplies available and the number required to operate AC-powered decay heat removal equipment necessary to achieve and maintain safe shutdown in a station blackout. Overall, the greater the level of EAC redundancy, the less restrictive are the station blackout coping durations and maximum emergency diesel generator (EDG) failure rates before longer coping durations are required, or corrective actions become necessary.

8.3A-3 Rev. 14

WOLF CREEK The potential for excess EAC power sources to be used as Alternate AC is directly related to the existing level of EAC redundancy. Since EAC redundancy is an important parameter for determining station blackout coping duration categories, EAC power sources relied upon as Alternate AC power sources must not also be considered when assessing the required coping duration.

The Wolf Creek designation of Group C is based on the following:

1)

There are two emergency AC power supplies not credited as alternate AC power sources; and

2)

One emergency AC power supply is necessary to operate safe shutdown equipment following a loss of off-site power.

8.3A.3.3 Emergency Diesel Generator (EDG) Reliability The target emergency diesel generator reliability for Wolf Creek is selected to be 0.95. The selection of this value is consistent with NUMARC 87-00 and is based upon having a nuclear unit average EDG reliability for the last 100 demands as of April 17, 1989 greater than 0.95.

The unit EDG reliability is used in conjunction with the sites off-site power design characteristic, P1, and the EAC configuration Group C, to determine the units required station blackout coping duration. The unit EDG reliability was calculated by averaging the individual EDG reliability for the last 20, 50, and 100 demands for each machine as of April 17, 1989.

The objective of the three-tier approach (i.e., 20, 50, and 100 Demands) to reliability measurements is to provide greater depth of understanding regarding reliability trends. The 20-demand sample set is the most volatile, and offers a very sensitive indication of EDG performance. Since this indicator moves with each incremental failure or success, it is not considered a reliable measure of long-term performance. Similarly, the 100-demand sample set offers a long-term trend indication, while providing limited insight to recent trends due to data smoothing effects. The 50-demand sample set bridges the two indicators while also providing an intermediate level. Taken together, the set of indicators provides a fairly complete picture of EDG reliability.

Wolf Creek maintains an EDG reliability monitoring program to ensure reliability remains greater than 0.95.

8.3A.3.4 Coping Duration Category Using Table 3-8 of NUMARC 87-00, Wolf Creek has a required coping duration category of four hours. The criteria supporting this four hour duration include the Wolf Creek off-site power group P1, discussed in Section 8.3A.3.1, the EAC Group C, discussed in Section 8.3A.3.2, and the minimum EDG target reliability of 0.95, discussed in Section 8.3A.3.3.

8.3A-4 Rev. 14

WOLF CREEK 8.3A.4 Procedures for SBO Wolf Creek procedures comply with the guidelines of NUMARC 87-00, Section 4.

SBO response guidelines provide for operator actions to be taken in a SBO event; guidance is provided to operations and load dispatcher personnel for actions to restore AC power in a station blackout; and guidance is given for operators to determine the proper actions due to the onset of severe weather.

Wolf Creek procedures incorporate these guidelines and are described as follows:

1)

The station blackout response guidelines of NUMARC 87-00, Section 4.2.1 are met by plant procedures, Loss of all AC Power; Security Diesel Generator Operability Test; Technical Support Center Diesel Generator Operability Test and Emergency Operations Facility Diesel Generator Operability Test.

2)

The AC power restoration guidelines of NUMARC 87-00, Section 4.2.2, are met by plant procedure, Loss of All AC Power Recovery Without SI Required.

3)

The severe weather preparation guidelines of NUMARC 87-00, Section 4.2.3, are met by plant procedure, Natural Events OFF Normal.

8.3A.5 Summary of SBO Coping Assessment The ability of Wolf Creek to cope with a station blackout for four hours has been assessed in accordance with NUMARC 87-00. The coping assessment assures that Wolf Creek has adequate condensate inventory for decay heat removal during a SBO of the four hour duration; has adequate battery capacity to support decay heat removal during the four hour duration; air operated valves required for decay heat removal have sufficient reserve air or can be manually operated under station blackout conditions for four hours; operability of equipment by determination of the average steady state temperature in dominant areas containing equipment necessary to achieve and maintain safe shutdown during the SBO; containment integrity can be provided during the SBO for the four hour duration, and the ability to maintain adequate reactor coolant system inventory. Each item of assessment is discussed in the following paragraphs.

8.3A.5.1 Condensate Inventory for Decay Heat Removal It was originally determined using guidelines in Section 7.2.1 of NUMARC 87-00 that 151,000 gallons of water are required for decay heat removal for a four-hour coping duration. This number has changed to 156,300 gallons due to power rerate and condensate storage tank temperature analysis for elevated tank temperatures when using recirculation of the tank via the condensate demineralizer system. The minimum permissible condensate storage tank level per Technical Specifications provides 281,000 gallons of water, which exceeds the required quantity for coping with a four-hour station blackout. Hence this new number still satisfies a four-hour coping duration.

8.3A-5 Rev. 26

WOLF CREEK 8.3A.5.2 Class 1E Battery (ies) Capacity A battery capacity calculation has been performed pursuant to NUMARC 87-00, Section 7.2.2, to verify that the Class 1E battery (ies) has sufficient capacity to meet station blackout loads for four hours.

8.3A.5.3 Compressed Air Air-operated valves relied upon to cope with a station blackout for four hours have sufficient backup sources independent of the blacked out units preferred and Class 1E power supplies. The valves are identified in plant procedures.

8.3A.5.4 Effects of Loss of Ventilation The calculated peak air temperature for the steam driven AFW pump room (the dominant area of concern for a PWR) during a station blackout induced loss of ventilation is 150° F provided corridor doors are opened. This requirement is incorporated in the plant procedures for Loss of All AC Power.

Reasonable assurance of the operability of station blackout response equipment in the above dominant area of concern has been assessed using Appendix F to NUMARC 87-00. No modifications are required to provide reasonable assurance for equipment operability.

The assumption in NUMARC 87-00, Section 2.7.1 that the control room will not exceed 120°F during a station blackout has been assessed. Calculations verify that the control room at Wolf Creek will not exceed 120°F during a station blackout provided certain doors are opened. The doors are listed in an Attachment in plant procedure Loss of All AC Power.

8.3A.5.5 Containment Isolation The plant list of containment isolation valves has been reviewed to verify that valves which must be capable of being closed or that must be operated (cycled) under station blackout conditions can be positioned (with indication) independent of the preferred Class 1E power supplies. No plant modifications were determined to be required to ensure that appropriate containment integrity can be provided under SBO conditions. Wolf Creek procedures include all actions necessary to assure containment integrity.

8.3A.5.6 Reactor Coolant Inventory The ability to maintain adequate reactor coolant system inventory to ensure that the core is cooled for four hours has been assessed. A plant-specific analysis was used for this assessment. The expected rates of reactor coolant inventory loss under SBO conditions do not result in uncovering the core in an SBO of four hours. Therefore, makeup systems under SBO conditions are not required to maintain core cooling under natural circulation (including reflux boiling).

8.3A-6 Rev. 14

WOLF CREEK 8.3A.6 REFERENCES

1.

NUMARC 87-00, Guidelines and Technical Bases for NUMARC Initiatives addressing Station Blackout at Light Water Reactors, November 1987.

2.

NRC NUREG-1032, Evaluation of Station Blackout Accidents at Nuclear Power Plants, 1985.

3.

NRC Regulatory Guide 1.155, Station Blackout.

4.

Wolf Creek Calculations: AN 93-056, AN 99-004, GK-E-001, GK-EW-001, GK-M-005, GK-MW-004, NK-E-001, SR-88-001, SA-89-004, YY-01-W.

5.

NO 89-0072, dated April 17, 1989 (Response to Station Blackout Rule).

6.

ET 90-0057, dated March 30, 1990 (Supplemental Response to Station Blackout Rule).

7.

ET 92-0072, dated March 24, 1992 (Response to Request for additional information on Station Blackout Analysis for the Wolf Creek Generating Station).

8.

NRC letter dated Janurary 16, 1992 (Safety Evaluation and Request for Additional Information Concerning Station Blackout Analysis for the Wolf Creek Generating Station, TAC No. M68626).

9.

NRC letter dated June 16, 1992, Wolf Creek Generating Station -

Supplemental Safety Evaluation Regarding Blackout Rule.

10.

WCAP-12231, Station Blackout Coping Assessment for Wolf Creek Generating Station, dated April 15, 1989.

11.

Wolf Creek Procedure EMG C-0, Loss of All AC Power.

12.

Wolf Creek Procedure EMG CS-01, Loss of All AC Power Recovery without SI Required.

13.

Wolf Creek Procedure AP20A-007, Station Blackout Quality Program Requirements.

8.3A-7 Rev. 25